LIBRARY 

OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA. 

OIFT    OF 

u,s 


Class 


DRILL  REGULATIONS 

FOR 

Field  Companies  of  the 
Signal  Corps 


(PROVISIONAL) 


Edition  of  March,  1911 


WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 
1911 


((UNIVERSITY  ,1 


JUN  141911 
GIFT 


WAR  DEPARTMENT, 
OFFICE  OF  THE  CHIEF  SIGNAL  OFFICER, 

Washington,  March  21,  1911. 

The  following  Provisional  Drill  Regulations  for  field  com- 
panies of  the  Signal  Corps,  prepared  under  the  direction  of  the 
Chief  Signal  Officer  of  the  Army,  are  approved  and  published 
by  authority  of  the  Secretary  of  War.  In  order  to  insure  uni- 
formity throughout  the  Signal  Corps,  these  regulations  only 
shall  be  used  in  the  instruction  of  field  companies  from  the 
date  of  their  receipt.  Commanding  officers  of  field  companies 
will  submit  to  the  Chief  Signal  Officer  of  the  Army  not  later 
than  November  1,  1911,  any  suggestions  or  recommendations 
relative  to  these  drill  regulations  which  they  think  will  add  to 
their  value. 

JAMES  ALLEN, 

Brigadier  General, 
Chief  Signal  Officer  of  the  Army. 


214808 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


PART  I. 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  AND  DEFINITIONS. 

CHAPTER  I. — General  Principles: 

Section  I.  Instruction —  Par- 
Object  of  the  instruction 1-6 

Sequence  and  methods  of  instruction 7-12 

Section  II.  General  rules 13-27 

Section  III.  Commands 28-33 

CHAPTER  II. — Definitions 34 

PART  II. 
DISMOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

CHAPTER  I. — General  Rules 35-40 

CHAPTER  II. — The  Soldier  Dismounted: 

Section  I.  General  provisions 41^4 

Section  II.  The  recruit 45 

Position  of  the  soldier,  or  attention 46 

To  assemble 47 

The  rests 48-51 

Facings 52-53 

Salute  with  the  hand 54-55 

Setting-up  exercises 56 

Steps  and  marchings 57 

Quick  time 57-59 

Double  time 60-62 

To  mark  time 63 

Half  step 64 

v 


VI  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  II. — The  Soldier  Dismounted — Continued.  Par- 

Section  II.  The  recruit — Continued. 
Steps  and  marchings — Continued. 

Side  step 65 

Back  step 66 

To  march  by  the  flank 67 

To  march  to  the  rear 68 

Change  step 69 

Covering  and  marching  on  points 70 

Section  III.  The  squad  — 71-72 

To  form  the  squad 73-74 

Alignments 75-79 

To  take  intervals L 80 

To  assemble 81 

Marchings 82 

To  march  to  the  front 83-84 

To  march  by  the  flank 85-88 

To  march  obliquely 89-91 

To  change  direction  in  flank  column *.  92-93 

Section  IV.  Manual  of  the  pistol 94-99 

Firings 100-106 

To  fire  at  will 107-108 

CHAPTER  III. — The  Company  Dismounted: 

Section  I.  General  provisions 109-115 

Section  II.  Posts  of  officers,  noncommissioned  officers, 

etc.,  in  line 116-117 

Section  III.  To  form  the  company  dismounted 118 

Alignments 119 

To  dismiss  the  company 120 

Route  order  and  at  ease 121 

PART  III. 
MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

CHAPTER  I.— The  Soldier  Mounted 122-125 

The  equipment  of  the  horse 126 

To  fold  the  saddle  blanket 127 

To  put  on  the  blanket  and  surcingle 128 

To  put  on  the  watering  bridle 129 

To  unbridle—    130 


CONTENTS.  VII 

CHAPTER  I. — The  Soldier  Mounted — Continued.  Par- 

The  saddle  and  bridle 131-132 

To  saddle 133-134 

To    unsaddle 135 

To  put  on  the  curb  bridle 136-138 

To  unbridle 139 

To  roll  the  overcoat 140 

The  blanket  roll  for  mounted  men 141 

The  blanket  roll  for  men  not  individually  mounted—      142 

To  pack  the  saddle 143 

The  position  of  stand  to  horse 144 

To  lead  out 145 

To  align  the  rank 146 

To  mount  (without  saddle) 147 

Position  of  the  soldier,  mounted  (without  saddle) 148 

Remarks  on  the  position  of  the  soldier  mounted 149 

To  lengthen  or  shorten  the  reins 150 

To  take  the  reins  in  one  hand 151 

To  adjust  the  reins 152 

To  retake  the  reins  in  both  hands 153 

To  drop  and  retake  reins 154 

To  dismount  (without  saddle) 155 

To  mount  from  the  off  side 156-160 

To  dismiss  the  squad 161-162 

Mounted  exercises 163 

Gaits  of  horses 164 

Analysis  of  gaits 165 

The  aids  in  horsemanship 166 

To  gather  the  horse 167 

To  march 168 

To  halt 169 

Being  in  line  with  intervals,  to  march  by  the  flank  in 

column  of  files 170-174 

The  individual  about 175 

To  oblique 176-177 

To  change  direction 178 

To  rein  back 179-180 

To  mount  in  line  (without  saddle) 181 

To  dismount  (without  saddle) 182 

Being  in  line  without  intervals,  to  march  by  the  flank 

in  column  of  files 183 


VIII  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  I. — The  Soldier  Mounted — Continued.  Par- 

To  trot 184 

To  pass  from  the  trot  to  the  walk 185 

To  increase  and  diminish  the  rapidity  of  the  trot 186-187 

To  pass  from  the  halt  to  the  trot 188 

To  halt  from  the  trot 189 

To  pass  from  the  front  to  the  rear  of  the  column 190 

To  pass  from  the  rear  to  the  front  of  the  column 191 

To  march  in  circle 192-193 

Individual    circling 194 

To  mount    (with  saddle) 195 

Position  of  the  soldier  (with  saddle) 196 

Stirrups 197 

To  dismount    (with   saddle) 198 

The  curb  bridle 199 

The  spur 200 

Instruction  with  saddle,  curb  bridle,  and  spurs 201 

To  gallop 202-204 

To  pass  from  the  canter  to  the  gallop  and  the  reverse-      205 

To  pass  from  the  gallop  or  canter  to  the  trot 206-207 

To  passage 208 

Jumping 209-213 

To  jump  the  ditch 214-215 

Alignments 216 

To  march  in  line 217-218 

To  halt 219 

To  march  backward 220 

Being  in  line,  to  oblique 221 

To  turn  and  advance 222 

Being  in  line,  to  form  column  of  fours  to  the  front 223 

To  change  direction 224 

Being  in  column  of  fours,  to  move  to  the  rear 225 

Being  in  column  of  fours,  to  form  line  to  the  front—       226 
Being  in  column  of  fours,  to  form  column  of  twos  to 

the  front 227 

Being  in  column  of  fours,  to  form  column  of  files 228 

Being  in  column  of  twos,  to  form  column  of  fours 229 

Being  in  column  of  files,  to  form  column  of  fours  or 

twos 230-231 

Movements  in  column  of  twos__,  232 


CONTENTS.  IX 

CHAPTER  I. — The  Soldier  Mounted — Continued.  Par- 

Being  in  column  of  fours,  to  dismount 233 

Manual  of  the  pistol 234 

CHAPTER  II. — The  driver: 

Object  and  sequence  of  the  instruction 235-236 

Section  II.  General  provisions 237-238 

Rests 239-242 

Disposition  of  the  harness 243 

To  harness 244-245 

To  unharness 246 

To  harness  and  unharness  in  the  field 247 

Fitting  harness 248 

To  lead  out 249 

To  hitch 250 

To  unhitch 251 

To  dismiss  the  teams  from  the  park 252-253 

Management  of  teams  in  draft 254-258 

Marchings — 

To  march  to  the  front 259 

To  halt 260 

To  march  by  the  flank 261 

To  march  to  the  rear 262 

Being  in  column,  to  change  direction 263-264 

To  back  the  carts 265 

Alignments 266 

CHAPTER  III. — The  Packer: 

Object  and  sequence  of  the  instruction 267 

General  provisions — 

Guides 268 

The  individual  packer 269-270 

The  aparejo  packsaddle L 271-273 

To  fold  the  blanket 274 

To  blind  the  mule 275 

To  harness 276-277 

To  unharness 278-279 

To  set  up  the  aparejo 280-285 

Remarks  on  the  packsaddle 286 

Care  of  the  harness 287 

To  gather  the  mule 288 

Management  of  the  led  mule 289 

To  dismiss  the  packer 290-292 


X  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  IV. — The  section  mounted:  Par- 
Section  I.  The  wire  section 293-296 

To  open  station  and  move  off 297-301 

To  recover  the  wire 302-305 

Section  II.  The  pack  wireless  section 306-312 

To  open  station 313-314 

To  close  station 315-316 

Section  III.  The  wagon  wireless  section 317-323 

To  open  station 324-327 

To  close  station 328-329 

CHAPTER  V.—The  Company  Mounted 330-331 

General  provisions 332-333 

Organization  of  the  company 334-336 

Duties  of  individuals 337 

Formation  of  the  company  and  posts  of  individuals.  338-341 

Posts  of  individuals 342-543 

To  form  the  company  mounted 344-345 

To  dismiss  the  company 346-348 

Commands  and  signals 349-351 

Arm  signals 352-353 

Preparatory  signals 354 

Maneuvers  of  the  company 355-358 

Gaits 359-361 

To  align  the  company 362 

To  march  to  the  front 363 

To  halt 364 

To  march  by  the  flank 365-366 

To  march  to  the  rear 367-368 

Being  in  line  or  column,  to  march  obliquely 369 

To  change  direction 370-371 

To  close  or  extend  intervals  in  line 372 

To  form  section  column  to  the  front  from  line 373 

To  form  line  from  section  column 374-377 

To  re-form  the  sections  in  the  normal  formation 378 

To  form  the  mounted  men  in  column  of  twos  or  files.       379 

To  re-form  the  mounted  men  in  column  of  fours 380 

To  form  platoon  column  from  section  column 381 

To  form  section  column  from  platoon  column 382 

Being  in  line,  to  form  platoon  column,  to  the  right  (or 

left) 383 

Being  in  platoon  column,  to  form  line  to  the  left  (or 

right) 384 


CONTENTS.  XI 

CHAPTER  VI.— The  Battalion  Mounted:  Par. 

Organization  and  formation  of  the  battalion 385-390 

To  form  the  battalion — 

Posts  of  individuals 391-396 

Maneuvers  of  the  battalion 397-398 

PART  IV. 
CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

CHAPTER  I. — Training  of  Horses: 

Skeleton  of  the  horse 399 

Points  of  the  horse 400-403 

Bridling 404 

The  cavesson  and  longeing 405-414 

Breaking  in  the  young  horse  to  harness 415 

To  accustom  the  horse  to  the  report  of  firearms 416H17 

To  break  the  horse  of  kicking 418 

Swimming  horses  and  fording 419 

CHAPTER  II. — Draft  Animals: 

Care  of  draft  animals  in  the  field 420-426 

Necks  and  shoulders 427 

Traces 428 

Breeching 429-436 

CHAPTER  III. — Driving: 

Double  harness 437-438 

Coupling  reins 1 439 

Holding  the  reins 440-447 

Driving  four-in-hand 448-449 

The  reins 450 

Adjusting  the  reins 451 

Wheel  reins 452 

Lead  reins 453 

Crossing  the  road 454 

Turning  to  the  left 455 

Turning  to  the  right 456 

To  steady  the  team 457 

The  whip 458-461 

To  start 462 

Pulling  up 463 


XII  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  III. — Driving — Continued.  Par- 

A  few  hints 464 

Rules  of  the  road 465 

CHAPTER  IV. — Care  of  Saddle  Animals 466-469 

Blanket 470 

Saddle J 471 

Saddling 472 

Cinching 473 

Unsaddling 474-477 

Bitting 478-479 

CHAPTER  V. — Care  of  Pack  Animals 480-504 

CHAPTER  VI. — Stable  Management 505 

General  rules  for  stable  management 506-507 

Sick   horses 508-512 

Grooming 513 

To    groom 514 

Feeding 515-516 

Watering 517 

PART  V. 

TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

CHAPTER  I. — General  Principles 518-522 

Field  lines 523-540 

CHAPTER  II. — Instruction  in  Garrison: 

General   rules v 541-543 

Visual   signaling 544-545 

Visual  stations 546-551 

Telegraphy 552-555 

Alphabet  and  numerals 556-559 

Elementary   principles 560-562 

Methods  of  practice 563-565 

Checking  the  message 566 

CHAPTER  III. — Instruments: 

The  buzzer  in  telegraphy  and  telephony 567-569 

The  field  buzzer— model  1908 570-571 

Transmission  of  information 572 

The  cavalry  buzzer 573-576 

To  use  the  buzzer  as  a  telephone 577 

Care  of  buzzers,  location  of  faults  and  adjustments.-       578 


CONTENTS.  XIII 

CHAPTER  III. — Instruments — Continued.  Par- 
Location  of  faults  (field  buzzer) 579-580 

Adjustments 581-582 

Dry  cells 583 

Field  wireless  telegraphy — 

General  principles 584 

General  description  of  pack  wireless  set    (1910 

type) 585 

Transmitting  and  receiving  apparatus 586-595 

Instructions    for    operating    field    wireless    pack 

sets 596 

Receiving   apparatus 597 

In  general 598 

Visual  signaling  apparatus — 

The  flag  kit 599-601 

The  heliograph 602-609 

The  acetylene  lantern 610-616 

Rockets 617-619 

Very's  night  signals 620 

CHAPTER  IV. — Field  Lines: 

General    provisions 621-622 

The  wire  cart 623-624 

To  clean  the  wire  cart 625-626 

Manipulation  of  the  wire  cart 627 

Laying  the  lines 628 

Operating  the  lines — 

Station  and  call  letters 629-632 

Maintaining  the  lines : 633-635 

Recovering  the  wire 636 

PART  VI. 
SIGNAL  TROOPS  IN  THE  FIELD. 

Position 637-638 

Marches 639-641 

Camping 642-648 

Pitching  tents : 

Single  shelter  tents 649-650 

Double  shelter  tents _  651-652 


XIV  CONTENTS. 

Par. 
To  strike  shelter  tents 653 

Common  and  wall  tents 654 

Conical  wall  tents 655 

To  strike  common,  wall,  and  conical  wall  tents 656 

To  fold  tents 657 

General  remarks 658-665 

PART  VII. 

CEREMONIES. 

CHAPTER  I. — General  rules 666-668 

CHAPTER  II. — Reviews: 

General  rules 669-688 

Battalion  review : 689 

Review  of  a  battalion  with  closed  intervals, 000-691 

Garrisori  review 692 

CHAPTER  III. — Inspections: 

General  rules 693-695 

Company  inspection,  mounted 696-698 

Company  inspection,  dismounted 699-701 

Battalion  inspection,  mounted 702-705 

CHAPTER  IV. — Muster: 

Battalion  or  company  muster 706 

CHAPTER  V. — Funeral  escort 707-714 

CHAPTER  VI. — Company  guard  mounting 715-716 

PART  VIII. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

The  guidon 717-721 

The  standard 722-725 

The  saber 726-732 

The  band 733 

Signals  of  the  drum  major 734 

To  inspect  the  band 735 

Honors _  736-751 


CONTENTS.  XV 

Par. 
Trumpet  calls : 

Warning  calls 752 

Formation  calls 753 

Alarm  calls 754 

Service  calls 755 

Drill  signals 756 

Trumpet  calls 245-272 

Arms  and  equipment 757 

Service  kit 758 

Technical  equipment 759 


PART  1. 

GENERAL    PRINCIPLES    AND    DEFINITIONS. 

CHAPTER  1.— GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 
SECTION  1. — Instruction. 
Object  of  the  Instruct/on. 

1.  The  certain  transmission  of  information  and  orders  from 
commanding  officers  to  their  subordinates  and  information  from 
subordinates  to  commanding  officers,  regardless  of  conditions  or 
terrain,  is  the  goal  to  be  kept  constantly  in  view  in  peace  train- 
ing.    School  and  drill  ground  training  must  not  be  allowed  to 
obscure  this. 

2.  The  special  qualifications  required  of  Signal  Corps  troops 
in  war  are  the  ability,  first,  to  be  in  position  fully  equipped 
with  efficient  men  and  materiel  to  carry  out  the  orders  of  the 
commanding  officer;  second,  to  maintain,  uninterruptedly,  such 
communication,    either   by    electricity   or   visual    signaling,    or 
both,  without  regard  to  change  of  headquarters,  as  will  keep  the 
commander  fully  and  continuously  informed  as  to  the  progress 
of  the  action,  the  position  of  his  troops,  hospitals,  trains,  and 
supply  departments. 

To  meet  the  first  requirement,  the  Signal  Corps  must  have 
men,  technically  trained  in  time  of  peace;  and  it  must  also  be 
prepared  to  cover  long  distances  as  quickly  as  Cavalry  or  Ar- 
tillery, and  to  overcome  all  the  difficulties  and  obstacles  of  the 
route,  and  still  keep  in  touch  with  such  subordinate  commanders 
as  orders  require. 

To  meet  the  second  requirement  the  personnel  must  under- 
stand thoroughly  all  classes  of  signaling;  must  know  how  to 
82940°— 11 1 


2  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

repair  the  necessary  materiel,  and  must  be  prepared  to  meet, 
tactically,  the  shifting  requirements  of  the  battle  field  and  the 
strategical  condition  of  the  occupied  territory. 

Mobility,  thorough  theoretical  training,  and  extensive  practice 
in  establishing  and  maintaining  lines  of  information  over  varied 
country  under  conditions  approximating  those  of  service,  are  the 
essentials. 

3.  An  additional  object  of  instruction  is  to  develop  resource- 
fulness, initiative,  and  self-reliance  on  the  part  of  Signal  Corps 
men  of  all  grades. 

The  regulations  prescribe  a  method  of  training  in  the  ordi- 
nary duties  of  field  companies  and  battalions  of  the  Signal 
Corps.  The  personnel  must  be  so  thoroughly  drilled  in  these 
duties  that  in  the  excitement  of  action  the  same  may  be 
performed  readily,  naturally,  and  as  a  matter  of  second 
nature. 

On  account  of  the  varied  conditions  that  arise  in  handling 
Signal  Corps  troops,  no  hard  and  fast  rules  can  be  laid  down 
to  cover  all  conditions.  As  a  consequence  much  is  left  to 
the  energy  and  ingenuity  of  the  officers  and  noncommissioned 
officers. 

4.  Instruction  in  peace  must  therefore  be  conducted  with  a 
view,  first,  to  drilling  the  personnel  thoroughly  in  their  habitual 
duties;  and  second,  to  affording  officers  and  men  practice  and 
experience  in  dealing  with  the  situations  and  difficulties  apt  to 
arise  in  campaign. 

5.  Solutions  of  practical  problems,  involving  at  first  simple 
tactical  situations  with  appropriate  units,  should  be  required. 
These  should  be  progressive  to  include  the  use  of  the  higher 
tactical  units.     Signal  troops  can  carry  out  this  instruction  to 
advantage  without  the  assistance  of  other  troops. 

6.  Systems  of  instruction  or  of  materiel  can  be  perfected  only 
by  actual  use  by  troops.    To  the  end  that  true  progress  may  be 
made,  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  will  be  encouraged 
to  make  suggestions,  based  upon  their  practical  experience,  in 
regard  to  methods  of  instruction  as  well  as  in  regard  to  the 
different   electrical  and   mechanical   features  of   the  materiel. 
The  experience  of  those  most  competent  to  judge  of  the  merits 
of  such  systems  will  thus  be  made  available  for  future  improve- 
ments therein. 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES.  3 

Sequence  and  Methods   of  Instruction. 

7.  A  progressive  order  will  be  followed  in  all  instruction, 
which    should   commence   with   theoretical    instruction    in   the 
smallest  unit,  and  proceed  to  the  larger  ones,  culminating  in 
field  maneuvers.     (See  par.  5.) 

8.  Thorough  training  of  the  individual  soldier  is  the  basis  of 
efficiency.     Great  precision  and  attention  to  detail  are  essential 
to  this  instruction,  for  from  it  the  soldier  must  acquire  that 
habit  of  implicit  obedience  to  orders,  and  of  accurate  perform- 
ance of  his  individual  duties,  which  is  the  indispensable  requi- 
site for  efficiency  in  combined  training. 

9.  Recruits  should  be  assembled  in  small  squads  for  the  be- 
ginning of  their  instruction.    As  the  instruction  progresses  it 
may  be  consistently  carried  on  by  sections,  platoons,  or  by  the 
entire  company.     This  principle  will  apply  to  technical  training 
as  well,  particularly  to  visual  signaling,  telegraphy,  and  tele- 
phony.    Grouping  according  to  progress  and  efficiency  should 
be  strictly  carried  out.     Those  who  lack  aptitude  and  quickness 
should  be  placed  under  experienced  instructors. 

The  training  of  the  recruit  will  include  instruction  in  the 
duties  of  sentinels,  the  care  of  equipment,  packing  of  field  kits, 
tent  pitching,  pistol  practice,  and  the  customs  and  courtesies  of 
the  service,  in  addition  to  his  training  as  a  signalman. 

10.  Short  and  frequent  drills  are  better  than  long  ones,  which 
exhause  the  attention  of  both  the  instructor  and  recruit. 

11.  The  instructor  of  each  unit  is  habitually  its  immediate 
chief,  and  should  be  given  all  due  latitude  in  conducting  the 
instruction,  and  be  held  to  strict  accountability  for  results  at- 
tained.    The  habit  of  self-reliance  and  a  feeling  of  responsibility 
for  the  instruction  of  their  respective  units,  as  well  as  a  proper 
feeling  of  pride  therein,  may  thus  be  developed  among  the  sub- 
ordinate commanders. 

The  instructor  will  always  maintain  a  military  bearing,  and 
by  a  quiet,  firm  demeanor,  set  a  proper  example  to  the  men. 
Faults  should  be  gradually  corrected  without  nagging. 

12.  Instruction  in  establishing  wire,  wireless,  or  visual  lines 
of  information,  telegraphy,  and  tent  pitching  may  appropriately 
be  given  by  section  or  by  platoon,  as  a  healthy  rivalry  among 
the  units  may  thus  be  developed. 


4  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

SECTION  II. — General  rules. 

13.  Movements  that  may  be  executed  toward  either  flank  are 
explained  as  toward  but  one  flank,  it  being  necessary  merely  to 
substitute  left  for  right,  or  the  reverse,  to  have  the  explanation 
of  the  corresponding  movement  toward  the  other  flank. 

14.  Any  movement  may  be  executed  either  from  the  halt  or 
when  marching,  unless  otherwise  prescribed. 

15.  All  movements  on  foot  not  especially  excepted  may  be 
executed  in  double  time    If  the  movement  be  from  the  halt,  or 
when  marching  in  quick  time,  the  command  double  time  precedes 
the  command  march;  if  marching  in  double  time,  the  command 
double  time  is  omitted. 

16.  All  mounted  movements  not  especially  excepted  may  be 
executed  at  the  trot  or  gallop. 

17.  The  gait   should  habitually  be   increased  or  decreased 
progressively,  the  trot  being  executed  from  the  walk,  and  the 
gallop  from  the  trot.    If  marching  at  the  gallop,  the  gait  will 
be  decreased  to  the  trot,  then  to  the  walk,  before  halting;  if 
marching  at  the  trot,  the  same  rule  applies,  halting  from  the 
trot  or  gallop  being  considered  an  exceptional  movement. 

18.  To  execute  a  movement  at  the  trot  or  gallop  the  com- 
mand trot  or  gallop  precedes  the  command  march,  unless  already 
marching  at  the  gait  desired. 

19.  Movements  or  procedures  explained  for  the  smaller  units 
are,  in  general,  applicable  to  the  larger  ones  when  under  in- 
struction of  the  same  character,  the  commands  being  modified 
so  as  to  be  adapted  to  the  particular  unit  dealt  with. 

20.  The  intervals  and  distances  prescribed  are  in  general 
such  that,  if  marched  by  the  flank  from  line,  the  elements  will 
be  in  column  at  proper  distances;  or  if  marched  by  the  flank 
from  column,  they  will  be  in  line  at  proper  intervals.    Similarly, 
if  marching  obliquely,  a  second  oblique  will  place  the  elements 
in  line  or  column,  as  the  case  may  be,  at  proper  intervals  or 
distances.    If,  however,  due  to  differences  of  length  of  elements, 
these  conditions  do  not  accurately  obtain,  the  proper  intervals 
or  distances  are  gradually   secured  by   appropriate  modifica- 
tions of  the  gait. 

21.  If,  in  forming  elements  abreast  of  each  other,  the  com- 
mands: 1.  Company  (platoon,  etc.)f  2.  HALT,  be  given  during  the 
movement,  only  those  elements  halt  which  have  reached  their 


GENEKAL  PRINCIPLES. 


new  positions  ;  the  others  continue  the  march  and  halt  on  reach- 
ing their  positions. 

22.  For  the  purpose  of  correcting  errors  while  marching,  the 
instructor  may  command:  1.  In  place,  2.  HALT;  when  all  halt 
and  stand  fast.     To  resume  the  march,  he  commands:  1.  Com- 
pany (platoon,  etc.),  2.  MARCH. 

23.  To  revoke  a  preparatory  command,  or  being  at  a  halt,  to 
begin  anew  a  movement  improperly  begun,  the  instructor  com- 
mands: AS  YOU  WERE,  at  which  the  movement  ceases  and  the 
former  position  is  resumed. 

24.  If  a  change  of  formation  requires  a  change  of  post  of 
officers  and  noncommissioned  officers,  they  proceed  by  the  short- 
est route  to  their  posts  in  the  new  formation. 

25.  While  the  posts  of  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers 
are  specified  in  the  text,  as  instructors  they  go  wherever  their 
presence  is  necessary. 

26.  Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  who  are  absent  are 
replaced  ordinarily  by  the  next  lower  in  rank.     In  a  company, 
chiefs  of  platoon  are  replaced  by  the  chiefs  of  sections  of  the 
platoon  in  the  order  of  rank.    The  first  sergeant,  if  performing 
the  duties  of  an  officer,  and  the  supply  and  stable  sergeants,  are 
not  replaced.     Sergeants  and  corporals  replace  absent  chiefs  of 
section. 

27.  The  numerical  designation  of  units  does  not  change,  as 
their  relative  order  in  line  or  column  is  changed. 

SECTION  III.  —  Commands. 

28.  Commands  are  of  two  kinds  :  Preparatory  commands  and 
commands  of  execution. 

The  preparatory  command,  such  as  forward,  indicates  the 
movement  that  is  to  be  executed. 

The  command  of  execution,  such  as  MARCH,  HALT,  causes  the 
execution. 

Preparatory  commands  are  distinguished  in  the  text  by 
italics;  those  of  execution  by  capitals. 

29.  The  commands  prescribed  in  the  text  are  given  by  the 
instructor,  except  when  otherwise  specified. 

30.  To  permit  the  preparatory  command  being  understood,  a 
well-defined  pause  should  be  made  between  it  and  the  command 
of  execution.     The  duration  of  this  pause  depends  in  a  measure 


6  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

upon  the  size  of  the  body  of  troops  under  command,  and  upon 
whether  the  troops  are  dismounted  or  mounted.  Ordinarily, 
in  dismounted  movements  and  in  mounted  movements  executed 
from  a  halt,  the  pause  should  be  brief  and  of  uniform  duration, 
as  otherwise  uncertainty  is  communicated  to  the  ranks,  and  a 
ragged  execution  of  the  movement  results. 

31.  The  tone  of  command  is  animated,   distinct,  and  of  a 
loudness  proportioned  to  the  number  of  men  under  command. 
Indifference  in  giving  commands  leads  to  laxity  in  execution. 

Each  preparatory  command  is  pronounced  in  an  ascending 
tone  of  voice,  but  always  in  such  a  manner  that  the  command  of 
execution  may  be  more  energetic  and  elevated. 

On  foot  the  command  of  execution  is  pronounced  in  a  firm, 
brief  tone. 

In  mounted  movements  the  preparatory  commands  are  more 
or  less  prolonged  to  insure  their  being  heard;  the  command  of 
execution  is  always  prolonged. 

When  giving  commands  to  troops,  it  is  usually  best  to  face 
or  look  toward  them. 

32.  To  secure  uniformity,  officers  and  noncommissioned  offi- 
cers are  practiced  in  giving  commands. 

33.  The  bugle  calls  and  prescribed  arm  signals  are  frequently 
used  in   instruction   in  order  that  the  officers  and  men   may 
readily  recognize  them. 

CHAPTER   II.— DEFINITIONS. 

34.  Alignment:  A    straight    line    upon    which    several    men, 
teams,  carts,  or  bodies  of  troops  are  formed,  or  are  to  be  formed. 

Base:  The  element  on  which  a  movement  is  regulated,  or  on 
which  a  formation  is  made. 

Center:  The  middle  point  or  element  of  a  command. 

Column:  A  formation  in  which  the  elements  are  placed  one 
behind  another. 

Depth:  The  space  from  head  to  rear  of  any  formation,  includ- 
ing the  leading  and  rear  elements. 

Disposition:  The  arrangement  of  the  elements  in  a  formation. 

Distance:  Open  space  between  elements  in  the  direction  of 
depth. 

Element:  One  of  the  similar  parts  of  a  larger  unit — as  a  file, 
squad,  team,  cart,  wagon,  section,  platoon,  company,  etc. 


DEFINITIONS.  7 

Facing  distance:  The  difference  between  the  front  of  a  man 
in  ranks,  including  his  interval,  and  his  depth — about  14  inches. 

File:  Two  men — the  front-rank  man  and  the  corresponding 
man  of  the  rear  rank.  The  front-rank  man  is  the  file  leader. 
A  file  which  has  no  rear-rank  man  is  a  blank  file.  The  term 
files  applies  also  to  individual  men  in  single-rank-  formation. 
A  single  mounted  man  in  ranks  is  also  called  a  file. 

File  closers:  The  noncommissioned  officers,  and  men  acting  as 
such,  who,  in  dismounted  formation,  are  posted  2  yards  in  rear 
of  the  line. 

Flank:  The  right  or  left  of  a  command  in  line  or  column ; 
also  the  element  on  the  right  or  left  of  a  line. 

By  the  enemy's  right  (left)  flank  is  meant  the  flank  which  the 
enemy  himself  would  so  designate. 

Formation:  Arrangement  of  the  elements  of  a  command  in 
their  order  in  line,  in  column,  or  for  battle. 

Front:  The  space  in  width  occupied  by  a  command  either  in 
line  or  column.  The  term  front  is  also  used  to  denote  the  direc- 
tion in  which  the  elements  of  a  command  face,  as  well  as  to 
denote  the  direction  of  the  enemy. 

Guide:  An  officer,  noncommissioned  officer,  or  private  upon 
whom  a  command  or  an  element  thereof  regulates  its  march. 

Interval:  Open  space  between  elements  abreast  of  each  other. 

Left:  The  left  extremity  or  element  of  a  body  of  troops. 

Line:  A  formation  in  which  the  different  elements  are  abreast 
of  each  other.  When  the  elements  are  in  column,  the  formation 
is  called  a  line  of  columns. 

Lines  of  information:  Channels  along  which  military  informa- 
tion may  be  transmitted,  as  wire,  wireless,  visual,  or  messenger. 

Maneuver:  A  movement  executed  by  a  company  or  larger  unit 
for  the  purpose  of  changing  from  one  formation  to  another. 

Rank:  A  line  of  men,  horses,  teams,  or  carts,  abreast  of  each 
other. 

Right:  The  right  extremity  or  element  of  a  body  of  troops. 


PART  II. 

DISMOUNTED   INSTRUCTION. 

CHAPTER  I.— GENERAL  RULES. 

35.  Field  companies  will  habitually  turn  out  mounted  and 
with  full  equipment  for  all  drills  and  ceremonies.     Therefore 
only  so  much  dismounted  instruction  will  be  given  as  is  neces- 
sary for  the  training  of  recruits  and  for  the  few  occasions  when 
the  company  is  obliged  to  be  dismounted. 

36.  Formations   are   habitually   in   double   rank.     The   men 
always  fall  in  at  attention. 

37.  The  interval   between   men   in   ranks   is  4   inches;   the 
allowance  for  the  front  of  a  man  is  taken  at  about  26  inches, 
including  the  interval ;  the  depth  about  12  inches.    The  distances 
between   subdivisions   in   column   is   measured   from   guide   to 
guide. 

38.  To  secure  uniformity  of  interval  between  files,  when  fall- 
ing in,  and  in  the  alignments,  each  man  slightly  opens  out  his 
right  elbow,  lightly  touching  the  left  elbow  of  the  man  on  his 
right,  and  he  drops  it  when  the  intervals  has  been  secured. 

39.  When  marching  in  flank  column,  the  leading  man  of  the 
leading  rank  is,  without  indication,  the  guide  of  the  column. 

During  the  oblique  march  the  leading  man  of  the  leading  rank 
is,  without  indication,  the  guide. 

40.  When  marching  in  line,  the  guide  is  always  announced 
as  soon  as  the  march  is  begun,  or  as  soon  as  the  line  is  formed. 
On  marching  to  the  rear  from  line,  or  on  taking  the  full  step 
after  a  turn,  the  guide  is  announced  as  soon  as  the  march  in 
the  new  direction  is  begun.     For  example : 

Being  in  line  at  a  halt : 

1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Guide  (right  or  left). 
Being  in  line: 

1.  Right    (or   left)    oblique,    2.  MARCH,    3.  Forward,    4.  MARCH, 
5.  Guide  (right  or  left). 
Marching  in  line: 

1.  To  the  rear,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Guide  (right  or  left). 
8 


THE  SOLDIER  DISMOUNTED.  9 

CHAPTER  II.— THE  SOLDIER  DISMOUNTED. 

SECTION  I. — General  provisions. 

41.  This  instruction  has  for  its  object  the  training  of  the 
individual  recruit  and  afterwards  that  of  the  squad.     It  must 
be  given  with  the  greatest  attention  to  detail. 

42.  In  the  instruction  of  the  recruit,  frequent  short  rests 
should  be  given,  in  order  that  the  men  may  not  be  unduly 
fatigued. 

The  instructor  will  take  advantage  of  these  rests  to  instruct 
the  recruits  in  the  customs  and  courtesies  of  the  service,  the 
duties  of  orderlies,  the  proper  manner  of  receiving  messages 
from  and  delivering  them  to  officers,  etc.,  so  that  when  the  re- 
cruit is  finally  reported  for  duty  he  will  not  only  know  his 
prescribed  drill  thoroughly,  but  will  know  how  to  conduct  him- 
self out  of  ranks  as  a  trained  soldier. 

43.  From  the  beginning  the  instructor  will  insist  on  a  smart 
appearance  of  the  recruits,  and  will  require  that  their  clothing 
be  clean  and  neatly  adjusted. 

44.  The  instructor  briefly  explains  each  movement,  at  first 
executing  it  himself  if  necessary.     He  exacts  by  degrees  the 
desired  precision  and  uniformity. 

SECTION  II. — The  recruit. 

45.  For  the  individual  instruction,  a  few  recruits,  usually  not 
exceeding  four,  are  placed  in  a  single  rank,  facing  to  the  front 
and  about  4  inches  apart. 

They  execute  the  marchings  as  explained  for  a  squad. 

Position  of  the  Soldier,  or  Attention. 

46.  Heels  on  the  same  line  and  as  near  each  other  as  the  con- 
formation of  the  man  permits. 

Feet  turned  out  equally  and  forming  with  each  other  an  angle 
of  about  60°. 

Knees  straight  without  stiffness. 

Body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclined  a  little  forward ;  shoulders 
square  and  falling  equally. 


10  DISMOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

Arms  and  hands  hanging  naturally,  backs  of  hands  outward ; 
little  fingers  opposite  the  seams  of  the  trousers;  elbows  near 
the  body. 

Head  erect  and  square  to  the  front,  chin  slightly  drawn  .in 
without  constraint,  eyes  straight  to  the  front. 

To  Assemble. 

47.  To  teach  the  recruits  to  assemble,   the  instructor  will 
first  place  them  in  a  single  rank  arranged  according  to  height, 
the  tallest  man  on   the  right  with  intervals  of  4   inches,   as 
nearly  as  may  be  between  men,  and  explain  that  the  objects  of 
the  interval  are  to  give  freedom  of  movement  in  marching ;  then 
direct  them  to  open  out  the  right  elbow  slightly  until  the  left 
elbow  of  the  man   on   the   right  is   lightly  touched  and  then 
withdraw  the  elbow;  this  repeated  a  few  times,  he  will  cause 
the  recruits  to  fall  out  and,  placing  the  man  on  the  right  in 
position,  will  instruct  them  that  at  the  command  FALL  IN  they 
will  successively  and  quickly  take  their  places  in  rank  as  before, 
each  assuring  himself  of  his  interval  by  making  the  touch  by 
the  elbow  and  then  withdrawing  the  elbow.     He  then  commands : 
FALL  IN,  when  they  assemble  rapidly  as  above  prescribed. 

The  Rests. 

48.  Being  at  a  halt,  to  rest  the  men:  FALL  OUT,  or  REST, 
or  AT  EASE. 

At  the  command  fall  out,  the  men  may  leave  the  ranks,  but 
will  remain  in  the  immediate  vicinity. 

At  the  command  fall  in,  they  resume  their  former  places  at 
attention. 

At  the  command  rest,  each  man  keeps  one  heel  in  place,  but 
is  not  required  to  preserve  silence  or  immobility. 

At  the  command  at  ease,  each  man  keeps  one  heel  in  place, 
and  preserves  silence,  but  not  immobility. 

If  marching:  1.  ROUTE  ORDER,  or,  I.  AT  EASE. 

The  men  keep  their  places  in  the  squad,  but  are  not  required 
to  keep  the  cadence  step;  at  route  order,  they  are  not  required 
to  preserve  silence. 

To  resume  the  attention :  1.  Squad,  2.  ATTENTION. 

The  men  take  the  position  of  the  soldier  and  fix  their  atten- 
tion. 


THE  SOLDIER  DISMOUNTED. 


11 


49.  1.  Parade,  2.  REST. 

Carry  the  right  foot  6  inches  straight  to  the  rear,  left  knee 
slightly  bent;  clasp  the  hands  in  front  of  the  center  of  the 
body,  left  hand  uppermost,  left  thumb  clasped  by  thumb  and 
forefinger  of  right  hand;  preserve  silence  and  steadiness  of 
position. 

50.  To  resume  the  attention  or  position  of  the  soldier:  1. 
Squad,  2.  ATTENTION. 

The  men  take  the  position  of  the  soldier  and  fix 
their  attention. 

5 1.  To  dismiss  the  squad  :  DISMISSED. 

Facings. 

52.  To  the  flank:  1.  Right  (Left),  2.  FACE. 
Raise  slightly  the  left  heel  and  right  toe,  face 

to  the  right,  turning  on  the  right  heel,  assisted  by 
a  slight  pressure  on  the  ball  of  the  left  foot; 
place  the  left  foot  by  the  side  of  the  right.  Left 
face  is  executed  on  the  left  heel. 

To  face  in  marching  and  advance,  turn  on  the 
ball  of  the  foot  in  advance  and  step  off  with  the 
other  foot  in  the  new  line  of  direction ;  to  face  in 
marching  without  gaining  ground  in  the  new  direc- 
tion, turn  on  the  ball  of  the  foot  in  advance  and 
mark  time. 

53.  To  the  rear:  1.  About,  2.  FACE. 

Raise  slightly  the  left  heel  and  right  toe,  face 


PI.  1,  Par.  49. 


to  the  rear,  turning  to  the  right  on  the  right  heel  and  the  ball 
of  the  left  foot ;  replace  the  left  foot  beside  the  right. 

Officers  execute  the  about  face  as  follows : 

At  the  command  about,  cari-y  the  toe  of  the  right  foot  about 
8  inches  to  the  rear  and  3  inches  to  the  left  of  the  left  heel 
without  changing  the  position  of  the  left  foot. 

At  the  command  face,  turn  upon  the  left  heel  and  right  toe, 
face  to  the  rear,  and  replace  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the 
left. 

Enlisted  men  out  of  ranks  may  use  the  about  face  prescribed 
for  officers. 


DISMOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 


Salute  with  the  Hand. 

54.  1.  Right  (left)  hand,  2.  SALUTE. 

Raise  the  right  hand  smartly  till  the  tip  of  the  forefinger 
touches  the  lower  part  of  the  headdress  above  the  right  eye, 
thumb  and  fingers  extended  and  joined,  palm 
to  the  left,  forearm  inclined  at  about  45°,  hand 
and  wrist  straight;  at  the  same  time  look  to- 
ward the  person  to  be  saluted.  TWO.  Drop  the 
arm  smartly  by  the  side. 

If  uncovered,  the  forefinger  touches  the  fore- 
head above  the  eye. 

The  salute  for  officers  is  the  same;  the  left 
hand  is  used  only  when  the  right  is  engaged. 

55.  Enlisted  men  salute  with  the  hand  far- 
thest from  the  officer,  giving  salute  6  yards  before 
passing  the 
officer,  and 
holding  the 
hand  at  the, 
visor  until 
the  salute 
is  acknowl- 
edged  or  the 
PI.  2,  par.  54.  officer  passed. 

Setting-up  Exercises. 

56.  All  soldiers  are  regu- 
larly practiced  in  the  fol- 
lowing exercises,  which  may 
be  supplemented  by  those 
authorized  in  calisthenic 
manuals. 

The  instructor  places  the 
men  about  2  yards  apart. 

In  these  exercises  the 
blouses  should  be  unbuttoned  and  the  cap  removed. 

As  soon  as  the  exercises  are  well  understood  they  may  be 
continued  without  repeating  the  commands.     For  this  purpose 


PI.  3,  par.  56,  1  Ex. 


THE  SOLDIER  DISMOUNTED. 


13 


the  instructor  gives  the  commands  as  prescribed,  then  adds: 

Continue  the  exercise,  upon  which  the  motions  to  be  repeated  are 

continuously  executed  until  the  command  halt. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  at  any  time,  the 

position  of  the  soldier  is  resumed. 

1.   Arm,  2.   EXERCISE,   3.    HEAD, 

4.  UP,  5.  DOWN,  6.  RAISE. 

At  the  command  exercise,  raise 
the  arms  laterally  until  horizontal, 
palms  upward.  HEAD:  Raise  the 
arms  in  a  circular  direction  over 
the  head,  tips  of  the  fingers  touch- 
ing top  of  head,  backs  of  fingers  in 
contact  their  full  length,  thumbs 
pointing  to  the  rear,  elbows  pressed 

back.      UP:     Extend 

the     arms     upward 

their      full      length, 

palms      touching. 

DOWN:     Force     the 

arms  obliquely  back 

and     gradually     let 

them     fall     by     the 

sides.    RAISE:  Raise 

the 


arms    laterally 


PL  5,  par.  56, 
1  Ex. 


as  prescribed  for  the  second 
command.  Continue  by  re- 
peating head,  up,  down,  raise. 

Second  Exercise. 

1.  Arms  vertical,  palms  to 
the  front,  2.  RAISE,  3.  DOWN, 
4.  UP. 

At  the  command  raise.,  raise 
the  arms  laterally  from  the 
sides,  extended  to  their  full 
length,  till  the  hands  meet  above  the  head,  palms  to  the  front, 
fingers  pointing  upward,  thumbs  locked,  right  thumb  in  front, 


PI.  6,  par.  56, 
2  Ex. 


PI.  7,  Par.  56,  2  Ex. 


14 


DISMOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 


shoulders  pressed  back.  DOWN:  Bend  over  till  the  hands,  if 
possible,  touch  the  ground,  keeping  the  arms  and  knees  straight. 
UP:  Straighten  the  body  and  swing  the  ex- 
tended arms  (thumbs  locked)  to  the  vertical 
position.  Continue  by  repeating  down,  up. 

Third  Exercise. 

1.  Arm,  2.  EXERCISE,  3.  FRONT,  4.  REAR. 

At  the  command  exercise,  raise  the  arms 
laterally  until  horiozntal,  palms  upward. 
FRONT:  Swing  the  extended  arms  horizon- 
tally to  the  front,  palms  touching.  REAR: 
Swing  the  extended  arms  well  to  the  rear, 
inclining  them  slightly  downward,  raising  the 
body  upon  the  toes.  Continue  by  repeating 
front,  rear,  till  men,  if  possible,  are  able  to 
?  touch  the  backs  of  the  hands  behind  the  back. 

Fourth  Exercise. 

PI.  8,  Par.  5G,  3  Ex.        1.  Leg,  2.  EXERCISE,  3. 
UP. 

At  the  command  exercise,  place  the  palms 
of  the  hands  on  the  hips,  fingers  to  the  front, 
thumbs  to  the  rear,  elbows  pressed  back. 
UP:  Raise  the  left  leg  to  the  front,  bending 
and  elevating  the  knee  as  much  as  possible, 
leg  from  the  knee  to  the  instep  vertical,  toe 
depressed.  UP:  Replace  the  left  foot  and 
raise  the  right  leg  as  prescribed  for  the  left. 

Execute  slowly  at  first,  then  gradually  in- 
crease to  the  cadence  of  double  time.  Con- 
tinue by  repeating  up  when  the  right  and  left 
legs  are  alternately  in  position. 

Fifth  Exercise. 

1.  Leg,  2.  EXERCISE,  3.  Left  (Right),  4.  PI.  9,  Par.  56,  4  Ex. 
FORWARD,  5.  REAR;  or,  5.  GROUND. 

At  the  command  exercise,  place  the  hands  on  the  hips,  as  in 
the  fourth  exercise.  FORWARD:  Move  the  left  leg  to  the  front, 


THE  SOLDIER  DISMOUNTED.  15 

knee  straight,  so  as  to  advance  the  foot  about  15  inches,  toe 
turned  out,  sole  nearly  horizontal,  body  balanced  on  right  foot. 
PEAR :  Move  the  leg  to  the  rear,  knee  straight,  toe  on  a  line  with 
the  right  heel,  sole  nearly  horizontal.  Continue  by  repeating 
forward,  rear. 

When  the  recruit  has  learned  to  balance  himself,  the  command 
forward  is  followed  by  GROUND:  Throw  the  weight  of  the  body 
forward  by  rising  on  the  ball  of  the  right  foot,  advance  and 
plant  the  left,  left  heel  30  inches  from  the  right,  and  advance 
the  right  leg  quickly  to  the  position  of  forward.  Continue  by 
repeating  ground  when  the  right  and  left  legs  are  alternately  in 
the  position  of  forward. 

Sixth  Exercise. 

1.  Lung,  2.  EXERCISE,  3.  INHALE,  4.  EXHALE. 

At  the  command  exercise,  place  the  hands  on  the  hips  as  in 
fourth  exercise.  IN HALE:  Inflate  the  lungs  to  full  capacity  by 
short,  successive  inhalations  through  the  nose.  EXHALE:  Empty 
the  lungs  by  a  continuous  exhalation  through  the  mouth.  Con- 
tinue by  repeating  inhale,  exhale. 

Seventh  Exercise. 

1.  Trunk,  2.  EXERCISE,  3.  Circle  right  (or  left).  At  the  com- 
mand exercise,  raise  the  hands  and  place  them  on  the  hips, 
fingers  to  the  front,  thumbs  to  the  rear,  elbows  pressed  back. 
Circle  right,  bend  the  trunk  to  the  right;  turn  the  trunk  to  the 
rear  and  bend  to  the  rear;  turn  the  trunk  to  the  left  and  bend 
to  the  left ;  turn  the  trunk  to  the  front  and  bend  forward.  Con- 
inue  by  repeating  Circle  right. 

STEPS  AND  MARCHINGS. 
Quick  Time. 

57.  The  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick  time  is  30  inches, 
measured  from  heel  to  heel,  and  the  cadence  is  at  the  rate  of  120 
steps  per  minute. 
/     58.  To  march  in  quick  time:  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  forward,  throw  the  weight  of  the  body  upon 
the  right  leg,  left  knee  straight. 


16  DISMOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

At  the  command  march,  move  the  left  foot  smartly,  but  with- 
out jerk,  straight  forward  30  inches  from  the  right,  measuring 
from  heel  to  heel,  sole  near  the  ground;  straighten  and  turn 
the  knee  slightly  out ;  at  the  same  time  throw  the  weight  of  the 
body  forward  and  plant  the  foot  without  shock,  weight  of  body 
resting  upon  it;  next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the  right  foot 
and  plant  it  as  above;  continue  the  march. 

The  cadence  is  at  first  given  slowly,  and  gradually  increased 
to  that  of  quick  time. 

The  arms  hang  naturally,  the  hands  moving  about  6  inches 
to  the  front  and  3  inches  to  the  rear  of  the  seam  of  the  trousers. 

59.  The  instructor,  when  necessary,  indicates  the  cadence  of 
the  step  by  calling  one,  two,  three,  four;  or,  left,  right,  the  instant 
the  left  and  right  foot,  respectively,  should  be  planted. 

This  rule  is  general. 

Double  Time. 

60.  The  length  of  the  full  step  in  double  time  is  36  inches; 
the  cadence  is  at  the  rate  of  180  steps  per  minute. 

6 1.  To   march   in   double   time :  1.   Forward,  2.   Double   time, 
3.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  forward,  throw  the  weight  of  the  body  on  the 
right  leg. 

At  the  command  march,  raise  the  hands  until  the  forearms  are 
horizontal,  fingers  closed,  nails  toward  the  body,  elbows  to  the 
rear;  carry  forward  the  left  foot,  knee  slightly  bent  and  some- 
what raised,  and  plant  the  foot  36  inches  from  the  right ;  then 
execute  the  same  motion  with  the  right  foot;  continue  this 
alternate  movement  of  the  feet,  throwing  the  weight  of  the  body 
forward  and  allowing  a  natural  swinging  motion  of  the  arms. 

If  marching  in  quick  time,  the  command  forward  is  omitted. 
At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
take  one  step  in  quick,  and  then  step  off  in  double  time. 

To  resume  the  quick  time:  1.  Quick  time,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
advance  and  plant  the  other  foot  in  double  time,  resume  the 
quick  time,  dropping  the  hands  by  the  sides. 

Recruits  are  also  exercised  in  running,  the  principles  being 
the  same  as  for  double  time* 


THE  SOLDIER  DISMOUNTED.  17 

When  marching  in  double  time  and  in  running,  the  men 
breathe  as  much  as  possible  through  the  nose,  keeping  the 
mouth  closed. 

Distances  of  100,  and  180  yards,  are  marked  on  the  drill 
ground,  and  noncommissioned  officers  and  men  practiced  in 
keeping  correct  cadence  and  length  of  pace  in  both  quick  and 
double  time. 

62.  To  arrest  the  march  in  quick  or  double  time:  1.  Squad, 
2.  HALT. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
advance  and  plant  the  other  foot;  place  the  foot  in  rear  by  the 
side  of  the  other.  If  in  double  time  drop  the  hands  by  the 
sides. 

The  halt,  while  marking  time,  and  marching  at  the  half  step, 
side  step,  and  back  step,  is  executed  by  the  same  commands. 

This  rule  is  general,  the  command  section,  platoon,  company,  etc., 
being  substituted  for  squad. 

To  Mark  Time. 

63.  Being  in  march:  1.  Mark  time,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
advance  and  plant  the  other  foot ;  bring  up  the  foot  in  rear,  and 
continue  the  cadence  by  alternately  raising  and  planting  each 
foot  on  line  with  the  other.  The  feet  are  raised  about  4  inches, 
from  the  ground  and  planted  with  the  same  energy  as  when 
advancing. 

To  resume  the  full  step :  1.  Full  step,  2.  MARCH. 

Half  Step. 

64.  Being  in  march:  1.  Half  step,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
take  steps  of  15  inches. 

To  resume  the  full  step :  1.  Full  step,  2.  MARCH. 
The  length  of  the  half  step  in  double  time  is  18  inches. 

Side  Step. 

65.  Being  at  a  halt:  1.  Right  (Left)  step,  2.  MARCH. 

Carry  and  plant  the  right  foot  10  inches  to  the  right;  bring 
the  left  foot  beside  it  and  continue  the  movement  in  cadence  of 
quick  time. 

82940° — 11 2 


18  DISMOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

The  side  step  is  used  for  small  intervals  only,  and  is  not 
executed  in  double  time. 

Back  Step. 

66.  Being  at  a  halt:  1.  Backward,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  step  back  with  the  left  foot  15  inches 
straight  to  the  rear,  then  with  the  right,  and  so  on,  the  feet 
alternating. 

At  the  command  halt,  bring  back  the  foot  in  front  to  the  side 
of  the  one  in  rear. 

The  back  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only,  and  is  not 
executed  in  double  time. 

To  March  by  the  Flank. 

67.  Being  in  march:  1.  By  the  right  (left)  flank,  2.  MARCH. 
At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 

ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot,  then  face  to  the  right 
in  marching  and  step  off  in  the  new  direction  with  the  right 
foot. 

To  March  to  the  Rear. 

68.  Being  in  march:  1.  To  the  rear,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot;  then  turning  on  the 
balls  of  both  feet,  face  to  the  right  about  and  immediately  step 
off  with  the  left  foot. 

If  marching  in  double  time,  turn  to  the  right  about,  taking 
four  steps  in  place,  keeping  the  cadence,  and  then  step  off  with 
the  left  foot. 

Change  Step. 

69.  Being  in  march:  1.  Change  step,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot;  plant  the  toe  of  the 
right  foot  near  the  heel  of  the  left  and  step  off  with  the  left  foot. 

The  change  on  the  right  foot  is  similarly  executed,  the  com- 
mand march  being  given  as  the  left  foot  strikes  the  ground. 


THE  SOLDIER  DISMOUNTED.  19 

Covering  and  Marching  on  Points. 

70.  The   instructor   indicates  two   points   and   requires  the 
recruits,  in  succession,  to  place  themselves  upon  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  straight  line  through  these  points  and  then  to  march 
upon  them  in  both  quick  and  double  time. 

It  should  be  demonstrated  to  the  recruits  that  they  can  not 
march  in  a  straight  line  without  selecting  two  points  in  the 
desired  direction  and  keeping  them  covered  while  advancing. 

A  distant  and  conspicuous  landmark  is  next  selected  as  a 
point  of  direction.  The  recruit  is  required  to  choose  two  inter- 
mediate points  in  line  with  the  point  of  direction  and  to  march 
upon  it  by  covering  these  points,  new  points  being  selected  as  he 
advances. 

SECTION  III. — The  squad. 

71.  As  soon  as  the  recruits  are  sufficiently  instructed  for  the 
purpose,  they  are  formed  into  squads  of  convenient  size  in  order 
to  teach  them  the  principles  of  the  alignments,  taking  intervals, 
and  the  marchings. 

72.  For  this  instruction,  the  recruits  are  formed  in  double 
rank.     The  files  on  the  right  and  left  of  the  squad  are  always 
complete;  if  there  be  an  incomplete  file,  it  will  be  the  second 
from  the  left.    The  rear-rank  men  cover  their  file  leaders  accu- 
rately at  1  yard  distance. 

In  the  case  of  a  small  number  of  recruits,  they  may  be  formed 
in  single  rank.  The  movements  described  for  the  double  rank 
formation  apply  equally  well  to  the  single  rank,  omitting  the 
explanations  for  the  rear-rank  men. 

To  Form  the  Squad. 

73.  To  form  the  squad,  the  instructor  designates  a  recruit  as 
the  front-rank  man  of  the  right  file  and  indicates  to  him  where 
the  right  of  the  squad  is  to  rest;  he  then  places  himself  about 
3  yards   in   front  of  where  the  center  is  to  be  formed,   and 
commands:  FALL  IN. 

The  men  form  on  the  designated  recruit,  in  two  ranks  facing 
to  the  front,  as  already  prescribed.  (Par.  47.) 

74.  The    squad    executes    the    rests;    resumes    the    attention; 
marks  time;  and  executes  the  facings,  the  setting-up  exercises, 


20  DISMOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

the  steps,  and  the  halt,  and  is  dismissed  by  the  same  commands 
and  means  as  explained  for  the  recruit. 

Alignments. 

75.  The  alignments  are  first  taught  by  requiring  the  recruits 
to  align  themselves  upon  two  files  established  as  a  base. 

Being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  causes  the  first  two  files  on  the 
flank  toward  which  the  alignment  is  to  be  made  to  move  for- 
ward a  few  paces,  and  establishes  them  as  a  base;  he  then 
commands :  1.  Right  (left),  2.  DRESS,  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  dress  the  first  two  files  turn  their  heads  to 
the  right  so  as  to  bring  the  left  eye  in  a  line  about  2  inches  to 
the  right  of  the  center  of  the  body.  Eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of 
eyes  of  the  men  in  or  supposed  to  be  in  the  same  rank.  The 
remaining  files  march  to  the  front,  each  man  shortening  the  last 
step  so  as  to  place  himself  about  6  inches  in  rear  of  the  new 
alignment,  which  must  never  be  passed;  each  man  then  looks 
to  the  right,  as  previously  prescribed  for  the  first  two  files,  and, 
taking  steps  of  2  or  3  inches,  moves  up,  slightly  opening  out  his 
right  elbow  and  touching  the  left  elbow  of  the  man  on  his  right, 
bringing  his  eyes  and  shoulders  in  line  with  those  of  the  men  in 
rank  on  his  right,  then  withdraws  his  elbow  from  touch,  but 
keeps  his  eyes  to  the  right.  In  dressing  to  the  left,  intervals 
are  taken  in  a  similar  manner,  by  making  a  light  touch  with  the 
left  elbow  to  the  right  elbow  of  the  next  man  on  the  left.  At 
the  command  front,  given  when  the  ranks  are  aligned,  the  men 
cast  their  eyes  to  the  front.  All  movement  in  ranks  must  then 
cease. 

76.  At  first,  the  basis  of  the  alignment  is  established  parallel 
to  the  front  of  the  squad ;  afterwards,  in  oblique  directions. 

77.  The  recruits  having  learned  to  align  themselves,  the  in- 
structor establishes  the  base  file  and  commands :  1.  Right  (left), 
2.  DRESS,  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  dress,  the  men,  except  the  base  file,  move  for- 
ward and  all  dress  as  previously  explained,  the  rear-rank  men 
being  careful  to  cover  their  file  leaders  accurately. 

78.  Alignments  to  the  rear  are  executed  on  the  same  prin- 
ciples :  1.  Right  (left)  backward,  2.  DRESS,  3.  FRONT. 

The  men  step  back,  halt  a  little  in  rear  of  the  line,  and  im- 
mediately dress  up  as  previously  explained. 


THE  SOLDIER  DISMOUNTED.  21 

79.  To  execute  the  alignments,  using  the  side  step,  the  in- 
structor establishes  the  base  file  a  short  distance  to  the  right  or 
left  of  the  squad,  and  commands :  1.  Right  (left)  step,  2.  (Right 
or  left),  3.  DRESS,  4.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  dress,  the  men  execute  the  side  step,  close 
toward  the  base  file,  and  dress  as  previously  explained. 

To  Take  Intervals. 

80.  Being  in  iine  at  a  halt:  1.  To  the  right  (left)  take  inter- 
vals, 2.  MARCH,  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

At  the  first  command,  the  rear  rank  steps  back  to  2  yards 
distance  from  the  front  rank ;  at  the  command  march,  all  face  to 
the  right  and  the  leading  man  of  each  rank  steps  off;  the  other 
men  step  off  in  succession  so  as  to  follow  the  preceding  man  at 
2  yards. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  when  all  have  their  intervals,  all 
halt  and  face  to  the  front. 

To  Assemble. 

81.  1.  To  the  right  (left)  assemble,  2.  MARCH. 

The  front-rank  man  on  the  right  stands  fast,  the  rear-rank 
man  on  the  right  closes  to  1  yard.  The  other  men  face  to  the 
right,  close  by  the  shortest  line,  and  face  to  the  front. 

Marchings. 

82.  During  the  marchings  the  guide  conducts  the  march,  pre- 
serving with  great  care  the  direction,  length,  and  cadence  of 
the  step,  selecting  points  on  which  to  march,  as  explained  in 
paragraph  70. 

To  March  to  the  front. 

83.  Being  at  a  halt:  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

The  men  step  off  and  march  straight  to  the  front. 

If  in  line,  the  rear-rank  men  follow  their  file  leaders  accu- 
rately. The  instructor  sees  that  the  ranks  preserve  the  align- 
ment and  the  intervals  toward  the  side  of  the  guide.  The  men 
yield  to  pressure  from  that  side  and  resist  pressure  from  the 


22  DISMOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

opposite  side;  by  slightly  shortening  or  lengthening  the  step 
they  gradually  recover  the  alignment,  and  by  slightly  opening 
out  or  closing  in  they  gradually  recover  the  interval,  if  lost; 
while  habitually  keeping  the  head  to  the  front,  they  may  occa- 
sionally glance  toward  the  side  of  the  guide  to  assure  them- 
selves of  the  alignment  and  interval,  but  the  head  is  turned  as 
little  as  possible  for  this  purpose. 

If  in  flank  column,  the  men  of  the  leading  file  step  off  at  full 
step;  the  leading  rear-rank  man  marches  abreast  of  his  file 
leader  at  26  inches  interval.  The  other  files  march  at  the  half 
step,  each  taking  the  full  step  when  at  1  yard  distance. 

84.  Being  in  march:  1.  To  the  rear,  2.  MARCH. 
Executed  as  explained  in  paragraph  68. 

If  at  a  halt,  the  squad  may  be  faced  about  and  then  moved 
forward,  as  explained  in  the  preceding  paragraph;  or,  without 
facing  about,  it  may  be  marched  a  short  distance  to  the  rear, 
as  explained  in  paragraph  66,  by  the  command :  1.  Backward, 
2.  MARCH. 

Whenever  the  squad  in  line  is  faced  about  or  marched  to  the 
rear,  all  men  in  the  front  rank  not  covered  step  into  the  new 
front  rank. 

To  March  by  the  Flank. 

85.  Being  in  line:  1.  By  the  right  (left)  flank,  2.  MARCH. 
Executed  as  explained  in  paragraphs  67  and  83. 

The  formation  obtained  by  marching  by  the  flank  from  line  is 
called  a  flank  column. 

If  at  a  halt,  the  squad  may  be  marched  by  the  flank  by  first 
facing  it  in  the  desired  direction  and  then  moving  it  forward, 
as  explained  in  paragraph  83. 

When  the  march  by  the  flank  is  executed  from  flank  column 
while  at  1  yard  distance,  the  file  close  in  gradually  toward  the 
guide  until  they  have  the  prescribed  interval. 

86.  Whenever  the  flank  column  is  halted  while  marching  at 
1  yard  distance,  the  leading  file  halts  at  the  command ;   the 
others  close  to  facing  distance  before  halting. 

87.  To  close  up  in  flank  column  without  halting:  1.  Close, 
2.  MARCH. 

The  leading  file  takes  the  half  step;  the  other  files  close  to 
facing  distance  and  take  the  half  step;  all  the  files  having 


THE  SOLDIER  DISMOUNTED.  23 

closed  to  facing  distance,  the  column  is  halted  or  marched  by 
the  flank  as  previously  explained. 

88.  To  halt  the  flank  column  without  closing  up :  1.  In  place, 

2.  HALT. 

To  March  Obliquely. 

89.  For  the  instruction  of  recruits,  the  squad  being  correctly 
aligned,  the  instructor  causes  the  squad  to  face  half  right  or 
half  left,  points  out  to  the  men  their  relative  positions,  and  ex- 
plains that  these  are  to  be  maintained  in  the  oblique  march. 

90.  1.  Right  (left)  oblique,  2.  MARCH. 

Each  man  steps  off  in  a  direction  45°  to  the  right  of  his 
former  front.  He  preserves  his  relative  position,  keeping  his 
shoulders  parallel  to  those  of  the  guide,  and  so  regulates  his 
step  as  to  keep  the  ranks  parallel  to  their  original  direction. 

If  the  command  halt  be  given  while  marching  obliquely,  the 
men  halt  faced  to  the  original  front. 

To    resume    the    original    direction :    1.  Forward,    2.  MARCH, 

3.  Guide  (right  or  left) 

At  half  step  or  mark  time,  while  obliquing,  the  oblique  march 
is  resumed  by  the  commands:  1.  Full  step,  2.  MARCH. 

91.  After  obliquing,   if  line  be  formed,  the  files,  if  not  at 
proper  intervals,  close  in  gradually  toward  the  guide;  similarly, 
if  flank  column  be  formed,  the  files,  if  not  at  1  yard  distance, 
fall  back  as  prescribed  in  paragraph  83. 

To  Change  Direction  in  Flank  Column. 

92.  1.  Column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

The  pivot  man  of  the  leading  file  faces  to  the  right  in  march- 
ing and  takes  the  half  step ;  the  man  on  the  marching  flank,  by 
twice  obliquing  to  the  right,  places  himself  abreast  of  the  pivot 
man ;  the  latter  then  takes  the  full  step.  The  other  files  march 
squarely  up  to  the  turning  point  and  execute  the  change  of 
direction  on  the  same  ground  and  in  the  same  manner.  When 
executed  from  a  halt,  all  the  men  step  off  at  the  command  march. 

93.  The  exercise  of  a  section  dismounted  are  similarly  exe- 
cuted, substituting  in  the  latter  case  the  word  section  for  squad 
in  the  commands. 


24  DISMOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

SECTION  IV. — Manual  of  the  pistol. 

94.  The  instruction  under  this  head  is  first  given  on  foot. 

95.  The  pistol  being  in  the  holster,  to  raise  pistol:  1.  Raise, 
2.  PISTOL. 

At  the  command  raise,  unbutton  the  holster  flap  with  the  right 
hand  and  grasp  the  stock,  back  of  the  hand  to  the  body. 

At  the  command  pistol,  draw  the  pistol  from  the  holster, 
reverse  it,  muzzle  up,  the  hand  holding  the  stock  with  the  thumb 
and  last  three  fingers;  the  little  finger  may  be  placed -under  the 
butt ;  forefinger  outside  of  the  guard ;  guard  to  the  front ;  barrel 
nearly  vertical;  hand  as  high  as  the  neck  and  6  inches  to  the 
right  and  front  of  the  right  shoulder.  This  is  the  position  of 
raise  pistol. 

96.  Being  mounted  and  at  position  raise     pistol,  1.  Lower, 
2.  PISTOL.    At  the  command  pistol,  lower  the  pistol,  without 
changing  the  grasp,  rest  the  hand  and  pistol  on  the  right  thigh, 
back  of  hand  up,  muzzle  in  front  of  right  knee. 

97.  Being  at  raise  or  lower  pistol:  1.  Return,  2.  PISTOL. 
Insert  the  pistol  in  the  holster,  back  of  hand  to  the  body,  but- 
ton the  flap,  and  drop  the  hand  by  the  side. 

If  the  holster  is  so  constructed  that  the  butt  is  to  the  rear, 
raise  and  return  pistol  are  executed  as  already  prescribed,  ex- 
cept that  the  back  of  the  hand  is  to  the  right  and  the  pistol  is 
not  reversed. 

98.  1.  Inspection,  2.  PISTOL. 

Execute  raise  pistol,  except  that  the  pistol  is  held  about  6 
inches  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  barrel  up,  pointing  to 
the  left  front  and  upward  at  an  angle  of  about  45°,  wrist 
straight  and  as  high  as  the  breast. 

The  instructor  passes  along  the  rank  and  examines  the  pistols. 
To  inspect  the  pistol  minutely,  he  takes  it  in  his  hands  and  then 
returns  it  to  the  soldier,  who  grasps  it  at  the  stock  and  resumes 
inspection  pistol ;  each  man  returns  pistol  as  the  inspector  passes 
to  the  next.  If  the  pistols  are  not  inspected,  they  are  returned 
by  the  commands :  1.  Return,  2.  PISTOL. 

For  purposes  of  instruction  the  men  may  be  required  to  exe- 
cute inspection  pistol  simultaneously,  suitable  caution  being 
given  to  that  effect  by  the  instructor.  But  at  formal  inspections 
the  men  execute  inspection  pistol  in  succession  as  the  inspector 
approaches  them. 


THE  SOLDIER  DISMOUNTED.  25 

99.  Being  at  raise  or  lower  pistol:  LOAD. 

Place  the  pistol  at  the  cylinder  in  the  left  hand,  latch  up, 
barrel  inclined  to  the  left  front  and  downward  at  an  angle  of 
about  30° ;  draw  back  the  latch  with  the  right  thumb,  push  the 
cylinder  out  with  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand,  and,  if 
necessary,  eject  the  empty  shells  by  pressing  the  ejector  with 
the  left  thumb,  right  hand  steadying  the  pistol  at  the  stock; 
take  a  cartridge  from  the  belt  or  box,  insert  it  in  the  chamber, 
press  it  home  with  the  right  thumb,  and  so  on  for  each  cham- 
ber to  be  loaded ;  close  the  cylinder  with  the  left  thumb  so  that 
the  hammer  will  rest  over  the  empty  chamber  and  resume  posi- 
tion held  before  loading. 

Firing*. 

100.  For  single  action.     Being  at  raise  (or  lower)   pistol: 

1.  To  the  front  (right  oblique,  etc.);  or,  1.  At  (such  an  object), 

2.  READY. 

Cock  the  pistol  with  the  right  thumb  and  direct  the  eyes  to 
the  front  or  toward  the  target. 

101.  1.  Squad,  2.  FIRE. 

Thrust  and  point  the  pistol  to  the  front  or  toward  the  target, 
arm  nearly  or  quite  extended,  keeping  the  eyes  on  the  object, 
and  fire;  resume  the  raise  (or  lower)  pistol. 

To  continue  the  firing  in  the  same  direction,  or  at  the  same 
target:  1.  READY,  2.  Squad,  3.  FIRE. 

102.  For  double  action,  being  at  raise    (or  lower)    pistol: 
1.  To  the  front  (right  oblique,  etc.),  2.  Squad,  3.  FIRE;  or,  1.  At 
(such  an  object),  2.  Squad,  3.  FIRE. 

Executed  as  in  paragraph  103,  except  that  at  the  command 
Fire  the  pistol  is  cocked  by  pressing  steadily  on  the  trigger. 

103.  An  almost  imperceptible  pause  may  be  allowed  between 
the  thrusting  and  firing,  in  which  to  correctly  point  the  pistol. 
Deliberate  aiming,  however,  should  not  be  encouraged.     After 
firing  without  cartridges,  pause  an  instant  to  see  if  the  pistol  is 
correctly  pointed,  to  get  the  personal  error. 

The  instructor  must  take  into  account  individual  peculiarities 
in  order  to  secure  the  best  results  in  firing;  in  such  cases  de- 
parture from  the  text  is  permissible. 

When  mounted,  lean  slightly  forward,  bearing  on  the  stir- 
rups; in  firing  to  the  front,  lean  well  to  the  right  and  slightly 
forward,  to  avoid  burning  or  frightening  the  horse, 


26  DISMOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

104.  In  a  similar  manner  the  men  will  be  instructed  to  fire 
to  the  left,  right,  right  oblique,  left  oblique,  right  rear,  left  rear, 
and  rear.    When  firing  to  the  left,  the  pistol  hand  will  be  about 
opposite  the  left  shoulder ;  when  firing  to  the  rear  or  right  rear, 
the  shoulders  are  turned  about  45°  to  the  right;  when  firing  to 
the  left  and  left  rear,  the  shoulders  are  turned  about  45°  to  the 
left. 

105.  The  recruits  are  first  taught  the  motions  of  loading  and 
firing  without  using  cartridges.     Loading  and  pointing  practice 
shall  be  given  mounted,  at  all  gaits. 

106.  No  cartridges  will  be  used,  except  when  indicated  in 
the  first  command,  thus:  1.  With   (so  many)   Dummy  (blank  or 
ball)  cartridges,  2.  LOAD. 

To  Fire  at  Will. 

107.  1.  Fire  at  will,  2.   To  the  front,  etc.,  or,  2.  At   (such  an 
object),  3.  COMMENCE  FIRING,  4.  CEASE  FIRING. 

The  man  fires  as  rapidly  as  is  consistent  with  good  pointing 
at  each  shot.  The  raise  or  lower  pistol  is  resumed  after  each 
shot. 

108.  At  the  command  cease  firing,  the  firing  will  stop,  and 
the  men  resume  the  raise  or  lower  pistol. 

Target  practice  will  be  conducted  on  the  principles  explained 
in  the  Small-Arms  Firing  Regulations. 

CHAPTER   III.— THE   COMPANY   DISMOUNTED. 
SECTION  I. — General  provisions. 

109.  The  instruction  herein  prescribed  for  the  field  company 
dismounted   is   applicable,   with   obvious   modifications,   to   the 
platoon  dismounted  and  the  section  dismounted.     Other  com- 
panies of  the  Signal  Corps,  not  mounted,  will  be  governed  by  the 
Infantry  Drill  Regulations. 

110.  Sections  are  either  wire  sections  or  wireless  sections. 
A  wire  section  dismounted  comprises  all  the  men  assigned  to 

the  installation  and  maintenance  of  a  wire  line  of  information. 
It  consists  of  one  first-class  sergeant,  who  is  chief  of  section, 
one  sergeant,  two  corporals,  driver,  operators,  linemen,  mes- 
sengers, and  horse  holders 


THE  COMPANY  DISMOUNTED.  27 

A  wireless  section  dismounted  comprises  all  the  men  assigned 
to  the  establishment  and  maintenance  of  a  wireless  station.  A 
pack  wireless  section  consists  of  one  first-class  sergeant,  who  is 
chief  of  section,  one  sergeant,  two  corporals,  operators,  antenna 
men,  messengers,  and  horse  holders.  A  wagon  wireless  section 
consists  of  one  first-class  sergeant,  who  is  chief  of  section,  one 
sergeant,  two  corporals,  the  engineer,  the  wagoner,  operators, 
antenna  men,  guy  men,  messengers,  and  horse  holders. 

The  men  are  permanently  assigned  to  sections  and  are  trans- 
ferred by  order  of  the  captain  only;  they  may  be  temporarily 
attached  to  sections  not  their  own  to  equalize  subdivisions  at 
drill  or  other  duty. 

111.  A  platoon  dismounted  consists  of  one  lieutenant,  who  is 
chief  of  platoon,  and  two  sections  dismounted. 

112.  A  company  dismounted  comprises  three  platoons  and  such 
additional  men  as  are  necessary  for  administrative,  tactical, 
and  technical  purposes. 

113.  Chief  of  platoons  and  of  sections  supervise  the  move- 
ments of  their  platoons  and  sections,  but  repeat  or  give  com- 
mands only  when  prescribed. 

114.  File  closers  will  rectify  mistakes  and  insure  steadiness 
and  promptness  in  the  ranks. 

115.  The  company  is  formed  in  double  rank,  with  the  platoons 
and  sections  arranged  from  right  to  left  in  the  order  of  their 
permanent  numbers. 

The  senior  lieutenant  is  assigned  as  chief  of  the  first  platoon, 
the  lieutenant  next  in  rank  as  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  and 
so  on. 

The  first  four  sections  of  a  field  company  are  wire  sections; 
the  other  two  are  pack  wireless  sections. 

The  first  four  sections  in  a  field  wireless  company  are  pack 
wireless  sections ;  the  other  two  are  wagon  wireless  sections. 

SECTION  II. — Posts  of  officers,  noncommissioned  officers,  etc.,  in 

line. 

116.  The  captain:  Four  yards  in  front  of  the  center  of  the 
company.     Chiefs  of  platoons:  Two  yards  in  front  of  the  center 
of  their  platoons.     Master  signal  electricians:  In  the  line  of  file 
closers,  opposite  the  centers  of  the  first  and  third  platoons,  re- 
spectively.   First  sergeant:  In  the  front  rank,  1  yard  from  the 


28  DISMOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

right  of  the  guidon.  Chiefs  of  sections:  One  yard  in  front  of 
the  center  of  their  sections.  Sergeants:  In  the  front  rank  on 
the  right  of  their  sections,  not  covered  in  the  rear  rank.  Supply, 
stable,  and  mess  sergeants:  In  the  line  of  file  closers.  Corporals: 
In  the  front  rank  of  their  sections,  one  on  the  left  of  the  ser- 
geant, the  other  on  the  left  of  the  section.  Guidon:  On  the 
right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  first  section,  not  covered  in  the 
rear  rank.  Trumpeters:  In  the  line  of  file  closers,  in  rear  of  the 
first  section.  Mechanics,  cooks,  etc.,  when  present,  will  be  as- 
signed to  the  various  sections. 

117.  In  flank  columns  the  posts  are  the  same  as  when  faced 
with  the  company  from  line. 

SECTION  III. — To  form  the  company  dismounted. 

118.  At  the  sounding  of  the  assembly,   the  first   sergeant, 
facing  the  company,  and  6  yards  in  front  of  where  the  center 
is  to  be,  commands :  1.  Fall  in,  2.  Call  rolls,  3.  REPORT. 

At  the  command  fall  in,  the  sergeants  place  themselves  on  the 
line  facing  to  the  front,  in  their  proper  order,  at  sufiicient  dis- 
tance apart  for  the  formation  of  their  sections.  The  men  of 
each  section  fall  in  on  the  left  of  their  sergeants,  as  prescribed 
in  paragraph  73;  the  chiefs  of  sections  take  their  posts,  facing 
their  sections,  and  the  guidon  and  the  file  closers,  except  the 
master  signal  electricians,  take  their  posts.  The  assembly  hav- 
in  ceased,  the  first  sergeant  causes  the  sections  to  close  to  the 
right,  if  necessary. 

At  the  command  call  rolls,  the  chief  of  sections  call  the  rolls 
and  then  face  to  the  front. 

At  the  command  report,  the  chief  of  the  first  section  salutes 
and  reports,  "  First  section  present,"  or  "  First  section,  Cor- 
poral    and  Private are  absent."  The  first  sergeant, 

having  received  and  verified  the  report,  returns  the  salute  with 
the  right  hand.  The  chief  of  the  second  section  then  reports  in 
like  manner,  and  so  on.  Men  who  are  known  to  be  absent  by 
proper  authority  are  not  reported  absent  by  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tion. After  receiving  the  reports  the  first  sergeant  faces  about, 
salutes  the  captain  and  reports,  "Sir,  the  company  is  present  or 
accounted  for,"  or  "Sir,  (so  many)  noncommissioned  officers  or 
privates  are  absent."  The  first  sergeant  then  takes  his  post. 
The  captain  places  himself  about  12  yards  in  front  of  the  center 


THE  COMPANY  DISMOUNTED.  29 

of  the  company,  superintends  the  formation,  and  receives  the 
report  of  the  first  sergeant,  whose  salute  he  returns.  The 
lieutenants  and  master  signal  electricians  take  their  posts  as 
soon  as  the  first  sergeant  has  reported.  During  instruction  the 
officers  have  the  saber  drawn  or  in  the  scabbard,  at  the  dis- 
cretion of  the  captain.  When  the  captain  draws  saber  the 
lieutenants  also  will  draw  sabers. 

Alignments. 

119.  The   alignments   are   executed    as   prescribed   for   the 
squad,  the  guide  being  established  instead  of  the  base  file.     In 
aligning  the  company,  the  captain  places  himself  in  prolonga- 
tion of  the  line,  2  yards  from  and  facing  the  flank  toward  which 
the  alignment  is  made;  after  commanding  FRONT  he  resumes 
his  post. 

To  Dismiss  the  Company. 

120.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt  the  captain  directs  the  first 
sergeant :  Dismiss  the  company,  and  returns  the  salute  of  the 
first  sergeant. 

The  officers  and  master  signal  electricians  fall  out;  the  first 
sergeant  salutes,  steps  3  yards  to  the  front,  faces  to  the  left, 
and  commands :  DISMISSED. 

In  exceptional  cases  the  company  may  be  dismissed  from 
any  formation,  either  at  a  halt  or  marching. 

Route  Order  and  at  Ease. 

121.  Marching    in    flank   column:  1.  ROUTE    ORDER,    or,    1. 
AT  EASE. 

The  officers  carry  their  sabers  at  will  or  in  the  scabbard ;  the 
men  retain  their  positions  in  ranks,  but  are  not  required  to 
keep  step. 

If  the  command  be  route  order,  the  men  are  permitted  to  talk ; 
if  the  command  be  at  ease,  silence  is  preserved. 

To  resume  the  cadenced  step :  1.  Company,  2.  A  TTENTION. 

If  halted,  while  marching  at  route  order,  the  men  remain  at 
rest  in  ranks ;  if  halted  while  marching  at  ease,  they  remain  at 
ease. 

Route  order  and  at  ease  are  not  used  while  marching  in 
double  time. 


PART  III. 

MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

CHAPTER  I.— THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED. 

122.  The  object  of  this  instruction  is  to  teach  horsemanship 
to  the  extent  necessary  to  enable  detachments  and  companies 
of  the  Signal  Corps  to  efficiently  perform  the  mounted  duties 
required  of  them. 

123.  During  the  first  few  lessons  the  instructor  will  devote 
his  attention  chiefly  to  giving  the  recruits  the  proper  seat  and 
carriage  and  to  making  them  self-confident  on  horseback;  he 
quietly  and  patiently  corrects  the  faults  of  each  individual  as 
they  occur,  frequently  passing  from  one  to  another,  and  will  re- 
quire by  degrees  the  correct  execution  of  his  teachings;  these 
understood  and  confidence  imparted,  the  positions  and  motions 
will  be  rigidly  enforced. 

The  recruit  will  be  taught  that  his  own  disposition  or  temper 
is  usually  communicated  to  and  reacts  upon  the  horse,  and 
therefore  it  is  to  their  mutual  interest  to  preserve  calmness. 

The  instructor  may  dismount  when  he  can,  in  that  way  the 
better  teach  the  positions. 

Quiet,  well-trained  horses  are  first  assigned. 

124.  Each  mounted  drill  begins  and  ends  at  the  walk.     This 
rule  is  general. 

125.  During  the  drills  the  recruits  are  taught  the  following 
rules  for  the  care  of  horses,  until  the  instructor  is  satisfied  by 
means  of  questions  that  they  are  thoroughly  comprehended : 

Never  threaten,  strike,  or  otherwise  abuse  a  horse. 

Before  entering  a  stall  or  when  approaching  a  horse  from  the 
rear  speak  to  the  horse  gently. 

Never  take  a  rapid  gait  until  the  horse  has  been  warmed  up 
by  gentle  exercise. 

Never  put  up  a  horse  brought  in  a  heated  condition  to  the 
stable  or  picket  line,  but  throw  a  blanket  over  him  and  rub 
his  legs,  or  walk  him  until  cool.    When  he  is  wet,  put  him  under 
shelter,  and  rub  him  until  dry. 
30 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  31 

Never  feed  grain  to  a  horse  nor  allow  him  to  stand  uncovered 
when  heated.  Hay  will  not  hurt  a  horse  no  matter  how  warm 
he  may  be. 

Never  water  a  horse  when  heated  unless  the  exercise  or 
march  is  to  be  immediately  resumed. 

Never  throw  water  over  any  part  of  a  horse  when  heated. 

Never  allow  a  horse's  back  to  be  cooled  suddenly  by  washing 
or  even  removing  the  blanket  unnecessarily. 

To  cool  the  back  gradually,  the  blanket  may  be  removed  and 
replaced  with  the  dry  side  next  the  horse. 

The  Equipment  of  the  Horse. 

126.  The  instructor  indicates  the  different  parts  and  uses 
of  each  equipment  as  a  commencement  of  this  instruction. 

To  Fold  the  Saddle   Blanket. 

127.  The  blanket,  after  being  well  shaken,  will  be  folded 
into  six  thicknesses,  as  follows:  Hold  it  well  up  by  the  two 
corners,  the  long  way  up  and  down;  double  it  lengthwise   (so 
the  fold  wih  come  between  the  "  U  "  and  "  S  "),  the  folded  cor- 
ner (middle  of  blanket)  in  the  left  hand;  take  the  folded  corner 
between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand ;   thumb 
pointing  to  the  left;  slip  the  left  hand  down  the  folded  edge 
two-thirds  its  length  and  seize  it  with  the  thumb  and  second  fin- 
ger ;  raise  the  hands  to  the  height  of  the  shoulders,  the  blanket 
between  them  extended;  bring  the  hands  together,  the  double 
fold  falling  outward;   pass  the  folded  corner  from   the  right 
hand  into  the  left  hand,  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger,  slip 
the  second  finger  of  the  right  hand  between  the  folds,  and  seize 
the  double-folded  corner;  turn  the  left  (disengaged)  corner  in, 
and  seize  it  with  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand,  the 
second   finger   of  the   right   hand   stretching   and   evening   the 
folds;  after  evening  the  folds,  grasp  the  corners  and  shake  the 
blanket  well  in  order  to  smooth  the  folds,  raise  the  blanket, 
and  place  it  between  the  chin  and  breast;  slip  the  hands  down 
halfway,   the  first  two  fingers   outside,   the  other   fingers  and 
thumb  of  each  hand  inside,  seize  the  blanket  with  the  thumbs 
and  first  two  fingers,  let  the  part  under  the  chin  fall  forward; 


32  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

hold  the  blanket  up,  arms  extended,  even  the  lower  edges,  seize 
the  middle  points  between  the  thumbs  and  forefingers,  and  flirt 
the  outside  part  over  the  right  arm ;  the  blanket  is  thus  held 
before  placing  it  on  the  horse. 

To  put  on  the  Blanket  and  Surcingle. 

128.  The  instructor  commands:  BLANKET. 

Approach  the  horse  on  the  near  (left)  side,  with  the  blanket 
folded  and  held  as  just  described;  place  it  well  forward  on  his 
back,  by  tossing  the  part  of  the  blanket  over  the  right  arm  to 
the  off  (right)  side  of  the  horse,  still  keeping  hold  of  the  middle 
points;  slide  the  blanket  once  or  twice  from  front  to  rear  to 
smooth  the  hair,  being  careful  to  raise  the  blanket  in  bringing 
it  forward;  place  the  blanket  with  the  forefinger  of  the  left 
hand  on  the  withers,  and  the  forefinger  of  the  right  hand  on  the 
backbone,  the  blanket  smooth ;  it  should  then  be  well  forward 
with  the  edges  on  the  left  side ;  remove  the  locks  of  mane  that 
may  be  under  it ;  pass  the  buckle  end  of  the  surcingle  over  the 
middle  of  the  blanket,  and  buckle  it  on  the  near  side,  a  little 
below  the  edge  of  the  blanket. 

To  put  on  the  Watering  Bridle. 

129.  The  instructor  commands:  BRIDLE. 

Take  the  reins  in  the  right  hand,  the  bit  in  the  left;  approach 
the  horse  on  the  near  side,  slip  the  reins  over  the  horse's  head 
and  let  them  rest  on  his  neck;  reach  under  and  engage  the 
snap  in  the  right  halter  ring,  insert  the  left  thumb  in  the  side 
of  the  horse's  mouth  above  the  tush  and  press  open  the  lower 
jaw ;  insert  the  bit  and  engage  the  snap  in  the  left  halter  ring. 
The  bit  should  hang  so  as  to  touch,  but  not  draw  up,  the  corners 
of  the  mouth. 

To  Unbridle. 

130.  At   the   command   unbriddle,   pass   the   reins   over   the 
horse's  head,  disengage  the  snaps,  and  remove  the  bit  gently 
from  the  horse's  mouth. 


131. 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED. 

THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED. 

The  Saddle  and  Bridle. 


33 


NOMENCLATURE    OF   THE 
SADDLE. 

A,  Pommel. 

B,  Cantle. 

C,  Side  bar. 

D,  E,  Spider   (quarter 

straps). 

F,  Spider  (or  girth-strap) 

ring. 

G,  Cincha. 

H,  Cincha  strap. 

I,  Cincha  ring. 

i,  Cincha-ring  safe. 

K,  Stirrup  loop. 

L.  Stirrup  strap. 

M,  Stirrup  tread. 

N,  Stirrup  hood. 

P,  Shield. 

Q,  Stud. 

R,  R,  Rings. 

S.  S,   Saber  straps. 

T,  Staple. 

a,  a,  a,  a,  Coat  straps. 


PI.  10,  Par.  131. 


82940°— 11- 


34 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 


NOMENCLATURE   OF   THE   BRIDI 

Headstall  : 

A,  Crovvnpiece. 

B,  Brow  band. 

C,  Ornament. 

D,  D,  Cheek  piece. 

E,  Throatlatch. 

Bit: 

F,  F,  Mouth  piece. 

G,  Port. 

H,  II,  Branches. 
I,    I,  Rein  rings. 
K,  Curb  strap. 
R,  Reins. 

Link  : 

L,  Link  strap. 
M,  Link  snap. 


PI.  11,  Par.  131. 

132.  Greatest  care  will  be  taken  in  the  fitting  of  the  saddle; 
sore  backs  are  generally  occasioned  by  neglect,  and  the  men 
must  never  be  allowed  to  lounge  or  sit  unevenly  in  the  saddle. 

To  Saddle. 

133.  For  instruction,  the  saddle  may  be  placed  4  yards  in 
rear  or  front  of  the  horse.     The  stirrups  are  crossed  over  the 
seat,  the  right  one  uppermost ;  then  the  cincha  and  cincha  strap 
are    crossed    above   the   stirrups,    the   strap    uppermost.      The 
blanket   having  been   placed   as   previously   explained,   the  in- 
structor commands:  SADDLE. 

Seize  the  pommel  of  the  saddle  with  the  left  hand  and  the 
cantle  with  the  right,  approach  the  horse  on  the  near  side  from 
the  direction  of  the  croup,  and  place  the  center  of  the  saddle  on 
the  middle  of  the  horse's  back,  the  end  of  the  side  bar  about  three 
finger  widths  behind  the  point  of  the  shoulder  blade ;  let  down 
the  cincha  strap  and  cincha ;  pass  to  the  off  side,  adjust  the 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  35 

cincha  and  straps,  and  see  that  the  blanket  is  smooth;  return 
to  the  near  side,  raise  the  blanket  slightly  under  the  pommel 
arch  so  that  the  withers  may  not  be  compressed;  take  the 
ciiicha  strap  in  the  right  hand,  reach  under  the  horse  and 
seize  the  cincha  ring  with  the  left  hand,  pass  the  end  of  the 
strap  through  the  ring  from  underneath  (from  inside  to  out- 
side), then  up  and  through  the  upper  ring  from  the  outside;  if 
necessary,  make  another  fold  in  the  same  manner. 

The  strap  is  fastened  as  follows:  Pass  the  end  through  the 
upper  ring  to  the  front;  seize  it  with  the  left  hand,  place  the 
fingers  of  the  right  between  the  outside  folds  of  the  strap ;  pull 
from  the  horse  with  the  right  hand  and  take  up  the  slack  with 
the  left ;  cross  the  strap  over  the  folds,  pass  the  end  of  it  with 
;he  right  hand  underneath  and  through  the  upper  ring  back  of 
the  folds,  then  down  and  under  the  loop  that  crosses  the  folds, 
and  draw  it  tightly;  weave  the  ends  of  the  strap  into  the 
strands  of  the  cincha. 

Another  method  of  fastening  the  cincha  strap  is  as  follows: 
Pass  the  end  through  the  upper  ring  to  the  rear;  seize  it  with 
;he  right  hand,  place  the  fingers  of  the  left  between  the  outer 
folds  of  the  strap ;  pull  from  the  horse  with  the  left  hand  and 
take  up  the  slack  with  the  right;  pass  the  end  of  the  strap 
underneath  and  draw  it  through  the  upper  ring  until  a  loop  is 
formed ;  double  the  loose  end  of  the  strap  and  push  it  through 
:he  loop  and  draw  the  loop  taut.  The  free  end  should  then  be 
long  enough  to  conveniently  seize  with  the  hand. 

Having  fastened  the  cincha  strap,  let  down  the  right  stirrup 
and  then  the  left. 

The  surcingle,  when  used,  is  then  buckled  over  the  saddle  and 
should  be  a  little  looser  than  the  cincha. 

The  cincha,  when  first  tied,  should  admit  a  finger  between  it 
and  the  belly.  After  exercising  for  awhile  the  cincha  will  be 
found  too  loose  and  should  be  tightened. 

134.  To  approximate  the  length  of  the  stirrup  straps  before 
mounting,  they  are  adjusted  so  that  the  length  of  the  stirrup 
strap,  including  the  stirrup,  is  about  1  inch  less  than  the  length 
of  the  arm,  fingers  extended. 

To  Unsaddle. 

135.  The  instructor  commands  :   UNSADDLE. 

Stand  on  the  near  side  of  the  horse ;  unbuckle  and  remove 
the  surcingle ;  cross  the  left  stirrup  over  the  saddle ;  loosen  the 


36  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

cincha  strap  and  let  down  the  cincha ;  pass  to  the  off  side,  cross 
the  right  stirrup,  then  the  cincha;  pass  to  the  near  side,  cross 
the  cincha  strap  over  the  saddle;  grasp  the  pommel  with  the 
left  hand,  the  cantle  with  the  right,  and  remove  the  saddle  over 
the  croup  and  place  it  in  front  or  rear  of  the  horse,  as  may  be 
directed,  pommel  to  the  front ;  grasp  the  blanket  at  the  withers 
with  the  left  hand  and  at  the  loin  with  the  right,  remove  it  in 
the  direction  of  the  croup,  the  edges  falling  together,  wet  side 
in,  and  place  it  across  the  saddle,  folded  edge  on  the  pommel. 

If  in  the  stable,  place  the  saddle  on  its  peg  when  taken  off  the 
horse. 

To  Put  on  the  Curb  Bridle. 

136.  The  instructor  commands:  BRIDLE. 

Take  the  reins  in  the  right,  the  crown  piece  in  the  left  hand; 
approach  the  horse  on  the  near  side,  passing  the  right  hand 
along  his  neck ;  slip  the  reins  over  his  head  and  let  them  rest  on 
his  neck ;  take  the  crownpiece  in  the  right  hand  and  the  lower 
left  branch  of  the  bit  in  the  left  hand,  the  fore  finger  against 
the  mouthpiece;  bring  the  crownpiece  in  front  of  and  slightly 
below  its  proper  position ;  insert  the  thumb  into  the  side  of  the 
mouth  above  the  tush ;  press  open  the  lower  jaw,  insert  the  bit 
by  raising  the  crownpiece;  with  the  left  hand  draw  the  ears 
gently  under  the  crownpiece,  beginning  with  the  left  ear;  ar- 
range the  forelock,  secure  the  throatlatch,  and  then  the  curb 
strap,  taking  care  not  to  set  them  too  closely. 

137.  The   mouthpiece,   which   should   fit  the  width   of  the 
horse's  mouth,  rests  on  that  part  of  the  bars  (the  lower  jaw  be- 
tween the  tushes  and  molars)  directly  opposite  the  chin  groove; 
the  curb  strap  should  then  lie  in  the  chin  groove  without  any 
tendency  to  mount  up  out  of  it  on  the  sharp  bones  of  the  lower 
jaw.     This  position  of  the  mouthpiece  will  be  attained  for  the 
majority  of  horses  by  adjusting  the  cheek  straps  so  that  the 
mouthpiece  will  be  1  inch  above  the  tushes  of  the  horse  and  2 
inches  above  the  corner  teeth  of  the  mare. 

The  throatlatch  should  admit  four  fingers  between  it  and  the 
throat;  this  prevents  constriction  of  the  windpipe  or  pressure 
on  the  large  blood  vessels. 

The  curb  strap  should  fit  smoothly  the  chin  groove  and  be 
loose  enough  to  admit  one  or  two  fingers  when  the  branches  of 
the  bit  are  in  line  with  the  cheek  straps. 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  37 

138.  At  the  discretion  of  the  instructor,  the  halter  may  be 
taken  off  before  bridling,  the  reins  being  first  passed  over  the 
neck;  the  hitching  strap,  if  not  left  at  the  manger  or  picket 
line,  is  tied  around  the  horse's  neck ;  if  the  horse  be  saddled,  in 
the  near  pommel  ring. 

To  Unbridle. 

139.  The  instructor  commands:  UNBRIDLE. 

Stand  on  the  near  side  of  the  horse;  pass  the  reins  over  the 
horse's  head,  placing  them  on  the  bend  of  the  left  arm ;  unbuckle 
the  throatlatch,  grasp  the  crownpiece  with  the  right,  and  assist- 
ing with  the  left  hand  gently  disengage  the  ears;  grasp  the  bit 
with  the  left  hand,  and  gently  disengage  it  from  the  horse's 
mouth  by  lowering  the  crownpiece ;  place  the  crownpiece  in  the 
palm  of  the  left  hand,  take  the  reins  in  the  right  hand,  pass 
them  together  over  the  crownpiece,  make  two  or  three  turns 
around  the  bridle,  then  pass  the  bight  between  the  brow  band 
and  crownpiece  and  draw  it  snug. 

The  bridle  is  hung  up  by  the  reins,  or  placed  across  the  saddle 
on  the  blanket. 

If  the  horse  has  no  halter  on,  unbridle  and  push  the  bridle 
back  so  that  the  crownpiece  will  rest  on  the  neck  behind  the 
poll  until  the  halter  is  replaced. 

To  Roll  the  Overcoat. 

140.  Spread  the  overcoat  on  the  ground,  inside  down,  skirt 
buttoned  throughout,  sleeves  parallel  to  the  middle  seam,  collar 
turned  over  on  the  shoulders. 

Turn  the  tails  of  the  coat  under  about  9  inches,  the  folded 
edge  perpendicular  to  the  back  seam.  Fold  over  the  sides  to 
form  a  rectangle  not  more  than  34  inches  across,  according  to 
the  size  of  the  coat.  Roll  tightly  from  the  collar  with  the  hands 
and  knees  and  bring  over  the  whole  roll  that  part  of  the  skirt 
which  was  turned  under,  thus  binding  the  roll. 

The  Blanket  Roll  for  Mounted  Men. 

141.  To  make  the  roll :  Spread  the  shelter  half  (model  1904) 
on  the  ground,  roll  straps  underneath,  and  fold  over  the  tri- 
angular part  on  the  rectangular  part.     Turn  under  the  roll- 


38  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

strap  edge  of  the  shelter  half  so  that  the  width  of  the  fold  will 
be  8  inches.  Fold  the  blanket  once  across  the  longer  edges  and 
lay  the  blanket  on  the  shelter  half,  folded  edge  within  1  inch 
of  the  roll-strap  edge  of  shelter  half.  Fold  the  sides  of  blanket 
and  of  shelter  half  inward,  width  of  folds  about  11  inches.  The 
shelter-tent  pole  and  pins  are  now  laid  on  the  blanket  at  the 
edge  farthest  from  the  roll-strap  edge,  pole  on  one  side,  pins  on 
the  other,  thus  leaving  what  will  be  the  middle  of  the  pack  free 
to  bend. 

Roll  tightly,  using  hands  and  knees,  toward  the  roll-strap 
edge,  and  bring  over  the  entire  roll  the  part  the  shelter  half 
which  was  turned  under,  thus  binding  the  roll.  Buckle  the  two 
available  roll  straps  about  the  roll,  passing  them  around  twice. 

The  roll  should  be  about  44  inches  long  and  about  6  inches  in 
diameter. 

The  Blanket  Roll  for  Men  not  Individually  Mounted. 

142.  To  make  the  roll,  lay  the  shelter  half  on  the  ground 
and  fold  over  the  triangular  part  on  the  rectangular  part. 

Fold  the  blanket  in  six  thicknesses,  as  prescribed  in  the  Drill 
Regulations  for  folding  the  saddle  blanket,  except  that  the  first 
fold  is  made  across  the  length  of  the  blanket  instead  of  across 
its  width. 

Lay  the  folded  blanket  on  the  shelter  half,  so  that  one  of  its 
shorter  sides  will  be  about  8  inches  from  the  edge  of  the  shelter 
half  farthest  from  the  triangular  part.  Across  the  other  short 
side  of  the  blanket  place  the  shelter-tent  pole  and  pins.  Fold 
over  the  sides  and  ends  of  the  shelter  half  which  lie  outside  of 
the  blanket,  causing  the  ropes  and  straps  to  be  included  within 
the  folds. 

Commencing  at  the  end  where  the  pole  and  pins  were  placed, 
roll  the  pack,  using  the  hands  and  knees  to  insure  the  roll  being 
made  as  tight  as  possible.  Just  before  the  roll  is  completed, 
open  out  slightly  with  the  hands  the  pocket  formed  by  the  8- 
inch  fold  of  the  shelter  half,  and  then  draw  the  pocket  over  the 
roll,  thus  binding  it.  Be  particularly  careful  to  draw  the  canvas 
over  the  ends  of  the  roll  so  as  to  prevent  rain  from  entering  the 
inner  portions  of  the  roll.  The  roll  should  be  about  22  inches 
long  and  about  7  inches  in  diameter. 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  39 

To  Pack  the  Saddle. 

143.  Overcoat  rolled  as  prescribed,  and  strapped  on  pommel; 
saddlebags  attached  to  rear  of  saddle,  by  saddlebag  stud  and 
staples,  and  to  cincha  rings  by  saddlebag  straps ;  blanket  and 
shelter  half  rolled  as  prescribed  and  strapped  to  cantle  with  one 
short  strap  and  to  the  saddlebag  rings  with  two  long  (60-inch) 
straps ;  nose  bag  drawn  up  under  near  saddlebag,  the  ventilating 
piece  outward  and  just  concealed  by  the  bottom  of  the  saddle- 
bag, the  nose-bag  strap  passed  through  the  near  cantle  rings, 
with   a   turn   around  the   ring   to   prevent   slipping,   and   then 
buckled ;  canteen  snapped  to  off  cantle  ring ;  meat  can,  tin  cup, 
knife,   fork,   spoon,   two   haversack   rations   in  near   pocket  of 
saddlebag;   currycomb,   brush,  watering  bridle,  one  emergency 
ration,  and  the  authorized  toilet  articles  in  off  pocket  of  saddle- 
bag. 

The  Position  of  Stand  to  Horse. 

144.  The  instructor  commands:  STAND  TO  HORSE. 

Each  man  places  himself,  facing  to  the  front,  on  the  near  side 
of  the  horse,  eyes  on  a  line  with  the  front  of  the  horse's  head, 
so  he  can  see  along  the  front,  and  takes  the  position  of  the 
soldier,  except  that  the  right  hand,  nails  down,  grasps  both 
reins,  forefinger  separating  them,  6  inches  from  the  bit. 

To  Lead  Out. 

145.  The  men  standing  to  horse,  to  leave  the  stable  or  picket 
line,  the  instructor  commands :  LEAD  OUT. 

Each  man,  holding  his  hand  well  up  and  firm,  leads  his  horse, 
without  looking  at  him,  to  the  place  designated  by  the  in- 
structor. 

The  men  form  in  single  rank  from  right  to  left,  and,  until 
further  orders,  with  intervals  of  3  yards. 

If  the  horse  shows  a  disposition  to  resist  being  led,  the  man 
takes  the  reins  from  the  horse's  neck,  takes  the  ends  in  the  left 
hand,  then,  with  the  right  hand  holding  the  reins,  leads  the  horse 
as  before.  When  leading  through  a  low  or  narrow  doorway 
the  horse  should  be  quieted  by  the  voice  or  caresses,  and  not 
allowed  to  pass  through  hurriedly.  To  prevent  the  horse  from 


40  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

rushing  ahead  the  instructor  may  direct  the  man  to  face  toward 
the  horse,  holding  one  rein  in  each  hand,  close  to  the  bit,  and 
lead  him  by  stepping  backward ;  after  passing  the  doorway  the 
man  leads  the  horse  as  before. 

To  Align  the  Rank. 

146.  1.  Right  (left),  2.  DRESS,  3.  FRONT. 

The  men  dress  to  the  right  and  move  their  horses  forward  or 
backward,  as  may  be  necessary  to  align  them. 

To  Mount  (without  Saddle). 

147.  1.  Prepare  to  mount,  2.  MOUNT. 

At  the  first  command  drop  the  right  rein?  take  two  back  steps, 
stepping  off  with  the  left  foot,  at  the  same  time  sliding  the  right 
hand  along  the  left  rein,  face  to  the  right.  This  should  place 
the  man  behind  the  near  shoulder  of  the  horse.  Take  both 
reins  in  the  right  hand,  aided  by  the  left,  the  reins  coming  in 
on  the  side  of  the  forefinger,  forefinger  between  the  reins,  the 
loose  end  falling  over  on  the  off  side;  place  the  right  hand 
behind  the  withers,  holding  the  reins  short  enough  to  feel 
lightly  the  horse's  mouth ;  pla^e  the  left  hand  near  the  withers, 
and  grasp  a  lock  of  the  mane,  the  lock  coming  out  between  the 
thumb  and  forefinger. 

At  the  command  mount,  spring  lightly  from  the  ground  and 
raise  the  body,  keeping  it  erect,  and  supporting  the  weight  on 
the  hands ;  carry  the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  horse's  back, 
the  weight  still  borne  on  the  hands;  sit  down  gently  on  the 
horse's  back,  and  take  one  rein  in  each  hand,  the  reins  bearing 
equally  on  the  horse's  mouth. 

Position  of  the  Soldier,  Mounted  (without  Saddle). 

148.  Body   balanced   on   the   middle   of   the   horse's   back. 
Head  erect  and  square  to  the  front. 

Chin  slightly  drawn  in,  but  not  so  much  as  to  produce  stiff- 
ness. 

Body  erect,  but  without  stiffness. 

Forearms  close  to  the  sides,  without  pressure. 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  41 

Hands  about  6  inches  apart,  backs  straight  up  and  down  and 
outward  and  held  low,  so  that  the  little  fingers  will  brush  the 
mane  on  top  of  the  withers. 

The  right  rein  in  the  right  hand  and  the  left  rein  in  the  left 
hand,  coming  in  on  the  underside  of  the  little  finger  and  coming 
out  over  second  joint  of  forefinger,  on  which  the  thumb  firmly 
holds  the  rein;  the  other  fingers  closed  on  the  reins,  nails  to- 
ward the  body ;  reins  bearing  equally  on  the  horse's  mouth ; 
bight — end — of  reins  falling  to  the  front  and  on  the  right  side 
of  the  horse's  neck. 

Buttocks  bearing  equally  on  the  middle  of  the  horse's  back, 
the  seat  being  as  flat  as  possible. 

Legs  stretched  by  their  weight  alone;  the  horse  clasped  by 
the  entire  leg — that  is,  the  flat  of  the  thighs,  the  inside  of  the 
knees,  and  the  calf  of  the  leg. 

Feet  hanging  naturally  and  turned  out  at  whatever  angle 
the  conformation  of  the  man  requires  in  order  to  grasp  the 
horse  as  above. 

Remarks  on  the  Position  of  the  Soldier  Mounted. 

149.  Body  erect  but  without  stiffness.  While  the  head  and 
shoulders  should  not  droop  forward,  nor  the  chest  be  con- 
tracted, nor  the  back  curved  to  the  rear,  and  any  tendency  to 
slouch  should  be  promptly  corrected,  still  no  part  of  the  body 
should  be  held  so  straight  or  erect  as  to  produce  stiffness. 

Forearms  close  to  the  sides  without  pressure,  to  prevent  their 
"being  thrown  out  when  the  horse  trots;  if  with  pressure,  the 
motion  of  the  body  will  be  communicated  to  the  hand  and  rein. 

Buttocks  bearing  equally,  and  seat  as  flat  as  possible,  so  that 
the  body  will  preserve  its  steadiness. 

Flat  of  thighs,  inside  of  knees,  and  the  calf  of  the  leg  clasping 
the  horse  equally  to  give  a  firm,  steady  seat. 

The  body  from  the  hips  up  should  be  movable  and  should 
yield  to  the  motion  of  the  horse. 

The  man  should  have  hold  the  horse  all  the  time  with  the 
legs,  but  not  grasping  him  so  much  as  to  produce  fatigue;  his 
legs  from  the  inside  of  the  thighs  and  knees  and  calf  should 
be  in  constant  contact  with  the  horse,  but  not  so  much  as  to 
produce  fatigue  in  the  man.  The  arms  should  be  without  stiff- 


42  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

ness  at  the  shoulders  to  avoid  communicating  the  motion  of  the 
body  to  the  reins. 

The  hands  take  a  gentle  feel  of  the  horse's  mouth,  but  other- 
wise are  stationary,  except  to  direct  the  horse. 

During  the  early  lessons  the  position  of  the  recruit  is  neces- 
sarily one  of  constraint.  He  will  probably  be  much  fatigued 
and  possibly  made  sore  in  tendons  and  muscles.  An  effort 
should  be  made  to  teach  him  to  ride  without  unnecessary  fa- 
tigue or  injuring  him  physically  and  without  putting  him  to 
anything  which  will  tend  to  destroy  his  confidence  on  a  horse 
or  his  "nerve." 

No  man  can  be  said  to  be  a  good  horseman  who  has  not  a 
firm,  well-balanced  seat,  and  good  hands ;  these  are  therefore  of 
the  utmost  importance;  they  will  assist  the  horse;  the  want  of 
them  will  impede  the  horse's  actions  and  make  sore  backs,  etc. 

To  Lengthen  or  Shorten  the  Reins. 

150.  Bring  the  hands  toward  each  other;  grasp  the  right 
rein  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  left  hand  a  short  dis- 
tance from  the  right  thumb ;  relax  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand 
and  allow  the  rein  to  slip  through  to  get  the  proper  bearing; 
then  close  the  right  hand  and  replace  the  hands.     With  the  left 
rein  the  positions  of  the  hands  are  reversed. 

To  take  the  Reins  in  One  Hand. 

151.  To  relieve  the  constraint  of  the  arms  by  changing  their 
position,  as  well  as  to  prepare  the  recruits  for  the  use  of  the 
curb  bridle,  the  instructor  commands:  1.  In  left  (right)  hand, 
2.  TAKE  REINS. 

At  the  second  command  bring  the  left  hand  opposite  the  mid- 
dle of  the  body ;  half  open  and  place  in  it  the  right  rein,  hold- 
ing both  reins  as  explained  for  the  left  rein,  except  that  the 
little  finger  separates  the  reins,  the  right  rein  coming  in  about 
the  little  finger ;  close  the  left  hand  and  drop  the  right  hand  be- 
hind the  thigh. 

To  Adjust  the  Reins. 

152.  Seize  the  bight  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the 
right  hand;  partly  open  the  left  hand  so  as  to  allow  the  reins 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  43 

to  slip  through  it;  raise  the  right  hand  until  the  reins  bear 
equally;  close  the  left  hand  upon  them,  letting  the  bight  fall 
over  the  forefinger  and  right  rein ;  drop  the  right  hand. 

To  Retake  the  Reins  in  both  Hands. 

-  153.  The  reins  being  in  the  left  hand:  1,  In  both  hands,  2. 
TAKE  REINS. 

Half  open  the  left  hand,  seize  with  the  right  hand  the  right 
rein,  and  hold  them  as  previously  described. 

To  Drop  and  Retake  Reins. 

154.  Drop  reins:  Drop  the  reins  on  the  horse's  neck  near  the 
withers  and  drop  the  hands  behind  the  thighs. 

Take  reins:  The  man  retakes  the  reins  and  holds  them  as 
before  dropping  them. 

To  Dismount  (without  Saddle). 

155.  1.  Prepare  to  dismount,  2.  DISMOUNT. 

At  the  first  command  pass  the  right  rein  into  the  left  hand, 
then  seize  both  reins  with  the  right  hand,  in  front  of  the  left, 
forefinger  between  the  reins,  and  place  'the  right  hand  on  the 
withers,  the  reins  coming  into  the  hand  on  the  side  of  the  fore- 
finger; let  go  with  the  left  hand  and  grasp  a  lock  of  the  mane 
in  front  of  the  withers,  the  lock  coming  out  between  the  thumb 
and  forefinger. 

At  the  command  Dismount,  raise  the  body  on  both  hands,  carry 
the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  horse's  back  without  touching 
it;  bring  the  right  leg  near  the  left  and  come  lightly  to  the 
ground  on  the  balls  of  the  feet,  bending  the  knees  a  little ;  face 
to  the  left,  drop  the  right  rein,  step  to  the  front,  sliding  the 
right  hand  along  the  left  rein,  and  take  the  position  of  stand  to 
horse. 

To  Mount  from  the  Off  Side. 

156.  The  man  being  dismounted  and  on  the  off  side  of  his 
horse:  1.  Prepare  to  mount,  2.  MOUNT. 

The  commands  are  executed  as  in  paragraph  147,  but  by 
inverse  means. 


44  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

157.  To  the  right,  2.  Prepare  to  dismount,  3.  DISMOUNT. 

The  second  and  third  commands  are  executed  as  in  paragraph 
155,  but  by  inverse  means,  the  man  coming  to  the  ground  on  the 
off  side. 

158.  If  the  commands  be:  1.  Squad,  2.  MOUNT,  the  men  exe- 
cute at  the  command  mount  all  that  has  been  prescribed  at  the 
commands  prepare  to  mount  and  mount. 

If  the  commands  be:   1.  Squad,  2.  DISMOUNT;   or,   1.  To  the 
right,  2.  Squad,  3.  DISMOUNT,  the  men  execute  at  the  command' 
dismount  all  that  has  been  prescribed  at  the  commands  prepare 
to  dismount  and  dismount. 

These  rules  are  general. 

159.  Being  at  stand  to  horse,  the  command  rest  is  executed 
as  in  "  The  soldier  dismounted,"  except  that  the  men  hold  the 
reins  and  keep  their  horses  in  place. 

Being  mounted,  at  the  halt,  at  the  command :  Rest,  or  being 
in  march,  at  the  command :  Route  order,  the  men  are  permitted 
to  turn  their  heads,  to  talk,  and  to  make  slight  changes  of  posi- 
tion, but  they  will  not  lounge  on  their  horses. 

Being  at  stand  to  horse,  the  command:  At  ease  is  executed  as 
in  "  The  soldier  dismounted." 

Being  mounted,  at  the  command:  At  ease,  the  men  are  per- 
mitted to  turn  their  heads  or  make  slight  changes  of  position, 
but  preserve  silence. 

160.  To  resume  the  attention:  1.  Squad,  2.  ATTENTION. 
Each  man,  if  dismounted,  takes  the  position  of  stand  to  horse ; 

if  mounted,  he  takes  the  position  of  the  soldier  mounted. 
These  rules  are  general. 

To  Dismiss  the  Squad. 

161.  The  squad  being  dismounted:   1.  By  the  right  (left,  or 
right  and  left),  2.  FALL  OUT. 

The  man  on  the  right  leads  his  horse  1  yard  to  the  front  and 
then  marches  directly  to  the  stables  or  picket  line. 

Each  of  the  other  men  executes  in  succession  the  same  move- 
ment, so  as  to  follow  the  horse  next  on  the  right,  at  a  distance 
of  1  yard. 

The  men  remove,  clean,  and  put  the  equipments  in  place,  and 
care  for  and  secure  their  horses  under  the  directions  of  the 
instructor  or  senior  noncommissioned  officer. 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  45 

Each  man  as  soon  as  he  has  finished  stands  to  heel.  The  in- 
structor or  noncommissioned  officer  having  satisfied  himself  by 
inspection  that  the  horse  and  equipments  are  properly  cared 
for,  and  that  the  precautions  required  on  their  return  from  exer- 
cise have  been  observed,  orders  the  men  to  fall  in,  marches  them 
to  the  company  parade,  and  dismisses  them  as  prescribed  in 
"  The  soldier  dismounted." 

162.  STAND    TO    HEEL:  Each    man    stands    at    attention,    1 
yard  in  rear  of  and  facing  his  heel  post.    At  the  picket  line  he 
stands  at  attention,  1  yard  in  rear  of  and  facing  his  horse. 

Mounted  Exercises. 

163.  These  exercises  are  not  considered  necessary   to  the 
training  of  a  good  horseman,  but,  if  desired,  the  various  move- 
ments can  be  taken  from  the  drill  regulations  for  cavalry. 

Gaits  of  Horses. 

164.  The  gaits  are  the  walk,  trot,  canter,  and  gallop. 

The  walk  is  at  the  rate  of  4  miles  an  hour,  or  1  mile  in  15 
minutes,  or  117^  yards  in  a  minute. 

The  maneuvering  trot  is  at  the  rate  of  8  miles  an  hour,  or  1 
mile  in  7*  minutes,  or  234§  yards  a  minute.  For  purposes  of 
individual  instruction,  the  rate  of  the  trot  may  be  diminished 
to  the  rate  of  6  or  6|  miles  an  hour  by  the  command  slow  trot. 
At  the  command  trot  out,  the  rate  is  8  miles  an  hour. 

The  canter  is  at  the  rate  of  8  miles  an  hour  and  is  generally 
used  for  individual  instruction. 

The  maneuvering  gallop  is  at  the  rate  of  12  miles  an  hour,  or 
1  mile  in  five  minutes,  or  352  yards  a  minute. 

The  length  of  the  stride  is  about  10  feet. 

The  full  or  extended  gallop  is  at  the  rate  of  16  miles  an  hour. 

To  instruct  in  the  maneuvering  cadences,  stakes  are  placed 
on  the  drill  ground,  on  a  convenient  line  for  a  long  track,  117£ 
yards  apart.  The  men  and  guides  are  required  to  march  over 
the  spaces  at  the  rate  of  one,  two,  three,  or  four  per  minute,  ac- 
cording as  the  gait  is  the  walk,  trot,  canter,  gallop,  or  full 
gallop. 

Instruction  in  each  gait  should  be  practiced  individually  and 
collectively,  until  each  man  knows  whether  he  has  the  proper 
speed  or  cadence  by  the  rhythm  of  motion. 


46  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

Horses  may  be  trained  to  walk  in  column  under  favorable 
conditions  4£  miles  an  hour,  making  125  steps  a  minute,  the 
stride  being  0.916  yard. 

The  average  walk  of  a  horse  is  a  mile  in  16  minutes,  3.75 
miles  an  hour,  making  120  steps  (110  yards)  per  minute,  the 
stride  being  0.916  yard. 

The  average  trot  of  a  horse  is  a  mile  in  eight  minutes,  7.5 
miles  an  hour,  making  180  steps  (220  yards)  per  minute,  the 
stride  being  1.22  yards. 

Analysis  of  Gaits. 

165.  The  walk  is  a  gait  of  four  distinct  beats,  each  foot 
being  planted  in  a  regular  order  of  succession;  e.  g.,  right  fore 
foot,  left  hind  foot,  left  fore  foot,  right  hind  foot,  and  so  on. 

The  trot  has  two  distinct  beats;  the  horse  springs  from  one 
diagonally  disposed  pair  of  legs  to  the  other;  between  the  steps 
all  the  feet  are  in  the  air. 

The  canter  has  three  beats,  the  regular  order  of  succession 
being,  e.  g.,  righ  hind  foot,  left  hind  foot  and  right  fore  foot, 
left  fore  foot,  and  so  on.  When  cantering  to  the  right  hand, 
the  horse  goes  into  the  air  from  the  left  fore  foot. 

The  gallop  has  four  beats,  the  regular  order  of  succession 
being,  e.  g.,  right  hind  foot,  left  hind  foot,  right  fore  foot,  left 
fore  foot,  and  so  on.  When  galloping  to  the  right  hand,  the 
horse  goes  into  the  air  from  the  left  fore  foot. 

The  Aids  in  Horsemanship. 

166.  The  training  of  the  new  horse  involves  the  infliction  of 
more  or  less  pain,  the  necessity  for  which  becomes  less  as  his 
intelligence  is  quickened  into  understanding  the  lightest  pres- 
sure. 

A  horse  is  bit-wise  when  (the  bit  being  correctly  fitted  and 
properly  adjusted,  par.  257)  he  obeys  the  lightest  pressure  upon 
either  bar. 

He  is  rein-wise  when  he  obeys  the  lightest  pressure  of  the  rein 
on  either  side  of  the  neck,  the  bit  not  being  disturbed  from  its 
normal  position. 

He  is  leg-wise  when  he  obeys  the  lightest  correctly  combined 
action  of  the  rider's  legs. 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  47 

The  most  thoughtful  care  should  be  constantly  exercised  in 
the  combined  applications  of  the  aids,  that  they  may  not  be 
opposed  to  each  other  in  their  action;  i.  e.,  one  favoring  the 
intended  move,  the  other  opposing  it. 

Preparatory  to  the  movements,  the  instructor  mounts  the 
squad  and  explains  the  uses  of  the  reins  and  legs. 

The  reins  and  legs,  the  application  of  which  determines  the 
movements  and  gaits  of  the  horse,  are  called  the  aids. 

The  man  should  not  only  know  when  he  is  to  apply  a  given 
aid,  but  he  should  also  understand  why  he  applies  it. 

The  reins  serve  to  prepare  the  horse  to  move,  and  to  guide, 
support,  and  halt  him ;  their  action  should  be  gradual  and  in 
harmony  with  that  of  the  legs. 

In  using  them,  the  arms  should  have  free  action  at  the  shoul- 
der ;  when  a  light  pressure  will  be  sufficient  to  govern  the  horse, 
the  action  of  the  hand  should  be  at  the  wrist ;  for  greater  pres- 
sure, the  elbow  should  be  carried  back,  but  ivithout  raising  the 
hand. 

In  riding,  the  bridle  hand  should  be  kept  steady  and  ought 
not  to  move  with  the  body;  it  should  merely  take  a  gentle  feel 
of  the  horse's  mouth ;  at  the  same  time  it  must  be  kept  light, 
for  the  bit  causes  pain  if  pressed  constantly  on  the  mouth, 
destroys  its  sensibility,  and  makes  the  horse's  mouth  hard. 

The  hand  is  light  when  there  is  an  almost  imperceptible  alter- 
nate feeling  and  easing  of  the  hand  in  harmony  with  the  motion 
of  the  horse's  head,  by  which  the  delicacy  of  the  mouth  is  pre- 
served and  the  horse  made  to  carry  himself  light. 

That  hand  is  best  which,  by  giving  and  taking  properly  and 
keeping  constant  touch  of  the  bit,  controls  the  horse  with  the 
least  force,  and  will  best  preserve  the  mouth. 

It  is  recommended  that  recruits  ride  with  one  rein  in  each 
hand ;  this  will  prevent  the  bad  habit  of  holding  the  left  shoul- 
der advanced. 

The  legs  serve  to  assist  in  directing  the  control  of  the  horse. 
Closing  the  legs  with  a  slight  pressure  prepares  him  to  move, 
or,  if  moving,  to  keep  him  up  to  the  hand.  Closed  with  greater 
pressure  behind  the  girth,  they  urge  him  forward. 

Increasing  the  pressure  of  the  right  leg  and  carrying  it 
slightly  to  the  rear  causes  the  horse  to  move  his  haunches  to 
the  left. 


48  MOUNTED  'INSTRUCTION. 

The  pressure  of  the  legs  must  be  an  elastic  muscular  action, 
suited  to  the  sensitiveness  of  the  horse;  a  heavy  clinging  pres- 
ure,  or  dull  thumping  with  the  heels,  must  not  be  permitted. 

The  reins  act  to  direct  the  forehand;  the  lower  legs  incite  to 
action  and  govern  the  movement  of  the  haunches. 

All  changes  of  gait  are  made  gradually.  The  horse  should 
never  be  spurred  to  make  a  sudden  start,  nor  should  the  reins 
be  jerked. 

To  Gather  the  Horse. 

167.  Close  the  legs  gently;  at  the  same  time  turn  the  little 
finger  toward  the  body;  this  is  to  attract  the  attention  of  the 
horse  and  to  prepare  him  to  move,  that  his  first  motions  be 
neither  too  abrupt  nor  too  slow. 

To  March. 

168.  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  forward,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  march,  yield  the  hand  and  close  the  legs 
slightly  to  the  rear,  with  a  firm,  equal,  and  elastic  pressure, 
until  the  horse  yields;  then  relax  the  legs  and  adjust  the 
reins  so  as  to  have  a  slight  feeling  of  the  bit. 

To  Halt. 

169.  1.  Squad,  2.  HALT. 

At  the  command  squad,  gather  the  horse  without  slackening 
the  gait. 

At  the  command  haft,  rein  in  by  gradually  bringing  the  hands 
toward  the  body,  turning  them  on  the  wrist  and  carrying  the 
elbows  slightly  to  the  rear  without  raising  the  hands;  at  tho 
same  time  close  the  knees  to  steady  the  horse.  When  the  horse 
stops,  relax  the  hands  and  knees. 

Being  in  Line  with  Intervals,  to  March  by  the  Flank  in  Column  of 

Files. 

170.  1.  By  the  right  (left)  flank,  2.  MARCH. 
At  the  first  command  gather  the  horse. 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  49 

At  the  command  march,  open  the  right  rein  and  close  both 
legs,  the  right  leg  a  little  more  to  the  rear  than  the  other; 
turn  to  the  right  by  moving  the  horse  over  a  quarter  of  a 
circle  whose  radius  is  2  yards;  when  the  turn  is  nearly  ended 
diminish  the  effect  of  the  right  rein  and  leg,  using  the  left  rein 


,*— CS^~-  -CS^3?-- CS^= 

if  if  if  if 


PI.  12,  Par.  170. 

and  leg  to  straighten  the  horse;  when  the  turn  is  completed, 
relax  both  legs  and  move  off  at  a  right  angle  to  the  original 
direction.  The  effect  of  the  rein  is  to  lead  the  horse  in  the 
desired  direction,  not  to  pull  him  back  on  that  side. 

Whenever  executing  the  individual  turn  at  the  trot  or  gallop, 
the  effect  of  the  outer  (in  this  case  the  left)  leg  should  be  in- 
\creasedto  sustain  the  horse. 

in.  The  turn  for  the  individual  man  is  made  on  the  arc  of  a 
circle  whose  radius  is  2  yards. 

172.  A  squad  marched  by  the  flank,  from  line  with  intervals, 
is  in  column  of  files,  with  the  distance  of  4  feet  from  the  head 
of  one  horse  to  the  croup  of  the  horse  next  in  front. 

Marching  in  column  of  files,  each  recruit  should  so  conduct 
his  horse  that  the  recruit  next  in  front  of  him  shall  hide  all 
others  in  front;  all  follow  in  the  trace  of  the  conductor  or 
leading  file. 

Distances,  when  lost,  should  be  regained  gradually. 

If  the  column  of  files  be  marched  by  the  flank,  the  squad  will 
then  be  in  line  with  intervals  of  3  yards  between  files. 

173.  For  convenience  in  estimating  spaces,  each  horse  with 
his  rider  is  considered  as  occupying  a  space  of  3  yards  in 
length  and  1  yard  in  width,  but  by  measurement  the  horse 
occupies  only  about  8  feet  in  length. 

174.  To  halt  the  column  of  files:  1.  Squad,  2.  HALT,  and  to 
resume  the  march :  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

82940°— 11 4 


50 


MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

The  Individual  About. 


175.  Being   in   line  with   intervals,   or   in   column   of  files: 
1.  Right  (left)  about,  2.  MARCH. 


i 

i  t  i  •( 

PI.  13,  Par.  175. 

Each  man  turns  his  horse  on  a  half  circle,  and  then  moves 
off  in  the  new  direction,  to  the  former  rear. 

To  Oblique. 

176.  Being  in  line  with  intervals,  or  in  column  of  files: 
1.  Right  (left)  oblique,  2.  MARCH. 

Each  man  turns  his  horse  half  right  on  an  eighth  of  a  circle, 
and  then  moves  at  an  angle  of  45°  to  his  former  direction. 


PI.  14,  Par.  176. 

To  resume  the  original  direction :  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 
Each  man  turns  half  left  and  then  moves  forward. 
Being  in  line  without  intervals,  the  commands  and  movements 
are  the  same. 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  51 

177.  If,  when  obliquing,  the  commands:  1.  Squad,  2.  HALT, 
be  given,  the  men  halt  in  the  oblique  position ;  the  oblique  march 
is  resumed  at  the  commands :  1.  Oblique,  2.  MARCH. 

This  rule  is  general. 

To  Change  Direction. 

178.  Marching  in  column  of  files:  1.  Column  right  (left);  or, 
1.  Column  half  right  (half  left),  2.  MARCH. 

The  leading  man  turns  or  half  turns  to  the  right  and  marches 
in  the  new  direction ;  the  other  men  move  forward  and  turn 
successively  on  the  same  ground. 

If  at  the  halt,  to  march  and  change  direction  at  the  same 
time ;  1.  Forward,  2.  Column  right  (left);  or,  2.  Column  half  right 
(half  left),  3.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  forward,  all  the  men  gather  their  horses. 

At  the  command  march,  the  leading  man  turns  to  the  right; 
the  others  move  forward  and  in  succession  turn  on  the  same 
ground. 

To  Rein  Back. 

179.  Being  in  line  at  the  halt:  1.  Backward,  2.  MARCH,  3. 
Squad,  4.  HALT. 

At  the  command  backward,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  march,  keep  a  firm  seat,  hold  both  legs  close ; 
carry  the  weight  of  the  body  slightly  to  the  rear,  and  at  the 
same  time  rein  in  gradually  until  the  horse  yields  to  the  pres- 
sure of  the  bit  and  steps  to  the  rear ;  then  immediately  yield 
the  hand  slightly  to  allow  the  horse  to  regain  his  balance  and 
relax  the  legs;  continue  in  the  same  manner  to  yield  the  hand 
and  relax  the  legs,  and  rein  in  and  close  the  legs,  giving  slight 
indication  to  the  rear  with  the  weight  of  the  body,  so  as  to  keep 
the  horse  in  continuous  motion. 

This  movement  should  be  frequently  practiced  to  keep  the 
horse  light  and  collected. 

If  the  horse  raises  his  nose  and  throws  his  weight  on  his 
haunches  without  stepping  back,  hold  the  hands  low  and  play 
the  reins  with  light,  rapid  motions  of  the  hands  until  he  yields. 

If  the  horse  throws  his  haunches  to  the  right,  close  well  the 
right  leg.  If  to  the  left,  close  well  the  left  leg.  If  this  be  not 
sufficient  to  put  the  horse  in  proper  position,  open  the  rein  on 


52  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

the  side  toward  which  he  throws  his  haunches,  supporting  him 
at  the  same  time  with  the  other  rein. 

180.  For  convenience,  the  instructor  may  cause  the  recruits, 
upon  leading  out,  to  form  line  with  the  horses  1£  feet  apart, 
and  teach  them  to  mount  and  dismount  in  line,  to  march  by 
the  flank  from  line,  and  to  form  line  from  column  of  files,  only 
employing  these  movements  to  begin  and  end  the  drill,  the  inter- 
val of  3  yards  being  maintained  during  the  instruction. 

To  Mount  in  Line  (Without  Saddle). 

181.  The  instructor  causes  the  men  to  count  off,  and  com- 

mands :  1.  Prepare  to  mount,  2.  MOUNT,  3.  Form, 
4.  RANK. 

At  the  first  command,  the  odd  numbers,  step- 
ping off  with  the  left  foot,  lead  their  horses  4 
yards  straight  to  the  front,  regulating  by  the 
right ;  all  then  prepare  to  mount. 

At  the  command  mount,  all  mount. 

At  the  command  rank,  the  even  numbers 
move  up  in  the  intervals  without  jostling  or 
PI.  15,  par.  181.  rushing.  In  forming  rank,  both  mounted  and 
dismounted,  the  odd  numbers  hold  their  horses' 
heads  well  up  to  prevent  kicking. 

To  Dismount  (Without  Saddle). 

182.  1.  PREPARE    TO    DISMOUNT,    2.  DISMOUNT,   3.  Form,   4. 
RANK. 

At  the  first  command,  the  odd  numbers  gather  their  horses 
and  move  forward  4  yards,  and  all  prepare  to  dismount. 

At  the  command  dismount,  all  dismount. 

At  the  command  rank,  the  even  numbers  move  up  in  the 
intervals. 

Being  in  Line  without  Intervals,  to  March  by  the  Flank  in  Column 

of  Files. 

183.  Being  at  the  halt:  1.  By  file,  by  the  right  (left)  flank, 
2.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command  the  man  on  the  right  gathers  his  horse. 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  53 

At  the  command  march,  he  turns  to  the  right  and  moves  for- 
ward in  the  new  direction.  The  second  man  from  the  right 
gathers  his  horse  when  the  first  begins  to  move,  he  turns  to  the 
right  so  as  to  follow  the  first  at  the  distance  of  4  feet  from 


PI.  16,  Par.  183. 


head  to  croup.    The  movement  is  executed  in  succession  by  the 
other  men  as  explained  for  the  second. 

If  marching,  all  halt  at  the  command  march,  except  the  man 
on  the  right.  The  movement  is  then  executed  as  before. 

To  Trot. 

184.  Being  at  the  walk:  1.  Trot  (Slow  trot)f  2.  MARCH. 
At  the  command  trot,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  march,  yield  the  hands  a  little  and  close  the 
legs  by  degrees  until  the  horse  obeys,  then  the  hands  are 
gradually  replaced  and  the  legs  relaxed. 

The  gait  is  slow  at  first,  and  the  instructor  sees  that  the  men 
feel  lightly  their  horses'  mouths  without  bearing  upon  the  reins, 
and  explains  that  the  necessary  ease  and  stability  are  acquired 
by  sitting  well  down  on  the  horse,  or  saddle,  and  partially 
relaxing  the  body,  thighs,  and  legs,  the  hands  feeling  lightly 
the  horse's  mouth. 

He  requires  the  men  to  preserve  their  seats  by  balancing  the 
body  ;  that  they  avoid  the  common  fault  of  leaning  the  body  too 
far  or  curving  the  back  to  the  rear;  that  they  sit  erect  and 
keep  the  legs  close  to  the  horse. 

The  movements  already  taught  at  open  intervals  at  the  walk 
are  repeated  at  the  trot.  In  turning  by  file  to  the  right  or 
left,  the  instructor  sees  that  the  trot  is  neither  slackened  nor 
increased. 

To  Pass  from  the  Trot  to  the  Walk. 

185.  Being  at  the  trot:  1.  Walk,  2.  MARCH. 
At  the  command  walk,  gather  the  horse. 


54  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

At  the  command  march,  rein  in,  by  degrees,  carry  the  weight 
of  the  body  slightly  to  the  rear,  and  hold  the  legs  close  to  pre- 
vent the  horse  from  coming  to  the  halt;  as  soon  as  he  walks, 
replace  the  hands  gradually  and  relax  the  legs. 

To  Increase  and  Diminish  the  Rapidity  of  the  Trot. 

186.  Being  at  the  slow  trot:  1.  Trot  out,  2.  MARCH. 
Gather  the  horse,  then  yield  the  hands,  and  close  the  legs  by 

degrees  until  the  horse  gradually  increases  the  gait  to  the  trot. 
The  instructor  sees  that  the  horses  are  kept  up  to  the  proper 
gait,  and  pays  particular  attention  to  the  position  of  the  men ; 
if  their  seats  become  too  much  deranged,  he  brings  the  squad  to 
the  slow  trot,  or  to  the  walk ;  this  is  especially  important  in  the 
earlier  instruction  of  recruits. 

187.  To  resume  a  moderate  trot:  1.  Slow  trot,  2.  MARCH. 
Rein  in,  by  degrees,  until  the  horse  moderates  the  gait,  clos- 
ing the  legs  to  prevent  his  taking  the  walk. 

The  greater  part  of  the  work  without  saddles  or  stirrups 
should  be  given  at  the  slow  trot,  as  it  is  unnecessarily  fatiguing 
and  difficult  to  sit  at  a  fast  trot  without  the  saddle  or  stirrups. 

To  Pass  from  the  Halt  to  the  Trot. 

188.  Being  at  the  halt:  1.  Forward,  2.  Trot,  3.  MARCH. 
At  the  command  forward,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  march,  pass  at  once  to  the  trot  as  explained 
from  the  walk,  except  that  the  legs  are  closed  with  more  energy. 

To  Halt  from  the  Trot. 

189.  Being  at  the  trot:  1.  Squad,  2.  HALT. 

Executed  as  explained  from  the  walk.  The  men  stop  their 
horses  together,  but  not  too  abruptly.  (Par.  17.) 

To  Pass  from  the  Front  to  the  Rear  of  the  Column. 

190.  Being  at  the  walk,  to  teach  recruits  the  application  of 
the  aids:  1.  First  man  from  front  to  rear,  2.  MARCH,  3.  NEXT. 

At  the  first  command,  the  leading  man  gathers  his  horse. 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  55 

At  the  command  march,  he  leaves  the  column  by  the  right  or 
left  about,  according  as  he  is  marching  to  the  right  or  left  hand, 
moves  parallel  to  the  column,  and  enters  it  again  by  another 
about. 

The  men  in  succession  execute  the  same  movement  at  the  com- 
mand next,  which  is  repeated  by  the  instructor  until  all  the  men 
have  passed  from  front  to  rear. 

To  Pass  from  the  Rear  to  the  Front  of  the  Column. 

191.  Being  at  the  walk:  1.  Last  man  from  rear  to  front,  2. 
Trot,  3.  MARCH,  4.  NEXT. 

At  the  command  trot,  the  man  in  rear  gathers  his  horse. 

At  the  command  march,  he  leaves  the  column  by  an  oblique, 
takes  the  trot,  moves  parallel  to  the  column,  enters  it  again  at 
the  front  by  another  oblique,  and  resumes  the  walk,  and  so  on 
for  the  others,  each  moving  out  at  the  command  next. 

Should  the  man  enter  the  column  at  too  great  a  distance  in 
front  of  the  leading  trooper,  he  slackens  the  walk  until  at  the 
proper  distance. 

To  March  in  Circle. 

192.  Marching  to  the  right,  and  the  conductor  being  at  least 
17  yards  from  a  corner :  1.  Squad,  2.  Circle  to  the  right  (left), 
3.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command,  the  leading  conductor  gathers  his  horse. 

At  the  command  march,  he  describes  a  circle  between  the  two 
tracks;  the  other  men  follow,  each  gathering  his  horse  before 
entering  upon  the  circle,  keeping  him  there  by  the  inner  rein, 
and  closing  the  leg  on  that  side.  If  at  the  fast  trot  or  gallop, 
the  haunches  should  be  sustained  by  the  outside  leg. 

193.  While  circling,  the  squad  may  change  gaits,  be  halted 
in  column,  and  put  in  march,  as  when  marching  on  the  track. 

To  change  hands :  1.  Column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

The  squad  passes  over  the  diameter  of  the  circle  and  circles 
in  the  opposite  direction  by  the  commands:  3.  Column  left 
(right),  4.  MARCH,  the  command  march  being  given  when  the 
conductor  is  2  yards  from  the  circumference. 

To  march  again  on  a  straight  line,  the  instructor  commands : 
1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH,  when  the  leading  conductor  arrives  on 
the  long  side  of  the  track. 


56  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

Individual  Circling. 

194.  Marching  to  the  right  (left)  hand  on  the  long  side  of 
the  hall :  1.  Men,  circle  to  the  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

The  men  should  make  one  circle  only,  should  complete  it  at 
the  same  time,  and  take  the  track  to  the  same  hand  as  when 
the  movement  began.  The  instructor  should  make  the  circle 
larger  in  the  beginning,  and  as  the  instruction  progresses  make 
it  smaller. 

When  marching  on  the  circle  to  the  right,  each  man  opens  the 
right  rein  and  closes  both  legs;  when  marching  at  the  trot  or 
gallop,  he  closes  the  left  more  than  the  right,  to  sustain  the 
horse. 


I... 


PI.  17,  par.  194. 

If  the  commands:  1.  Squad,  2.  HALT,  be  given,  the  men  halt 
their  horses  facing  in  the  same  direction  as  the  conductors. 

To  Mount  (with  Saddle). 

195.  The  horses  equipped  with  saddle  and  curb  bridles  are 
habitually  formed  in  line.  The  men  standing  to  horse,  the  in- 
structor causes  them  to  count  off,  and  commands :  1.  Prepare  to 
mount,  2.  MOUNT. 

At  the  first  command,  the  odd  numbers  lead  out.  (Par.  145.) 
All  the  men  drop  the  right  rein,  take  two  back  steps,  stepping 
off  with  the  left  foot,  at  the  same  time  sliding  the  right  hand 
along  the  left  rein;  half  face  to  the  right;  this  should  place 
the  man  about  opposite  the  girth ;  with  the  aid  of  the  left  hand 
take  both  reins  in  the  right,  forefinger  between  the  reins,  and 
place  the  right  hand  on  the  pommel,  the  reins  coming  into  the 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  57 

hand  on  the  side  of  the  forefinger,  and  held  so  as  to  feel  lightly 
the  horse's  mouth,  the  bight  falling  on  the  off  side.  TWO.  Place 
a  third  of  the  left  foot  in  the  stirrup,  with  the  assistance  of  the 
left  hand,  if  necessary;  rest  upon  the  ball  of  the  right  foot; 
grasp  a  lock  of  the  mane  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  coming 
out  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger. 

At  the  command  mount,  spring  from  the  right  foot,  holding 
firmly  to  the  mane  and  keeping  the  right  hand  on  the  pommel ; 
pass  the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  croup  of  the  horse  with- 
out touching  him ;  sit  down  gently  in  the  saddle ;  let  go  the 
mane,  insert  the  right  foot  in  the  stirrup,  pass  the  reins  into 
the  left  hand  and  adjust  them. 

At  the  command:  3.  Form,  4.  RANK,  the  even  numbers  move 
up  in  their  intervals. 

Position  of  the  Soldier  (with  Saddle). 

196.  Same  as  previously  explained  (par.  148),  with  the  fol- 
lowing exceptions :  Buttocks  bearing  equally  and  as  flat  as  pos- 
sible upon  the  middle  of  the  saddle;  reins  coming  into  the  left 
hand  on  the  side  of  the  little  finger,  and  leaving  it  between 
thumb  and  forefinger ;  little  finger  between  the  reins,  right  rein 
above  it;  the  other  fingers  closed,  thumb  pointing  to  the  right 
front  in  prolongation  of  the  forearm  and  pressing  the  reins 
firmly  on  second  joint  of  forefinger,  the  end  of  the  reins  falling 
to  the  front  and  outside  of  the  right  rein ;  left  forearm  close  to 
the  body  without  pressure;  the  back  of  the  hand  nearly  ver- 
tical; left  hand  in  front  of  the  pommel  of  the  saddle  and  as 
close  to  the  top  of  the  horse's  withers  as  possible,  without  rest- 
ing upon  the  pommel ;  right  hand  behind  the  thigh,  arm  hanging 
naturally;  feet  inserted  in  the  stirrups  so  that  the  ball  of  the 
foot  rests  on  the  tread  of  the  stirrup,  heel  slightly  lower  than 
the  tread. 

Stirrups. 

197.  The  stirrups  should  support  the  feet  and  the  weight  of 
the  legs  only,  and  be  6f  such  length  that  when  the  legs  are  in 
proper  position,  the  feet  out  of  the  stirrups,  the  treads  will  be 
on  a  level  with  the  lower  part  of  the  inner  ankle  bone. 

The  length  depends  somewhat  on  the  formation  of  the  man; 
a  man  with  a  thick,  heavy  thigh  requires  a  shorter  stirrup 


58  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

than  a  man  with  a  thin,  flat  one.  For  long  distances  at  the 
gallop  and  trot  a  shorter  stirrup  is  required  than  at  a  walk. 

When  riding,  the  stirrups  take  up,  in  a  measure,  the  weight 
of  the  body  in  its  descent  to  the  saddle,  by  yielding  of  the 
ankles  to  prevent  shock.  This  action  is  an  easy,  quick  stiffen- 
ing of  the  muscles  which  distributes  the  downward  motion 
between  the  feet,  thighs,  and  seat. 

If,  after  the  man  has  exercised  a  short  time  at  the  slow  trot, 
he  has  a  close  seat,  his  leg  in  proper  position,  with  his  heel 
down,  but  does  not  easily  keep  his  stirrup,  then  the  stirrup 
requires  shortening. 

To   Dismount   (with   Saddle). 

198.  1.  Prepare  to  dismount,  2.  DISMOUNT. 

At  the  first  command,  the  odd  numbers  move  forward  4 
yards,  regulating  by  the  right.  All  the  men  then  seize  the  reins 
with  the  right  hand,  in  front  of  and  near  the  left,  forefinger  be- 
tween the  reins,  so  that  they  come  in  on  the  side  of  the  fore- 
finger ;  place  the  right  hand  on  the  pommel ;  let  go  with  the  left 
hand,  grasp  a  lock  of  the  mane,  the  lock  coming  out  between  the* 
thumb  and  forefinger ;  take  the  right  foot  out  of  the  stirrup ; 
partly  disengage  the  left  foot,  body  erect. 

At  the  command  dismount,  rise  upon  the  left  stirrup,  pass  the 
right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  croup  of  the  horse  without  touch- 
ing him ;  descend  lightly  to  the  ground,  remove  the  left  foot 
from  the  stirrup  and  place  it  by  the  side  of  the  right,  body 
erect;  let  go  the  mane;  place  the  end  of  the  reins  on  the  neck 
near  the  pommel  of  the  saddle  with  the  right  hand,  which  then 
seizes  the  left  rein ;  face  to  the  left,  take  two  short  steps,  left 
foot  first,  slipping  the  right  hand  along  the  left  rein,  and  take 
the  position  of  stand  to  horse. 

At  the  command :  3.  Form,  4.  RANK,  even  numbers  lead  up 
into  their  intervals. 

The  Curb  Bridle. 

199.  The  general  principles  for  the  use  of  the  reins  and  legs, 
already  explained  for  the  watering  bridle,  apply  to  the  manage- 
ment of  the  horse  with  the  curb  bridle,  except  that  the  bridle 
Land  is  moved  instead  of  both  hands.    In  all  movements  of  the 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  59 

hand  the  arm  should  act  freely  and  without  constraint  to  the 
body,  and  as  the  bit  of  the  curb  bridle  is  much  more  severe  than 
that  of  the  watering  bridle,  it  must  be  applied  gradually  and 
more  gently,  particularly  in  halting  and  in  reining  back. 

To  turn  the  horse  to  the  right  (left):  Carry  the  hand  a  little 
forward  and  to  the  right  (left),  so  that  the  left  (right)  rein 
bears  on  his  neck. 

The  Spur. 

200.  The  spur  is  used  as  an  aid,  and  also  as  a  means  of  pun- 
ishment.   It  is  an  aid  when  it  is  used  to  augment  the  effect  pro- 
duced by  one  or  both  legs ;  it  is  used  as  a  means  of  punishment 
when  the  horse  refuses  to  obey  the  action  of  the  legs. 

To  use  it  as  an  aid,  the  man  continues  the  pressure  of  the  leg 
until  the  spur  touches  the*  skin  and  adds  its  effect  to  that  of 
the  leg. 

To  use  it  as  a  means  of  punishment,  hold  firmly  to  the  horse 
with  the  legs,  turn  the  toes  out  a  little,  yield  the  hand  slightly, 
and  give  him  several  quick  applications  of  the  spur  behind  the 
girth,  without  moving  the  body,  until  the  horse  obeys.  The 
spur  must  never  be  used  to  punish  unless  absolutely  necessary, 
and  then  with  vigor  at  the  moment  the  horse  commits  the  fault. 
Unnecessary  strokes  will  arouse  his  resentment  and  induce 
stubbornness ;  a  thumping  or  a  continuous  light  touch  will 
either  make  the  horse  insensible  to  the  proper  action  of  the 
legs  or  cause  him  to  kick. 

Instruction  with  Saddle,  Curb  Bridle,  and  Spurs. 

201.  The  movements  already  prescribed  are  repeated.     The 
instructor  causes  recruits  at  first  to  use  the  saddle  and  watering 
bridle,  and  does  not  give  them  the  curb  bridle  and  spurs  until 
they  have  confidence  in  their  seat  and  are  able  to  ride  fairly 
well. 

As  a  general  rule,  after  commencing  the  use  of  the  saddle  in 
the  riding-hall  exercises,  about  one-half  the  time  of  each  drill 
may  be  without  saddles,  the  saddles  being  removed  and  con- 
veniently placed  in  the  hall. 

A  man  who  can  ride  bareback  can  ride  with  a  saddle. 


60  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

To  Gallop. 

2  O2.  The  gallop  is  a  succession  of  leaps  during  which  there 
is  a  small  interval  of  time  that  all  the  feet  are  in  the  air.  In 
galloping  on  a  straight  line  it  is  immaterial  with  which  foot 
the  horse  leads,  but  companies  will  march  with  greater  ease 
and  comfort  if  all  the  horses  lead  with  the  same  foot. 

A  horse  gallops  on  the  right  foot  when  the  right  fore  and 
hind  legs  move  in  advance  of  the  left  fore  and  hind  legs;  he 
gallops  on  the  left  foot  when  the  left  fore  and  hind  legs  are 
in  advance.  He  gallops  true  when  he  gallops  on  the  right  foot 
in  marching  to  the  right,  or  on  the  left  foot  when  marching 
to  the  left  hand ;  he  gallops  false  if  in  marching  to  the  right 
he  gallops  on  the  left  foot  or  conversely. 

A  horse  is  disunited  when  he  gallops  with  the  near  foreleg 
followed  by  the  off  hind  leg,  or  the  off  foreleg  followed  by  the 
near  hind  leg;  in  either  case  his  balance  is  deranged  and  his 
strength  impaired. 

When  the  horse  gallops  on  the  left  foot,  the  rider  feels  a 
sensible  movement  in  his  position  from  left  to  right;  when  he 
gallops  on  the  right  foot,  the  movement  of  the  rider  is  from 
right  to  left ;  when  the  horse  is  disunited,  the  rider  experiences 
irregular  movements ;  when  the  horse  gallops  true,  he  preserves 
his  balance,  and  in  case  of  a  mistake  he  has  his  legs  under 
better  control  and  can  more  easily  recover  himself.  When  he 
gallops  false  or  disunited  he  is  apt  to  fall  whenever  he  makes 
a  blunder. 

203.  The  canter  is  a  short,  collected  gallop;  the  horse's  fore- 
hand is  raised,  his  whole  figure  is  collected  and  shortened,  his 
neck   bowed,   and  his  head  drawn   in,   and   he  moves  by   the 
spring  of  the  haunches.     It  is  the  gait  that  should  be  used 
in  the  riding-hall  exercises  and  mounted  gymnastics. 

The  gallop  can  not  be  safely  used  in  the  riding  hall  unless 
the  horse  gallops  true  and  the  track-  is  in  good  condition. 

204.  The  recruits  marching  to  the  right  hand:  1.  To  three 
yards  take  distance,  2.  TROT,  3.  MARCH. 

The  leading  man  takes  the  trot;  each  of  the  other  men  in 
succession  takes  the  trot  when  the  one  in  front  of  him  has 
gained  the  distance  of  3  yards. 

This  precaution  is  taken  with  recruits  to  prevent  the  horses 
running  upon  each  other  and  causing  confusion. 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  61 

1.  Gallop;  or,  canter,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  gallop,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  march,  close  both  legs  and  rein  in  with  a 
firm,  light  hand  (this  is  to  bring  the  haunches  under),  then 
carry  the  bridle  hand  to  the  left  and  press  the  left  leg  with 
vigor ;  these  actions  throw  the  weight  on  the  near  hind  leg  and 
allow  the  off  fore  and  hind  feet  to  lead ;  as  soon  as  the  horse 
rises,  give  the  hand  and  relax  the  left  leg;  reining  in  slightly 
and  closing  the  legs  with  light  pressure  will  keep  the  horse  at 
the  gait  and  up  to  the  hand ;  a  dead  pull  should  be  avoided ;  if 
the  horse  leans  on  the  hand,  yield  the  hand  and  paly  the  reins 
a  little,  then  close  the  legs  and  rein  in  a  little  abruptly ;  as  soon 
as  the  horse  obeys,  yield  the  hand. 

For  recruits  the  gait  at  first  is  restricted  to  the  canter. 

To  keep  the  horse  true  the  rider  must  accommodate  himself 
to  all  the  horse's  motions,  sustaining  him  slightly  with  the 
outside  leg,  particularly  in  changing  direction  at  the  corners. 
When  a  horse  gallops  false  or  disunited,  his  rider  is  ordered 
to  leave  the  column,  come  to  the  trot,  and  pass  to  the  rear  of 
the  column,  taking  care  not  to  interfere  with  the  other  men; 
arriving  at  the  rear  he  resumes  the  gallop,  the  instructor  ex- 
plaining how  to  keep  the  horse  true.  The  gallop  to  each  hand 
will  be  kept  up  only  once  or  twice  around  the  riding  school, 
the  horses  being  brought  to  the  trot  before  changing  hands. 

In  turning  corners  at  a  fast  gait  there  is  danger  that  the 
horse  will  fall  down.  If  his  haunches  swing  out,  he  will  change 
so  as  to  gallop  disunited,  and  the  danger  of  his  falling  will  be 
increased.  To  prevent  this  the  man  should  keep  the  outside  leg 
closed  strongly  and  not  lean  in,  but  maintain  a  vertical  posi- 
tion. 

The  instructor  will  not  at  first  dwell  upon  the  mechanism  of 
the  gait,  but  allow  each  recruit  to  accommodate  himself  to  the 
motion  of  the  horse  without  losing  his  seat. 

The  men  must  keep  their  horses  steady ;  when  able  to  manage 
them  properly  at  the  gallop  the  distance  of  4  feet  from  head 
to  croup  is  gradually  resumed. 

In  order  to  make  it  easier  for  the  man  to  start  his  horse  true, 
the  instructor  will  find  it  advantageous  to  march  the  squad  in 
line  with  intervals  across  the  hall  at  the  trot,  and,  upon  ap- 
proaching the  track,  commands:  1.  By  the  right  flank,  2.  Gallop; 
or,  2.  Canter,  3.  MARCH. 


62  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

Or,  give  the  command  gallop  or  canter  when  the  squad  is 
circling  at  the  trot. 

When  the  men  have  been  sufficiently  exercised  at  the  gallop  on 
straight  lines  and  in  circling,  they  are  exercised  at  the  gallop 
in  inarching  by  the  flank  and  circling  by  man,  the  instructor 
taking  care  that  the  turns  are  not  made  too  short;  that  the 
men  keep  their  horses  true,  and  that  they  do  not  derange  their 
positions. 

To  Pass  From  the  Canter  to  the  Gallop,  and  the  Reverse. 

205.  Being  at  the  canter:  1.  Gallop,  2.  MARCH. 

Give  the  hand  and  close  the  legs  by  degrees  until  the  horse 
increases  his  gait  to  the  gallop;  when  the  proper  cadence  is 
attained,  the  instructor  pays  particular  attention  to  the  posi- 
tions of  the  men ;  if  their  seats  become  too  much  deranged,  he 
brings  the  squad  to  the  canter  or  to  the  trot. 

To  resume  the  canter :  1.  Canter,  2.  MARCH. 

Rein  in  by  degrees  until  the  horse  moderates  the  cadence, 
closing  the  legs  to  prevent  his  taking  the  trot. 

To  Pass  From  the  Gallop  or  Canter  to  the  Trot. 

206.  1.  Trot,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  trot,  gather  the  horse. 

At  the  command  march,  rein  by  degrees  and  hold  the  legs 
close;  as  soon  as  the  horse  trots,  replace  the  hand  gradually 
and  relax  the  legs. 

207.  The  object  of  circling  on  the  forehand  and  haunches 
is  to  teach  the  horse  to  obey  the  pressure  of  the  legs  and  reins, 
and  to  instruct  the  recruits  in  the  application  of  the  aids. 

Each  of  these  movements  will  first  be  taught  to  the  recruits 
individually.  If  the  movement  be  new  to  the  horses,  the  man 
should  have  one  or  two  pliant  switches  sufficiently  long  to  reach 
his  horse  behind  the  girth,  which  are  used  at  the  time  of  and  on 
the  same  side  as  the  pressure  of  the  leg;  when  the  horse  yields, 
much  should  be  made  of  him ;  it  will  encourage  the  horse  to 
pet  him  after  each  effort. 

Care  is  taken  that  the  movements  are  not  hurried,  nor  too 
much  required  of  the  horse  during  the  first  trials. 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  63 

• 

To  Passage. 

208.  Being  upon  a  long*side,  the  squad  is  marched  by  the 
flank  and  halted,  head  to  the  wall  or  track,  upon  arriving  near 
the   opposite   side.     The   instructor    then    commands :  1.  Right 
(left)  pass,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

At  the  first  command,  gather  the  horse  and  incline  him  to 
the  right  by  carrying  the  bridle  hand  slightly  to  the  right. 

At  the  command  march,  rein  in,  close  the  legs,  to  force  the 
horse  to  the  bit ;  bear  the  hand  well  to  the  right,  the  left  rein 
pressing  the  horse's  neck,  and  close  the  left  leg  behind  the 
girth,  keeping  the  body  erect.  Continue  the  movement  by  a 
gentle  application  of  the  same  means. 

The  horse's  shoulder  should  precede  the  haunches ;  that  is,  he 
is  held  inclined  to  the  right.  Only  a  few  steps  should  be  taken 
at  first. 

At  the  command  halt,  replace  the  bridle  hand ;  relax  the  pres- 
sure of  the  left  leg  as  soon  as  the  horse  moves  his  haunches 
and  is  straight  in  line. 

The  application  of  the  reins  and  legs  should  be  in  harmony 
with  the  sensibility  of  the  horse ;  if  the  horse  obliques  too  much, 
diminish  the  bearing  of  the  reins ;  if  he  steps  too  quickly,  mod- 
erate the  effect  of  reins  and  legs;  if  he  backs,  force  him  up  to 
the  pit  by  pressure  of  the  legs. 

The  passage  in  column  may  be  executed  by  the  application  of 
the  same  means.  The  movement  will  be  practiced  at  the  trot 
and  canter. 

Jumping. 

209.  For  this  exercise  the  height  of  the  bar  should  at  first 
be  1  foot,  and  the  width  of  the  ditch  2  feet.    As  the  men  and 
horses  become  used  to  jumping,  the  height  of  the  bar  and  the 
width  of  the  ditch  are  gradually  increased,  the  bar  to  3  feet 
and  the  ditch  to  5  feet;  this  exercise  should  generally  be  prac- 
ticed near  the  end  of  each  drill. 

A  horse  that  hurries  or  rushes  will  become  an  uncertain  and 
unsafe  jumper.  If  impatient  in  going  up  to  the  bar,  he  should 
be  halted,  reined  back,  halted  and  tried  again  until  he  takes  it 
coolly. 


64  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

Horses  are  taught  to  jump  the  ditch  and  the  bar.  They  are 
equipped  with  the  watering  bridle  and  are  led  by  a  steady 
horse  that  is  accustomed  to  jumping. 

This  instruction  is  also  given  on  the  longe. 

The  horses  are  taken  in  the  open  field  and  practiced  at 
jumping  shallow  ditches,  fallen  logs,  very  low  fences,  etc.  If 
the  horse  refuses  to  take  the  jump,  the  instructor  may  give  aid 
with  the  whip,  but  in  such  a  way  as  not  to  terrify  him.  If  the 
horse  be  timid,  it  is  advisable  to  place  the  bar  on  the  ground 
until  he  passes  over  it  without  alarm.  Great  discretion  must 
be  used  in  applying  the  whip,  and  the  horses  will  not  be  re- 
quired to  jump  repeatedly  over  the  same  thing  or  at  the  same 
place. 

210.  The  instructor  forms  the  squad  in  line,  about  30  yards 
from  the  obstacle,  and  commands:  1.  First  file  from  the  right 
(left),  2.  MARCH,  3.  NEXT. 

The  man  on  the  right  moves  to  the  front  at  the  walk;  he 
takes  the  trot  when  he  has  passed  over  about  one-third  the  dis- 
tance, and  then  the  gallop. 

After  making  the  jump,  he  takes  the  trot,  then  the  walk,  and 
takes  his  place  in  the  rank,  which  is  re-formed  about  30  yards 
beyond,  and  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  obstacle,  and  facing  it. 

The  other  men  move  out  successively  from  the  right  at  the 
command  next. 

211.  In  the  riding  hall  the  men  are  formed  in  two  squads,  in 
line,  facing  each  other  at  opposite  ends  of  the  hall ;  two  bars 
are  placed  across  the  track,  one  on  each  of  the  long  sides  of  the 
hall,  about  midway. 

1.  First  file  from  the  right  (left),  2.  MARCH,  3.  NEXT. 

The  man  on  the  right  of  each  squad  moves  out  at  the  walk 
and  marches  diagonally  across  the  hall;  on  passing  each  other 
both  take  the  trot  and  when  abreast  of  the  flank  of  the  opposite 
squad  they  take  the  track  at  the  gallop  (or  canter),  the  horse 
leading  with  the  right  foot;  after  jumping  both  bars,  each  man 
takes  the  trot,  then  the  walk,  passes  around  the  left  flank  of  the 
opposite  squad,  marches  at  the  walk  diagonally  across  the  hall, 
and  forms  on  the  left  of  his  squad. 

212.  The  other  men  move  out  successively  from  the  right  (or 
left)  of  each  squad  at  the  command  Next. 

This  rule  is  general  for  individual  exercises. 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  65 

213.  in  making  the  flying  jump,  the  horse  must  not  be  hur- 
ried nor  allowed  to  rush,  but  be  held  steady  and  straight  for  the 
bar  or  other  obstacle.    The  rider  should  sit  down  snugly  in  the 
middle  of  his  saddle,  the  horse  firmly  inclosed  between  the  legs, 
the  hands  held  low  and  steady,   and  the  body  not  forward, 
and   thus   ride   steadily   and   smoothly   at   the   obstacle.     The 
muscles  of  the  back  and  shoulders  should  not  be  contracted. 
The  waist  should  be  supple,  so  as  to  adopt  in  its  motion  the 
movement  of  the  horse. 

To  Jump  the  Ditch. 

214.  Ride  straight  for  the  ditch  at  a  steady,  animated  gait, 
with  the  legs  closed  firmly;  the  instant  the  horse  springs,  give 
the  hand,  and  as  he  grounds  sustain  him  with  a  light,  steady 
pressure. 

215.  The  instructor  must  observe  that  the  rider  does  not 
thrust  his  weight  into  the  stirrups  nor  throw  out  his  elbows, 
nor  check  his  horse  too  abruptly.    If  the  hand  is  held  so  that 
the  back  of  the  hand  is  nearly  vertical  with  the  ground,  there 
will  be  little  tendency  to  turn  out  the  elbows.     If  the  horse  is 
checked  with  a  sudden  violence  after  making  the  jump,  he  takes 
it  as  a  punishment,  and  may  thereafter  try.  to  avoid  the  obstacle. 

Recruits  are  apt  to  try  to  sustain  themselves  by  the  reins; 
to  prevent  this  the  instructor  may  find  it  necessary  to  allow 
them  to  place  the  bridle  hand  on  the  horse's  neck  until  they 
have  gained  confidence.  If  necessary  the  bar  should  be  lowered 
to  the  height  at  which  the  recruit  can  easily  keep  his  seat. 

The  rider  will  be  practiced  jumping  obstacles  without  stirrups 
and  may  be  without  saddles. 

Alignments. 

216.  Being    in    line    without    intervals:  1.  Right    (left),    2. 
DRESS,  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  dress  all  the  men  move  up  slowly  on  the 
basis  of  the  alignment  established  by  the  instructor,  each  casts 
his  eyes  to  the  right  so  as  to  see  the  buttons  on  the  breast  of 
the  second  man  from  him,  sits  squarely  on  his  horse,  keeps  his 
horse  straight  in  ranks,  and  touches  lightly  with  his  stirrup  the 
82940°— 11 5 


66  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

stirrup  of  the  man  on  his  right.  At  the  command  front,  given 
when  the  last  man  is  aligned,  all  cast  their  eyes  to  the  front. 
All  movements  in  ranks  must  then  cease. 

In  dressing  the  first  two  or  three  men  are  accurately  aligned 
as  quickly  as  possible,  in  order  to  afford  a  base  for  the  rest  of 
the  squad. 

This  rule  is  general. 

To  March  in  Line. 

217.  Being   in    line   at   the  halt:  1.  Forward,   2.  MARCH,   3. 
GUIDE  RIGHT  (LEFT).    The  squad  moves  off  promptly,  the  guide 
marching  straight  to  the  front  at  the  regular  gait. 

The  instructor  observes  in  marching  in  line  that  the  squad 
marches  straight  to  the  front  at  the  regular  gait ;  that  the  men 
keep  their  horses  straight  in  the  rank ;  that  they  maintain  the 
interval  of  about  6  inches  from  knee  to  knee  (or  light  touch  with 
stirrup)  toward  the  side  of  the  guide;  that  they  yield  to  pres- 
sure from  that  side  and  resist  pressure  from  the  opposite  direc- 
tion ;  that  if  too  much  closed  toward  the  guide  they  carry  the 
bridle  hand  from  that  side  and  close  the  leg  on  the  side  of  the 
guide ;  that  if  the  interval  be  too  great  they  carry  the  hand 
toward  the  guide,  and  also  close  the  leg  on  the  opposite  side, 
and,  while  habitually  keeping  the  head  to  the  front,  they  occasion- 
ally glance  toward  the  guide.  If  in  advance,  they  rein  in 
gradually.  If  in  rear,  they  gradually  increase  the  gait  until  the 
alignment  is  regained. 

218.  Marching  in  line,  to  effect  a  slight  change  of  direction: 
INCLINE  TO  THE  RIGHT  (LEFT). 

The  guide  turns  his  horse  slightly  to  the  right  and  marches 
in  the  new  direction.  The  other  men  gradually  conform  to  the 
movements  of  the  guide,  increasing  or  diminishing  the  gait 
according  as  the  change  is  toward  or  opposite  the  side  of  the 
guide. 

To  Halt. 

219.  Whenever  the  squad  is  in  motion,  it  is  halted  by  the 
commands:  1.  Squad,  2.  HALT.     This  rule  is  general,  the  com- 
mand section,  platoon,  company,  etc.,  being  substituted  for  squad. 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  67 

To  March  Backward. 

220.  1.  Backward,  2.  Guide  right  (left),  3.  MARCH. 
All  the  men  rein  back,  dressing  on  the  guide. 
This  movement  is  used  for  short  distances  only. 

Being  in  Line,  to  Oblique. 

221.  1.  Right  (left)  oblique,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  each  man  executes  a  turn  of  45°  to 
the  right,  his  right  knee  in  rear  of  the  left  knee  of  the  man 
on  his  right.  The  squad  moves  in  the  new  direction,  regulating 
by  the  right,  in  a  line  parallel  to  the 
original  front. 

To  resume  the  original  direction : 

1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH.^ 

Each  man  turns  45°  to  the  left  and 
marches  straight  to  the  front,  regu- 
lating on  the  guide. 

To  Turn  and  Advance. 

PI.   18,   Par.   221. 

222.  Being  in  line  at  the  halt  or 

at   the  walk,   the   instructor   commands:    1.   Right   (left)   turn, 

2.  MARCH,  3.  GUIDE  RIGHT  (LEFT).     The  man  on  the  right  turns 
his  horse  90°  to  the  right,  on  an  arc  with  a  radius  of  about 
4  yards,  and  moves  forward  in  the  new  direction  without  chang- 
ing  (increasing)   the  speed.     Each  of  the  other  men  turns  his 
horse  to  the  right  approximating  an  oblique,  and,  moving  at  the 
trot  by  the  shortest  line,  places  himself  on  the  new  line,  when 
he  takes  the  gait  and  direction  of  the  pivot  man.     During  the 
turn  the  guide  is,  without  command,  on  the  frivot  flank.     The 
guide  is  announced  when  all  men  have  arrived  on  the  line.     If 
marching  at  a  trot  the  pivot  man  continues  at  the  trot.     All 
others  move  at  the  gallop.     If  marching  at  the  gallop,  the  pivot 
takes  the  canter ;  all  other  men  continue  the  gallop,  each  taking 
the  canter  on  arriving  in  line;   as  soon  as  all  the  men  have 
arrived  on  the  line  all  resume  the  gallop. 


68  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

Being  in  Line,  to  Form  Column  of  Fours  to  the  Front. 

223.  1.  Right    (left)    by    fours,    2.    MARCH,    3.    GUIDE    RIGHT 

(LEFT).  The  right  four  moves  straight  to  the  front,  the  other 
fours  oblique  to  the  right,  so  as  to  follow  the  leading  four  at 
the  proper  distance. 

If  marching,  rule  2,  paragraph  361,  applies  for  gaits. 

To  Change  Direction. 

224.  Marching  in  column  of  fours:  1.  Column  right,  2.  MARCH. 
The  leading  four  executes  right  turn,  the  other  fours  move  for- 
ward and  turn  on  the  same  ground  as  the  first.     Column  half 
right  is  similarly  executed,  except  that  the  leading  four  makes  a 
half  turn. 

Being  in  column  of  fours,  at  the  halt,  to  march  and  change 
direction  at  the  same  time:  1.  Forward,  2.  Column  right  (left), 
3.  MARCH.  To  make  a  slight  change  of  direction,  incline  to 
the  right  (or  left). 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Move  to  the  Rear. 

225.  1.  Right  about,  2.  MARCH.     The  leading  four  turns  to  the 
right  over  a  half  circle  with  a  radius  of  4  yards.     The  other 
fours  move  forward,  and,  following  the  first,  turn  on  the  same 
ground. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Line  to  the  Front. 

226.  1.  Squad,  2.  Left  (right)  front  into  line,  3.  MARCH.     The 

leading  four  move  straight  to  the  front,  the  rear  fours  oblique 
to  the  left  until  the  preceding  four  is  uncovered,  when  it  moves 
straight  to  the  front  until  it  arrives  on  the  line. 
Rule  1,  paragraph  361,  applies  for  gaits. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Column  of  Twos  to  the  Front. 

227.  Being   at   a    halt:  1.  By    twos,    march,    2.  GUIDE   RIGHT 
(LEFT). 

The  right  two,  Nos.  1  and  2  of  the  leading  four,  moves  straight 
to  the  front,  the  left  two,  Nos.  3  and  4  of  the  leading  four,  keep 


THE  SOLDIER  MOUNTED.  69 

their  horses'  heads  straight  until  their  horses'  heads  are  passed 
by  the  croups  of  the  horses  of  the  right  two,  when  they  oblique 
to  the  right  and  follow  the  leading  two,  at  a  distance  of  4  feet. 
Each  of  the  other  fours  form  in  the  same  manner  as  soon  as  the 
left  two  in  the  preceding  four  commences  to  oblique.  Nos.  3 
and  4  always  follow  in  rear  of  Nos.  1  and  2,  no  matter  on  which 
side  the  guide  may  be. 

If  marching,  Rule  2,  paragraph  361,  applies  for  gaits. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Form  Column  of  Files. 

228.  1.  By  file,  2.  MARCH. 

The  movement  is  executed  according  to  the  principles  of  the 
preceding  paragraph.  No.  1  of  the  leading  four  moves  forward 
and  is  followed  successively  by  Nos.  2,  3,  and  4,  who  preserve  a 
distance  of  4  feet  from  head  to  croup.  When  No.  4  commences 
to  oblique,  No.  1  of  the  succeeding  four  marches  forward  or 
takes  the  increased  gait. 

Column  of  files  from  column  of  twos  is  formed  in  similar 
manner,  No.  1  leading  the  column. 

Being  in  Column  of  Twos,  fo  Form  Column  of  Fours. 

229.  Being   at   the  halt:  1.  Form    fours,   2.  MARCH.     Nos.    1 
and  2  of  the  leading  four  move   straight  to  the  front.     The 
instructor  commands  halt  when  the  leading  two  have  moved  3 
yards.     Nos.  3  and  4  of  the  leading  four  oblique  to  the  left  until 
uncovered,  then  march  to  the  front  and  halt  when  abreast  of 
Nos.  1  and  2.     The  other  twos  march  forward  and  form  fours 
successively  as  explained  for  the  first  four.     Nos.  3  and  4  of 
each  four  commence  the  oblique  to  the  left  when  Nos.  1  and  2 
are  at  3  yards  from  their  position. 

If  marching,  rule  1,  paragraph  361,  governs  the  gaits. 

Being  in  Column  of  Files,  to  Form  Column  of  Fours  or  Twos. 

230.  1.  Form  fours,  2.  MARCH. 

The  move  is  executed  on  the  same  principles  as  in  forming 
fours  from  column  of  twos,  No.  1  of  each  four  being  the  base, 
and  Nos.  2,  3,  and  4  obliquing  to  the  left  and  forming  on  the 
left  of  No.  1. 


70  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

231.  1.  Form    Twos,  2.  MARCH.     The  movement   is  executed 
on  the  same  principles  as  in  forming  fours,  Nos.  1  and  3  being 
the  base  men,  No.  2  forming  on  the  left  of  No.  1,  and  No.  4  on 
the  left  of  No.  3. 

Movements  in  Column  of  Twos. 

232.  The  column  of  twos  changes  direction,  halts,  and  ad- 
vances by  the  same  commands  and  means  as  a  column  of  fours. 

Being  in  Column  of  Fours,  to  Dismount. 

233.  Being  at  the  halt  or  marching:  1.  Prepare  to  dismount, 
2.  DISMOUNT. 

At  the  first  command,  Nos.  1  and  2  open  to  the  right  and 
front,  Nos.  3  and  4  to  the  left  and  front,  and  all  halt.  The 
four  opens  only  so  far  as  to  allow  sufficient  room  for  each  man 
to  dismount  without  interference  from  the  others.  Nos.  1 
and  4  open  a  little  more  than  2  and  3. 

The  column  of  twos  dismounts  by  the  same  commands  and 
means.  In  mounting  from  column  of  twos  or  fours  the  horses 
are  opened  out  as  in  the  preceding  paragraph  at  the  prepara- 
tory command  for  mounting.  At  the  commands  Forward, 
March,  either  before  or  after  mounting,  the  column  moves  for- 
ward, the  files  closing  toward  the  center. 

Manual  of  the  Pistol. 

234.  The  instruction  under  this  head  will  conform  to  what 
has  already  been  described  in  The  Soldier  Dismounted.     (Para- 
graphs 94  to  108.) 

CHAPTER  II.— THE  DRIVER. 

Object  and  Sequence  of  the  Instruction. 

235.  The  object  of  this  instruction  is  the  detailed  training 
of  the  individual  drivers. 

First.  In  harnessing  and  unharnessing,  and  in  fitting  and 
properly  cleaning  and  caring  for  harness  and  packs. 

Second.  In  managing  and  maneuvering  a  single  pair,  and  in 
the  proper  caro  of  draft  horses  and  mules  and  pack  mules. 


THE  DRIVER.  71 

Third.  In  managing  and  maneuvering  the  different  pairs  of  a 
team  hitched. 

Quiet,  well-trained  animals  will  be  used  in  the  instruction  of 
recruits. 

236.  In  order  to  vary  the  mounted  instruction  of  recruits, 
their  training  as  drivers  may  advantageously  be  begun  as  soon 
as  they  have  had  elementary  instruction  in  the  duties  of  the 
soldier  mounted.     The  two  kinds  of  instruction  are  then  con- 
tinued concurrently. 

SECTION  II. — General  provisions. 

237.  When  two  or  more  carts  or  wagons  march  in  line,  the 
instructor,  as  soon  as  the  march  in  line  is  begun,  designates 
the  element  on  one  flank  or  the  other  as  the  guide  of  the  move- 
ment, thus:   GUIDE  RIGHT  (LEFT).    The  other  elements  align 
themselves  on  the  guide  thus  indicated  and  maintain  their  in- 
tervals from  that  flank. 

238.  If  marching  in  column,  or  if  marching  obliquely  from 
column,  the  leading  element  is,  without  indication,  the  guide  of 
the  movement. 

Rests. 

239.  The  rests  are  executed  and  the  attention  resumed  ac- 
cording  to   the  general   principles   heretofore   prescribed ;    the 
drivers,  when  dismounted,  remain  close  to  their  teams,  so  as  to 
keep  them  under  control. 

240.  The  position   of  the  driver   dismounted,   at  attention, 
will  be  just  outside  the  right  wheel,  abreast  of  the  footboards, 
and  holding  the  reins. 

241.  After  exercise,   the  drivers,   when  dismounted,   should 
raise  the  collars  from  the  shoulders  and  adjust  the  harness  if 
necessary. 

242.  Each  cart  driver  is  assigned  two  horses,  and  each  wagon 
driver  of  the  combat  transportation  is  assigned  four  mules. 

Disposition  of  the  Harness. 

243.  In  garrison  the  cart  harness  is  arranged  on  pegs  on 
the  heel  posts,  as  follows:  Both  bridles  hung  from  the  peg  by 


72  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

their  headstalls ;  the  traces,  reins,  and  collars,  unlocked,  of  both 
horses  hung  from  the  peg  close  to  the  heel  post ;  the  pole  yoke, 
with  martingales  attached,  is  hung  from  a  spike  driven  into  the 
side  of  the  heel  post. 

In  the  field  the  harness  is  laid  back  on  the  footboards;  reins, 
bridles,  and  collars  on  top,  and  covered  with  the  paulin. 

The  wagon  harness  is  arranged,  as  nearly  as  possible,  in  a 
similar  manner. 

To  Harness. 

244.  A  pair  of  quiet,  well-trained  horses,  in  a  double  stall, 
is  assigned  to  the  recruit,  who  should  be  supervised  at  first  by 
a  thoroughly  instructed  man. 

The  instructor  causes  a  team  to  be  harnessed,  points  out  and 
names  the  different  parts  of  the  harness,  and  explains  their 
uses;  he  then  causes  the  harness  to  be  taken  off  and  replaced 
on  its  peg. 

245.  The  harness  being  on   the  heel   posts,   the   instructor 
causes  the  recruits  to  stand  to  heel,  and  commands:  HARNESS, 
when  each  man  will  place  the  harness  upon  the  team  in  the  fol- 
lowing order  and  manner : 

Collar:  Each  driver  puts  on  and  locks  the  collar  of  his  off 
horse,  then  that  of  his  near  horse. 

Traces:  He  lays  the  middle  of  the  trace  of  the  off  horse  over  the 
horse's  back,  toggles  on  opposite  sides,  and,  beginning  with  the 
off  trace,  passes  the  toggles  through  the  loin  loops  from  the  rear 
and  attaches  them  to  the  tugs  on  the  collar.  The  traces  of  the 
near  horse  are  then  attached  in  the  same  manner.  The  rear 
ends  of  the  traces  are  left  hanging  over  the  backs  of  the  horses. 

Bridle:  He  bridles  the  off  horse  and  adjusts  the  reins,  and 
then  bridles  the  near  horse  and  adjusts  the  reins. 

Unless  instructions  to  the  contrary  are  given,  the  halters  are 
removed  before  bridling. 

Yoke:  The  driver  takes  down  the  yoke ;  places  himself  between 
his  horses,  facing  in  the  same  direction  with  them ;  fastens  the 
breast  strap  of  the  off  horse,  then  that  of  the  near  horse ;  passes 
the  martingale  of  the  near  horse  between  the  forelegs,  through 
the  standing  loop  on  the  cincha ;  attaches  the  hooks  at  the  end 
of  the  side  straps  to  the  martingale  D  ring ;  secures  the  martin- 
gale of  the  off  horse  in  the  same  manner;  then  passes  out  in 
rear  of  the  near  horse,  and  stands  to  horse. 


UNIVERSITY   i) 

cr  THE  DRIVER.  73 

.- 

To  Unharness. 

246.  UNHARNESS,  when  the  harness  will  be  removed  in  the 
following  order  and  manner : 

Unyoke:  The  driver  passes  between  his  horses  from  the  rear, 
unhooks  the  martingale  of  his  near  horse,  and  draws  the  mar- 
tingale through  the  standing  loop  on  the  cincha;  then  does  the 
same  with  respect  to  the  off  horse;  unhooks  the  inside  end  of 
each  breast  strap,  detaches  the  neck  yoke  and  hangs  it  on  its 
spike. 

Bridle:  He  detaches  the  reins  from  the  near  horse,  puts  on  the 
halter,  fastens  the  halter  strap  to  the  manger,  does  the  same 
with  respect  to  the  off  horse  and  hangs  the  bridles  and  reins  on 
the  peg,  the  near  bridle  next  to  the  post. 

Traces:  He  disengages  the  near  trace  of  the  near  horse  and 
lays  its  middle  over  the  horse's  back,  toggle  on  the  near  side; 
disengages  the  off  trace  and  lays  it  beside  the  near  trace,  toggle 
on  the  off  side;  removes  the  traces  and  hangs  them  on  their 
peg.  In  like  manner  he  removes  and  hangs  up  the  traces  of  the 
off  horse. 

Collar:  He  removes  the  collar  of  the  near  horse,  then  that  of 
the  off  horse,  and  hangs  them  up,  the  near  collar  next  to  the 
post. 

To  Harness  and  Unharness  in  'the  Field. 

247.  Executed  as  in  garrison,  with  such  modifications  as  the 
disposition  of  the  harness  requires.    The  horses  are  ordinarily 
tied  by  the  halters  to  the  wheels  of  the  carts  while  harnessing 
and  unharnessing. 

Fitting  Harness. 

248.  The  cart  harness  is  the  artillery  wheel  harness,  without 
saddles,  and  fitted  with  a  back  strap. 

When  the  recruit  has  become  somewhat  familiar  with  the 
method  of  harnessing  and  unharnessing,  he  will  be  instructed 
in  fitting  harness,  the  importance  of  which  will  be  thoroughly 
impressed  upon  him. 

The  bridle  is  fitted  as  prescribed  in  The  Soldier  Mounted. 

The  collar,  when  adjusted,  should  freely  admit  the  thickness 
of  the  hand  between  the  lower  part  and  the  throat,  and  the 


74  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

fingers  between  the  sides  and  the  neck.  A  short  collar  chokes 
a  horse  by  pressing  on  the  windpipe ;  a  narrow  one  pinches  and 
rubs  the  neck.  A  broad  collar  works  about  and  galls  the 
shoulders. 

The  back  strap,  when  adjusted,  should  admit  the  breadth  of 
the  hand  between  it  and  the  horse's  back. 

The  breech  strap  should  Jbe  adjusted  so  that  it  will  bear 
quickly  when  the  horse  is  required  to  check  the  movement  of 
the  cart,  but  will  not  impede  his  movement  while  in  draft. 
This  adjustment  is  most  important.  It  can  best  be  made  by 
observing  the  horse  in  draft  and  tightening  the  straps  as  much 
as  can  be  done  without  impeding  the  free  movement  of  the 
animal  while  in  draft. 

The  hip  straps  should  be  of  such  length  that  the  breech  strap 
will  bear  just  below  the  point  of  the  buttocks.  The  lower  the 
breech  strap  is  adjusted  the  less  does  it  assist  the  horse  in 
checking  the  movement  of  the  cart. 

The  loin  straps  should  be  so  adjusted  that  the  traces,  when  in 
draft,  will  be  straight  and  without  downward  pull  on  the  loops 
that  support  them. 

The  traces:  The  length  of  the  traces  must  depend  in  a  great 
measure  on  the  size  of  the  horse  and  his  stride.  The  rule  is 
to  allow  about  14  inches  from  singletree  to  hind  quarters.  The 
traces  should  be  adjusted  so  that  the  line  of  traction  will  be 
straight  from  the  singletree  to  the  collars.  This  rule  will  regu- 
late, in  some  measure,  the  length  of  the  loin  straps. 

All  trace  chains  have  a  ring  at  one  end  and  a  hook  at  the 
other;  the  hook  is  passed  through  the  D  ring  at  the  end  of 
the  trace,  and  hooked  back  into  any  desired  link.  By  this 
means  the  length  of  the  trace  is  adjusted,  and  the  trace  chain 
need  not  be  removed  except  for  cleaning. 

To  Lead  Out. 

249.  The  teams  being  harnessed,  the  instructor  commands: 
LEAD  OUT.    The  teams  are  led  out  directly  and  to  the  carts. 

To  Hitch. 

250.  Hitch.     Each  driver  passes  behind  the  near  horse;  places 
himself  between  his  horses,  on  the  left  of  the  pole;  engages  the 


THE  DRIVER.  75 

end  of  the  pole  in  the  pole-yoke  ring ;  then  goes  behind  the  near 
horse  and  attaches  his  traces  to  the  singletree,  beginning  with 
the  off  trace.  He  then  passes  around  the  front  of  his  team  at 
double  time,  and  hitches  the  off  horse,  beginning  with  the  near 
trace. 

He  then  mounts,  if  the  section  is  mounted ;  if  it  is  dismounted 
he  stands  as  heretofore  prescribed  in  paragraph  240. 

To  Unhitch. 

251.  Unhitch.     Each  driver  dismounts,  if  mounted;  detaches 
the  traces  of  his  off  horse,  and  places  the  end  of  the  traces  over 
the  horse's  back,  as  prescribed  for  harnessing ;  passes  around  the 
front  of  his  team  at  double  time,  and  unhitches  his  near  horse  in 
like  manner;   passes  between  his  horses,   disengages  the  pole 
from  the  pole-yoke  ring  and  lowers  the  pole  to  the  ground. 

To  Dismiss  the  Teams  from  the  Park. 

252.  Lead  in.    The  teams  are  then  conducted  to  the  stable  or 
other  designated  place. 

253.  The  instructor  then  commands:  Unharness. 

The  harness  is  removed,  cleaned,  and  properly  put  in  place; 
the  horses  rubbed  down  and  cared  for.  Having  satisfied  himself 
by  inspection  that  these  duties  have  been  properly  performed, 
and  that  all  the  precautions  required  on  return  from  exercise 
have  been  observed,  the  instructor  causes  the  harness  to  be 
covered,  orders  the  men  to  fall  in,  marches  them  to  the  company 
parade  ground,  and  dismisses  them. 

Management  of  Teams  in  Draft. 

254.  In  all  movements  from  a  halt,  each  driver  gathers  both 
of  his  horses  just  before  they  are  to  move;  if  in  march  and  the 
gait  or  direction  is  changed  both  horses  are  gathered  just  before 
they  change  the  gait  or  direction.     Care  should  be  taken  that 
both  the  horses  move  off  together  and  change  the  gait  at  the 
same  time. 

255.  In  starting  a  cart  or  wagon,  it  is  especially  important 
that  both  the  horses  of  the  team  should  throw  their  weights 
into  the  collars  gradually  but  simultaneously.     Unremitting  at- 


76  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

tention  is  required  upon  the  part  of  every  driver  in  order  that 
his  horse  shall  at  all  times  do  its  proper  share  of  the  work. 

By  observing  these  important  rules,  a  team  is.  enabled  to  pull 
steadily  together  and  the  horses  are  not  fatigued  by  jerks,  which 
make  them  balky,  gall  their  shoulders,  and  break  the  harness. 

256.  In  reducing  the  gait  or  in  halting,  the  movement  must 
be  checked  gradually  so  as  not  to  bring  undue  strains  upon  the 
horses   or  the  harness.     Ordinarily  about  2  yards  should   be 
gained  in  bringing  a  cart  to  a  halt  from  a  walk;  in  the  ex- 
ceptional cases  when  carts  are  halted  while  moving  at  rapid 
gaits,  from  5  to  10  yards  should  be  gained  in  halting  from  a 
trot ;  from  10  to  15  in  halting  from  a  gallop. 

The  command  for  halting  must  be  so  given  that  the  carts  may 
be  properly  brought  to  rest  at  the  place  desired. 

257.  The  gaits  are  always  changed  gradually,  so  as  not  to 
strain  or  worry  the  horses  by  sudden  movements.     In  all  cases, 
whether  moving  from  a  halt,  changing  gait,  or  halting,  the 
horses  should  be  made  to  act  together,  but  they  should  always 
be  handled  quietly  and  kindly  and  allowed  a  sufficient  time  for 
their  movements. 

258.  In   executing  the  abouts  and  the  turns  at  a   trot  or 
gallop  the  radius  is  sufficiently  increased  to  permit  the  horses 
to  execute  the  movement  with  ease;  and  in  the  abouts  the  gait 
is  moderated  to  avoid  overturning  the  carts. 

MARCHINGS. 
To  March  to  the  Front. 

259.  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

The  teams  move  out  simultaneously  and  march  straight  to 
the  front.  If  in  line,  they  preserve  the  alignment  and  the  inter- 
val from  the  guiding  flank. 

To  Halt. 

260.  1.  Carts,  2.  HALT. 

Each  driver  stops  his  team,  but  not  suddenly,  and  keeps  it 
straight. 

To  March  by  the  Flank. 

261.  1.  Carts,  2.  By  the  right  (left)  flank,  3.  MARCH. 

Each  driver  wheels  his  team  to  the  right  by  moving  the  off 
horse  over  a  quarter  circle  whose  radius  is  4  yards  and  causing 


THE  DRIVER.  77 

the  near  horse  to  quicken  his  movements  so  as  to  keep  abreast 
of  the  off  horse.  On  the  completion  of  the  wheel,  each  driver 
moves  his  team  straight  to  the  front  in  the  new  direction.  If 
executed  from  column,  a  guide  should  be  announced  when  line 
is  formed. 

To  March  to  the  Rear. 

262.  1.  Carts,  2.  Right  (left)  about,  3.  MARCH. 

Executed  as  explained  for  the  march  by  the  flank,  except  that 
each  driver  moves  his  team  over  a  half  circle  instead  of  a 
quarter  circle. 

Being  in  Column,  to  Change  Direction. 

263.  1.  Column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

The  leading  cart  wheels  to  the  right  as  explained  in  paragraph 
260 ;  the  rear  carts  follow  in  the  track  of  the  leading  cart,  and 
wheel  on  the  same  ground. 

264.  Column  half  right  (or  left)  is  similarly  executed,  except 
that  only  one-eighth  of  a  circle  is  passed  over. 

To  back  the  Carts. 

265.  To  the  rear:  Being  at  a  halt,  to  move  a  short  distance 
to  the  rear:  1.  Backward,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Carts,  4.  HALT. 

The  drivers  rein  back  their  horses,  taking  care  to  keep  the 
pole  straight;  at  the  command  halt  they  stretch  the  traces  and 
halt. 

Alignments. 

266.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  sees  that  the 
driver  on  the  flank  toward  which  the  alignment  is  to  be  made  is 
in  the  desired  position,  and  commands :  1.  Right  (left),  2.  Dress, 
3.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  dress,  the  other  driversr  look  to  the  right  and 
align  themselves  accurately,  keeping  their  pairs  straight  and 
preserving  their  intervals.  At  the  command  front,  they  turn 
their  eyes  to  the  front. 

The  instructor  may  place  himself  on  either  flank,  and  give  a 
general  alignment  by  ordering  any  driver  to  move  one  or  both 
of  his  horses  forward  or  backward. 


78  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

CHAPTER  III.— THE  PACKER. 
Object  and  Sequence  of  the  Instruction. 

267.  The  object  of  this  instruction  is  the  detailed  training 
of  the  individual  packers  in  harnessing  and  unharnessing  and 
in  fitting  and  properly  cleaning  and  caring  for  harness,  and  in 
managing  and  maneuvering  the  different  mules  of  a  section. 

GENERAL  PROVISIONS. 
Guides. 

268.  The  general  instructions  for  the  guide  in  marching  in 
line  and  in  column,  and  for  rests,  etc.,  are  similar  to  those  given 
for  the  soldier  mounted,  with  such  modifications  as  may  be 
necessary. 

The  Individual  Packer. 

269.  The  aparejos  stand  upon  the  lower  edges  of  their  panels 
with  the  cruppers  doubled  forward;  upon  each  rest,  in  order, 
its   frame,   folded  cincha,   folded   saddle  blanket,   and  corona. 
The  corona  is  doubled,  canvas  inside,  and  lies  on  the  blanket, 
fold  to  the  front.     The  bridle,  bit  to  the  left,  and  the  blind  are 
laid  across  the  corona  or  hung  on  harness  pegs. 

270.  In  garrison,  the  aparejos   are  aligned  upon   racks   in 
rear  of  the  mules  or  in  the  wagon  shed.     In  the  field  they  are 
aligned  parallel  to  and  about  5  yards  from   the  picket  line. 
They  should  rest  on  poles  and  be  covered  with  canvas. 

The  A  pare  jo  Packsaddle. 

271.  The  aparejo  packsaddle  consists  of  the  aparejo  proper 
:ind   the   detachable   frame.     The   aparejo   proper   consists   of 
two  panels  of  leather,  each  braced  with  light  ribs  held  in  place 
by  a  boot  stick  at  the  bottom  and  a  saddle  bar  at  the  top  of 
the  panel ;  the  panels  are  filled  with  hay,  each  saddle-  being 
fitted  to  its  mule.     Over  the  panels  is  the  sobrejalnm  of  canvas, 
leather  faced,  the  ends  of  which  are  protected  by  wooden  shoes 
held  in  place  by  leather  caps.     The  sobrejalma  is  secured  to 
the  aparejo  by  thongs  at  the  ends  of  its  center  line.    To  the 


THE  PACKER.  79 

panels  is  laced  the  crupper.  The  cincha  is  of  canvas,  doubled, 
with  a  leather  cincha  strap  laced  to  it  at  one  end,  which  is 
faced  with  leather  and  braced  with  an  iron  rod.  This  strap,, 
at  its  attachment  to  the  cincha,  carries  a  rendering  ring  through 
which  it  passes  in  tightening.  Fifteen  inches  from  this  end 
of  the  cincha  a  leather  thong,  the  finger  loop,  is  attached,  which 
is  used  to  secure  the  end  of  the  cincha  strap  after  cinching. 
The  other  end  of  the  cincha  carries  a  curved  piece  of  pipe 
which  takes  the  place  of  a  cincha  ring.  The  cincha  should  be 
8  inches  longer  than  the  aparejo  with  which  it  is  used. 

272.  The   frame    consists   of   metal    arches   and    side   bars, 
riveted  to  spring-steel  side  plates  for  distributing  the  pressure 
on  the  saddle,  and  has  suitable  attachments  for  supporting  the 
wireless  chests,  sections  of  mast,  generator,  etc. 

273.  Each  aparejo  is  provided  with  a  corona,  or  pad,  made 
of  several  thicknesses  of  blanket,  lined  with  canvas ;   also  a 
saddle  blanket. 

To  Fold  the  Blanket. 

274.  Hold  the  blanket  by  ttie  corners,  the  short  edge  up  and 
down.     Bring  the  short  edges  together,  the  right  hand  holding 
the  corners,  the  left  holding  the  folded  edge  at  the  top.     Shake 
the  blanket  and  spread  it  on  the  ground,  the  hands  still  holding 
the  corners.     Carry  the  upper  edge  to  the  front  so  as  to  leave 
a  portion  of  the  blanket  22  inches  wide  on  the  ground.     Then 
fold  back  so  as  to  leave  the  blanket  in  three  equal  folds,  22 
inches  wide  and  42   inches  long.     Shake  well   and   fold  once 
more,  bringing  the  ends  together,  and  place  across  the  aparejo. 

To  Blind  the  Mule. 

275.  A  pack  mule  is  ordinarily  blinded  during  harnessing 
and  unharnessing,  loading  and  unloading.     To  teach  it  not  to 
move  when  blinded,  the  blind  must  always  be  lifted  before  re- 
quiring it  to  change  position. 

To  Harness. 

276.  Two  packers  are  assigned  to  each  mule.     A  quiet,  well- 
trained  mule  is  assigned  to  two  recruits.     Each  recruit  should 


80  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

be  supervised  by  a  thoroughly  instructed  man.  The  instructor 
causes  a  mule  to  be  harnessed  and  points  out  and  names  the 
different  parts  of  the  pack  outfit  and  explains  their  uses.  He 
then  has  the  harness  taken  off  and  placed  in  rear  of  the  mule. 

277.  The  pack  outfit  being  in  rear  of  the  mule,  the  instructor 
causes  the  recruits  to  stand  to  heel  and  commands  harness, 
upon  which  the  harness  is  placed  upon  the  mule  in  the  follow- 
ing order: 

Blind:  The  packer  of  the  mule  being  harnessed,  on  the  near 
side,  takes  hold  of  the  halter  with  the  left  hand ;  grasps  an  edge 
of  the  blind  near  one  end  with  the  right  hand;  carries  it  over 
the  mule's  neck  to  the  off  side,  tail  down ;  brings  the  blind  well 
to  the  front  over  the  mule's  ears  and  places  it  over  the  eyes, 
the  tail  on  top  of  the  neck. 

Bridle:  The  packer  of  the  mule  being  harnessed,  on  the  near 
side,  passes  the  reins  over  the  mule's  head,  snaps  the  hook  of 
the  watering  bridle  into  the  off  halter  ring  with  the  left  hand ; 
opens  the  mule's  mouth  with  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand,  in- 
serts the  bit,  and  snaps  the  hook  in  the  near  ring;  secures  the 
leading  rein  in  the  throat  latch. 

Corona:  The  off  packer  on  the  off  side  places  the  corona,  can- 
vas side  down,  well  forward  on  the  mule's  back  .and  slides  it  to 
the  rear  until  its  front  edge  is  just  behind  the  point  of  the 
withers,  taking  care  that  the  hair  lies  smooth  beneath  it. 

Blanket:  The  near  packer  on  the  near  side  places  the  folded 
saddle  blanket  on  the  corona,  taking  care  that  its  lower  edges 
slightly  overlap  to  prevent  bunching,  the  off  packer  assisting 
from  the  off  side. 

Saddle:  The  near  packer  on  the  near  side  grasps  the  front 
edge  of  the  aparejo  near  the  boot  with  his  left  hand,  the  rear 
edge  near  the  boot  with  his  right  hand ;  the  off  packer  on  the  off 
side  grasps  the  aparejo  in  a  corresponding  manner ;  both  to- 
gether raise  the  aparejo,  pass  it  over  the  mule  from  the  rear 
and  place  it  slightly  in  rear  of  its  proper  position. 

Crupper:  The  packer  on  the  near  side  places  his  left  hand, 
palm  up,  on  the  front  edge,  the  right  hand,  palm  down,  on  the 
rear  edge  of  the  crupper;  the  packer  on  the  off  side  takes  a 
corresponding  position;  both  together  raise  the  crupper  well 
up,  reverse  it  and  turn  it  down  over  the  croup.  The  off  packer 
raises  the  mule's  tail  and  places  the  dock  piece  well  under  it, 
taking  care  that  no  hairs  are  caught.  He  then  places  his  left 


THE  PACKER.  81 

hand,  thumb  down,  at  the  top  and  rear  of  the  aparejo,  his  right 
hand  at  the  rear  of  the  boot,  and  moves  it  forward  to  its  place. 
The  near  packer  on  the  near  side  throws  the  upper  fold  of  the 
cincha  toward  the  off  packer,  guiding  the  cincha  to  the  center 
of  the  aparejo  with  the  left  hand.  The  off  packer  passes  the 
cincha  well  under  with  his  right  hand,  holding  it  in  position 
over  the  center  of  the  off-side  boot  until  it  has  been  received  by 
the  near  packer.  He  then  steps  to  the  mule's  shoulder  and, 
facing  to  the  rear,  places  his  right  hand  on  the  collar  of  the 
aparejo,  thumb  under  the  corona,  and  with  his  left  hand  at  the 
rear  of  the  boot  pulls  the  aparejo  forward. 

Cinch:  The  off  packer  holds  the  aparejo  in  place,  raising  the 
corona  from  the  withers  with  his  right  thumb,  taking  care  not 
to  raise  the  front  of  the  aparejo.  The  near  packer  holds  the 
end  of  the  cincha  with  his  left  hand,  passes  the  double  cincha 
strap  through  the  cincha  eye  from  above,  brings  it  up  in  front 
and  passes  it  through  the  rendering  ring  from  above;  grasps 
the  double  cincha  strap  with  the  left  hand  well  under  and  with 
the  right  hand  passes  the  end  through  the  eye  in  rear  of  the 
other  part ;  places  the  palm  of  his  right  hand  against  the  rear 
end  of  the  boot,  pulls  the  strap  taut  with  his  left  hand,  and  calls 
set.  At  this  the  off  packer  passes  in  rear  and  observes  whether 
the  aparejo  is  straight.  If  not,  it  is  correctly  adjusted.  He 
then  takes  hold  of  the  cincha  strap  between  the  near  packer  and 
the  mule,  the  palm  of  the  right  hand  up,  that  of  the  left  hand 
down,  and  places  his  right  knee  against  the  boot.  The  near 
packer  raises  his  left  foot  to  the  boot  and  both  pull  together 
until  the  cincha  eye  is  at  the  edge  of  the  boot,  the  cincha  in 
the  center  of  the  aparejo.  The  near  packer  holds  the  cincha 
strap  with  his  left  hand  below  his  right,  and  passes  the  finger 
loop  from  above  and  back  into  the  right  hand  of  the  near 
packer,  who  secures  it.  The  packer  of  the  harnessed  mule  re- 
moves the  blind  and  places  it  on  his  left  shoulder  with  the 
tail  under  the  right  arm. 

To  Unharness. 

278.  Unharness,  at  which  the  recruits  unharness  in  the  fol- 
lowing order : 

Saddle:  The  packer  on  the  near  side  unfastens  the  cincha 
strap  and  throws  its  end  across  the  aparejo;  folds  the  cincha 
82940°— 11 6 


82  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

with  the  strap  inside  and  places  it  on  top  of  the  frame.  Both 
packers  push  the  aparejo  slightly  to  the  rear.  The  near  packer 
places  his  left  hand  on  the  upper  edge  of  the  crupper,  his  right 
on  the  lower  edge  near  the  dock  piece;  the  off  packer  takes  a 
corresponding  position ;  both  together  raise  the  crupper  and 
reverse  it  forward  over  the  cincha;  take  hold  of  the  aparejo 
as  in  saddling,  pass  it  backward  over  the  mule,  and  lower  it 
carefully  to  its  place  in  rear: 

Blanket:  The  packer  on  the  near  side  grasps  the  front  and 
rear  edges  of  the  blanket  at  their  middle  points,  removes  it, 
allows  it  to  fall  into  a  fold  between  his  hands,  places  it  along 
the  near  side  of  the  corona,  grasps  the  corona  at  the  middle 
points  of  its  front  and  rear  edges,  removes  it,  and  places  both 
on  the  aparejo. 

Bridle:  The  packer  of  the  mule  being  unharnessed  removes 
the  watering  bridle  in  the  reverse  order  of  bridling  (par.  277) 
and  places  it  and  the  blind  on  the  corona. 

279.  All  recruits  are  instructed  in  the  duties  of  both  near 
and  off  packers. 

To  set  up  the  aparejo. 

280.  To  rib  up:  Unlace  the  slits  and  handholes;   soak  the 
aparejo  in  tepid  water  for  about  15  minutes,  drain  it  and  lay  it 
flat,  back  pieces  up;  insert  the  boot  stick  and  the  saddle  bar 
through  the  slit  in  rear  and  press  them  to  their  places  at  the 
boot  and  the  center  stitch  line,   slotted  sides  up;   insert  the 
numbered  set  of  nine  ribs  through  the  slit  in   rear  in  their 
numerical  order  and  seat  them  in  that  order  from  collar  to 
rear  in  the  slots  of  the  boot  stick  and  saddle  bar,  butts  at  the 
boot ;  secure  the  top  of  each  rib  as  it  is  seated  by  inserting  the 
key  bar  at  the  front  edge  below  the  collar  and  passing  it  over 
the  rib  in  place ;  fasten  the  key  bar  to  the  collar  by  the  thong. 

NOTE. — Aparejos  are  issued  to  the  service  with  ribs  in  place. 
Ribs  are  furnished  in  sets  of  nine.  Each  rib  is  numbered  at  its 
butt  to  correspond  to  its  proper  numerical  position  in  the  panel, 
counting"  from  the  collar  to  the  rear.  Each  rib  is  also  stamped 
with  the  size  of  the  aparejo  for  which  it  is  made.  The  aparejos 
are  furnished  in  58,  60,  and  62  inch  sizes.  The  ribs  for  a  60- 
inch  aparejo  are  therefore  marked  "1-60,"  "2-60,"  "3-60," 
etc.  Should  repairs  or  alterations  make  it  necessary  to  rib  up. 


THE  PACKER.  83 

the  butt  of  the  fifth  rib  is  seated  iu  its  slot,  the  overlap  at  its 
slot  in  the  saddle  bar  is  marked  and  cut  away,  and  the  other 
ribs  are  cut  to  the  exact  resulting  length. 

Guava,  willow,  dogwood,  hickory,  or  any  other  wood  com- 
bining the  qualities  of  permanent  elasticity  and  strength  may 
be  used  to  replace  broken  ribs. 

281.  To  fill  or  pad:  Turn  the  aparejo  over,  belly  pieces  up; 
procure  about  6  pounds  of  long,  fine,  soft,  elastic  hay ;  taking  a 
little  at  a  time,  tease  or  "  mix  "  it  thoroughly,  insert  it  through 
the  handhole  and  thus  gradually  fill  the  body  of  the  aparejo 
with  a  smooth  and  even  layer,  not  more  than  2  inches  thick. 

NOTE. — Other  filling  may  be  used  in  necessity,  such  as  moss, 
excelsior,  curled  hair,  sea  grass,  but  these  substitutes  are  diffi- 
cult of  manipulation  in  alterations  necessary  to  accommodate 
the  rigging  to  injuries  of  the  mule.  By  teasing  or  "  mixing  "  is 
meant  the  arrangement  of  the  straws  so  that  they  will  cross 
one  another.  The  body  of  an  aparejo  is  that  part  which  comes 
in  contact  with  the  body  of  the  mule.  As  3  inches  of  the  lower 
portion  of  each  boot  stick  and  3  inches  of  the  upper  portion  of 
each  saddle  bar  must  not  come  in  contact  with  the  mule,  no 
filling  should  be  pressed  under  the  boot  stick  or  within  3  inches 
of  the  center  stitch  line.  The  body  course  tapers,  however,  so 
as  to  overlap  the  boot  stick  and  saddle  bar,  and  also  tapers 
toward  front  and  rear. 

282.  To  face  up  or  dress:  To  adjust  the  aparejo  more  ac- 
curately to  the  shape  <Jf  the  mule,  introduce  filling  and  press 
it  well  into  the  corner  of  the  front  boot;  working  toward  the 
handhole,  continue  the  facing  along  the  boot  stick  and  front 
edge,  gradually  increasing  its  thickness  to  about  an  inch  at  7 
inches  from  the  corner  and  forming  its  inner  edge  into  the  arc 
of  a  circle  concentric  with  the  handhole,  the  thickness  tapering 
to  the  ends  of  the  arc;  continue  the  facing  for  3  inches  more 
toward  the  handhole,  rapidly  decreasing  the  thickness  to  noth- 
ing; proceed  in  exactly  the  same  way  at  the  collar.     Under  no 
circumstances  should  the  collar  facings  reach  within  7  inches 
of  the  center  of  the  handhole.     Connect  the  front  boot  and 
collar  facings  by  a  dressing  along  the  front  edge  about  3  inches 
wide  and  an   inch  thick,  decreasing  in   thickness  toward  the 
handhole  and  toward  the  middle  of  the  edge. 

283.  Rib   up,  fill,  and  dress  the  other  panel  in  the  same 
manner. 


84  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

NOTE. — In  facing  up,  introduce  the  filling  with  the  hand, 
palm  up,  so  as  not  to  disturb  the  body  course.  In  case  the 
leather  will  not  yield  enough  to  permit  the  filling  to  be  intro- 
duced well  into  the  corners,  the  tamping  stick  may  be  used  to 
raise  it.  This  stick,  used  with  the  commercial  aparejo,  is  4  or 
5  feet  long,  1J  inches  in  diameter,  wedge  shaped  for  4  inches 
from  one  end,  the  edge  of  the  wedge  being  about  one-fourth 
inch  thick  and  grooved.  The  object  of  the  boot  facing  is  to 
cause  the  boot  stick  to  carry  horizontally  and  parallel  to  the 
center  line  of  the  mule  and  give  free  action  to  the  mule's  elbow. 
Mules  of  large  barrel  will  require  a  thicker  facing  than  that 
described.  The  object  of  the  collar  facing  is  to  cause  the 
saddle  bar  to  carry  horizontally  and  parallel  with  the  center 
line  of  the  mule  and  to  protect  the  mule's  withers.  Mules  with 
high  withers  will  require  a  thicker  facing  than  that  described. 
In  setting  to  the  shape  of  the  mule  the  aparejo  bends  at  the 
middle  of  the  front  edge.  It  is  important  that  the  body  course 
remain  undisturbed  during  dressing  and  that  the  instructions 
given  be  carefully  followed  to  avoid  sore  withers  and  tails  and 
body  and  belly  bunches. 

284.  To  attach  the  crupper:  Stand  the  aparejo  on  its  boot  in 
its  normal  position ;  secure  a  lance  thong  to  the  front  hole  on 
the  upper  facing  of  the  crupper  on  each  side  and  fasten  the 
crupper  with  short  thongs  to  the  center  holes  of  the  carrier 
pieces  on  the  rear  of  the  aparejo;  pass  the  crupper  lace  thong 
through  the  second  hole  from  the  top  of  the  front  facing  of  the 
aparejo,  through  the  second  hole  of  the  crupper,  through  the 
third  hole  of  the  aparejo  facing,  through  the  fourth  hole  of  the 
crupper,  and  so  on,  finishing  through  bottom  holes  of  facing  and 
crupper  and  tying  to  the  crupper  hole. 

NOTE. — In  lacing  the  crupper  to  the  aparejo,  the  thong  must 
be  passed  through  the  holes  from  the  outside  and  must  not  be 
twisted,  the  lacing  must  not  cross,  and  it  is  important  that  the 
tie  be  made  on  the  last  hole  of  the  crupper  instead  of  the 
aparejo. 

285.  To   assemble   the  saddle:  Place  the   sobrejalma   on   the 
aparejo  so  that  its  staple  holes  fit  over  the  staples  on  the  latter ; 
seat  the  frame  and  pass  the  straps  on  the  sobrejalma  through 
the  staples;  pass  the  cincha  through  the  frame  over  the  side 
bars,  finger  loop  up  and  cincha  to  the  left;  double  the  cincha 
over  the  frame,  strap  inside;  double  the  crupper  forward  so 
that  the  dock  piece  rests  on  the  cincha. 


THE  PACKER.  85 

Remarks  on  the  Pack  Saddle. 

286.  When  the  set-up  aparejo  is  to  be  filled,  no  soaking  is 
necessary;  instead,  make  the  belly  pieces  pliable  by  rubbing 
with  a  wet  sponge. 

Mules  weighing  850  to  900  pounds  require  a  58-inch  aparejo; 
1,000  pounds,  60-inch;  1,100  pounds,  62-inch;  for  heavier  mules 
requisition  should  be  made  for  larger  sizes. 

When  the  mule  is  loaded  the  cincha,  in  travel,  should  free  the 
elbow  by  about  an  inch;  more  than  this  will  prevent  a  proper 
grip  on  the  belly. 

If  the  boots  ride  high  on  the  body  of  the  mule,  or  if  they 
reach  under  the  belly,  even  though  they  ride  horizontally  and 
parallel  to  the  center  line  of  the  mule,  the  aparejo  will  be 
likely  to  turn  easily.  This  fault  encourages  injuriously  tight 
cinching. 

If  one  or  both  boots  flare  out  or  turn  in  toward  the  mule, 
cinch  sores  and  sore  tails  result,  or  belly  and  body  bunches  are 
caused. 

The  width  of  the  collar  arch  clearance  should  be  at  least  5£ 
inches.  If  it  is  too  narrow  or  too  wide,  or  if  the  saddle  bars 
slope  downward  toward  the  front,  there  will  be  sores  on  the 
withers;  it  they  slope  to  the  rear  there  will  be  injuries  over 
the  loins,  called  kidney  sores. 

If  the  lacing  of  the  crupper  is  drawn  too  tight  at  the  bottom 
the  lower  edge  of  the  crupper  will  rub  the  buttocks  and  cause 
abrasions. 

The  object  to  be  attained  is  the  uniform  distribution  of  the 
weight  of  the  load  over  that  portion  of  the  mule's  body  ana- 
tomically suited  to  carrying  a  burden  so  that  the  saddle  will 
ride  with  little  motion  and  without  friction  of  the  bearing  sur- 
face of  the  body.  The  contact  of  the  bearing  surface  of  the 
saddle  must  be  close  at  all  points.  As  the  mule's  body  swells 
from  front  to  rear,  the  more  or  less  cylindrical  shape  of  the 
aparejo  after  the  body  course  is  laid  must  be  modified  by  facing 
up  so  as  to  provide  a  concave  surface  to  fit  over  a  convex  sur- 
face. But  as  the  barrel  of  the  properly  conformed  mule  is 
nearly  cylindrical  through  the  rear  half  or  more  of  the  contact 
surface,  no  facing  is  necessary,  as  a  rule,  in  the  rear  part  of  the 
aparejo,  although  conformation  may  require  it  exceptionally. 


86  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

Care  of  the  Harness. 

287.  The  leather  parts  of  the  harness  should  be  exposed  to 
the  sun  as  little  as  possible  and  should  be  cleaned  whenever 
dirt,  grit,  or  dust  has  collected  on  them  or  when  they  have  be- 
come saturated  with  the  sweat  of  the  animal.    The  parts  should 
be  separated  and  each  sponged  with  a  lather  of  castile  soap  and 
warm  water.     They  should  then  be  rubbed  nearly  dry  and  a 
lather  of  Crown  soap  and  warm  water  should  be  applied.     Ex- 
cess of  moisture  in  this  later  should  be  permitted  to  evaporate 
in  a  shaded  place.     This  treatment  frequently  applied  is  suffi- 
cient, but  if  the  leather  has  become  harsh  and  dry,  its  dressed 
side  should  be  lightly  coated  with  neatsfoot  oil  after  the  castile 
lather  and  allowed  to  dry  before  the  Crown  soap  lather  is  ap- 
plied, the  latter  removing  surplus  oil.    Polishing  of  the  leather 
parts  should  not  be  permitted,  as  it  leads  to  the  surreptitious 
use  of  commercial  materials  that  are  often  detrimental  to  the 
life  of  the  leather. 

Leather  is  injured  by  exposure  to  the  sun,  by  water,  and  by 
the  use  of  too  much  Crown  soap  or  of  common  commercial  soaps. 
In  proper  condition  it  is  clean,  soft,  smooth,  pliable,  and  free 
from  stains. 

Immediately  after  the  harness  is  removed  from  the  animal, 
canvas  parts  should  be  scraped  free  from  all  adhering  sub- 
stances with  a  dull  but  smooth-edged  knife.  Especially  constant 
attention  must  be  given  to  the  cleanliness  and  pliability  of  the 
canvas  side  of  the  corona  and  crupper  and  to  the  dock  piece. 

Woolen  parts  and  hair  cine-lias  should  be  rubbed  between  the 
hands  or  hung  up  and  beaten  with  switches  or  wands  to  remove 
dust,  mud,  and  hairs  and  to  make  them  soft  and  pliable.  They 
should  be  exposed  frequently  to  the  sun,  completely  unfolded, 
and  blankets  should  be  occasionally  washed  in  tepid  water. 

Metal  parts  must  be  kept  free  from  rust,  dirt,  sweat,  and 
hair.  Those  issued  with  coats  of  paint  or  lacquer  are  to  be 
maintained  in  that  condition.  Bright  parts  should  be  polished. 
The  tongues,  rollers,  and  keepers  of  buckles  must  work  freely, 
to  which  end  the  straps  must  be  unbuckled  in  cleaning. 

To  Gather  the  Mule. 

288.  The  packer  raises  his  right  hand,  to  attract  the  atten- 
tion of  the  mule,  collect  him  and  prepare  him  to  move. 


THE  SECTION  MOUNTED.  87 

Management  of  the  Led  Mule. 

289.  The  led  pack  mule  is  managed  by  the  leading  reins  or 
halter.     By  quiet  and  gentle  treatment  he  must  be  taught  to 
work  and  to  effect  changes  of  gait  and  direction  evenly.     He 
should  not  be  turned  short,  but  on  the  arc  of  a  circle  of  1  yard 
radius.    He  should  be  led  with  a  loose  rein,  urged  on,  if  he  lags, 
by  the  driver  in  rear.     He  should  not  be  threatened  by  his 
packer.     The   mule  must   always   be   gathered   before   moving 
from  a  halt,  before  halting,  and  before  changing  gait  or  direc- 
tion. 

To  Dismiss  the  Packer. 

290.  The  instructor  may  conduct  the  packers  in  column  into 
the  stable  and  halt  the  column  so  that  each  driver  is  opposite 
his  stall ;  or  he  may  first  form  the  drivers  in  line  in  the  vicinity 
of  the  stable  or  park,  and  command:  1.  By  the  right  (left),  2. 
FILE  OFF.    In  the  latter  case  the  packers  file  off  in  succession, 
as  explained  in  The  Soldier  Mounted,  and  halt  when  opposite 
their  stalls  or  the  place  designated  for  unharnessing. 

291.  The  instructor  commands:  UNHARNESS. 

The  harness  is  removed,  cleaned,  and  properly  put  in  place; 
the  mules  rubbed  down  and  cared  for.  Having  satisfied  him- 
self by  inspection  that  these  duties  have  been  properly  per- 
formed and  that  all  the  precautions  required  on  return  from 
exercise  have  been  observed,  the  instructor  causes  the  harness 
to  be  covered,  orders  the  men  to  fall  in,  marches  them  to  the 
company  parade  ground,  and  dismisses  them. 

292.  The  mules  assigned  to  the  transportation  of  a  wireless 
pack  set  are  designated  respectively    (1)   generator  mule,    (2) 
chest  mule,  (3)  mast  mule,  (4)  kit  mule. 

CHAPTER  IV.— THE  SECTION  MOUNTED. 
The  Wire  Section. 

293.  The  wire  section  is  normally  composed  of  13  mounted 
men  formed  in  column  of  fours  and  the  wire  cart  and  its  driver. 

294.  The  chief  of  section  is  on  the  right  of  the  leading  four 
and  the  cart  is  2  yards  in  rear  of  the  mounted  men.    When  the 


88  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

section  is  acting  alone  the  chief  of  section  may  go  where  his 
services  are  most  needed. 

295.  The  fours  are  formed  from  right  to  left,  as  follows: 
No.  1,   the  lineman ;   No.   2,   the  messenger ;   No.  3,  the  horse 
holder;  No.  4,  the  operator. 

296.  The  section  is  maneuvered  as  prescribed  for  the  com- 
pany mounted  and  by  similar  commands. 

To  Open  Station  and  Move  Off. 

297.  To  open  station  and  move  to  the  front  from  a  halt: 
OPEN  STATION.    At  this  command  the  linemen  of  the  first  and 
second  fours,  the  messenger  of  the  first  four,  and  the  chief  of 
section  turn  out  of  the  column,  to  the  right,  the  horse  holder 
and  operator  of  the  first  four  turn  out  of  the  column  to  the  left, 
the  two  linemen,  remaining  mounted,  prepare  to  follow  the  reel 
cart  and  lay  out  the  wire,  the  lineman  of  the  second  four  in 
front.    The  remaining  men  of  the  first  four  all  move  to  the  rear 
of  the  cart  and  dismount,  except  the  horse  holder,  to  whom  the 
horses  are  turned  over.    The  messenger  unties  the  wire  from  the 
cart  and  pulls  off  enough  slack  and  holds  it  or  makes  it  fast  to 
some  convenient   anchor.     The   operator   prepares   his   buzzer, 
connectors,  and  ground  rod,  and  opens  the  station  in  the  loca- 
tion indicated. 

When  the  end  of  the  wire  has  been  removed  from  the  cart, 
the  messenger  commands :  DRIVE  ON,  at  which  the  cart,  preceded 
by  the  men  of  the  second  and  third  fours,  except  the  lineman  of 
the  second  four,  moves  out  over  the  indicated  route,  at  first 
slowly,  in  order  not  to  break  the  wire.  The  two  linemen  follow 
the  cart  attending  the  wire  until  the  second  station  is  opened, 
when  the  lineman  of  the  first  four  returns  back  over  the  line  to 
his  station.  His  place  is  taken  on  the  line  work  by  the  lineman 
of  the  second  four,  who  is  replaced  by  the  lineman  of  the  third 
four. 

298.  The  manipulation  of  the  machinery  of  the  wire  cart  for 
handling  the  wire  will  be  a  part  of  the  duty  of  the  cart  driver, 
unless  an  operator  be  placed  on  the  cart,  in  which  case  the  lat- 
ter may  handle  the  clutch,  etc.    The  reel  must  always  be  stopped 
before  a  march  to  the  rear  is  taken  up. 

299.  The  chief  of  section  rides  near  the  cart,   in  order  to 
supervise  the  laying  of  the  line. 


THE  SECTION  MOUNTED.  89 

300.  If  the  section  is  in  march,  it  is  halted  before  giving  the 
command  for  opening  station. 

301.  As  each  station  is  established  the  operator  will  call  up 
the  initial  station. 

To  Recover  the  Wire. 

302.  1.  Close  station,  2.  REEL  UP.    At  the  first  command  the 
lineman  of  the  station  immediately  starts  back  over  the  line, 
laying  out  the  wire  in  a  convenient  place  for  recovery.     The 
operator  calls  up  "  all  stations  "  on  his  line,  sends  G.  B.,  and 
signs  his  station  call,  cuts  out  his  buzzer,  and  mounts.     The 
horse  holder  now  mounts  and,  if  this  is  the  third  station,  at- 
tends the  loop,  using  the  spare  pike  which  is  lashed  to  the  pole 
of  the  wire  cart ;  otherwise  one  of  the  linemen  present  attends 
the  loop.     The  messenger  takes  the  hand  guard  from  the  cart 
and  feeds  the  wire  upon  the  reel. 

At  the  second  command  the  wire  cart  moves  off  back  over  the 
line,  reeling  up  the  wire.  As  the  loop  approaches  the  cart  the 
man  attending  it  will  call  out  clutch,  when  the  driver  will  throw 
out  the  clutch  in  order  to  allow  the  loop  to  drop  back. 

303.  Intermediate  stations  are  closed  by  the  command  close 
station,  and  when  the  cart  approaches  the  members  of  these 
stations  take  charge  of  the  work  of  recovering  the  line  back  to 
the  next  station. 

304.  Members  of  the  section  not  engaged  in  laying  out  or 
recovering  the  line  ride  in  front  of  the  cart.    This  rule  is  gen- 
eral. 

305.  As  the  cart  approaches  the  end  of  the  line  an  increased 
gait  will  be  taken  to  gain  sufficient  momentum  to  reel  up  the 
slack.     When  all  the  wire  is  on  the  reel  the  section  is  re-formed 
in  its  proper  place. 

The  Pack  Wireless  Section. 

306.  The  pack  wireless  section  is  normally  composed  of  10 
mounted  men  and  4  pack  mules. 

307.  The  men,  except  the  chief  of  section,  are  numbered  from 
1  to  9.     The  mules  are  designated,  respectively,  as  the  "  gener- 
ator mule,"  the  "  chest  mule,"  the  "  mast  mule,"  and  the  "  kit 
mule."     Each  mule  is  led  by  one  of  the  men,  and  the  section 


90  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

is  formed  in  column  of  twos,  the  led  mules  being  considered 
as  one  of  the  set  of  twos. 

308.  The  chief  of  section  is  on  the  right  of  the  leading  two, 
composed  of  Nos.  1  and  2,  No.  1  on  the  right.     These  are  fol- 
lowed by  Nos.  3  and  4,  and  then  by  Nos.  5,  6,  7,  and  8,  leading, 
respectively,  the  mules  carrying  the  generator,  the  chests,  the 
masts,  and  the  kit  in  order  from  front  to  rear,  the  mules  on  the 
right.     No.  9  rides  in  the  rear,  and  it  is  his  duty  to  observe 
the  packs  and  to  keep  up  any  lagging  mule. 

309.  It  is  the  duty  of  all  men,  so  far  as  they  may  be  able,  in 
addition  to  leading  their  own  mules,  to  urge  forward  the  mule 
immediately  in  front. 

310.  When  the  section  is  acting  alone,  the  chief  of  section 
may  go  where  his  services  are  most  needed. 

311.  The  section  is  maneuvered  as  prescribed  for  the  com- 
pany mounted,  and  by  similar  commands. 

3  12.  When  the  section  is  acting  alone,  it  may  when  necessary 
march  in  column  of  files,  in  which  case  each  man  leading  a 
mule  will  ride  in  front  of  his  mule. 

To  Open  Station. 

313.  1.  Open  station,  2.  DISMOUNT.  At  the  command  open 
station,  Nos.  3,  4,  and  9  ride  left  front  into  line  on  No.  2;  No.  5 
stands  fast,  and  Nos.  G  and  7  lead  their  mules  left  front  into 
line  on  No.  5 ;  No.  8  leads  his  mule  by  the  left  front,  in  front  of 
and  opposite  the  center  of  the  line  of  mounted  men.  At  the 
command  dismount,  the  section  is  dismounted  and  the  chief  of 
section  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  and  9  turn  their  horses  over  to  No.  8, 
and  proceed  to  unpack  the  mules  (except  the  kit  mule).  Nos. 
5,  6,  and  7,  holding  their  mules  in  position,  move  their  horses 
out  of  the  way.  Nos.  1  and  2  unpack  the  generator,  the  chief 
of  section  and  No.  9  the  chests,  and  Nos.  3  and  4  the  antenna 
bags  and  mast,  which  are  placed  on  the  ground  in  rear  of  their 
mules;  Nos.  5,  6,  and  7  then  lead  off  their  horses  and  mules 
and  turn  them  over  to  No.  8.  As  soon  as  the  mules  are  un- 
packed No.  2  removes  the  cover  from  the  generator,  Nos.  3  and  4 
take  the  contents  from  the  bags,  No.  4  takes  out  the  counter- 
poise and  places  the  pins  or  pegs  for  anchoring  the  antenna 
on  the  ground  in  front  of  the  chest,  No.  3  fixes  the  insulator 


THE  SECTION  MOUNTED.  91 

with  antenna  attached  into  the  top  joint  of  the  mast,  which 
No.  1  holds  on  the  ground  in  front  of  the  chest;  Nos.  1  and  3 
then  unloop  and  straighten  out  the  antenna  cords,  placing  them 
on  the  ground.  No.  9  will  now  step  on  the  chest  and  hold  the 
joint  of  the  mast  in  position,  while  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  take  up 
the  antenna  reels  and  pins  and  run  out  the  antenna  in  the 
directions  indicated  by  the  chief  of  section.  As  soon  as  the 
antenna  and  the  rope  attached  have  been  unreeled,  the  antenna 
men  face  in  the  direction  of  the  mast  and  watch  the  chief 
of  section  for  signals.  When  the  antenna  is  paid  out,  No.  9 
will  raise  the  mast  hand  over  hand,  the  other  sections  being 
placed  underneath  by  No.  7. .  While  the  mast  is  being  raised 
Nos.  5  and  6  set  up  the  generator  or  batteries  and  untie  and 
pay  out  the  counterpoise,  securing  its  center  to  the  generator 
or  anything  to  hold  it  in  place.  Nos.  7  and  9  connect  up  the 
instrument  chests  and  the  generator  or  batteries. 

When  the  mast  is  up,  the  chief  of  section  may  command  tie  in, 
when  the  antenna  men  will  secure  the  rope  attached  to  the 
antenna  to  the  pins  which  they  will  drive  into  the  ground. 

As  soon  as  the  antenna  is  secured  the  antenna  men  will 
assist  in  laying  out  the  counterpoise. 

314.  The  chief  of  section  will  then  detail  an  operator,  one  or 
two  messengers  as  needed,   men  to  turn   the  generator,   and 
guards  to  protect  the  antenna  from  being  run  into  and  injured. 
The  latter  will  also  see  that  the  antenna  pins  and  cord  do  not 
become  insecure. 

To  Close  Station. 

315.  The  station  is  closed,  taken  down,  and  packed  in  a  simi- 
lar manner  at  the  command  close  station,  each  man  handling  and 
packing  the  same  equipment  as  in  unpacking  and  opening  sta- 
tion.   When  the  mules  are  packed  and  the  men  are  all  mounted, 
the  chief  of  section  commands  fall  in,  when  the  normal  forma- 
tion in  column  is  resumed. 

316.  Each  man,  having  a  permanent  assignment  of  duty,  soon 
learns  to  do  his  part  quickly,  and  after  the  men  have  become 
proficient  in  handling  the  equipment  the  entire  operation  of 
unpacking  and  opening  station  or  packing  and  closing  station 
may  be  effected  by  the  command  open  (or  close)  station. 


92  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

The  Wagon  Wireless  Section. 

317.  The  wagon  wireless  section  is  normally  composed  of  18 
mounted  men,  the  wagoner  and  engineer,  who  ride  on  the  wagon, 
and  one  wagon  wireless  set,  drawn  by  4  mules. 

3  18.  The  mounted  men  are  formed  in  column  of  fours,  except 
one  man  who  rides  in  rear  of  the  wagon.  At  drills  and  cere- 
monies he  will  ride  on  the  left  of  the  leading  team. 

319.  The  chief  of  section  is  to  the  right  of  the  leading  four 
and  the  wagon  is  2  yards  in  rear  of  the  mounted  men.     When 
the  section  is  acting  alone  the  chief  of  section  may  go  where 
his  services  are  most  needed. 

320.  In  forming  fours  a  noncommissioned  officer  will  be  No. 
1  of  the  leading  four,  and  the  horse  holders  will  be  No.  4  of 
the  leading  four  and  the  third  four. 

321.  The  wagon  wireless  set  consists,  briefly,  of  a  pintle-type 
wagon,    drawn   by   4   mules.     The   telegraph    instruments   are 
attached  to  the  front  element,  and  the  engine  and  dynamo  are 
attached  to  the  rear  element,  and  electrically  connected  with  the 
instruments  by  cable.     On  the  rear  vehicle  are  also  carried  the 
mast,  consisting  of  10  sections  8  feet  in  length;  the  antenna, 
which  has  nine  cords,  one  of  which  is  the  connecting  cord ;  two 
sets  of  guy  ropes,  four  to  each  set;  and  the  rubber  insulated 
wire  counterpoise,  consisting  of  eight  branches. 

322.  The  section  is  maneuvered  as  prescribed  for  the  com- 
pany mounted,  and  by  similar  commands. 

323.  The  mounted  men,  except  the  chief  of  section,  are  num- 
bered from  1  to  17  for  the  purpose  of  prescribing  their  duties 
in  opening  and  closing  station :   Thus,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  are 
antenna  men,  Nos.  5,  6,  7,  and  8  are  guy  men,  Nos.  9  and  10 
(usually  noncommissioned  officers)  direct  the  antenna  men  and 
guy  men  during  the  erection  of  the  mast,  Nos.  11,  12,  and  13 
assemble   and   raise   the   mast,    Nos.    14   and   15   lay    out   the 
counterpoise  and  assist  the  engineer,  and  Nos.  16  and  17  are 
horse  holders. 

To  Open  Station. 

324.  The  section  will  always  be  halted  before  the  command 
open  station  is  given. 

325.  At  this  command  the  wagoner  unhitches  his  team.     The 
chief  of  section  moves  the  mounted  men  a  sufficient  distance  to 


THE  SECTION  MOUNTED.  93 

be  out  of  the  way  of  the  antenna  and  guy  ropes  when  the  mast 
is  raised  and  dismounts  them.  The  horses  are  turned  over  to 
the  horse  holders  (Nos.  16  and  17),  and  the  remaining  men  pro- 
ceed to  unpack  the  wagon,  each  man  assisting  in  unpacking 
and  making  ready  that  part  jof  the  equipment  which  it  is  his 
duty  to  handle  in  establishing  the  station — i.  e.,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and 
4  unpack  the  antenna  and  pins  or  stakes  and  pay  out  the 
antenna  under  direction  of  the  chief  of  section;  Nos.  5,  6,  7, 
and  8  do  the  same  with  the  two  sets  of  guy  ropes  and  pins; 
Nos.  11  and  12  take  position  on  top  of  the  front  element  of  the 
wagon,  prepared  to  raise  the  mast;  Nos.  9  and  10,  assisted  by 
No.  13,  unpack  the  sections  of  the  mast  and  place  them  on  the 
ground,  convenient  to  the  point  at  which  the  mast  is  to  be 
raised ;  Nos.  14  and  15  unpack  the  counterpoise  and  place  it  in 
position. 

As  soon  as  the  top  joint  of  the  mast  is  unloaded,  No.  13 
places  the  top  insulator  (with  antenna  attached)  in  the  top  of 
the  joint  and  raises  it  vertically  to  Nos.  11  and  12.  He  then 
places  the  remaining  joints  in  place,  and  assists  Nos.  11  and  12, 
who  raise  the  mast  hand  over  hand.  The  five  smaller  joints 
form  the  upper  part  of  the  mast.  No.  13  also  places  the  guy 
rings  in  place  at  the  top  of  the  fourth  and  seventh  sections.  As 
the  mast  is  being  raised  the  antenna  and  guy  men,  standing 
facing  it,  will  keep  it  vertical  by  skillful  handling  of  the  an- 
tenna and  guys,  under  direction  of  Nos.  9  and  10.  No.  1  should 
be  in  rear  of  the  wagon,  with  Nos.  2,  3,  and  4,  in  sequence  to 
his  left,  in  a  circle  around  the  mast.  This  will  bring  No.  3 
opposite  No.  1,  and  No.  4  opposite  No.  2.  Each  man  holds  two 
adjacent  antenna  cords,  and  carries  a  pin.  The  guy  men,  each 
with  an  upper  and  a  lower  guy  rope  and  a  pin,  take  position,  in 
a  corresponding  manner,  in  a  smaller  circle  around  the  mast, 
No.  5  being  between  No.  1  and  the  mast.  This  will  bring  No.  7 
opposite  No.  5,  and  No.  8  opposite  No.  6.  No.  9  will  direct  Nos. 
1,  3,  5,  and  7,  and  No.  10  will  direct  Nos.  2,  4,  6,  and  8.  When 
it  is  desired  that  an  antenna  or  guy  be  pulled  out  the  command 
out  will  be  used.  When  it  should  be  slacked  off  the  command  in 
will  be  used.  Thus,  if  No.  3  is  holding  his  antenna  too  slack, 
No.  9  commands:  No.  3,  OUT.  The  guy  ropes  which  each  man 
holds  are  referred  to,  respectively,  as  upper  and  lower.  When  the 
mast  is  up  the  chief  of  section  commands  tie  in.  At  this  com- 
mand the  guy  men  secure  the  guys  to  pins  driven  into  the 


94  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

ground  with  the  assistance  of  the  counterpoise  men  with  ham- 
mers. Antenna  men  secure  the  proper  antenna  cord  to  a  pin 
driven  into  the  ground  and  then  secure  the  remaining  antenna 
cords  in  a  similar  manner  midway  between  those  first  placed. 
In  doing  this  all  move  to  the  right  from  the  antenna  cord  first 
secured.  If  hammers  are  necessary  in  driving  the  pins,  they 
will  hold  the  antenna  cords  until  assisted  by  the  counterpoise 
men  or  guy  men. 

As  soon  as  the  command  tie  in  is  given,  No.  9  makes  the  proper 
connection  for  the  antenna  and  counterpoise,  while  No.  10  super- 
vises the  tying  in  and  sees  that  cords  and  ropes  are  kept  taut. 

326.  As  soon  as  the  wagoner  starts  to  unhitch  his  team,  the 
engineer  will  see  that  there  is  sufficient  gasoline  in  the  tank, 
oil  in  the  cups,  water  in  the  proper  receptacles  (if  the  engine 
is  water  cooled),  and  connect  the  dynamo  to  the  instrument 
by  means  of  the  cable  and  generally  make  ready  to  start  the 
engine  and  dynamo. 

327.  When  the  mast  is  up,  the  chief  of  section  details  the 
operators  (usually  either  No.  9  or  No.  10  for  the  first  relief), 
messengers,  and  guards  for  the  antenna  and  guys,  and  makes 
such  disposition  of  the  remaining  men  as  the  situation  demands. 
If  the  station  is  to  be  maintained  open  any  length  of  time,  he 
also  directs  that  the  picket  line  be  established  or  the  horses 
otherwise  disposed  of. 

The  wagoner  takes  care  of  his  team. 

To  Close  Station. 

328.  At  the  command  close  station,  the  operator  removes  the 
antenna   and  counterpoise  connections,   the  guy  men   take  up 
the  pins  and  hold  the  guys,  each  antenna  man  first  takes  up  the 
pin  and  frees  the  end  of  the  antenna  cord  which  he  last  secured 
and  turns  it  loose,  then  proceeds  to  his  other  antenna  cord, 
pulls  up  the  pin,  and  holds  the  cord  wrhile  the  mast  is  being 
lowered.     The  mast  is  lowered  by  the  same  men  in  the  same 
positions  as  when  being  raised.     Nos.  9  and  10  direct  the  an- 
tenna and  guy  men.     The  counterpoise  men  recover  the  counter- 
poise; the  engineer  shuts  off  all  valves,  the  wagoner  brings  his 
team  close  to  wagon,  and,  when  the  mast  is  down,  hitches  it  to 
the  wagon.     All  men  assist  in  packing  the  equipment  which  they 


THE  COMPANY  MOUNTED.  95 

unpacked.  When  all  the  apparatus  has  been  securely  packed 
the  chief  of  section  commands  stand  to  horse,  when  all  men 
proceed  to  their  horses  and  obey  this  command.  The  men  are 
then  mounted  and  the  section  formed  by  the  appropriate  com- 
mands. 

329.  In  opening  and  closing  station,  all  men  who  have  fin- 
ished the  duty  herein  assigned  to  them  may  be  directed  by  the 
chief   of   section    to   perform    such    other   duties   as    may   be 
necessary, 

CHAPTER  V.— THE  COMPANY  MOUNTED. 

330.  The  special  object  of  this  instruction  is  the  training  of 
the  personnel  of  the  company  with  a  view  to  mobility,  either  as 
separate  units  of  the  company  or  the  company  as  a  whole.    The 
company  should  be  so  trained  that  the  drill-ground  maneuvers 
may  be  executed  with  a  certain  degree  of  accuracy,  and  so  that 
in  the  field  a  complete  unit  to  perform  the  desired  duty  can  be 
detached  by  command  without   halting  the  column  or  inter- 
rupting in  any  way  the  march. 

331.  Much  of  the  instruction  can  be  advantageously  done  in 
platoon  and  section.    The  captain  completes  the  training  of  the 
company  as  a  whole. 

The  captain  should  require  the  section  mounted  and  the  platoon 
mounted,  properly  manned,  horsed,  and  equipped,  to  be  instructed 
by  their  chiefs  in  accordance  with  the  principles  prescribed  for 
The  Company  Mounted.  In  fact,  much  of  the  instruction  in 
signaling,  either  mounted  or  dismounted,  can  be  conducted  ad- 
vantageously in  this  manner. 

General  Provisions. 

332.  The  saber  will  not  be  used  except  at  ceremonies.    When 
the  captain  draws  saber  the  other  officers  will  also  draw  saber. 
When  mounted,  the  saber  is  habitually  attached  to  the  left  side 
of  the  saddle.     On  dismounting,  for  duties  connected  with  sig- 
naling, it  is  not  removed  from  the  saddle. 

333.  The  rests  are  executed  and  attention  resumed  according 
to  the  principles  already  explained. 


96  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

Organization  of  the  Company. 

334.  The  field  company  is  normally  organized  into  six  sec- 
tions, consisting  of  four  wire  sections  and  two  pack  wireless 
sections,  but  the  drill  is  suitable  for  any  number  of  sections. 

335.  A  field  wireless  company  is  normally  organized  into  six 
sections,   consisting   of  four   pack   wireless   sections   and   two 
wagon  wireless  sections. 

336.  For  drill,  the  company  may  be  formed  into  platoons  of 
two  sections  each.    The  two  wireless  sections  of  the  field  com- 
pany will  form  one  platoon,  which  will  normally  constitute  the 
ieft  platoon  of  the  company  in  order  in  line  or  the  rear  platoon 
in  order  in  section  column.    The  two  wagon  sections  of  the  field 
wireless  company  will  form  one  platoon,  which  will  constitute 
the  left  platoon  in  line  or  the  rear  platoon  in  column.     In  the 
field  or  on  the  march  the  remainder  of  the  combat  train  will 
form  a  fourth  platoon  under  command  of  the  supply  sergeant. 

Duties  of  Individuals. 

337.  The  captain  commands  the  company,  and  is  responsible 
for  its  training  and  efficiency. 

The  lieutenants  command  platoons,  and  will  be  assigned  to 
such  duties  as  the  captain  may  deem  necessary. 

The  master  signal  electricians  are  responsible  to  the  captain 
for  the  condition  of  the  technical  equipment  of  the  company. 

The  first  sergeant  is  the  assistant  of  the  captain,  and  is  re- 
sponsible to  him  for  the  general  good  order,  police,  and  dis- 
cipline of  the  company.  In  action  he  remains  with  the  captain 
and  under  his  immediate  orders. 

The  supply  sergeant  is  responsible  to  the  captain  for  the  care 
and  preservation  of  the  materiel  not  issued  to  the  sections. 

The  stable  sergeant  is  responsible  to  the  captain  for  the  gen- 
eral care  of  the  public  animals  assigned  to  the  company,  and  the 
good  order  and  police  of  the  stables  and  picket  lines,  etc. 

The  mechanics,  under  the  orders  of  the  supply  sergeant,  are 
responsible  for  the  repair  of  the  materiel  pertaining  to  the  com- 
pany. 

Chiefs  of  sections  command  the  sections  and  will  be  held 
responsible  to  the  captain  for  the  condition  of  their  equipment 
and  the  training  and  efficiency  of  their  sections. 


THE  COMPANY  MOUNTED.  97 

The  drivers  and  packers  are  directly  responsible  to  their 
chiefs  of  sections  for  their  animals,  harness,  and  equipment. 
They  will  report  at  once  to  their  chief  of  section  any  injury  to 
animals  or  materiel. 

The  operators  are  responsible  for  the  serviceable  condition  of 
their  instruments  and  will  report  at  once  to  their  chiefs  of 
sections  any  need  of  repairs. 

The  linemen  are  responsible  for  maintaining  the  section  lines 
intact.  They  will  carry  the  necessary  equipment,  and  will 
report  to  the  chief  of  section  at  once  if  their  materiel  is  not, 
in  their  possession. 

Messengers  are  responsible  for  the  delivery  of  all  messages, 
no  matter  what  the  conditions. 

Formation  of  the  Company  and  Posts  of  Individuals. 

338.  The  habitual  formations  are:  The  order  in  section  col- 
umn, the  order  in  line,  and  the  order  in  platoon  column. 

339.  The  order  in  section  column  is  that  in  which  the  sections 
of  the  company  follow  each  other  in  the  order,  or  the  reverse 
order,  of  their  numbers,  from  front  to  rear.     The  distance  be- 
tween the  mounted  men  and  carts  in  a  section  and  between 
sections  is  2  yards. 

If  the  sections  of  each  platoon  are  abreast,  the  formation  is 
called  the  order  in  platoon  column. 

340.  The  order  in   line. — The   sections  of  the   company  are 
formed  abreast  of  each  other  in  the  order,  or  the  reverse  order, 
of  their  numbers  from  right  to  left.    The  interval  between  the 
sections  is  that  'which  would  result  from  the  sections  moving 
from  the  order  in  section  column  by  the  flank. 

341.  In  platoon  column  the  distance  between  two  sections  is 
that  which  would  result  from  wheeling  the  platoons  from  the 
order  in  line  to  the  order  in  platoon  column,  and  the  interval 
between  the  sections  is  the  same  as  in  the  order  in  line. 

Posts  of  Individuals. 

342.  The  captain  in  order  in  line  is  8  yards  in  front  of  the 
company,  opposite  the  center.     In  order  in  section  column  he  is 
opposite  the  center  of  the  column  and  16  yards  from  the  flank. 

82940°— 11 7 


98  .      MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

In  order  in  platoon  column  the  captain,  except  at  ceremonies, 
is  posted  opposite  the  leading  section  of  the  center  platoon  and 
16  yards  from  its  flank.  In  column  the  captain  is  on  the  left 
when  the  first  section  leads  and  on  the  right  when  the  column 
is  reversed. 

The  chiefs  of  platoons. — In  order  in  line  they  are  posted  in 
line  with  the  leading  fours  of  their  platoons  and  midway  be- 
tween their  two  sections.  In  order  in  section  column  they  are 
4  yards  from  the  center  of  their  respective  platoons  and  on 
the  same  side  as  the  captain.  In  order  in  platoon  column  they 
are  posted  as  in  order  in  line. 

The  master  signal  electricians  are  posted  in  all  formations  oppo- 
site the  centers  of  the  first  and  third  platoons,  their  positions 
corresponding  to  that  of  the  first  sergeant. 

The  first  sergeant. — The  first  sergeant  is  posted  in  order  in 
line  4  yards  in  rear  of  the  center  platoon.  In  order  in  section 
column  and  in  platoon  column  he  is  on  the  flank  opposite  the 
captain  and  4  yards  from  the  center  of  the  center  platoon. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  are  posted  to  the  right  of  the  front  rank 
of  their  sections. 

The  guidon  in  line  and  in  platoon  column  is  abreast  of  the 
front  rank  of  the  company  and  2  yards  from  the  flank  toward 
which  the  guide  has  been  announced.  In  section  column  he  is 
abreast  of  and  2  yards  from  the  leading  chief  of  section. 

The  supply  and  stable  sergeants,  when  present  with  the  com- 
pany mounted,  are  posted  between  the  master  signal  electricians 
and  conform  to  the  movements  prescribed  for  them. 

The  trumpeters  follow  2  yards  in  rear  of  the  captain. 

343.  The  wire  carts  are  ordinarily  arranged  in  park  in 
order  in  line;  the  sections  arranged  from  right  to  left  in  the 
order  of  their  numbers.  The  aparejos  are  arranged  on  a  line  j 
with  the  front  of  the  poles  of  the  carts.  The  instrument  wagons 
and  other  transportation  may  be  arranged  in  a  similar  manner 
16  yards  in  rear,  or  the  whole  may  be  arranged  in  line,  as  cir- 
cumstances permit.  The  intervals  between  carts  and  wagons 
are  normally  the  same  as  when  the  company  is  in  the  order  in 
line.  The  picket  line  is  usually  mounted  on  the  carts  and 
wagons,  and  in  the  pack  wireless  sections  on  the  kit  mules  for 
bivouac  or  temporary  camp.  The  animals  of  the  sections  are 
always  tied  on  the  line  between  the  carts  or  wagons  in  the  order 
of  their  sections. 


THE  COMPANY  MOUNTED.  99 

To  Form  the  Company  Mounted. 

344.  The  company  is  formed  dismounted  and  marched  to  the 
stables  by  the  first  sergeant,  where  he  commands  by  section, 
FALL  OUT.    The  drivers  then  harness  their  teams  and  the  men 
saddle  their  horses,  under  the  direction  of  the  chief  of  section. 
The  latter  then  causes  the  wire  cart  of  his  section  to  be  hitched 
up,  verifies  and  makes  an  inspection  of  his  section,  causes  it  to 
mount,  and  reports  the  result  to  his  chief  of  platoon.    The  chiefs 
of  platoons  then  make  an  inspection  of  their  platoons,  after 
which  the  company  is  formed  under  the  direction  of  the  senior 
chief  of  platoon  and  brought  to  rest.     On  the  arrival  of  the 
company  commander  the  company  is  brought  to  attention  by  the 
senior  chief  of  platoon.     The  captain  then  commands  report. 
The  chiefs  of  platoons  then  report  in  the  order  of  rank  the 
result  of  the  verifications  and  inspections. 

345.  The  master  signal  electricians,  the  supply  and  stable 
sergeants,  if  present,  and  the  guidon,  take  their  posts  when  the 
company  is  formed.     The  trumpeters  report  to  the  captain  at 
such  time  and  place  as  he  may  direct.     The  chiefs  of  platoons 
join  their  platoons  at  the  stable  or  picket  line,  and  superintend 
the  formation  of  their  platoons. 

To  Dismiss  the  Company. 

346.  The  captain  commands:  Dismiss  the  company. 

The  chiefs  of  platoons  and  the  master  signal  electricians  fall 
out.  The  company  is  returned  to  the  stables  or  picket  line  by 
the  first  sergeant,  who  then  commands:  By  sect  ion,  FALL  OUT. 
The  chiefs  of  sections  then  supervise  the  placing  of  the  trans- 
portation under  shelter  or  in  park ;  the  horses  in  the  stable  or  on 
the  picket  line;  and  see  that  horse  equipment  and  harness  has 
been  properly  put  away,  and  that  all  equipment  has  been  prop- 
erly disposed. 

347.  The  section  column  is  the  habitual  column  of  route.    The 
mounted  men  of  the  wire  sections  may,  when  conditions  require 
it,  be  formed  in  column  of  twos  instead  of  column  of  fours.    Be- 
ing in  march,  route  order  or  at  ease  are  executed  according  to 
the    principles    already    prescribed.     Sabers    are    returned    if 
drawn.    To  resume  attention  the  captain  commands:  Company, 
ATTENTION. 


100  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

The  captain  marches  8  yards  in  front  of  the  leading  element, 
followed  at  2  yards  distance  by  the  trumpeters  and  guidon,  the 
latter  on  the  right;  the  chiefs  of  platoons  usually  march  near 
the  rear  of  their  platoons,  but  they  and  the  chiefs  of  sections 
may  go  wherever  their  presence  is  necessary;  the  file  closers 
close  in  on  the  column. 

348.  To  avoid  dust,  the  captain  may  direct  the  officers  and 
file  closers  to  march  on  the  windward  side. 

Constant  attention  should  be  given  by  each  officer  and  chief 
of  section  in  order  to  insure  the  proper  handling  of  teams  and 
mounts  and  the  adjustment  of  equipment  and  harness.  They 
should  see  that  no  horse  is  overheated  and  that  each  team 
horse  does  his  share  of  work,  that  distance  is  preserved,  and 
that  no  men  or  carriages  move  at  a  faster  gait  than  that 
ordered. 

No  practice  is  more  fatiguing  to  men  and  injurious  to  horses 
than  the  alternate  trotting  and  walking  so  often  seen  at  the 
rear  of  a  column. 

At  halts  on  slopes,  vehicles  should  be  turned  at  right  angles 
to  the  road,  so  that  the  horses  may  be  eased. 

Commands  and  Signals. 

349.  Commands  are  given  by  the  captain,  either  verbally,  by 
trumpet  signals,  or  by  signals  made  by  the  arm.    When  verbal 
commands  are  given   by   the  captain   they   should  be  supple- 
mented by  the  appropriate  trumpet  or  arm  signals. 

350.  Chiefs  of  platoons  repeat  the  commands  of  the  captain, 
or  give  appropriate  commands  to  their  platoons  in  time  to  in- 
sure the   proper   execution   of  the  movement.     The  chiefs  of 
platoons    ordinarily    give    their    commands    verbally,    supple- 
mented, if  necessary,  by  the  appropriate  arm  signal,  and  see  to 
it  that  the  commands  'of  the  captain  are  understood  and  cor- 
rectly executed  by  their  platoons.     If  the  chief  of  a  platoon 
does  not  hear  a  command,  he  governs  himself  by  what  he  sees 
executed  by  the  adjoining  platoon. 

351.  Chiefs  of  sections  repeat  the  commands  of  the  chiefs  of 
platoons   or   give   appropriate   commands  to   their   sections   in 
time  to  insure  the  proper  execution  of  the  movement.     Chiefs 
of  sections  ordinarily  give  their  commands  by  signals  with  the 


THE  COMPANY  MOUNTED.  101 

arm,  supplemented,  if  necessary,  by  verbal  commands,  and  see 
to  it  that  the  command  is  understood  and  correctly  executed. 

Arm  Signals. 

352.  Signals  are  ordinarily  made  with  the  right  arm,  but 
may  be  made  with  the  left  arm  when  convenient.     If  the  saber 
is  in  the  hand,  the  signals  are  made  in  a  manner  similar  to 
that  prescribed  for  the  arm. 

353.  Ordinarily,  before  making  a  signal  for  the  execution  of 
a  movement,  the  captain  places  himself  where  he  can  be  seen  by 
the  company,  generally  with  his  horse  facing  in  the  same  direc- 
tion as  the  horses  of  the  company,  and  commands  or  signals 
attention,  or  causes  it  to  be  sounded  on  the  bugle.    The  captain 
may  signal  attention  by  a  long  blast  on  a  whistle.    The  signals 
prescribed  for  the  different  movements  are  the  preparatory  sig- 
nals; for  the  signal  of  execution  the  arm  is  extended  vertically 
and  then  lowered  quickly  to  the  side.    If  the  movement  involves 
a  change  in  the  direction  of  march,  the  captain  moves  his  horse 
in  the  new  direction  on  making  the  preparatory  signal. 

Preparatory  Signals. 

354.  Attention. — Extend  the  arm  vertically  and  move  it  slowly 
back  and  forth  from  right  to  left. 

Forward. — Extend  the  arm  vertically  and  lower  it  to  the  front 
until  horizontal. 

By  the  right  (left)  flank. — Extend  the  arm  vertically  and  lower 
it  to  the  right  (left)  until  horizontal. 

Right  (left)  about. — Extend  the  arm  vertically  and  describe 
slowly  a  large  horizontal  circle  with  the  hand ;  then  extend  the 
arm  to  the  left  (right)  and  describe  a  horizontal  arc  to  front 
and  right  (left). 

Right  (left)  oblique. — Extend  the  arm  obliquely  upward  to  the 
right  (left)  and  front,  and  then  lower  the  arm,  describing  a 
vertical  circle  on  the  right  (left)  side  of  the  horse. 

To  increase  the  gait. — Carry  the  hand  to  the  shoulder,  forearm 
vertical;  extend  the  arm  vertically  from  this  position  and  re- 
peat several  times. 

To  decrease  the  gait. — Hold  the  arm  horizontally  above  and 
in  front  of  the  forehead. 


102  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

To  indicate  an  increased  or  decreased  gait  for  a  maneuver, 
the  appropriate  signal  is  made  just  after  the  preparatory  signal 
for  the  maneuver. 

To  halt. — Extend  the  arm  vertically  and  hold  it  there  until  the 
signal  is  obeyed. 

To  change  direction  to  the  right  (left). — Extend  the  arm  ver- 
tically; lower  it  to  the  left  (right)  until  horizontal  and  describe 
a  horizontal  arc  to  the  front  and  right  (left). 

Right  (left)  by  section.— Point  at  the  right  (left)  section  and 
signal  forward. 

Right  (left)  front  into  line. — Extend  the  arm  vertically  and 
describe  several  large  vertical  circles  on  the  right  (left)  side 
of  the  horse. 

Maneuvers  of  the  Company. 

355.  The  guide  of  a  section  is  the  section  commander.    Chiefs 
of  sections  supervise  the  gait  and  direction  of  march  of  their 
sections.     In  section  column,  the  guide  of  the  leading  section  is 
the  guide  of  the  company. 

356.  The  guide  of  the  company  in  line  is  the  guide  of  the 
right  or  left  section. 

357.  During  an  oblique  march  the  guide  of  the  company  is, 
without  indication,  the  guide  of  the  leading  section  on  the  side 
to  which  the  oblique  is  made. 

358.  The  guidon  always  posts  himself  as  prescribed  in  para- 
graph 342.    Should  the  guide  be  changed,  he  hastens  to  his  new 
post,  except  that  he  does  not  change  post  during  an  oblique 
movement.    With  this  exception,  the  guide  is  always  toward 
the  guidon. 

Gaits. 

359.  In  changes  of  formation,  the  section  which  establishes 
the  new  direction  and  rate  of  march  will  be  termed  the  direct- 
ing section. 

360.  The  following  rules  govern  the  gaits  during  changes  of 
formation  : 

361.  Rule  No.  1:  When  a  change  of  formation  requires  cer- 
tain sections  to  gain  ground  so  as  to  reach  specified  positions 
abreast  of  the  directing  section,  the  captain  may  or  may  not 
announce  an  increased  gait  for  the  movement.    If  he  announces 


THE  COMPANY  MOUNTED.  103 

an  increased  gait,  the  directing  section  maintains  its  gait;  the 
other  sections  move  at  the  gait  announced  until  they  have 
reached  their  new  position,  when  they  take  the  gait  of  the  di- 
recting section. 

If  the  captain  does  not  announce  an  increased  gait,  the  direct- 
ing section  reduces  its  gait  one  degree ;  the  others  maintain  their 
gait  until  they  reach  their  new  positions,  when  they  take  the 
gait  of  the  directing  section.  If  the  movement  is  executed  from 
a  halt  or  while  marching  at  a  walk,  and  an  increase  of  gait  is 
not  ordered,  the  directing  section  advances  toward  the  front  of 
the  new  formation  and  halts  at  the  command  of  the  captain. 

Rule  No.  2:  When  a  change  of  formation  requires  the  directing 
section  to  gain  ground  in  order  to  precede  the  other  sections, 
the  captain  may  or  may  not  announce  an  increased  gait  for  the 
movement.  If  he  announces  an  increased  gait,  the  directing 
section  takes  the  increased  gait  at  once,  the  other  sections  take 
it  up  so  as  to  follow  the  movement  in  their  proper  order. 

If  the  captain  does  not  announce  an  increased  gait,  the  direct- 
ing section  maintains  its  gait,  the  others  reduce  the  gait  one 
degree,  and  take  the  gait  of  the  directing  section  in  time  to 
follow  the  movement  in  their  proper  order.  If  the  movement  is 
executed  from  a  halt  or  while  marching  at  a  walk  and  an  in- 
crease of  gait  is  not  ordered,  the  directing  section  moves  at  a 
walk,  the  others  remain  halted  or  halt  and  take  up  the  gait  of 
the  directing  section  as  before  explained. 

Reducing  gait  one  degree  is  to  be  understood  as  passing  from 
the  gallop  to  the  trot,  from  the  trot  to  the  walk,  or  from  the 
walk  to  the  halt.  Increasing  the  gait  one  degree  is  the  reverse 
of  this. 

To  Align  the  Company. 

362.  The  company  being  at  a  halt. 

If  the  section  on  the  side  toward  which  the  alignment  is  to 
be  made  is  not  in  proper  position,  the  captain  establishes  it 
in  the  position  desired,  and  commands :  1.  Right  (left),  2.  DRESS, 
3.  FRONT.  At  the  command  dress  the  other  sections  move  for- 
ward or  backward,  the  chiefs  of  sections  aligning  themselves; 
the  men  and  drivers  turn  their  heads  to  the  right  and  dress  on 
their  corresponding  elements  in  the  section  on  their  right.  The 
captain  places  himself  on  the  right  of  the  leading  element  of 
the  right  section,  facins  to  the  left.  He  quickly  establishes  the 


104  MOUNTED  INSTKTJCTION. 

leading  element  of  the  next  section  to  arrive  on  the  line,  and 
superintends  the  alignment  of  the  other  sections  as  they  arrive 
on  the  line.  The  captain  then  commands  front,  and  takes  his 
post. 

To  March  to  the  Front. 

363.  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  simultaneously  by  all  the  sections  moving  straight 
to  the  front,  taking  care  to  maintain  their  proper  relative  posi- 
tions in  the  formation. 

To  Halt. 

364.  1.  Company,  2.  HALT. 

Executed  by  all  sections  stopping  simultaneously,  but  not 
suddenly. 

To  March  by  the  Flank. 

365.  1.  By  the  right  (left)  flank,  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  simultaneously  by  all  the  sections  executing  column 
right,  as  prescribed  in  paragraph  224,  the  carts  following  in  rear 
of  the  mounted  men. 

366.  If  the  company  is  in  line,  with  closed  intervals,  the 
following  modifications  apply:    The  movement   is   successive; 
the  section  on  the  indicated  flank  begins  the  movement  by  exe- 
cuting column  right ;  the  others  take  it  up  in  turn  so  as  to  fol- 
low, at  the  proper  distance,  in  the  track  of  the  sections  which 
preceded  them.     If  executed  while  marching,  all  the  sections, 
except  the  one  on  the  indicated  flank,  halt  and  then  resume  the 
march  so  as  to  follow  at  the  proper  distance  in  the  column. 

To  March  to  the  Rear. 

367.  1.  Right  (left)  about;  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  simultaneously  by  all  sections  moving  to  the  right 
and  rear  over  half  a  circle  with  a  radius  of  4  yards,  taking  care 
to  quickly  track  the  section  preceding  them  in  the  new  forma- 
tion, if  the  company  was  in  column  at  the  command,  or  to 
promptly  take  up  the  announced  guide  if  it  was  in  line. 

368.  If  the  company  is  in  line  with  closed  intervals,  the  fol- 
lowing  modifications  apply;  The   captain   first   commands:  1. 


THE  COMPANY  MOUNTED.  105 

Right  sections  forward,  2.  MARCH.  The  right  section  of  each 
platoon  moves  forward  so  as  to  clear  the  left  section.  If  the 
captain  orders  an  increased  gait  for  the  maneuver  the  right 
sections  take  the  gait  indicated;  if  an  increased  gait  is  not  or- 
dered the  left  sections  reduce  the  gait  one  degree,  or,  if  halted, 
they  remain  halted.  As  soon  as  the  right  sections  are  clear  of 
the  left  sections  the  captain  gives  the  command  for  the  about, 
which  is  executed  by  all  the  sections  at  the  gait  of  the  right 
sections.  On  the  completion  of  the  about  the  sections  in  real- 
increase  the  gait  so  as  to  move  up  to  their  positions  in  line. 

Being  in  Line  or  Column,  to  March  Obliquely. 

369.  1.  Sections,  2.  Column  half  right  (left),  3.  MARCH. 

All  the  sections  execute  column  half  right  simultaneously,  as 
previously  described.  The  sections  move  on  parallel  lines.  The 
guide  of  each  section  takes  care  to  align  himself  on  the  guide 
of  the  section  toward  which  the  movement  is  made*  To  resume 
the  original  direction,  the  command  will  be:  1.  Sections,  2. 
Column  half  left  (right),  3.  MARCH. 

To   Change  Direction. 

370.  Being   in    section    column:    1.    Column    right    (left),    2. 
MARCH. 

The  leading  section  executes  column  right,  as  explained  in 
paragraph  224 ;  the  sections  in  rear  follow  the  leading  section 
and  turn  on  the  same  ground. 

Column  half  right  (half  left)  is  similarly  executed,  except  that 
the  turn  is  only  one-eighth  of  a  circle. 

371.  Being  in  line:  1.  Company  right  (left)  turn,  2.  MARCH, 
3.  Guide  right  (left),  or  3.  Company,  4.  HALT.     The  pivot  section 
executes  column  right.    The  other  sections  increase  the  gait 
one  degree,  preserving  their  intervals  from  the  pivot  section 
and  take  the  gait  of  the  latter  on  arriving  abreast  of  it. 

Company  right  half  (left  half)  turn  is  similarly  executed,  ex- 
cept that  the  pivot  section  executes  column  half  right. 

If  the  company  is  marching  at  a  gallop,  the  pivot  section 
will  take  the  canter  at  the  command  march;  the  other  sections 
will  take  the  canter  when  abreast  of  the  directing  section. 
When  all  of  the  sections  are  in  line,  the  captain  commands: 
1.  Gallop,  2.  MARCH,  3.  GUIDE  RIGHT  (LEFT). 


106  MOUNTED  INSTBUCTION. 

To  Close  or  Extend  Intervals  in  Line. 

372.  1.    On    (such)    section ,    2.    Close    (extend)    intervals,    3. 
MARCH. 

The  normal  closed  interval  is  8  yards.  If  the  captain  wishes 
any  other  interval  than  the  normal  closed  or  normal  interval  to 
be  taken,  he  announces  the  interval  before  giving  the  second 
command;  for  example:  1.  On  first  sect/on,  2.  To  20  yards, 
3.  Extend  intervals,  4.  MARCH. 

The  indicated  section  moves  straight  to  the  front,  the  other 
sections  incline  toward  or  away  from  the  indicated  section  and 
move  to  the  front  when  at  the  proper  interval.  Rule  No.  1 
governs  the  gait. 

To  Form  Section  Column  to  the  Front  from  Line. 

373.  1.  Right  (left)  by  section,  2.  MARCH. 

The  right  section  moves  straight  to  the  front.  The  other 
sections,  in  turn,  move  by  the  right  flank  and  follow  in  the 
column  at  2  yards  distance.  Rule  2,  paragraph  361,  governs 
the  gait. 

To  Form  Line  from  Section  Column. 

374.  To  the  front:  1.  Right  (left)  front  into  line,  2.  MARCH. 

The  leading  section  moves  straight  to  the  front.  Each  sec- 
tion in  rear  executes  column  half  right  until  opposite  its  place 
in  line,  when  it  executes  column  half  left,  moves  to  the  front, 
and  takes  its  place  on  the  line.  Rule  No.  1,  paragraph  361, 
governs  the  gait. 

375.  On    the   right    (left):  1.  On    right    (left)    into    line,    2. 
MARCH. 

The  leading  section  executes  column  right  and  then  moves 
straight  to  the  front  in  the  new  direction ;  the  other  sections 
move  forward  beyond  the  preceding  sections,  and  successively 
execute  column  right  when  by  so  doing  they  will  be  opposite 
their  positions  in  line  with  proper  intervals,  and  then  move 
forward  until  abreast  of  the  leading  section.  When  an  in- 
creased gait  is  ordered,  all  of  the  sections  will  take  it,  but  the 
leading  section  will  resume  the  original  gait  when  it  has  turned 
out  of  column.  If  moving  at  a  trot  or  gallop  and  no  increased 


THE  COMPANY  MOUNTED.  107 

gait  is  ordered,  the  leading  section,  after  completing  the  turn, 
will  decrease  its  gait  one  degree.  As  here  modified,  Rule  No.  1, 
paragraph  361,  for  gaits  applies. 

376.  To  form  line  at  closed  intervals  the  captain  commands: 
At  closed  intervals,  before  giving  the  prescribed  commands  for 
forming  line;  the  company  is  then  formed  with  8  yards  inter- 
vals instead  of  the  normal  intervals. 

377.  To  form  the  mounted  men  of  the  section  in  line.     This 
will  always  be  done  to  the  left. 

1.  Sections,  2.  Left  front  into  line,  3.  MARCH,  4.  Sections  HALT, 
or,  4.  GUIDE  RIGHT. 

In  the  wire  and  wagon  wireless  sections  this  will  be  executed 
as  prescribed  in  paragraph  226,  The  Soldier  Mounted,  for 
forming  left  front  into  line  from  column  of  fours. 

The  cart  closes  up  to  4  yards  in  rear  of  the  right  four. 

In  the  pack  wireless  sections,  this  will  be  executed  by  forming 
two  lines,  4  yards  apart,  the  first  being  composed  of  the  men  not 
leading  mules,  the  second  being  composed  of  the  pack  mules 
and  their  leaders.  Each  line  is  formed  in  a  manner  similar  to 
that  described  in  paragraph  226,  The  Soldier  Mounted. 

To  Re-form  the  Sections  in  the  Normal  Formation. 

378.  1.  Sections,  2.  Right  by  fours,  3.  MARCH,  4.  GUIDE  RIGHT 
(LEFT). 

The  right  four  of  each  section  moves  straight  to  the  front; 
the  other  fours  successively  oblique  to  the  right  front  so  as  to 
follow  the  leading  four  at  the  proper  distance.  The  cart  follows 
the  rear  four  at  2  yards  distance. 

Rule  2,  paragraph  361,  governs  the  gaits. 

To  Form  the  Mounted  Men  in  Column  of  Twos  or  Files. 

379.  1.  By  twos  (or  files),  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  section  as  indicated  in  The  Soldier  Mounted. 
If  in  section  column,  this  movement  will  be  a  successive  one, 
throughout  the  column. 

To  Re-form  the  Mounted  Men  in  Column  of  Fours. 

380.  1.  Form  fours,  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  section  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  pre- 
scribed in  The  Soldier  Mounted. 


108  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

To  Form  Platoon  Column  From  Section  Column. 

881.  1.  Platoons,  2.  Right  (left)  front  into  line,  3.  MARCH. 

The  leading  section  of  each  platoon  moves  straight  to  the 
front.  The  rear  section  executes  column  half  right  and  then 
column  half  left,  when  by  so  doing  it  will  have  its  normal  inter- 
val from  the  leading  section. 

Rule  No.  1,  paragraph  361,  governs  the  gaits. 

To  Form  Section  Column  From  Platoon  Column. 

382.  1.  Left  (right)  by  section,  2.  MARCH. 

The  left  sections  of  the  platoons  move  straight  to  the  front. 
The  right  sections  execute  column  half  left  and  then  column 
half  right,  and  follow  in  the  rear  of  the  leading  sections. 

Rule  No.  2  governs  the  gaits. 

Being  in  Line,  to  Form  Platoon  Column,  to  the  Right  (or  Left). 

383.  1.  Platoons,    2.  Right    (left)    turn,    3.    MARCH,    4.    GUIDE 
(RIGHT  or  LEFT),  or,  4.  Company,  5.  HALT. 

The  right  section  of  each  platoon  executes  column  right.  The 
other  sections  increase  the  gait  one  degree,  preserving  their 
interval  from  the  right  section,  and  take  the  gait  of  the  latter 
on  arriving  abreast  of  it. 

Being  in  Platoon  Column,  to  Form  Line  to  the  Left  (or  Right). 

384.  1.  Platoons,    2.  Left    (right)    turn,    3.  MARCH,    4.  GUIDE 
(RIGHT  or  LEFT),  or,  4.  Company,  5.  HALT. 

Executed  as  prescribed  in  the  preceding  paragraph. 

CHAPTER  VI.— THE  BATTALION  MOUNTED. 
Organization  and  Formation  of  the  Battalion. 

385.  A  field  battalion  of  the  Signal  Corps  may  consist  of  two 
or  three  field  companies  and  of  the  authorized  staff  and  non- 
commissioned staff.     It  is  commanded  by  a  major. 


THE  BATTALION  MOUNTED.  109 

386.  The  field  staff  and  noncommissioned  staff,  etc.,  of  a  bat- 
talion are  as  follows : 

One  major  commands  the  battalion. 

One  adjutant  (captain). 

One  supply  officer,  Quartermaster,  and  commissary  (captain). 

One  sergeant  major,  assistant  to  adjutant  (master  signal 
electrician). 

One  supply  sergeant,  assistant  to  supply  officer  (first-class 
sergeant). 

Two  color  sergeants  (sergeants). 

Three  privates,  orderlies  (one  of  whom  shall  be  a  trumpeter). 

387.  The  normal  formations  of  the  battalion  are:  The  order 
in  line,  order  in  section  column,  and  order  in  platoon  column. 

The  individual  companies  are  formed  as  in  paragraphs  338- 
340.  In  each  case  the  formation  of  the  battalion  is  analogous 
thereto. 

388.  In  the  order  in  line  the  interval  between  companies  is 
twice  the   interval   between    sections.      The   distance   between 
companies  in  order  in  section  column  is  section  distance.     The 
distance  between  companies  in  order  in  platoon  column  is  platoon 
distance. 

389.  If  the  battalion  is  formed  in  column,  with  its  companies 
each  formed  in  the  order  in  line,  the  formation  is  called  a  col- 
umn of  companies.    The  distance  between  companies  is  equal  to 
the  company  front,  when  at  full  distance;  it  is  section  distance 
when  at  closed  distance.     When  the  battalion  is  in  column  of 
companies  at  closed  distances,  it  is  said  to  be  closed  in  mass. 

390.  At  formations  of  the  battalion  the  companies  habitually 
take  their  places  from  right  to  left  in  line  and  from  front  to 
rear  in  column,  in  the  order  of  rank  of  their  captains. 

Companies  whose  captains  are  absent  take  their  places  in 
line  or  column  according  to  the  relative  rank  of  the  officers 
present  in  command  of  them.  A  company  whose  captain  is 
absent  for  a  few  days  only  retains  its  place,  according  to  the 
rank  of  the  captain,  unless  otherwise  ordered  by.  the  major. 

After  the  formation  of  the  battalion  no  cognizance  is  taken 
of  the  relative  order  of  the  companies.  On  marches  the  major 
ordinarily  varies  from  day  to  day  the  relative  order  of  the  com- 
panies in  column. 


110  MOUNTED  INSTRUCTION. 

TO  FORM  THE  BATTALION. 
Posts  of  Individuals. 

391.  At  ceremonies,  the  major  is  30  yards  in  front  of  his 
battalion,  opposite  the  center.     On  other  occasions  he  places 
himself  where  he  can  most  readily  observe  and  direct  his  bat- 
talion.   The  commissioned  staff  is  posted  2  yards  in  rear  of  the 
major,   in  order  of  rank  from  right  to  left ;   the  noncommis- 
sioned staff  and  the  trumpeter,   similarly  formed,  2  yards  in 
rear  of  the  commissioned  staff. 

392.  To  form  the  battalion  in  line,  the  adjutant  causes  ad- 
jutant's call  to  be  sounded;  the  adjutant  and  sergeant  major 
proceed  to  the  selected  ground  and  post  themselves  facing  each 
other  a  few  yards  outside  the  points  where  the  right  and  left 
of  the  right  company  of  the  battalion  are  to  rest. 

The  companies  approach  the  line  from  the  rear  and  are  posted 
in  succession  from  right  to  left  by  their  captains,  so  that  the 
front  rank  will  be  on  the  line  established  by  the  adjutant  and 
sergeant  major.  After  halting  his  company,  each  captain 
aligns  it  toward  the  right,  as  prescribed  in  paragraph  362. 

The  battalion  in  line  is  formed  on  the  same  principle  as  the 
company,  in  the  line  the  interval  between  companies  being  6 
yards. 

When  the  company  that  arrives  first  on  the  line  has  been 
established,  the  sergeant  major  joins  the  battalion  noncommis- 
sioned staff. 

The  line  being  formed,  the  major  and  his  staff  take  post,  fac- 
ing the  center  of  the  battalion.  The  adjutant  then  moves  at  a 
trot  or  gallop  by  the  shortest  line  to  a  point  midway  between 
the  major  and  the  center  of  the  battalion,  halts,  facing  the 
major,  salutes  with  the  right  hand,  and  reports:  Sir,  the  bat- 
talion is  formed. 

The  major  returns  the  salute  with  the  right  hand. 

The  adjutant  then  takes  his  post  with  the  battalion  staff. 

393.  The  battalion  may  also  be  assembled  in  any  other  con- 
venient formation.     In  such  cases,  as  soon  as  the  last  company 
has  taken  its  place  the  adjutant  joins  the  major  and  reports 
to  him  that  the  battalion  is  formed. 

394.  Officers  draw  and  return  saber  with  the  major.    At  cere- 
monies, sabers  are  habitually  drawn;  at  other  times,  they  are 
drawn  or  kept  in.  the  scabbard  at  the  discretion  of  the  major. 


THE  BATTALION  MOUNTED.  Ill 

395.  To  align  the  battalion. — To  effect  a  general  alignment  the 
major  causes  one  of  the  flank  companies  to  be  established  in  the 
desired  position,  and  commands:  1.  By  company,  2.  Right  (left), 
3.  DRESS. 

Each  captain  in  turn,  commencing  with  the  company  first 
posted,  aligns  his  company  toward  the  flank  designated,  and 
commands  front  when  the  alignment  is  complete. 

The  captain  of  the  company  first  established  superintends  the 
alignment  from  the  flank  of  his  company  nearest  the  point  of 
rest.  The  captains  of  the  other  companies  superintend  the 
alignment  from  the  flank  of  their  companies  farthest  from  the 
point  of  rest. 

396.  To  dismiss  the  battalion. — The  major  commands :  Dismiss 
your  companies,  or  sends  appropriate  instructions  to  the  captains. 
Each  captain  marches  his  company  to  its  park  and  dismisses  it. 

Maneuvers  of  the  Battalion. 

397.  Formal  maneuvers  of  the  battalion  are  of  limited  appli- 
cation. 

For  passing  from  one  formation  to  another,  and  for  the  simple 
evolutions  requisite  for  ceremonies  and  the  ordinary  incidents 
of  service,  the  battalion  is  maneuvered  in  accordance  with  the 
principles  heretofore  prescribed  for  a  single  company  and  by 
similar  commands.  In  the  case  of  simultaneous  movements, 
such  as  marching  to  the  front,  to  the  flank,  to  the  rear,  obliquely, 
etc.,  the  command  or  signal  of  execution  of  the  major  is  im- 
mediately repeated  by  the  captains  and  simultaneously  exe- 
cuted by  the  companies.  In  the  case  of  successive  movements, 
the  captains  maneuver  their  companies  so  as  to  cause  them  to 
assume  their  proper  positions  by  the  shortest  route  and  in 
conformity  with  the  principles  of  the  rules  of  gaits. 

398.  The  commands  of  the  major  are  transmitted  by  order- 
lies or  given  by  arm,  saber,  or  trumpet  signals,  or  by  word  of 
mouth.     The  captains  habitually  repeat  the  commands  of  the 
major,  or  give  such  commands  as  may  be  necessary  to  insure 
the  execution   of  the  movement.     Their   commands   are   given 
by  arm  or  saber  signal,  or  by  word  of  mouth.     The  whistle,  and 
not  the  trumpet,  is  habitually  used  to  attract  attention  to  the 
signals  of  the  captain  during  the  evolutions  of  the  battalion. 


PART  IV. 

CARES  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

CHAPTER  I.— TRAINING  OF  HORSES. 
399.  Skeleton  of  the  Horse. 


PI.   19,   Par.  399. 

A.  Molar  teeth. 

5,  5,  Lumbar    vertebrae. 

26,  Inner    small    ineta- 

B   II,  Canine  or  tush. 

6,  6,  Sacrum. 

carpal  bone. 

C    I,   Incisors. 

7,  7,  Coccygeal       verte- 

27, 28,  Sesamoid   bones. 

K,  Atlas. 

brae. 

L'9,  Os  suffraginis. 

(J.  Orbit. 

8,  Sternum. 

80,  Os  corona?. 

M.    Cariniform   carti- 

9, 9,  True  ribs. 

31,  Os  pedis. 

lage. 

10,  10,  Cartilages       o  f 

32,  Wing   of   the   pedal 

N,   Ensiform  cartilage. 

true  ribs. 

bone. 

O,  Coracoid  process  of 

11,  11,  False  ribs. 

33,  34,  35,  36,  Os      in- 

scapula. 

12,  12,  Cartilages        o  f 

nominatum. 

P,  Spine. 

false  ribs. 

37,  Femur. 

Q,  Cartilage. 

13,  Scapula. 

38,  Tibia. 

R,  Trochanter  major. 

14,  Humerus. 

39,  Os  calcis. 

S,  Subtrochant  e  r  i  a  n 

15,  Radius. 

40,  Astragalus. 

crest. 

16,  Elbow. 

41,   42,   43,   44,   Tarsal 

T,  Trochlea. 

17,  Os  pisiforme. 

bones. 

U,  External  condyle. 

18,   19,   20,  21,   22,  23, 

45,  Large       metatarsal 

V,  Patella. 

Carpal   bones. 

bone. 

W,  Hock  joint. 

24,  Large      rnetacarpal 

46,  Outer    small    metp- 

1,  Cranium. 

bone. 

tarsal  bone. 

l_',  Lower  jaw. 

25,  Outer    small    meta- 

47,  Inner    small    meta- 

3, Cervical  vertebra?. 

carpal  bone. 

tarsal  bone. 

4,  4,  Dorsal  vertebra?. 

112 

TRAINING  OF  HORSES. 
400.  Points  of  the  Horse. 


113 


Head. 

1,  Muzzle. 

2,  Nostril. 

3,  Forehead. 

4,  Jaw. 

5,  Poll. 

Neck. 

6,  6,  Crest. 

7,  Throttle    or    wind- 

pipe. 

Fore  quarter. 

8,  8,  Shoulder  blade. 

9,  Point    of    shoulder. 

10,  Bosom  or  breast. 

11,  11,  True  arm. 

12,  Elbow. 

13,  Fore  arm   (arm). 

14,  Knee. 

15,  Cannon  bone. 

82940°— 11 


PI.  20,   Par.   400. 

16,  Back   sinew. 

17,  Fetlock   or    pastern 

joint. 

18,  Coronet. 

19,  Hoof  or  foot. 

20,  Heel. 

Body  or  Middle  piece. 

21,  Withers. 

22,  Back. 

23,  23,  Ribs       (forming 

together  the  bar- 
rel or  chest). 

24,  24,  The     circumfer- 

ence of  the  chest 
at  this  point, 
called  the  girth. 

25,  The  loins. 

26,  The   croup. 

27,  The   hip. 

28,  The  flank. 

29,  Sheath. 


30,  The     root     of     the 

dock  or  tail. 

Hind  quarter.         • 

31,  The    hip     joint, 

round,    or    whirl 
bone. 

32,  The  stifle  joint. 

33,  33,  Lower   thigh   or 

gaskin. 

34,  The  quarters. 

35,  The  hock. 

36,  The    point    of    the 

hock. 

37,  The  curb  place. 

38,  The  cannon  bone. 

39,  The  back  sinew. 

40,  Pastern    or    fetlock 

joint. 

41,  Coronet. 

42,  Hoof  or  foot. 

43,  Heel. 

44,  Spavin  place. 


114  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

401.  Signal  Corps  officers  should  make  themselves  thoroughly 
acquainted  with  the  natural  history  and  structure  of  the  horse, 
and  what  effects  different  modes  of  treatment,  changes  of  diet, 
etc.,  have  on  his  system  and  powers  of  endurance.     An  officer 
deficient  in  such  knowledge  will  either  have  his  company  con- 
stantly  lacking  in   efficiency   and  reliability,   or   else  make  it 
necessary  to  expend  a  large  amount  to  keep  him  supplied  with 
remounts.      Officers   should   also   make   themselves   acquainted 
with  the  best  methods  of  breaking  and  training  horses. 

All  Signal  Corps  officers  should  be  familiar  with  the  diseases 
that  are  commonly  met  with  in  horses;  they  should  know  their 
symptoms,  mode  of  treatment,  what  to  do  in  emergencies,  and 
have  a  good  knowledge  of  the  effects  produced  by  the  medicines 
supplied  to  the  company. 

It  is  the  duty  of  the  company  commander  to  instruct  his  offi- 
cers in  these  things,  as  they  are  a  very  important  part  of  the 
knowledge  that  should  be  possessed  by  every  Signal  Corps 
officer. 

402.  The  horse  is  considered  as  an  animal  of  a  single  idea, 
and  that  he  has  no  reasoning  faculties  beyond  the  limits  of  his 
experience,  and  consequently  we  reason  with  him  by  acts  alone, 
his  natural  movement  being  away  from  that  which  hurts  him 
or  excites  his  fear.     Early  impressions  are  seldom  forgotten, 
and  it   is  important  that  each  move  be  correctly  begun.     In 

^familiarizing  him  with  objects  that  excite  his  fear,  the  horse 
should  be  allowed  to  smell  or  touch  them  with  his  nostrils,  for 
in  a  certain  sense  they  are  to  him  what  the  fingers  are  to  man. 
Invariable  rules  can  not  be  laid  down  for  the  proper  training 
of  all  horses,  as  it  will  be  found  that  each  horse  requires  special 
treatment. 

403.  Horses  are  trained  by  the  best  horsemen,   under  the 
supervision  of  an  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer ;  and  the 
men  employed  in  this  part  of  the  horse's  education  are  selected 
for   their  natural   fondness  for  animals  as  well   as  for  their 
patience,  coolness,  and  intelligence. 

The  horse  is  made  gentle  and  obedient,  and  his  powers  and 
qualities  are  best  developed  by  patience,  kindness,  encourage- 
ment, and  fearlessness;  punishment  is  resorted  to  only  when 
necessary,  and  then  only  administered  after  the  commission  of 
the  offense,  that  he  may  know  why  he  is  punished.  No  punish- 
ment should  ever  be  administered  to  the  horse  in  anger.  Under 


TRAINING  OF  HORSES.  115 

harsh  treatment  he  will  become  timid,  then  sullen,  and  at  length 
iolent  and  unmanageable. 

Restlessness  and  impatience  frequently  arise  from  exuberance 
of  spirits  or  playfulness,  which  must  be  carefully  distinguished 
from  that  which  arises  from  viciousness  and  timidity.  When 
restless,  the  horse  should  be  handled  quietly  until  he  becomes 
calm ;  when  submissive  after  punishment,  he  should  be  treated 
kindly. 

As  one  horse  is  apt  to  be  governed  by  the  actions  of  another, 
trained  horses  that  are  indifferent  to  such  sounds  should  be 
nterspersed  among  the  new  ones  when  accustoming  them  to 
firing,  beating  of  drums,  etc. 

The  first  object  to  be  attained  in  training  the  horse  is  to 
gain  his  confidence  and  render  him  gentle  and  tractable.  For 
;his  purpose,  all  proper  means  must  be  employed,  such  as  feed- 
ng,  handling,  patting  him,  taking  up  his  feet,  etc.,  and  the 
practice  of  the  longe. 

When  the  horse  will  quietly  allow  his  feet  to  be  handled  and 
if  ted,  the  man  should  practice  gently  tapping  them  to  accus- 
tom him  to  the  action  of  shoeing. 

The  man  must  endeavor  to  discover  the  horse's  natural  incli- 
nations and  to  gain  a  knowledge  of  his  abilities,  that  he  may 
know  how  to  take  advantage  of  these  qualities. 

Every  action  of  the  man  should  tend  to  induce  full  confidence 
:hat  no  harm  is  intended  and  nothing  but  kind  treatment  is  to 
be  expected. 

When  new  horses  are  first  placed  in  stalls,  the  men  approach 
them  quietly,  and  always  take  care  to  speak  to  them  before 
entering  the  stall;  they  should  be  carefully  fed  and  gradually 
accustomed  to  the  Government  forage  ration;  as  many  of  them 
will  be  entirely  unused  to  eating  oats,  corn,  or  barley,  great 
care  must  be  taken  or  serious  trouble  may  follow.  By  com- 
mencing with  the  coarser  part  of  the  ration,  consisting  of  hay 
and  bran,  and,  where  possible,  crushing  or  grinding  the  grain, 
the  horse  will  gradually  be  brought  to  the  habit  of  eating  the 
service  ration  without  injury. 

From  their  arrival,  the  horses  should  be  exercised  one  or  two 
hours  daily  in  the  open  air.  For  this  purpose  the  new  horse 
will  be  equipped  with  the  halter  only,  and  led  by  the  man 
mounted  on  a  trained  horse.  After  a  few  days,  a  bit  may  be 


116  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

placed  in  the  youug  horse's  mouth,  aiid  the  reins  tied  loosel; 
and  thrown  over  his  neck. 

Bridling. 

404.  A  plain  snaffle  bridle  should  at  first  be  used  and  put  i 
with   care  and   gentleness.     If  the  horse   resists,   no   violenc 
should  be  used.     He  should  be  turned  round  in  his  stall  and  th 
instructor  should  take  the  end  of  the  halter  while  the  mai 
quiets  and  encourages  the  horse.     By  careful  treatment  he  wil 
soon  become  accustomed  to  the  sight  of  the  bit  and  will  allo\ 
it  to  be  placed  in  his  mouth.    The  reins  will  be  tied  so  as  t 
hang  loosely  on  the  neck. 

The  Cavesson  and  Longe/ng. 

405.  The   cavesson   is   a   light   halter  with   the  brow  bane 
throatlatch,  and  cheek  pieces  like  the  bridle  headstall,  and  ha 
a  noseband  that  may  be  adjusted  with  a  buckle;  there  is  als 
a  running  ring  on  the  chin  strap  for  the  longe.     The  longein; 
strap  is  from  20  to  30  feet  long.     The  lariat  may  be  used. 

The  cavesson  is  put  on  after  the  snaffle  has  been  fitted;  th 
noseband  should  be  placed  about  3  inches  above  the  nostrils,  s 
as  to  not  affect  the  breathing;  it  should  act  both  as  a  noseban< 
and  curb,  and  be  over  the  snaffle.  It  must  not  be  buckled  s< 
tightly  as  to  make  the  horse  uneasy. 

The  first  lesson  to  be  taught  a  young  horse  is  to  go  forward 
Until  he  does  this  freely,  nothing  else  should  be  required  of  hiir 

The  practice  of  the  longe  is  to  supple  and  teach  the  horse  th 
free  and  proper  use  of  his  legs.  It  thus  aids  in  forming  hi 
gaits  and  in  fitting  him  for  the  mounted  service. 

The  lesson  should  be  begun  on  a  circle  from  I'o  to  20  feet  ii 
diameter.  As  horses  are  usually  fed,  watered,  saddled,  and  le 
from  the  near  side,  they  are  inclined  to  lead  better  from  tha 
than  the  off  side.  It  will  therefore  generally  be  found  neces 
sary  to  give  two  lessons  on  the  right  to  one  on  the  left. 

If  a  horse  hesitates  or  stands  still  when  he  is  ordered  t 
move  on,  he  should  be  encouraged,  as  such  hesitation  oftene 
comes  from  fear  or  ignorance  as  to  what  is  required  of  hie 
than  from  obstinacy  or  other  vice. 


TRAINING  OF  HORSES.  117 

The  horse  is  first  led  several  times  around  the  circle  at  a 
walk.  A  man  with  a  whip  follows  at  a  short  distance  and 
shows  the  whip  occasionally  when  the  horse  hangs  hack;  if 
this  does  not  produce  the  desired  effect,  he  should  strike  the 
ground  in  rear  of  the  horse  or  touch  him  lightly  with  the  whip 
until  he  obeys.  When  he  moves  freely  at  the  walk,  the  man 
holding  the  longe  should  gently  urge  him  to  trot,  and  gradually 
lengthen  the  rein  so  that  the  horse  may  scarcely  notice  it;  he 
should  continue  to  go  round  the  circle  at  an  active  pace,  nearly 
opposite  the  horse's  shoulder,  so  as  to  keep  him  out  and  urge 
him  forward. 

If  the  horse  takes  kindly  to  this  lesson,  the  man  holding  the 
longe  may  lengthen  it  by  degrees  until  he  has  only  to  turn  in  the 
same  spot,  the  man  with  the  whip  being  careful  to  keep  the 
horse  out  of  the  line  of  the  circle. 

When  the  horse  breaks  his  pace  or  plunges,  the  rein  should 
be  shaken  horizontally  without  jerking  until  he  returns  to  the 
trot. 

The  man  holding  the  lougeing  rein  should  have  a  light  and 
easy  hand.  For  the  first  two  or  three  days  the  horse  must  not 
be  urged  too  much;  if  he  goes  gently,  without  jumping  or  re- 
sisting, enough  is  accomplished.  He  should  be  longed  to  the 
right,  left,  and  right  again,  changing  from  the  trot  to  the  walk 
and  back  again  in  each  case.  He  should  be  frequently  halted 
by  gently  feeling  the  rein  and  speaking  to  him ;  and  at  the  con- 
clusion of  each  lesson  the  rein  should  be  carefully  shortened 
and  gathered  up  in  the  hand,  and  the  horse  brought  to  the 
center  of  the  circle  and  caressed  before  being  dismissed. 

After  a  few  days  of  the  above  practice,  the  horse  may  be 
urged  a  little  more  in  the  trot,  but  great  care  is  requisite  to 
teach  him  to  use  his  limbs  without  straining  them.  Much  harm 
may  be  done  in  this  instruction  by  a  sudden  jerk  or  a  too  forci- 
ble pull  on  the  longe. 

Care  must  be  taken  that  the  lessons  are  not  made  so  long  as 
to  fatigue  or  fret  the  horse,  being  gradually  increased  in  length 
as  the  instruction  progresses.  The  man  holding  the  longeing; 
rein  should  take  it  short  in  one  hand,  at  the  same  time  patting 
and  rubbing  the  horse  about  the  head  and  neck  with  the  other ; 
he  should  then  try  to  bend  the  horse's  neck  a  little  to  the  right 
and  to  the  left  by  means  of  the  longeing  rein ;  the  bend  should 
be  in  the  very  poll  of  the  neck,  and  should  be  cautiously  re- 


118  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  BITTY,  ETC. 

peated  at  the  end  of  each  lesson  until  the  horse  responds  easily ; 
this  will  greatly  facilitate  the  future  instruction.  The  longe  is 
used  to  instruct  the  new  horses,  especially  if  timid,  to  jump  the 
bar  and  ditch. 

406.  The  running  rein  is  of  great  value  in  teaching  a  horse 
to  keep  his  head  in  a  proper  position,  and  affords  valuable  aid 
in  his  first  handling.     If  judiciously  used,  it  saves  the  rider 
a  great  deal  of  trouble  and  the  horse  much  ill-usage,  and  sim- 
plifies the  subject  of  "  bits  and  bitting."     It  is  especially  useful 
in  controlling  horses  that  are  inclined  to  bolt. 

It  should  act  directly  on  the  snaffle  bit  itself,  and  is  wholly 
independent  of  the  reins. 

The  running  rein  consists  of  three  parts — the  chin  strap,  rein, 
and  martingale. 

The  chin  strap,  about  6  to  8  inches  long,  on  which  is  suspended 
a  loose  ring,  is  fastened  to  both  snaffle-bit  rings. 

The  martingale  has  only  one  ring;  the  loop  through  which 
the  girth  passes  is  made  adjustable  by  a  buckle.  The  martin- 
gale is  so  adjusted  that  when  taut  the  ring  will  be  on  a  level 
with  the  points  of  the  horse's  shoulders. 

The  rein  is  about  8£  feet  long;  one  end  is  buckled  into  the 
near  pommel  ring ;  the  free  end  is  then  passed  through  the  mar- 
tingale ring  from  rear  to  front,  thence  through  the  chin-strap 
ring  from  left  to  right,  thence  through  the  martingale  ring  from 
front  to  rear  and  is  held  in  the  rider's  right  hand. 

A  pull  on  this  rein  will  act  directly  on  the  mouthpiece,  draw- 
ing it  back  and  somewhat  downward  toward  the  horse's  breast- 
bone. 

407.  Before  commencing  the  bending  lessons,   it  is  well  to 
give  the  horse  a   preparatory  one  in  obedience  to  make  him 
sensible  of  the  power  man   has  over  him.     This  first  act  of 
submission  will  prove  of  great  service,  and  gives  the  man  such 
ascendency  as  to  prevent  the  horse  at  the  outset  from  resisting 
the  means  employed  to  bring  him  under  control. 

Go  up  to  the  horse,  pat  him  on  the  neck,  and  speak  to  him ; 
then  take  the  reins  off  the  horse's  neck  and  h'old  them  at  a  few 
inches  from  the  rings  of  the  bit  with  the  left  hand;  take  such 
position  as  to  offer  as  much  resistance  as  possible  to  the  horse, 
should  he  attempt  to  break  away;  hold  the  whip  in  the  right 
hand,  with  the  point  down ;  raise  the  whip  quietly  and  tap 
the  horse  on  the  breast;  the  horse  naturally  tries  to  move 


TRAINING  OF  HORSES.  119 

back  to  avoid  the  whip ;  follow  the  horse,  at  the  same  time 
pulling  against  him,  and  continuing  the  use  of  the  whip ;  be 
careful  to  show  no  sign  of  anger  nor  of  yielding.  The  horse, 
tired  of  trying  ineffectually  to  avoid  the  whip  soon  ceases  to 
pull,  and  moves  forward;  then  drop  the  point  of  the  whip  and 
make  much  of  him.  This  repeated  once  or  twice  usually  proves 
sufficient.  The  horse,  having  found  how  to  avoid  the  punish- 
ment, no  longer  waits  for  the  application  of  the  whip,  but  an- 
ticipates it  by  moving  up  at  a  gesture. 

408.  Bending  lessons  should  be  given  each  day,  so  long  as 
the  snaffle  bit  is  used  alone;  but  the  exercise  should  be  varied, 
so  that  the  horse  may  not  become  fatigued  or  disgusted. 

The  horse's  balance  and  his  lightness  in  hand  depend  on  the 
proper  carriage  of  his  head  and  neck. 

A  young  horse  Usually  tries  to  resist  the  bit,  either  by  bend- 
ing his  neck  to  one  side,  by  setting  his  jaw  against  the  bit,  or 
by  carrying  his  nose  too  high  or  too  low. 

The  bending  lessons  serve  to  make  the  horse  conform  to  the 
movements  of  the  reins,  and  yield  to  the  pressure  of  the  bit. 
During  the  lessons,  the  horse  must  never  be  hurried. 

409.  To  bend  to  the  right. — Take  a  position  on  the  near  side 
of  the  horse  in  front  of  his  shoulder  and  facing  toward  his  neck ; 
take  the  off  rein  close  against  the  bit  in  the  right  hand,  the 
near  rein  in  the  same  way  in  the  left  hand,  the  thumbs  toward 
each  other,   the  little  fingers  outward;  bring  the  right  hand 
toward  the  body,  and  at  the  same  time  extend  the  left  arm  so 
as  to  turn  the  horse's  head  to  the  right. 

The  force  employed  must  be  gradual  and  proportioned  to  the 
resistance  met  with,  and  care  must  be  taken  not  to  bring  the 
horse's  nose  too  close  to  his  chest.  If  the  horse  moves  back- 
ward, continue  the  pressure  until,  finding  it  impossible  to  avoid 
the  restraint  imposed  by  the  bit,  he  stands  still  and  yields  to  it. 

When  the  bend  is  complete,  the  horse  holds  his  head  without 
any  restraint  and  champs  the  bit;  then  make  much  of  him  and 
let  him  resume  his  natural  position  by  degrees,  without  throw- 
ing his  head  around  hurriedly. 

A  horse,  as  a  rule,  champs  the  bit  when  he  ceases  to  resist. 

The  horse's  neck  is  bent  to  the  left  in  a  similar  manner,  the 
man  standing  on  the  off  side. 

410.  To  arch  the  neck. — Being  on  the  near  side  of  the  horse: 
Cross  the  reins  behind  the  horse's  jaw,  taking  the  near  rein  in 


120  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

the  right  hand,  the  off  rein  in  the  left,  at  about  6  inches  from 
the  rings,  and  draw  them  across  each  other  till  the  horse  gives 
way  to  the  pressure  and  brings  his  nose  in.  Prevent  the  horse 
from  raising  his  head  by  lowering  the  hands.  When  the  horse 
gives  way  to  the  cross  pressure  of  the  reins,  ease  the  hand  and 
make  much  of  him. 

411.  To  lower  the  head. — Being  mounted:  Take  the  right  rein 
in  the  right  hand,  the  left  rein  in  the  left,  and  feel  lightly  the 
mouth  of  the  horse;  then,  holding  the  hands  low,  play  with  the 
bit,  gently  drawing  in  the  reins  as  the  horse  drops  his  nose. 
When  the  horse,  opening  his  mouth,  yields  the  lower  jaw  to  the 
bit  and  brings  in  his  head  so  that  the  face  is  vertical,  release 
the  tension  of  the  reins  and  caress  the  horse  for  his  obedience. 
By  degrees  the  horse  can  be  taught  to  depress  the  head  to  any 
extent. 

412.  To  elevate  the  head. — Being  mounted :   Hold  the  reins 
separately,  as  prescribed  above,  and  with  arms  extended  for- 
ward, make  light  pulls  upward  upon  the  reins;  when  the  horse 
has  obeyed,  lower  the  hands  so  that  the  horse  can  lower  his 
muzzle,  and  then  quietly  demand  that  the  face  of  the  animal 
shall  be  brought  into  the  vertical  position. 

413.  To  carry  the  head  to  the  right. — Being  mounted:   Hold 
the  reins  as  previously  prescribed,  and  drawing  the  right  rein 
toward  the  body,  carry  the  head  of  the  horse  a  little  to  the 
right,  using  the  left  hand  to  measure  the  effect  of  the  right,  to 
keep  the  face  of  the  horse  vertical,  and  to  aid  in  keeping  the 
jaw  pliant.     The  rider  should  be  satisfied  with  slow  progress, 
but  in  time  the  head  should  be  brought  round  so  that  the  face, 
with  the  nose  down,  shall  look  to  the  rear.    By  this  exercise  the 
head  and  neck  are  suppled  and  made  submissive.     After  the 
head  has  been  carried  to  the  right,  the  left  hand,  supported  by 
the  right,  will  carry  the  head  to  the  front,  and  the  vertical  posi- 
tion of  the  head  be  demanded  by  a  play  of  both  reins.     In  a 
similar  manner  the  head  will  be  carried  to  the  left. 

414.  After  the  horse  has  submitted  quietly  to  this  instruc- 
tion, he  will  be  required  to  move  forward. 

For  this  purpose  the  rider  takes  the  snaffle  rein  in  each  hand 
and  feels  lightly  the  horse's  mouth;  the  man  with  the  longe 
leads  the  horse  forward  and  longes  him  first  to  the  left  and 
then  to  the  right,  at  a  walk ;  if  the  horse  shows  any  disposi- 


TRAINING  OF  HORSES.  121 

tion  to  kick  or  plunge,  the  longe  is  shaken  lightly  to  engage  his 
attention. 

After  a  short  lesson  the  rider  dismounts,  the  horse  is  petted 
and  dismissed. 

These  lessons  are  continued  until  the  horse  can  be  made  to 
go  forward,  to  the  right  and  left,  to  halt,  and  rein  back  by 
application  of  the  aids. 

Breaking  in  the   Young  Horse  to  Harness. 

415.  The  harness  should  be  put  on  the  horse  in  the  stable 
with  caution,  and  at  first  without  traces,  so  that  in  the  event  of 
the  horse  jumping  about  they  will  not  hang  around  his  legs  and 
frighten  him.    The  horse  should  then  be  fed  in  his  harness,  and 
after  standing  for  some  hours,  be  walked  about  in  it. 

When  the  horse  has  thus  been  fed  and  walked  about  and  has 
become  reconciled  to  the  harness,  the  traces  should  be  attached 
and  a  rope  tied  to  the  rear  end  of  each ;  a  man  then  takes  the 
ends  of  the  ropes  and  the  horse  is  walked  about,  the  man  hold- 
ing the  ropes  taking  care  that  the  traces  do  not  rub  against 
the  sides  of  the  horse  in  the  beginning,  but  accustom  him  to 
them  gradually. 

When  the  horse  has  become  accustomed  to  the  pressure  of 
the  collar  and  traces  he  may  be  then  hitched  in  with  a  steady 
horse.  At  first  the  utmost  caution  should  be  observed,  and  a 
foreleg  held  up,  if  necessary,  while  the  traces  are  being  fas- 
tened, and  no  noise  or  shouting  should  be  permitted.  After 
being  hitched  in,  the  horse  should  be  permitted  to  stand  still 
for  some  minutes  before  the  carriage  is  started,  and  it  should 
be  put  in  motion  by  the  other  horses.  The  horse  should  be  left 
to  himself  and  not  be  required  to  draw  at  first ;  all  that  should 
be  demanded  of  him  is  to  move  forward  quietly. 

To  Accustom  the  Horse  to  the  Report  of  Firearms. 

416.  This  part  of  the  horse's  education  should  not  be  com- 
menced until  he  has  become  so  familiar  with  the  bridle,  etc., 
that  he  makes  no  resistance  when  they  are  applied.     He  is 
then  shown  the  pistol,  allowed  to  smell  it,  made  familiar  with 
the  sound  of  the  cocking  and  the  falling  of  the  hammer,  the 
man  at  the  same  time  talking  to  and  caressing  him  to  allay  his 


122  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

fears.  A  blank  cartridge  is  fired  some  distance  from  him. 
The  horse  will  be  startled,  but  his  fears  will  be  dispelled  by 
kind  words  and  caresses.  The  horse's  fears  having  been 
quieted,  other  shots  will  be  fired  nearer  and  rearer  to  him, 
observing  the  same  caution. 

Great  care  should  be  exercised  that  the  pistol  be  not  dis- 
charged too  near  the  horse's  ears,  nor  so  close  to  him  that  the 
powder  will  burn  him;  a  horse  once  injured  in  this  way  will 
nearly  always  be  nervous  while  firing  is  going  on. 

This  lesson  is  repeated  several  times,  until  the  horse  no 
longer  flinches  materially,  nor  struggles  after  a  shot  is  fired. 

417.  Horses  that  shy,  etc.,  may  be  treated  in  this  way :  Tie  a 
rope  with  a  slipknot  around  the  body  over  the  loins,  the  knot 
under  the  belly ;  the  free  end  of  the  rope  is  passed  under  the 
horse  between  his  forelegs  and  carried  up  through  the  halter 
ring  and  made  fast  to  a  suspended  rope,  sustained  in  place  by 
guy  ropes  to  prevent  too  much  lateral  motion. 

The  horse  being  thus  secured,  such  articles  as  robes,  blankets, 
etc.,  of  which  he  may  have  shown  fear,  are  brought  into  his 
sight,  and  he  is  encouraged  to  smell  or  touch  them.  Pistol 
firing,  etc.,  is  practiced  until  he  ceases  to  show  signs  of  alarm. 

The  object  in  having  a  rope  suspended  is  to  prevent  the  horse 
from  hurting  himself  and  yet  allow  him  freedom  to  move  his 
haunches.  The  picket  rope,  if  high  enough,  will  do. 

To  Break  the  Horse  of  Kicking. 

418.  The  horse  is  thrown  and  one  end  of  each  of  two  long 
straps  is  made  fast  to  the  bit  rings;  the  other  ends  are  passed 
through  rings  on  the  leather  surcingle  and  secured  to  the  hind 
pasterns.     When  thus  secured,  all  means  should  be  resorted  to 
in  order  to  make  the  horse  kick,  and  this  should  be  repeated 
until  he  no  longer  struggles  nor  attempts  to  move  his  hind  legs 
under  any  provocation  whatever. 

Swimming  Horses  and  Fording. 

419.  As  it  is  often  necessary  for  mounted  troops  to  cross 
streams  by  swimming,  the  exercise  is  important,   as  it  gives 
confidence  to  men  and  horses. 


TRAINING  OP  HORSES.  123 

The  horses  are  at  first  equipped  with  the  watering  bridle  and 
are  barebacked.  The  reins  are  on  the  horse's  neck  just  in  front 
of  the  withers  and  knotted  so  that  they  will  not  hang  low 
enough  to  entangle  the  horse's  feet,  care  being  taken  to  have 
them  so  placed  as  to  permit  the  horse  to  push  his  nose  well  out 
and  to  have  entire  freedom  of  the  head.  The  horse  should  be 
watered,  but  not  too  freely,  before  entering  him  into  the  stream. 

The  man  mounts,  rides  into  the  stream,  and  when  he  gets 
into  deep  water,  drops  reins,  seizes  a  lock  of  the  mane  with  the 
upstream  hand,  allows  his  body  to  drift  off  quietly  to  the  down- 
stream side  of  the  horse,  and  floats  or  swims  flat  on  the  water, 
guiding  the  horse,  when  necessary,  by  splashing  water  against 
his  head,  only  using  the  reins  when  the  splashing  fails.  When 
the  horse  touches  bottom  at  the  landing,  the  man  pulls  himself 
on  the  horse's  back  and  takes  the  reins.  The  horse  is  easily 
controlled  when  swimming;  he  is  also  easily  confused.  It  is 
therefore  necessary  that  the  man  should  be  gentle  and  delib- 
erate. The  man  must  be  cautioned  that  pulling  on  the  reins 
is  apt  to  pull  the  horse  over  backward,  and  that  when  the 
horse  touches  bottom  he  may  begin  to  plunge. 

The  man  will  also  be  required  to  swim  holding  the  horse's 
tail,  the  horse  towing  him. 

After  the  man  and  horse  have  gained  confidence,  the  man 
will  be  required  to  be  seated  on  his  horse,  with  or  without 
saddle,  while  swimming.  The  man's  weight  presses  the  horse 
down  and  impedes  his  movements,  and  when  saddled  the  man 
should  hold  the  knees  well  up  to  lessen  the  resistance,  and 
steady  his  seat  by  holding  on  the  mane  or  the  pommel  of  the 
saddle. 

With  some  horses,  especially  those  that  swim  low,  it  is  ad- 
visable that  the  man  sit  behind  the  saddle  to  allow  the  fore- 
quarters  to  float  high. 

The  men  will  also  be  practiced  in  swimming  the  horses  when 
fully  armed  and  equipped.  The  stirrups  are  crossed  and  se- 
cured. The  horse  is  guided  by  the  reins.  The  men  are  in- 
structed in  crossing  swift-running  water  to  keep  their  eyes 
fixed  on  the  opposite  bank. 

When  large,  swift  rivers  are  to  be  crossed,  too  hazardous 
for  all  the  horses  to  be  ridden,  the  bridle  reins  are  secured 
to  avoid  the  danger  of  their  being  caught  by  the  horse's  feet, 
or  by  those  of  another  horse  swimming  close  to  him;  the  stirrups 


124  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

are  crossed  and  secured;  a  trained  horse  is  selected  for  a 
leader  and  is  ridden  without  saddle;  all  the  horses  are  led 
or  driven  to  the  approach  and  can  generally  be  made  to  take 
the  water  without  much  difficulty.  The  approach  should  be 
selected  at  some  distance  above  the  landing.  If  practicable,  a 
few  horses  should  be  taken  over  and  placed  at  the  landing,  and 
some  men  stationed  to  receive  the  horses  as  they  land. 

If  there  be  a  pontoon  bridge  in  the  immediate  vicinity,  the 
crossing  should  be  below  it. 

When  a  horse  is  towed  or  led  from  a  boat,  he  should  be  held 
astern  of  the  oars  and  on  the  downstream  side  or  in  the  wake. 

When  a  stream  with  a  treacherous  bottom  is  to  be  forded, 
stakes  or  bushes  should  be  placed  so  as  to  mark  the  limits  of 
the  ford,  or  may  be  placed  so  as  to  mark  the  dangerous  places 
only. 

When  the  stream  is  to  be  forded  at  night,  lighted  lanterns 
should  be  fastened  to  the  stakes  and  one  displayed  at  the  land- 
ing or  a  fire  built  there. 

When  the  stream  has  a  swift  current  and  the  water  is  above 
the  horses  bellies,  the  subdivisions  should  cross  with  as  wTide 
n  front  as  practicable,  to  permit  a  freer  flow  or  prevent  dam- 
ming of  the  water,  which  might  carry  a  horse  off  his  feet ;  but 
in  crossing  a  dangerous  ford,  the  column  of  twos  is  less  ob- 
jectionable than  the  column  of  fours. 

Mounted  troops  should  generally  cross  streams  above  infantry 
or  so  far  below  that  the  water  will  not  be  dammed  against  them. 

CHAPTER    II.— DRAFT  ANIMALS. 
Care  of  Draft  Animals  in  the  Field. 

420.  Constant  and  intelligent  supervision  of  adjustment  of 
the  bearing  parts  of  harness,  packs,  and  saddles  is  productive  of 
better  results  than  medication  in  keeping  transportation  ani- 
mals in  serviceable  condition. 

421.  In  preparing  for  the  field  it  is  well  to  bear  in  mind 
that  nearly  all  animals  in  a  command  lose  flesh  rapidly  for  the 
first  10  days  of  a  march,  and  that  during  this  period  the  adjust- 
ment of  all  parts  of  the  harness,  more  especially  the  collars, 
should  be  given  close  attention. 


DRAFT  ANIMALS.  125 

422.  If  the  march  should  happen  to  be  a  continuous  and  a 
severe  one,  it  may  be  noticed  that  about  the  sixteenth  day,  draft 
animals  appear  suddenly  to  become  very  lean  in  the  muscles  of 
the  shoulders,  back,  abdomen,  and  croup.     If  a  fair  amount  of 
forage  is  available  they  quickly  improve  to  a  certain   point, 
where  they  remain  stationary  and  continue  to  do  hard  work 
without  noticeable  change  under  an  intelligent  system  of  water- 
ing and  feeding.    They  are  now  in  working  condition. 

423.  Water  on  the  march  whenever  a  good  opportunity  to  do 
so  presents  itself,  never  forgetting,  however,  that  a  warm  ani- 
mal should  be  watered  but  sparingly,  and  that  such  a  watered 
animal  should  not  be  allowed  to  remain  stationary  even  for  a 
few  minutes,  as  this  induces  laminitis   (founder),  due  to  con- 
traction of  the  internal  blood  vessels  by  the  cold  water  taken 
and  the  consequent  increase  of  blood  pressure  in  the  legs  and 
feet  where  it  can  not,  while  the  animal  is  inactive,  be  taken  care 
of  by  the  system.    Laminitis  (founder)  is  due  to  congestion  of 
the  feet. 

424.  Feeding. — Soon  after  reaching  camp,  offer  a  little  hay. 
Water  before  feeding  grain  when  possible.    Offer  grain  immedi- 
ately after  watering,  and  then  place  before  the  animals  what 
remains  of  the  hay  for  that  day.    The  morning  watering  must 
of  necessity  be  governed  by  circumstances.     If  absolutely  sure 
of  water  on  the  road,   say  one  hour  after  breaking  camp,   it 
would  be  a  needless  waste  of  time  and  energy  to  water  immedi- 
ately before  or  after  the  morning  feed  on  the  line. 

425.  Midday  baiting. — As  little  as  1  pound  of  grain  per  ani- 
mal, taken  for  the  daily  allowance  and  given  in  charge  to  each 
driver,  fed  at  the  noon  halt,  will  have  a  wonderful  effect  for 
good  on  the  animals  of  a  command.     At  this  halt  the  careful 
driver  will  add  a  few  handfuls  of  grass,  and  at  the  same  time 
look  over  his  collars  and  breeching  with  a  view  to  their  read- 
justment. 

426.  Collars   of  steel,   such  as  those  furnished  to  artillery 
commands,   are  preferable  to  leather  for  military  use,  when 
properly    adjusted    and    cleaned.     When    improperly    adjusted 
they  are  inferior  to  the  leather  article.     Steel  collars  are  ad- 
justed by  means  of  bolts  and  plates.     Leather  collars  by  means 
of  top  straps  and  hames.     When  these  methods  will  not  pro- 
duce the  desired  results,  the  use  of  collar  pads  must  be  resorted 


126  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

to.  Felt  collar  pads  are  not  desirable,  as  they  soon  become  stiff 
and  hard. 

A  collar  should  fit  snugly  to  the  sides  of  the  neck  without 
compressing  it,  and  its  bearing  surface  should  rest  squarely  on 
the  bed  of  muscles  situated  on  the  front  of  the  shoulder.  When 
in  position  there  should  be  a  space  between  its  lower  part  and 
the  windpipe  sufficiently  .large  to  comfortably  admit  the  inser- 
tion of  the  open  hand,  back  up,  as  far  as  the  wrist. 

All  collars  should  be  furnished  with  a  neck  plate  of  zinc,  for 
the  protection  of  the  top  of  the  neck  against  rubbing. 

To  prevent  blistering  of  the  top  of  the  neck  on  hot,  sunny 
days,  it  will  be  found  that  a  wet  sponge  or  a  wet  piece  of  folded 
gunny  sack,  properly  secured  to  the  top  of  the  collar  and  wetted 
at  intervals,  is  effective. 

The  bearing  surface  of  steel  collars  and  neck  plates  should 
be  washed  carefully  soon  after  making  camp.  They  should 
never  be  scoured  with  sand  or  rubbed  with  an  abrasive  sub- 
stance, for  the  reason  that  the  steel  beneath  the  zinc  plating 
may  be  thus  exposed.  The  exposed  steel  rusts  quickly,  pits 
rapidly  from  the  action  of  the  acid  sweat,  and  acts  as  a  rasp 
would  on  the  soft  tissues  with  which  it  comes  in  continual  con- 
tact. 

The  bearing  surface  of  leather  collars  should  not  be  scraped 
unless  considered  absolutely  necessary  to  remove  accumulated 
dirt  due  to  negligence.  If  scraped  they  should  be  boned  smooth 
and  then  slightly  oiled.  Leather  collars  may  be  easily  cleaned 
with  a  damp  sponge.  They  should  be  thus  cleaned  each  even- 
ing. A  careful  man  will  not  let  his  collars  remain  on  the 
ground  over  night,  but  will  hang  them  on  the  pole,  or  put  them 
in  some  safe  place  where  he  will  protect  them  from  the  rain 
and  the  dust  of  the  camp. 

427.  Necks  and  shoulders. — On  arrival  in  camp  let  collars 
remain  in  position  for  about  15  minutes.  Their  weight  on  the 
hot,  tender  skin  affords  sufficient  pressure  to  prevent  the  forma- 
tion of  swellings  so  often  observed  after  the  collar  is  suddenly 
removed.  Normal  circulation  will  establish  itself  gradually 
under  collar  pressure  alone,  and  the  skin  of  the  shoulders  and 
neck  will  regain  its  tone  and  elasticity. 

After  removal  of  the  collar,  bathe  the  shoulder  and  neck 
with  clean  water;  this  to  remove  sand  and  dust  that  would 


DRAFT  ANIMALS.  127 

I. 

'  otherwise  remain  in  the  hair,  where  it  may  not  be  reached  by 
the  horse  brush. 

Salty  water,  or  a  weak  solution  of  vinegar  in  water,  when 
i  applied  to  the  shoulders  and  neck,  acts  as  a  tonic  to  the  jaded 
skin. 

Animals  with  narrow,  lean  shoulders  should  not  be  placed 
in  the  collar.  For  these,  if  they  must  be  harnessed,  a  breast 
strap  (Dutch  collar)  should  be  used. 

When  putting  on  a  collar,  see  that  the  mane  hangs  naturally 
beneath  the  neck  plate.  If  the  collar  is  a  steel  one,  be  careful 
when  snapping  it  in  place  that  the  skin  of  the  upper  part  of 
neck  is  not  pinched  between  the  neck  plate  and  the  collar  itself. 

If  swellings  appear  on  the  shoulders,  use  massage  to  remove 
them  and  in  addition  apply  a  cold-water  pack  during  the  night ; 
;  a  wet  sack  properly  adjusted  and  held  in  place  will  answer  the 
purpose.  If  a  gall  appears,  do  not  grease  it.  Wash  it  with 
water  and  soap,  dry  thoroughly,  and  apply  a  weak  solution  of 
alum  (one-half  ounce  to  a  pint  of  water)  or  a  solution  of  aloes 
in  water  (one-half  ounce  to  the  pint).  If  the  animal  must  be 
worked,  use  a  chambered  (cut-out)  pad  over  the  spot  to  remove 
pressure.  Greasy  ointments  serve  as  a  trap  for  dust  and  sand. 

428.  Traces. — Verify   the   length   of   traces   frequently.     Do 
not  depend  on  the  chain  links  as  a  guide  in  hitching.     Leather 
traces  stretch  considerably   in  wet  weather.     A  difference  of 
half  an  inch  in  the  length  of  traces  will  cause  trouble  on  the 
shoulder  of  the  shorter  side.     It  is  also  liable  to  produce  lame- 
ness due  to  irritation  of  extensor  muscles.     If  the  point  of  at- 
tachment of  the  trace  to  the  collar  should  be  too  high,  it  will 
cause  a  downward  pull  on  top  of  neck,  with  its  consequent  irri- 
tation.    If  too  low,  it  will  cause  the  collar  to  "  ride,"  and  nearly 
all  the  pressure  will  be  on  the  point  of  the  shoulders  and  on 
the  windpipe. 

The  number  of  sore-shouldered  draft  animals  in  a  command 
on  the  march  is  an  excellent  standard  by  which  to  judge  the 
horsemanship  of  the  personnel. 

429.  Breeching. — The  breeching  should  be  fairly  loose;  oth- 
erwise it  is  liable  to  chafe  the  quarters  and  to  interfere  with 
the  free  play  of  the  muscles.    It  should  be  taken  up  as  the  ani- 
mals become  thin. 

Martingales  should  not  fit  too  snugly,  as  they  are  very  liable 
to  chafe  the  soft,  thin  skin  of  the  under  part  of  the  body. 


128  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

430.  Yoke   straps   should   be   adjusted  with  a   view   to   the 
height  of  the  pair.    They  should  never  be  permitted  to  trespass 
on  the  bearing  surface  of  the  collars. 

431.  Backstraps  should  be  so  adjusted  as  not  to  let  the  sad- 
dles ride  the  withers,  but  at  the  same  time  there  should  not  be 
sufficient  strain  on  them  to  cause  the  crupper  to  irritate  the 
under  part  of  the  tail. 

432.  Belly  bands  and  cinchas  should  never  be  unduly  tight- 
ened, as  they  cause  cinch  sores  near  the  elbow,  and  quarter- 
strap  sores  beneath  the  ring  shields. 

When  a  cinch  gall  appears,  remove  the  cause,  keep  the  place 
clean,  and  apply  a  solution  of  aloes  or  alum  in  water.  Either  of 
these  will  stimulate  the  gall  and  deter  insects  from  alighting  on 
the  wound. 

433.  Bearing  reins  should  be  of  such  a  length  that  the  ani- 
mals may  have  free  use  of  the  muscles  of  head  and  neck.    Bear- 
ing reins  are  not  a  necessity. 

434.  A  driving  bit  should  be  smooth  and  jointed.     It  should 
be  so  adjusted  that  it  will  not  lift  the  corners  of  the  mouth.     If 
placed  too  high  in  the  mouth,  the  animal  uses  his  molar  teeth 
to  press  against  it,  and  gains  for  himself  the  reputation  of  a 
hard-mouthed  puller. 

435.  Beware  of  thread  ends  in  collar  pads  and  of  knots  in 
headstalls,   throatlatches,    bellybands,   cinchas,    and   surcingles, 
and  be  careful  that  bucklQg  are  not  turned  toward  the  skin. 
These  readily  produce  irritations  and  abrasions,  and  are  plain 
evidence  of  negligence  and  carelessness  on  the  part  of  the  rider 
or  driver,  as  well  as  loose  supervision  on  the  part  of  those  su- 
perior in  rank. 

436.  To  keep  his  animals  in  the  collar  and  off  the  lead  line 
should  be  the  aim  of  each  driver.     This  can  be  accomplished 
with  little  trouble,  barring  accidents,  if  the  harness  is  kept  in 
proper  shape  and  fit,  and  necks  and  shoulders  are  kept  clean. 

CHAPTER  III.— DRIVING. 
Double  Harness. 

437.  Double  harness  is  fitted  exactly  the  same  way  as  single, 
except  that  the  bellybands  should  be  slightly  looser. 

438.  Never  pole  too  tightly,  especially  when  the  pole  is  a 
heavy  one,  because  if  the  pole  chains  are  tight  the  weight  of 


DRAFT  ANIMALS.  129 

the  pole  will  continually  rest  on  the  neck.  On  the  other  hand, 
if  the  poling  up  is  too  lose  the  constant  swaying  will  be  a 
source  of  irritation  and  danger  to  the  team. 

Coupling  Reins. 

439.  The  correct  adjustment  of  the  two  short  inside  reins, 
called  coupling  reins,  requires  great  care.     They  should  be  so 
fitted  that  an  even  pressure  is  brought  to  bear  on  both  sides  of 

'  the  animals'  mouths,  and  in  such  a  way  also  that  both  animals 
shall  go  straight  and  pull  evenly  on  the  traces  For  instance, 
if  the  near  horse  carries  his  head  to  the  near  side,  the  coupling 

•  rein  on  the  off  side  should  be  taken  up,  when  his  head  will  be 
straightened. 

Supposing  we  have  two  animals  apparently  well  matched, 
but  that  the  near  one  carries  his  head  rather  out  to  the  front, 

;  and  has  a  light  mouth,  while  the  off  animal  has  a  hard  mouth, 

i  and  carries  his  head  close  to  his  chest.  Now  to  get  this  pair 
to  pull  equally  on  the  traces  we  must  have  the  near  animal's 
rein  considerably  longer  than  those  of  the  off  animal.  In  this 
case  we  should  begin  by  letting  out  the  off  side  coupling  rein 
and  taking  up  the  near  side  rein  the  same  number  of  holes. 

The  reins  will  now  be  adjusted  so  as  to  permit  the  near  horse 
to  hold  his  head  well  in  front  of  the  other,  while  the  collars  are 
brought  level. 

The  most  general  fault  is  coupling  up  both  reins  too  tightly, 
which  makes  the  animals  carry  their  heads  in  toward  the  pole, 
instead  of  going  straight,  as  they  should  do.  To  prevent  ani- 
.mals  acquiring  this  habit,  it  is  a  good  plan  to  change  their 
positions  occasionally,  instead  of  always  driving  them  on  the 
same  side  of  the  pole. 

It  is  a  convenient  plan  to  have  more  than  one  hole  in  the 
billets  for  buckling  the  reins  on  the  bits,  so  that  an  animal  can 
be  pulled  back  or  let  out  a  hole  or  two  on  either  side  without 
altering  the  coupling  rein. 

Ho/ding  the  Reins. 

440.  Place  both  reins  in  the  left  hand,  the  near  rein  over  the 
forefinger  and  the  off  rein  under  the  middle  finger.     Thus  you 
have  two  fingers  between  the  reins.    The  reason  for  this  is  that 

82940°— 11 9 


130  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

it  gives  much  more  scope  for  play  of  the  wrist  on  the  mouths 
than  if  you  only  have  one  finger  between  the  reins.  The  thumb 
should  point  straight  to  the  right,  and  the  forefinger  be  held 
well  out,  pointing  to  the  right  rear.  This  will  keep  the  rein 
close  up  to  the  knuckle,  and  the  pair  may  be  easily  moved 
across  the  road  by  turning  the  back  of  hand  up  or  down ;  up 
for  left  turn,  down  for  right  turn. 

441.  Sit  firmly  but  comfortably  in  your  seat,  body,  erect, 
without  stiffness,  and  elbows  close  to  side.      Do  not  lean  for- 
ward.   Now  take  the  whip  in  the  right  hand,  at  the  place  where 
it  balances  comfortably,  and  you  are  ready  to  start. 

442.  Bring  the  pair  to  attention   by   feeling  their   mouths 
gently,  and  speak  to  them.    If  they  do  not  respond,  touch  them 
gently  with  the  whip. 

The  moment  they  start  drop  the  hand  slightly;  "jibbing"  is 
often  caused  by  neglect  of  this  precaution. 

443.  The  elbows  should  be  held  close  to  the  sides,  with  the 
points  almost  touching  the  hips. 

The  wrist  should  be  well  bent,  as  by  this  means  the  driver 
is  enabled  to  keep  a  perfectly  steady  bearing  on  the  mouths 
without  any  jerking. 

The  forearms  should  be  horizontal,  and  the  fingers  from  3  to 
5  inches  from  the  center  of  the  body,  with  the  knuckles  to  the 
front. 

The  thumb  should  not  be  pressed  down  on  the  rein.  The 
fingers  that  should  grip  the  reins  are  the  three  lower  ones. 

444.  Never  hit  an  animal  while  the  right  hand  is  holding  a 
rein,  because  if  you  try  to  cut  him  when  you  have  the  off  rein 
in  the  right  hand,  you  must  slack  that  rein  off,  and  the  pair  is 
apt  to  dash  to  the  left. 

445.  Do  not  get  into  the  habit  of  "jabbing"  the  pair  with 
the  bits,  and  do  not  flap  the  reins  on  their  backs  to  start  them 
or  make  them  increase  their  pace. 

Drive  at  a  steady,  even  pace,  as  nothing  tires  a  team  so  much 
as  to  constantly  change  the  rate  of  speed. 

When  it  is  necessary  to  pull  up  in  a  hurry  the  proper  course 
to  pursue  is  to  catch  hold  of  the  reins  with  the  finger  and 
thumb  of  the  right  hand,  just  behind  the  left,  and  shortetn 
them  as  much  as  necessary  by  pulling  them  through.  This 
is  safer  and  more  businesslike  than  elevating  the  hands,  which 
disturbs  the  seat. 


DRAFT  ANIMALS.  131 

446.  The  driving  gloves  should  be  large  and  very  comfort- 
able.   They  should  never  be  of  a  size  to  cramp  the  hand  in  the 
slightest. 

447.  The  right  hand  is  known  as  the  whip  hand.    It  is  gen- 
erally used  only  for  holding  the  whip,  for  assisting  the  left 
hand,  and  for  shortening  the  reins  by  pulling  them  through 
from  behind  the  rein  hand. 

Driving  Four-in-Hand. 

448.  The  driving  of  four  animals  as  they  should  be  driven  is 
an  art  that  can  only  be  learned  by  constant  practice  and  study. 

449.  When   driving,   the  body   should  be  kept  upright  and 
square  to  the  front,  but  all  stiffness  should  be  avoided.    The 
driving  seat  should  be  about  3  or  4  inches  higher  at  the  back 
than  in  front,  so  that  the  driver  can  sit  well  back  \n  a  really 
comfortable  position.    The  ankles  and  knees  should  be  just 
touching  each  other,  and  the  arms  close  to  the  sides.    The 
forearm  should  be  about  horizontal,  and  the  left  handr  as  in 
driving  a  pair,  from  4  to  5  inches  from  the  center  of  the  body, 
the  back  of  the  hand  being  turned  toward  the  front,  but  in- 
clined  a   little  toward   the   team.    The  wrist   should  be  bent 
slightly  toward  the  body,  and  on  no  account  allowed  to  bend 
the  other  way.     This  is  far  the  best  position  for  feeling  the 
mouths,  as  the  wrist  then  acts  like  a  spring,  and  an  even  pres- 
sure can  be  maintained. 

The  driver  should  on  no  account  be  half  standing,  or  merely 
leaning  against  the  seat,  with  unbent  knees,  as,  in  the  event  of 
a  wheeler  falling  or  shying  to  the  side,  he  will  probably  be 
jerked  off  the  wagon. 

The  Reins. 

450.  The  best  way  of  holding  the  reins  is  to  have  the  near 
lead  over  the  left  forefinger,  the  off  lead  between  the  forefinger 
and  the  middle  finger,  the  near  wheel  between  the  same  and 
under  the  off  lead,  and  the  off  wheel  between  the  middle  and 
third  finger.    The  reins  must  be  gripped  firmly  by  the  three 
lower  fingers  of  the  left  hand.    The  thumb  should  point  to  the 
right,  and  the  forefinger  be  held  well  out.     The  near  lead-rein 
should  pass  over  or  close  to  the  knuckle  of  the  forefinger  and 
not  over  the  first  or  second  joint. 


132  CAEE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

Adjusting  the  Reins. 

451.  All  four  reins  can  be  shortened,  if  much  is  required,  by 
pulling  them  through  from  behind,  but  it  is  generally  quicker 
and  neater  to  hold  the  reins  with  right  hand  2  or  3  inches  in 
front  of  left  (the  little  and  third  fingers  over  the  off-side  reins 
and  the  middle  finger  between  the  near-side  reins),  and  then 
slide  the  left  hand  up  to  the  right.    This  movement  is  generally 
required  when  going  down  hill. 

Wheel  Reins. 

452.  It  is  better  to  shorten  these  by  pulling  them  through 
from  behind.    This  is  necessary  when  going  down  hill,  especially 
when  the  wheelers  are  loosely  poled  up,  so  as  to  prevent  the 
singletrees  from  hitting  the  leaders'  hind  legs. 

Lead  Reins. 

453.  In  order  to  shorten  these,  take  out  both  the  leaders  with 
the  right  hand  (the  third  and  little  fingers  over  off,  and  first  or 
middle  finger  over  near-side  rein)  ;   they  then  can  be  passed 
back  to  the  left  hand  the  required  length  by  letting  them  slip 
through  the   right  hand  the  necessary   amount.     To   lengthen 
them,  simply  pull  them  through  from  the  front. 

Near-Lead  Rein. 

Either  push  through  from  the  front,  with  the  full  of  the  right 
hand  over  the  rein,  or  take  it  right  out  of  left  hand  and  re- 
place it  the  proper  length. 

Off -Lead  Rein. 
Push  it  through  from  the  front. 

Near-Wheel  Rein. 

This  is  the  most  difficult  rein  to  keep  in  its  right  place  and 
to  shorten.  It  is  constantly  slipping  when  the  wheelers  pull. 
It  appears  to  be  the  best  plan  to  pull  it  through  from  behind. 


DRAFT  ANIMALS.  133 

Off-Wheel  Rein. 

Push  it  through  from  the  front  with  the  right  hand. 
Crossing  the  Road. 

454.  To  the  left:  Turn  the  left  hand,  knuckles  upward,  and 
pass  it  across  the  body  from  left  to  right ;  the  team  will  incline 
to  the  left,  the  reins  on  that  side  being  shorter. 

To  the  right:  Pass  the  left  hand  down  toward  the  left  hip, 
back  of  the  hand  to  the  front,  with  the  knuckles  of  the  fore- 
finger downward,  and  that  of  the  little  finger  uppermost.  This 
shortens  the  right-hand  reins  and  causes  the  team  to  incline 
in  that  direction.  The  whip  can  be  applied  to  the  off  wheeler 
in  the  first  instance,  or  to  the  near  one  in  the  second,  if  they  do 
not  cross  rapidly  enough. 

Turning  to  the  Left. 

455.  With  the  right  hand  seize  the  near-lead  and  wheel  reins 
under  the  lower  fingers ;  then  either  pull  those  reins  up  toward 
the  center  of  the  body,  which  will  shorten  them,  or  allow  the 
left  hand  to  go  slightly  to  the  front,  which  will  slack  off  the 
right  reins,  or,  better  still,  combine  these  motions. 

Turning  to  the  Right. 

456.  Take  hold   of  the  off-lead  and  wheel   reins  with   the 
lower  fingers  of  the  right  hand  and  treat  them  in  the  same 
way  as  in  using  the  left  reins. 

To  Steady  the  Team. 

457.  In  order  to  steady  the  animals  or  to  ease  the  left  hand, 
the  right  may  be  placed  in  front  of  the  other  over  all  the  four 
reins,  the  third  and  little  fingers  being  over  the  off  reins  and 
the  upper  fingers  over  only  one  of  the  near  reins. 

The  Whip. 

458.  The  handle  should  rest  in  the  palm  of  the  right  hand 
and  be  kept  firmly  in  its  place  by  the  action  of  the  thumb 


134  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

pressing  against  the  base  of  the  forefinger;  the  lower  fingers 
will  then  be  left  free  to  catch  hold  of  the  reins. 

If,  however,  it  is  necessary  to  pull  the  reins  through  from 
behind,  tDe  lower  fingers  must  be  tightened  on  the  handle,  so 
as  to  allow  the  thumb  and  forefinger  to  be  used. 

Hold  the  whip  at  an  angle  of  about  30°  to  the  left  front  and 
about  40°  upward. 

The  thong  ought  to  have  three  or  four  turns  round  the 
handle. 

The  point  of  the  thong  should  be  just  under  the  inside  of  the 
thumb ;  this  will  keep  it  from  slipping.  Hold  the  whip  where  it 
will  balance  comfortably,  the  end  of  handle  under  the  forearm, 
the  wrist  well  bent,  and  the  elbow  close  to  the  side. 

459.  When  the  right  hand  is  on  the  reins  or  using  the  whip, 
it  should  be  kept  close  to  the  left,  the  forearm  being  nearly 
horizontal.     It  can  then  rest  on  the  thigh  and  yet  be  ready  for 
any  emergency. 

460.  The  wheelers  should  be  hit  in  front  of  the  saddles,  to 
avoid  making  them  kick.     It  is  no  use  hitting  the  wheelers  if 
the  leaders'  reins  are  too  long.      In  this  case  you  must  first 
shorten  up  the  wheelers'  reins,  and  then  use  the  whip  on  the 
leaders;  otherwise,  as  soon  as  the  wheelers  have  jumped  into 
their  collars,  the  leaders  will  again  press  forward  and  allow 
the  wheelers  to  hang  back  as  before. 

461.  The  proper  hitting  of  the  leaders  with  the  whip  can 
only  be  acquired  by  constant  practice  when  off  the  wagon.     A 
good  whip  can  hit  his  leaders  wherever  he  desires  and  with- 
out the  dangerous,  flail-like  swipes  that  some  teamsters  appear 
to  consider  necessary. 

To  Start. 

462.  Feel  all  the  animals'  mouths,  and,  if  necessary,  give 
them  the  word  to  go,  dropping  the  hand  to  them  at  once  until 
the  vehicle   is   fairly   off.     The  wheelers   ought   to    start   the 
wagon,  and  this  can  be  effected  by  touching  them  with  the 
whip,  if  they  require  a  hint.     It  is  never  safe  to  start  without 
having  the  whip  in  the  right  hand,  ready  for  immediate  use. 
The  whip  is  to  the  driver  what  the  leg  is  to  the  rider,  that  is,, 
it  keeps  the  team  up  to  their  bits.    As  soon  as  the  team  is  go- 
ing straight,  take  the  right  hand  off  the  reins,  at  the  same  time 
keeping  it  close  by,  ready  for  any  emergency. 


DRAFT  ANIMALS.  135 

Pulling  up. 

463.  When  you  want  to  pull  up,  shorten  all  the  four  reins  by 
passing  the  left  hand  up  to  the  right,  or  else  by  pulling  all  the 
four  reins  through  from  behind,  as  before  explained ;  then,  hav- 
ing the  right  forefinger  on  the  near  lead  rein,  the  middle  finger 
on  the  near  wheel,  and  the  lower  fingers  of  the  right  hand  on 
the  off  reins,  pull  both  hands  back  toward  the  body,  and  if 
necessary  lean  back  a  little. 

Should  the  team  be  getting  the  better  of  yon,  and  you  find 
that  you  can  not  stop  it,  it  will  be  found  a  great  assistance  to 
place  the  right  leg  over  all  the  four  reins,  as  you  may  be  able 
to  stop  them  by  the  extra  power  and  leverage  by  the  position 
of  the  leg.  Of  course  it  is  understood  the  brake  has  been 
applied. 

A  Few  Hints. 

464.  Always  keep  a  steady  pressure  on  the  reins. 

Never  remove  left  hand  from  reins,  even  though  the  right 
may  be  holding  them  in  front,  as  it  is  very  difficult  to  get  the 
left  hand  back  into  its  place  again  with  the  reins  in  the  right 
places. 

Lead  reins  should  seldom  be  removed  from  left  hand. 

Grip  the  reins  tightly  with  third  and  little  fingers  to  prevent 
their  slipping. 

Alter  position  of  bits  if  the  team  pulls  hard. 

See  to  it  that  your  wagon  is  always  well  greased. 

Always  take  a  pull  at  the  team  to  steady  it  just  before  you 
arrive  at  the  crest  of  a  hill,  and  begin  to  descend  slowly,  hold- 
ing the  leaders  steady,  and  with  just  enough  traction  to  keep 
their  singletrees  from  hitting  them. 

In  crossing  ruts  and  in  turning  corners  be  careful  that  the 
leaders  are  out  of  draft;  otherwise  the  pole  may  be  snapped 
off  or  the  wheelers  pulled  down. 

If,  while  going  down  a  hill,  and  especially  when  near  the 
bottom,  you  find  a  wheeler  slipping  on  his  hocks,  do  not  try  to 
pull  him  up,  but  drop  the  hand  and  allow  the  team  to  go  a  trifle 
faster. 

Rules  of  the  Road. 

465.  Always  keep  to  the  right  when  meeting  vehicles. 

On  a  narrow  road  a  loaded  team  has  the  right  of  way,  and 
it  should  be  given  ungrudgingly. 


136  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

On  overtaking  a  vehicle,  pull  out  to  the  left  and  pass  it  at 
a  steady  pace  and  without  cracking  your  whip  or  coming  in 
too  close. 

When  followed  closely  by  another  vehicle  and  both  are  at 
a  good  pace,  signal  with  your  whip  if  you  are  about  to  slacken 
your  gait  or  change  your  direction. 

When  approaching  a  railroad  crossing,  bring  your  team  to  a 
walk ;  halt  if  necessary,  but  always  look  and  listen. 

Be  courteous  in  observing  the  simple  rules  of  the  road;  give 
plenty  of  room  to  others,  and  do  not  forget  that  a  smile  or  a 
pleasant  laugh  will  do  more  for  you  than  a  growl  or  a  surly 
remark.  Horsemen,  as  a  rule,  possess  good  dispositions;  meet 
them,  at  least  half  way. 

CHAPTER  IY.— CARE  OF  SADDLE  ANIMALS. 

466.  Animals  for  riding  purposes  should  be  selected  with  a 
view  to  the  adaptability  of  their  backs  to  the  saddle. 

467.  The  back  of  a  saddle  animal  should  be  fairly  short.    A 
short  back  sustains  weight  better  than  a  long  one.    The  withers 
should  not  be  high  enough  to  be  rubbed  by  the  pommel  arch 
when  the  horse's  condition  is  low.     A  broad,  low  withers  is 
objectionable  for  the  reason  that  it  is  liable  to  be  pinched  by 
the  saddle  bars.    It  also  allows  the  saddle  to  drift  to  the  front, 
and,  as  a  matter  of  course,  the  cincha  will  come  in  contact 
with  the  elbow  and  lower  breast  muscles,  where  it  is  liable  to 
produce  galls. 

A  short  back  with  medium  withers  is  rarely  concave  (sway 
back)  to  any  great  extent.  Such  backs  generally  have  well- 
developed,  well-rounded,  deep  chests,  and  properly  proportioned 
abdomens. 

468.  A  thin,  tucked-up  belly  is  undesirable  in  a  saddle  ani- 
mal, the  reason  being  that  the  saddle  has  a  tendency  to  drift  to 
the  rear,  no  matter  how  tightly  it  may  be  cinched;  then,  too, 
animals  with  tucked-up  bellies  are  "  poor  keepers,"  and  go  to 
pieces  quickly  in  the  field.     On  the  other  hand,  "  pot-bellied " 
animals,  as  a  rule,  are  narrow  and  flat  in  the  chest   ( "  slab- 
sided"),  usually  poor  stayers,  and  are  generally  of  a  sluggish 
disposition. 


CARE  OF  SADDLE  ANIMALS.  137 

469.  The  problem  in  the  field  is  to  keep  the  back  in  good 
condition.    A  sore  back  means  a  led  horse,  and  for  riding  pur- 
poses a  useless  one. 

It  is  believed  that  with  fair  care  in  saddling,  riding,  and  un- 
saddling an  animal  of  decent  saddle  conformation,  a  continuous 
march  of  2,000  miles  and  more,  at  the  usual  rate,  with  the  pack 
up,  can  be  made  without  a  gall.  This  supposes,  of  course,  that 
there  is  a  sufficiency  of  forage  to  keep  the  animal  in  fair  condi- 
tion of  flesh. 

Blanket. 

470.  The  blanket  should,  if  possible,  be  kept  dry  and  free 
from  sand,  caked  dandruff,  and  hairs.    It  should  be  frequently 
shaken  out  and  well  switched,  if  necessary,  lo  retore  its  plia- 
bility and  remove  dust  and  hair.     In  warm  weather,  when  the 
animal  sweats  freely,  a  fresh,  clean  bearing  surface  on  the 
blanket  should  be  placed  next  to  the  back. 

It  is  not  a  good  plan  to  dry  the  sweat-soaked  surface  of  a 
folded  blanket  in  the  sun  and  put  this  dried  surface  next  the 
back  the  following  morning.  Such  drying  hardens  the  dandruff 
mixed  with  sweat  and  dust  that  is  always  present,  and  makes 
this  part  of  the  blanket  rough  and  hard.  It  is  preferable  to 
double  the  sweat-soaked  folded  blanket  on  itself,  so  it  will 
remain  moist  and  soft. 

To  keep  the  back  and  saddle  blanket  clean  and  the  latter  free 
from  sweat,  a  piece  of  smooth  canvas,  slightly  smaller  than  the 
folded  blanket,  and  placed  next  to  the  skin,  will  be  found  to 
give  satisfactory  results.  This  piece  of  canvas  should  never  be 
washed,  but  should  be  allowed  to  become  smooth  and  slick. 

Before  placing  the  blanket  on  the  back,  be  sure  that  both 
are  free  from  sand  and  dust,  and  that  the  mane  lies  properly. 
Place  the  blanket  in  position  in  such  a  manner  that  it  will  not 
disturb  the  mane  or  ruffle  the  hair  of  saddle  bed,  and  be  sure 
there  are  no  wrinkles  in  any  of  its  folds. 

Saddle. 

471.  It  is  of  importance  that  the  saddle  fit  the  rider  as  well 
as  the  horse. 

A  saddle  too  large  for  the  rider  may  not  be  objectionable, 
if  stirrups  are  of  the  proper  length,  but  a  saddle  with  too  small 


138  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

a  seat  causes  the  rider  to  place  undue  weight  over  the  cantle 
arch.  This  uneven  distribution  of  weight  causes  the  rear  of 
the  bars  to  bore  into  the  muscles  of  the  posterior  portion  of 
saddle  bed  and  to  induce  "  cantle  sores,"  or  so-called  "  kidney 
sores." 

A  saddle  too  large  for  the  animal  may  press  on  the  thinly 
covered  ribs  when  he  becomes  low  in  flesh.  Doubling  the 
blanket  will  not  save  him  from  the  inevitable  gall.  As  such  a 
saddle  sits  lower  on  the  back  as  the  animal's  condition  becomes 
low,  the  pommel  arch  will,  if  withers  are  high,  cause  contusion 
there,  and  may  produce  a  fistula. 

In  selecting  a  saddle,  secure  one  that  will  not  be  too  large 
for  the  animal  when  he  becomes  thin,  and  that  will  not  be  too 
small  in  the  seat  to  properly  accommodate  the  rider. 

Saddling. 

472.  There  is  no  hard  and  fast  rule  for  placing  a  saddle  in 
position  on  the  back.  The  saddle  place  is  determined  by  the 
animal's  conformation,  and  will  sooner  or  later,  during  the 
morning,  take  that  place  irrespective  of  tight  cinching.  On 
backs  of  good  saddle  conformation,  however,  the  saddle  if  too 
tightly  cinched  may  interfere  with  the  free  play  of  the  shoulder 
blades,  when  placed  too  far  forward  in  the  first  instance,  and 
may  remain  for  a  sufficient  length  of  time  in  this  objectionable 
position  to  cause  lameness  by  the  irritation  of  the  muscles  that 
run  from  the  upper  part  of  shoulder  to  the  bones  of  the  arms. 

The  saddle  should  not  be  placed  too  far  to  the  rear,  for  two 
reasons:  First,  on  most  backs  it  causes  it  to  tilt  forward  and 
bore  into  the  muscles  back  of  the  withers;  second,  this  position 
brings  the  cincha  back  on  the  "  floating "  ribs,  where  it  will 
compress  them,  thus  interfering  with  the  proper  expansion  of 
the  lungs. 

The  saddle  being  placed  in  the  proper  position,  determined 
by  the  conformation,  and  on  the  blanket,  which  should  be  with- 
out the  suspicion  of  a  wrinkle,  the  rider  should  see  to  it  that 
all  straps,  buckles,  and  lashings  are  free  of  the  bars,  that  the 
bars  rest  only  on  the  blanket,  and  that  the  pack  on  pommel 
and  cantle  does  not  rest  on  the  withers  nor  the  back. 


CARE  OF  SADDLE  ANIMALS.  139 

It  should  now  be  seen  to  that  the  quarter  straps  are  evenly 
adjusted,  and  that  there  are  no  wrinkles  or  rough  places  on  the 
ring  safes. 

Cinching. 

473.  The   cincha    should    not    be    unduly    tightened.     Tight 
cinching  causes  young  animals  to  rear  and  even  throw  them- 
selves.    It  induces  local  swellings  and  galls,  by  interfering  with 
the  circulation,  and  it  teaches  all  saddle  animals  to  inflate  the 
lungs  ("swell  themselves")  the  moment  they  feel  the  touch  of 
the  cincha.     On  cold  mornings  tight  cinching  causes  even  old 
saddlers  to  buck. 

Take  up  the  cincha  gently  and  draw  it  snugly,  then  secure  it 
temporarily.  Adjust  your  stirrups  and  see  that  they  are  of 
equal  length.  This  can  be  judged  by  standing  in  front  of  the 
animal  and  comparing  one  with  the  other.  It  will  be  found 
that  from  the  often  repeated  mounting  and  dismounting  on  the 
near  side  the  stirrup  leather  of  that  side  will  usually  be  found 
longer  than  the  other.  Having  adjusted  things  generally,  re- 
turn to  the  cincha  and  take  up  the  slack  that  will  now  be  found, 
draw  it  snugly  but  not  tightly,  and  secure  it,  being  careful  that 
there  are  no  wrinkles  in  the  strap  and  that  the  cincha  itself 
does  not  encroach  on  the  quarter  strap  ring  shield.  If  it  does, 
either  the  cincha  strap  is  too  long  on  the  off  side  or  the  cincha 
is  too  long.  In  either  event,  make  the  necessary  correction  at 
once,  if  possible.  If  this  correction  is  not  made  soon,  a  gall 
may  be  expected. 

Unsaddling. 

474.  On  arriving  in  camp  and  having  dismounted,  ease  off 
the  cincha  about  3  inches  and  change  the  bearing  of  the  saddle 
by  moving  it  to  rear  or  front  at  least  an  inch.    Allow  the  saddle 
to  remain  on  the  back  for  ten  or  twelve  minutes,  to  enable  the 
almost  bloodless  skin  beneath    (caused  by  weight  of  yourself 
and  pack)  and  the  tired  saddle  bed  muscles  to  regain  to  some 
extent  their  lost  tone,  while  you  busy  yourself  about  the  bridle 
and  halter,  and  the  religious  duty  of  closely  examining  the  feet 
for  loose  shoes,  rocks,  nails,   bruises,   thrush,  and  interfering 
sores.     Now  remove  the  saddle,  turn  over  the  blanket,  and  let 
that  remain  in  place  until  the  back  has  dried. 


140  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

475.  If  any  dry  spots  are  noticed  on  the  sweaty  skin  while 
the  blanket  is  being  turned  over,  remember  they  are  inflamma- 
tions of  the  skin,  produced  by  unequal  distribution  of  weight, 
and  are  liable  to  puff  up  later  if  not  attended  to.    Mark  their  lo- 
cation well,  for  you  are  close  to  the  walking  stage  if  you  neglect 
them.    When  the  back  is  dry,  remove  the  blanket  and  take  care 
of  it.     Massage  well  from  front  to  rear  the  spots  referred  to, 
bathe  the  saddle  bed  with  clean  water,  dry  it,  and  let  the  ani- 
mal roll  if  he  will.     Should  small  swellings  appear,  however, 
keep  the  blanket  in  place  until  a  soaking  wet  gunny  sack  is 
procured.    Now  remove  the  blanket,  massage  the  swelling  vigor- 
ously, and  put  the  wet  folded  gunny-sack  pack  over  the  back 
and  secure  it  there.     Do  not  allow  the  animal  to  roll  if  it  can 
be  avoided,  and  keep  the  pack  wet  during  the  night.     In  the 
majority  of  cases  the  animal  will  be  ready  for  careful  saddling 
in  the  morning. 

476.  should  you  have  produced  a  gall,  the  place  should  be 
bathed  and  disinfected  with  a  creolin  or  carbolic-acid  solution 
(1  ounce  to  the  quart  of  water),  the  spot  protected  from  the 
flies,  cold-packed  if  necessary,  and  the  animal  led  until  nature 
effects  a  cure.     Close  attention  to  cleanliness,  disinfection,  and 
stimulation  of  the  wound  will  hasten  the  process.     Use  a  solu- 
tion of  aloes  or  alum  in  water   (one-half  ounce  of  either  to  a 
pint  of  water)  as  a  stimulant. 

477.  Even  with  very  close  attention  to  saddling,  galls  may 
be  produced  if  the  rider  is  not  a  careful  one. 

Irrespective  of  the  fit  of  the  saddle  and  condition  of  blanket, 
the  things  that  cause  galls  and  "  bunches "  most  frequently 
are  carelessness  in  balancing  and  securing  the  pack,  a  loung- 
ing, shifting  seat,  and  a  sloppy  method  of  handling  the  reins, 
inattention  to  proper  cinching,  unequal  length  of  stirrups, 
neglect  of  adjustment  at  the  halts,  the  riding  of  a  lame  animal, 
and  the  galloping  of  a  leg-weary  one. 

Bitting. 

478.  Use  a  snaffle  in  preference  to  a  curb,  and  adjust  it  so 
that  it  will  not  elevate  the  corners  of  the  lips.     When  a  bit  and 
bridoon  are  used,  let  the  bit  hang  somewhat  lower  than  the 
bridoon.    Adjust  the  curb  strap  or  chain  properly,  and  be  sure 
that  the  animal  is  comfortably  fitted. 


CAEE  OF  PACK  ANIMALS.  141 

The  inside  of  the  lower  jaw  is  often  injured  by  ignorant 
handling  of  the  curb  rein.  These  injuries  appear  above  the 
bridle  teeth  or  "  tusks  "  and  present  inflamed  places  that  some- 
times exhibit  ulcers.  Quite  often  the  bone  is  splintered.  Less 
frequently  the  under  part  of  the  jaw,  in  the  vicinity  of  the  curb 
groove,  is  bruised  and  perhaps  fractured  more  or  less  com- 
pletely. 

Any  of  these  conditions  may  be  made  manifest  by  the  animal 
"  fighting  the  bit,"  "  throwing  the  head,"  or  rearing. 

479.  These  injuries  should  be  treated  by  putting  the  animal 
on  a  snaffle  at  once  and  placing  it  high  enough  in  the  mouth  to 
avoid  any  pressure  on  the  injured  parts.     If  ulcers  appear,  wash 
them  out  frequently  with  a  saturated  solution  of  boracic  acid. 
When  the  bone  is  splintered  it  is  usually  a  serious  matter,  and 
the  parts  should  not  be  interfered  with  by  the  inexperienced. 

CHAPTER  V.— CARE  OF  PACK  ANIMALS. 

480.  The  selection   of  a   properly   shaped   pack  animal   for 
use  under  the  aparejo  is  a  difficult  one  to  the  novice,  but  it  can 
be  made  with  ease  by  one  who  has  an  intimate  knowledge  of  the 
conditions  under  which  such  an  animal  must  serve. 

481.  The  pack  animal  should  be  between  14  hands  and  1  inch 
and  15  hands  in  height.    He  should  be  of  a  chunky  build,  pos- 
sessing a  strong,  fairly  straight,  well-shaped  back.    His  withers 
should  not  be  high,   nor  sharp ;   neither   should   they   be  low 
enough  to  slope  the  back  to  the  front,  and  his  weight  should  be 
in  the  neighborhood  of  975  pounds. 

Too  small  an  animal  will  not  "  stand  up "  under  the  usual 
pack  load  of  250  pounds. 

Too  tall  an  animah  will  be  inconvenient  to  pack,  as  the  cargo 
must  of  necessity  be  elevated  by  one  man  on  each  side  of  him. 

482.  Having  a  pack  animal  of  good  conformation  to  begin 
with,  understanding  the  construction  of  the  aparejo  and  being 
familiar  with  the  method  of  "  setting  up,"  "  ribbing,"  and  stuff- 
ing it,  and  of  breaking  it  in  to  a  particular  animal,  it  is  be- 
lieved that  the  withers,  sides,  belly,  elbows,  loins,  and  dock  of 
the  animal  to  which  a  well-fitting  aparejo  pertains  may  be  kept 
free  of  "  bunches  "  and  galls  under  ordinary  service  conditions 
in  the  field. 


142  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

483.  In  an  organization  where  the  art  of  properly  "ribbing," 
stuffing,  and  fitting  an  aparejo  is  more  or  less  of  a  mystery,  it  is 
only  a  question  of  a  few  days  on  the  march,  even  with  light 
cargoes,  until  many  of  the  pack  animals  will  be  unable  to  trans- 
port a  burden,  on  account  of  the  quickly  appearing  galls,  sores, 
and  "  bunches  "  produced  by  faulty  distribution  of  the  sticks, 
which  may  be  either  too  large  or  too  small.    The  wrong  kind  of 
hay,  or  too  much  or  too  little  of  it  may  be  used  in  the  stuffing. 
The  aparejo  itself  may  be  too  deep,  too  shallow,  or  too  narrow. 

484.  Should  the  wrong  kind  of  hay  be  used  for  stuffing  pur- 
poses it  is  apt  to  cake  or  wad  in  a  day  or  two.    Should  too  much 
hay,  even  of  the  soft,  crisp  variety,  be  used,  it  will  cause  the 
aparejo  to  flare  or  stand  out  and  lose  its  grip  on  the  body  of  the 
animal.     Should  too  little  of  the  hay  be  introduced  it  will  not 
provide  sufficient  protection  for  the  animal's  ribs. 

485.  If  the  aparejo  should  be  too  deep,  it  will  have  a  ten- 
dency to  wrap  itself  around  the  belly  and  cause  belly  sores. 
Should  it  be  too  shallow  it  will  ride  too  high,  be  defective  in 
grip  and  drift  to  the  front  or  rear,  depending  on  the  kind  of 
trail   traveled.     Should  the  "  ribbing "   sticks  be  too   stiff,  or 
taper  in  the  wrong  direction,  they  will  not  adapt  themselves  to 
the  shape  of  the  animal's  frame,  and  if  too  slender  they  will 
lack  spring  enough  to  keep  the  weight  off  the  ribs. 

486.  When  the  corona  is  neglected,  or  improperly  scraped 
and  cleaned,  it  may  cause  irritation  of  the  skin.    The  same  is 
true  of  the  crupper. 

487.  The   proper    "ribbing,"    stuffing,    and   packing   of   the 
aparejo  is  an  art  that  can  only  be  acquired  during  a  long  ap- 
prenticeship.   Throwing  the  "  diamond  "  hitch,  the  sole  stock  in 
trade  of  some  men,  is  but  a  small  part  of  the  packer's  art,  and 
may  be  learned  in  two  lessons  by  even  a  dull  intellect. 

Keeping  the  animals  on  the  trail  day  after  day,  each  one 
carrying  his  load,  in  good  health  and  sound  body,  is  a  problem 
for  an  expert  packer. 

488.  In  a  supply  pack  train  on  the  march  the  cargoes,  as  a 
rule,  decrease  in  w eight  from  day  to  day  as  rations,  ammuni- 
tion, and  forage  are  expended,  and  this  is  taken  advantage  of 
to  favor  weak  or  galled  animals.     In  organizations  where  the 
cargo  is  fixed  by  regulations,  the  weight  is  usually  235  pounds, 
and  is  seldom  reduced.    It  follows,  as  a  matter  of  course,  that 


CAEE  OF  PACK  ANIMALS.  143 

the  latter  pack  outfit,  even  though  it  may  be  small  in  numbers, 
demands  closer  attention  to  the  warding  off  of  galls  than  the 
former. 

489.  When  an  aparejo  of  the  size  suitable  to  the  animal  is 
properly  fitted  to  a  particular  animal,  and  by  fitting  is  meant  its 
close  adjustment  to  the  animal's  frame  in  the  same  manner  as 
a  shoe  of  the  proper  size  conforms  to  the  inequalities  of  the 
human  foot  when  well  broken  in,  never  change  it  to  another 
with  a  view  to  packing  unless  absolutely  necessary,  and  not  even 
then  until  it  has  been  restuffed,   perhaps  reribbed,  and  thor- 
oughly broken  in  to  the  new  conformation.     Neglect  of  these 
precautions  will  be  productive  of  serious  mischief. 

490.  The  disabling  conditions,  caused  by  the  aparejo,  to  be 
guarded  against  are  bruised  withers,  galled  elbows,  belly  sores, 
crupper  galls,  and  loin  and  back  sores. 

491.  Contusion  of  withers  is  the  result  of  undue  height  of 
same,  too  narrow  or  too  wide  a  collar  arch,  lack  of  sufficient 
stuffing  in  front  under  arch,  improperly  balanced  top  load,  de- 
fective conformation  of  animal,  and  drifting  of  aparejo.     Con- 
tusion of  withers  is  a  serious  matter.     The  pressure  should  be 
removed  at  once,  and  the  entire  withers  covered  with  a  cold- 
water  pack.     A  folded  gunny  sack,  kept  well  saturated  with 
water  and  secured  in  place,  will  produce  good  results  in  allay- 
ing inflammation.     If  a  fistula  should  form,  usually  indicated 
by  a  running  sore,  the  animal,  as  a  rule,  becomes  unfit  for  pack 
purposes  thereafter. 

492.  Galled  elbows  are  due  to  contact  with  the  cincha.    When 
a  properly  adjusted  cincha  infringes  on  the  elbow  and  produces 
galls,  it  shows  that  the  aparejo  has  been  placed  too  far  forward, 
or  that  the  animal's  conformation  is  defective  ("  soldier  toed"). 
Packers  generally  adjust  the  aparejo  so  that  the  cincha  passes 
about  If  inches  behind  points  of  elbow. 

Treatment  of  elbow  galls  consists  in  freeing  them  of  the  irri- 
tating cause  and  keeping  them  clean.     They  heal  rapidly. 

493.  Crupper  galls,  in  open  country,  indicate  that  the  aparejo 
is  either  too  long  or  too  short.     If  too  long  it  will  wrap  around 
the  chest  to  some  extent  and  develop  a  tendency  to  drift  for- 
ward, thus  putting  undue  strain  on  the  crupper.     Should  the 
aparejo  be  too  short  it  will  be  defective  in  body  grip,  and  will 
shift  from  side  to  side,  especially  with  a  top  load.     This  sway- 


144  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

ing  will  cause  the  crupper  to  act  as  a  saw.  Should  a  properly 
fitting  aparejo  cause  crupper  galls,  they  may  be  traced  to  too 
tight  lacing  of  the  latter,  or  by  too  much  stuffing  of  the  aparejo 
in  the  boots.  The  overstuffing  near  the  boots  weakens  the  grip 
on  the  body. 

Treat  crupper  galls  by  proper  adjustment  of  aparejo,  thorough 
cleaning  of  wounds,  and  the  application  of  a  solution  of  aloes 
in  water  (one-half  ounce  to  the  pint).  If  these  galls  are  severe, 
wash,  after  cleaning  and  before  applying  the  aloes,  with  a  cre- 
olin  solution  of  1  ounce  to  the  quart  of  water. 

494.  Loin  or  kidney  sores  are  due  to  the  aparejo  drifting  to 
the  rear,  an  unusual  condition  except  in  hilly  country;  or  to 
placing  it  improperly  on  the  back  and  holding  it  there  by  means 
of  the  crupper,  or  by  the  unequal  distribution  of  the  cargo. 

These  kidney  sores  readily  respond  to  treatment  when  the 
cause  is  removed.  A  cold  water  padk  (wet  gunny  sack)  soon 
relieves  the  inflammation. 

495.  Belly  sores  are  the  result  of  too  tight  cinching.     The 
fit  of  the  aparejo  has  considerable  influence  on  the  cinching, 
for  should  the  aparejo  flare  at  the  boots  from  overstuffing,  it 
will  not  conform  to  the  shape  of  the  animal,  and  undue  cinch- 
ing will  have  to  be  resorted  to  to  hold  it  in  place.     With  very 
tight  cinching  a  patch  of  skin  on  the  under  part  of  the  chest 
may  have  its  circulation  entirely  stopped;  in  such  an  event  a 
piece  of  dead  skin  may  come  away  when  the  cinch  is  taken  off 
and  leave  a  nasty  wound.     Proper  size  of  aparejo  and  proper 
"ribbing"  and  stuffing  should  be  the  preventive.     Cleanliness, 
disinfection,  protection  from  dust  and  flies,  and  the  application 
of  a  weak  solution  of  aloes  or  alum  in  water  (one-half  ounce 
of  either  to  the  pint)  will  give  good  results  in  the  line  of  treat- 
ment. 

496.  Body  sores,  galls,  and  swellings,  the  most  disabling  of 
all  aparejo  troubles,  are  caused  by  the  following:  Bad  confor- 
mation,  unequal   pressure,   wrong  "  ribbing,"   careless  stuffing, 
imperfectly  broken-in  aparejo,  aparejo  too  short,  aparejo  too 
narrow,  careless  packing,  overloading,  and  unwieldly  top  load. 

497.  Swellings  are  due  to  interference  with  the  circulation 
of  the  skin  at  the  particular  spot,  for  at  that  spot  the  extreme 
pressure  lowers  the  tone   of  the   small  blood  vessels,   which, 
when  pressure  is  suddenly  released,  become  engorged  with  the 


CAKE  OF  PACK  ANIMALS.  145 

constituents  of  the  blood,  and  remain  so  engorged  until  the  tone 
is  regained.  If  the  tone  should  not  be  regained  the  swelling 
will  persist,  the  skin  there  will  mummify  and  a  sitfast  or  cal- 
lous will  form.  Should  the  circulation  be  entirely  stopped  and 
the  small  blood  vessels  become  paralyzed,  a  patch  of  skin  will 
slough  off  (mortify)  and  leave  an  angry-looking  wound  more 
or  less  deep. 

Simple  galls  are  due  to  rubbing  or  chafing  of  the  part. 

498.  When  putting  on  the  aparejo,  see  to  it  that  the  corona 
is  right  side  front,   clean  and  smooth,   and  that  the  aparejo 
itself  belongs  to  the  animal  on  which  it  is  put.    A  general  rule 
can  not  be  laid  down  for  packing  and  cinching,  and  experience 
must  be  the  teacher. 

499.  On  reaching  camp,  remove  the  cargo  in  a  leisurely  man- 
ner, relax  the  cincha,  and  allow  the  cinched  aparejo  to  remain 
in  place  for  15  minutes  or  so,  until  the  circulation  of  the  skin 
of  the  back  is  restored  to  the  normal  and  the  parts  under  the 
aparejo  become  gradually  cool.    When  the  aparejo  is  at  length 
removed,  examine  the  back  for  swellings,  and  massage  them 
from  front  to  rear,  to  cause  them  to  disappear.     Apply  a  cold 
water   pack,   if  necessary,   and   keep   it  wet  and   securely   in 
place. 

500.  Very  often  fairly  large  swellings  may  be  reduced  by 
simply  putting  a  dry  blanket  over  the  back  and  immediately 
replacing  the  aparejo  and  cinching  it  snugly. 

501.  When  a  swelling  persists,  or  when  it  is  evident  that 
there  is  undue  pressure  on  a  particular  spot,  the  aparejo  should 
be  chambered  on  the  bearing  surface  over  that  spot.    Chamber- 
ing consists  in  taking  out  the  stuffing  at  the  spot  indicated,  so 
as  to  relieve  the  pressure.    This  chambering  is  done  by  insert- 
ing the  hand  in  the  handhole  and  carefully  withdrawing  the 
stuffing  at  the  place  selected.     To  accurately  locate  the  place 
where  the  chambering  is  needed,  apply  a  little  wet  clay  over 
the  swelling  and  then  put  on  the  bare  aparejo  and  fit  it  into 
its  proper  place  and  roll  it  slightly  from  near  to  off  side.    The 
wet  clay  over  the  swelling  will  adhere  to  the  leather  and  mark 
the  exact  spot  sought  for. 

502.  It  is  the  custom  in  some  pack  trains  to  "  pack  out "  the 
"  bunches  "  by  means  of  light  loads.    This  treatment  is  effective 
only  when  the  small  blood  vessels  have  not  entirely  lost  their 

82940°— 11 10 


146  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

tone.  Where  a  sitfast  or  callous  forms,  or  where  a  slough 
takes  place,  there  is  no  simple  remedy  to  take  the  place  of  the 
operation  and  energetic  treatment  indicated. 

503.  The  pressure  of  the  unpacked  aparejo,  massage,  and 
cold  water  packing  are  to  be  relied  on  when  body  "  bunches " 
appear. 

In  all  cases,  where  practicable,  relieve  the  suffering  animal 
from  weight  of  cargo.  A  rest  of  24  hours  may  restore  him  to 
work. 

Wounds  of  the  back  should  be  kept  clean  and  protected  from 
dust  and  flies. 

504.  When  it  is  not  intended  to  carry  loads,  mules  should 
not  be  tightly  cinched.    A  pack  mule  is  best  kept  moving.    At 
halts  of  sufficient  duration  the  loads  should  be  removed.     At 
longer  halts  the  cincha  should  be  loosened,  but  only  at  sus- 
tained halts  should  the  mules  be  unharnessed. 

CHAPTER  VI.— STABLE  MANAGEMENT. 

505.  Foul  air  and  dampness  cause  many  of  the  diseases  of 
the  horse,  hence  the  importance  and  economy  of  spacious,  clean, 
dry,  and  well-ventilated  stables.     Ceilings  should  be  12  to  15 
feet  high,  with  large  ventilators  through  the  roof,  and  a  window 
or  a  side  aperture  in  each  stall,  which  should  be  placed  well 
above  the  horse's  eyes.     If  possible,  the  building  should  have 
no  upper  story  or  loft. 

Double  stalls  should  be  not  less  than  9  feet  wide  by  10  feet 
6  inches  long,  measured  from  the  wall,  and  not  less  than  1,200 
cubic  feet  of  air  space  should  be  allowed  to  each  horse  in  the 
stable. 

In  stables  with  a  loft,  ventilation  from  the  top  is  always  in- 
sufficient, and  there  must  be  side  openings  well  above  the 
horses,  so  that  the  draft  will  pass  over  their  heads. 

These  openings  should  not  be  closed,  except  on  the  windward 
side,  to  keep  out  the  rain  or  snow. 

If  the  stable  is  partitioned  off  into  single  stalls,  each  stall 
should  be  at  least  5  feet  in  width,  to  permit  the  horse  to  lie 
down  without  difficulty. 

A  picket  line  is  established  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  each 
stable,  the  horses  being  tied  to  a  manila  or  wire  rope  or  chain 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT.  147 

passed  through  the  picket  posts.  There  should  be  shallow 
trenches  behind  the  horses  to  carry  off  the  rain,  the  ground  on 
which  they  stand  having  just  enough  slope  to  let  water  run  into 
the  trenches,  or  there  may  be  a  single  drain  in  the  center  along 
the  line  of  the  posts.  Constant  attention  must  be  given  to 
keeping  the  ground  about  the  picket  line  in  good  order. 

General  Rules  for  Stable  Management. 

506.  The  following  general  rules  are  recommended: 

The  stable  sergeant  has  immediate  charge  of  the  police  and 
sanitary  condition  of  the  stable,  picket  line,  etc.,  and  is  the  cus- 
todian of  the  forage  and  stable  property  generally. 

The  stable  is  to  be  kept  thoroughly  policed,  free  from  smells, 
and,  except  portions  of  the  stalls  that  horses  can  reach,  should 
be  lime-washed.  There  must  be  no  accumulation  of  manure  or 
foul  litter  inside,  nor  near  the  doors  or  windows  without.  The 
feed  boxes  are  washed  from  time  to  time  and  kept  clean.  The 
ground  about  the  picket  line  is  swept  daily,  and  all  dung,  etc., 
carried  to  the  manure  heap. 

Except  at  night,  when  the  horses  are  bedded  down,  no  manure 
or  urine  is  to  remain  in  the  stalls;  the  stable  police  remove  it 
as  it  accumulates. 

If  practicable,  all  woodwork  within  the  reach  of  the  horses 
and  not  protected  with  sheet  iron  or  other  metal,  should  be 
painted  with  thin  coal  tar  to  prevent  it  being  gnawed.  The 
same  precaution  may  be  followed  with  regard  to  troughs, 
picket  posts,  and  picket  line.  It  should  be  thoroughly  dried  be- 
fore putting  horses  near  it. 

Smoking  in  stables,  or  in  their  immediate  vicinity,  is  pro- 
hibited. 

One  or  more  lamps  will  be  hung  in  each  stable  to  burn  during 
the  night. 

The  horses  are  stalled  according  to  their  sections ;  their  places 
at  the  picket  line  will  be  in  accordance  with  the  same  rule. 

Over  each  horse's  stall  is  placed  the  name  of  the  horse  under 
the  name  of  the  man  to  whom  assigned. 

Clay  is  the  best  for  earthen  floors.  Gravel  or  sandy  earth 
is  not  suitable. 

The  sloping  of  the  floor  of  stalls  from  the  manger  to  the  heel- 
post  is  injurious  and  uncomfortable  for  the  animal,  making 


148  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

him  stand  in  an  unnatural  position,  with  the  forelegs  higher  than 
the  hind  ones.  When  the  earthen  floors  are  level,  the  horse 
will  paw  a  hollow  for  his  forefeet  unless  he  can  elevate  his  hind- 
quarters by  backing  out  of  the  stall. 

Whenever  horses  go  out  of  the  stable,  the  windows  of  their 
stalls  are  to  be  kept  open,  unless  necessary  to  exclude  rain  or 
snow,  or  when  cold  drafts  affect  the  animals  in  contiguous  or 
opposite  stalls. 

Stable  doors  are  never  closed  in  daytime,  except  to  keep  out 
wet  or  to  exclude  cold  winds  that  blow  on  the  horses.  If  the 
doors  be  in  a  single  piece,  bars  are  put  across  the  doorway ;  if 
divided  into  upper  and  lower  halves,  it  will  usually  be  sufficient 
to  open  the  upper  part.  At  night  the  entrance  to  the  stables 
should  be  secured  in  such  fnanner  as  will  prevent  the  escape  of 
animals. 

When  circumstances  permit,  horses  should  be  turned  loose  in 
the  corral  during  the  daytime  or  herded  under  the  charge  of  a 
guard.  When  neither  is  practicable,  they  should,  except  in 
very  cold,  windy  weather,  or  in  very  hot  weather  where  there 
is  no  shade,  stand  most  of  the  day  at  the  picket  line,  as  they 
have  better  air  and  are  less  confined,  while  the  stables  become 
drier  and  more  healthful. 

In  ordinary  climates,  cavalry  stables  must  be  kept  as  cool  as 
possible.  If  the  horses  do  not  stand  directly  in  the  draft/  the 
colder  the  stable  the  less  will  they  suffer  if  called  suddenly  to 
take  the  field.  For  the  same  reason,  horses  should  never  be 
blanketed  in  the  stable,  except  during  very  cold  weather. 

507.  Horses  require  gentle  treatment.  Docile  but  bold  horses 
are  apt  to  retaliate  upon  those  who  abuse  them,  while  persistent 
kindness  often  reclaims  vicious  animals. 

A  horse  must  never  be  kicked,  or  struck  about  the  head. 

At  least  two  hours'  exercise  daily  is  necessary  to  the  health 
and  good  condition  of  horses.  They  should  be  marched  a  few 
miles  when  cold  weather,  muddy  ground,  etc.,  prevent  drill. 

Horses'  legs  will  be  often  hand-rubbed,  particularly  after 
severe  exercise,  as  this  removes  enlargement  and  relieves  or 
prevents  stiffness. 

The  sheath  will  be  washed  out  when  necessary  with  warm 
water  and  ca stile  soap,  and  then  dried  with  a  cloth. 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT.  149 

Sick  Horses. 

508.  The  horses  on  sick  report  are  in  charge  of  the  stable 
sergeant,  who  reports  daily  to  the  captain  for  instructions  as 
to  their  treatment. 

The  sick  horses  are  inspected  daily.  The  names  of  the  horses 
on  sick  report,  and  the  treatment  they  receive,  are  recorded 
daily  in  the  sick  book. 

In  treating  sick  horses,  it  is  to  be  observed  that  very  little  medi- 
cine is  ordinarily  required,  and  that  unnecessary  doses  do  a  great 
deal  of  harm. 

If  a  horse  sustains  an  injury,  neglects  his  feed,  refuses  to 
drink,  or  gives  any  evidence  of  sickness,  it  will  be  at  once  re- 
ported. 

No  horse  on  sick  report  will  be  taken  from  the  stable  or 
picket  line  for  exercise  or  work  without  permission  from  proper 
authority. 

509.  If  there  be  at  any  time  a  suspicious  discharge  from  one 
or  both  nostrils  of  an  animal,  it  must  be  immediately  reported. 

To  prevent  contagion  to  man  or  beast,  an  animal  that  shows 
any  decided  symptom  of  glanders  is  to  be  isolated  at  once,  and 
confined  or  tied  up  in  some  locality  where  no  other  animal  can 
approach  him. 

510.  A  glandered  horse  should  be  killed  as  soon  as  possible. 
The  stall  in  which  he  stood  is  torn  down  and  all  the  woodwork 
burned  and  the  ironwork  disinfected,  or  otherwise  it  is  closed, 
and  must  remain  empty  until  the  rack,  manger,  and  every  part 
of  the  iron  and  wood  work,  as  also  the  vessels  used  in  watering 
and  feeding,  and  his  saddle  and  bit  have  been  three  or  four 
times  thoroughly  washed  with  a  5  per  cent  solution  of  carbolic 
acid  or  a  1  to  1,000  solution  of  corrosive  sublimate ;  all  parts 
to   which   the   latter   has   been   applied   should   be   thoroughly 
scrubbed  with  hot  water  to  remove  all  traces  of  the  poisonous 
salt.     The  application  of  a  lime  wash  to  all  the  stalls,  after 
complete  disinfection,  will  be  desirable.    Small  articles,  such  as 
bits,  etc.,  can  be  disinfected  by  keeping  them  immersed  for  a 
half  hour  in  boiling  water.    All  articles  of  little  value  that  have 
been   used  with   a   glandered  horse,    such   as   halters,   bridles, 
horse    cloths,    saddlecloths,    blankets,    nosebags,     currycombs, 
brushes,  etc.,  should  be  destroyed. 


150  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

Stables  occupied  by  infected  or  suspected  horses  should  be 

disinfected  daily  by  washing  exposed  surfaces  with  a  5  per  cent 

solution  of  carbolic  acid,  and  nosebags,  halters,  buckets  used  for 

drinking  water,  etc.,  should  be  carefully  washed  with  the  same 

solution  or  with  boiling  water. 

511.  Drugs  and  dressings  sufficient,  under  ordinary  condi- 
tions of  field  service,  for  100  animals  for  one  month : 

Boracic  acid :  4  ounces,  saturated  solution,  for  disinfection  of 
wounds  of  eye  and  vicinity. 

Carbolic  acid:   16  ounces.     A  solution  of  1  ounce  to  1  quart 
of  water  to  disinfect  wounds  of  body. 

Alcohol :  1  quart ;  2  ounces  in  pint  of  water  as  a  quick  stimu- 
lant. 

Aloes:  20  ounces;  1  ounce  as  a  cathartic;  \  ounce  to  pint  of 
water  stimulates  wounds. 

Alum:  4  ounces;  \  ounce  to  pint  of  water  acts  as  a  nice  stimu- 
lant to  wounds. 

Ammonia,  aromatic  spirits  of:  16  ounces;  2  ounces  in  pint  of 
water  a  quick  stimulant. 

Ammonia,  solution  of:  8  ounces;  used  to  make  liniments. 

Paimabis  Indica :  16  ounces ;  %  ounce  to  the  dose  in  cases  of 
colic  to  relieve  pain. 

Pharcoal:  8  ounces;  used  to  dust  on  exposed  wounds. 

Posmoline:  2  pounds;  used  to  make  ointments. 

Pivolin:  1  pound;  1  ounce  to  quart  of  water  as  a  disinfectant 
for  wounds. 

Ether,  nitrous:  16  ounces;  2  ounces  in  pint  of  water  as  a  stimu- 
lant. 

Iodine  crystals :  2  ounces,  with  which  to  make  a  saturated  solu- 
tion or  tincture  for  application  to  sprains. 

Popper   sulphate:   1   ounce,   to  cut  down  granulations    (proud 
flesh). 

Mercury,  bichloride  tablets :  1  ounce ;  1  tablet  in  pint  of  water 
as  a   disinfectant  for  wounds. 

Olive  oil :  1  pint,  with  which  to  make  liniments. 

Turpentine:  1  pint,  to  make  liniments. 

Tar,  oil  of:  4  ounces,  with  which  to  make  ointments. 

DRESSINGS. 

Absorbent  cotton :  \  pound,  for  eye  pads. 

Antiseptic  gauze:  1  package,  for  dressing  of  wounds. 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT.  151 

Oakum :  3  pounds,  to  be  used  in  dressing  wounds. 

Red  flannel  bandages :  1  dozen. 

White  cotton  bandages :  2  dozen. 

Silk  thread:  %  ounce. 

Soap,  ca stile:  1  pound. 

Sponges:  4,  small. 

Adhesive  plaster :  1  roll. 

INSTRUMENTS,    ETC. 

1  farrier's  case. 

1  thermometer. 

1  twitch. 

1  drenching  bottle. 

4  small  bottles  and  corks. 

1  tin  basin. 

2  quart  bottles  and  corks. 
30  sheets  tissue  paper. 

A  liniment :  Olive  oil.  3  ounces ;  turpentine,  2  ounces ;  ammonia 
(solution  of),  2  ounces.    Mix  well.    Apply  with  slight  fric- 
tion. 
A  stimulant :  Aromatic  spirits  ammonia,  2  ounces ;  alcohol,  1 

ounce ;  water,  16  ounces.     Mix.     Give  as  a  draught. 
A  good  dusting  powder  for  wounds :  Air-slaked  lime,  16  ounces ; 

powdered  charcoal,  2  ounces.    Mix.    Dust  on  open  wounds. 
An  ointment :  Oil  of  tar,  1  ounce ;  creolin,  \  ounce ;  cosmoline, 

6  ounces.    Mix. 

512.  The  captain  is  responsible  for  the  proper  performance 
of  stable  duty  in  his  company. 

A  noncommissioned  officer,  designated  as  siable  sergeant,  or 
corpora/,  is  detailed  in  each  company  to  take  immediate  general 
charge  of  the  forage  and  stables.  He  is  held  responsible  for 
the  proper  policing  and  sanitary  condition  of  the  stable,  picket 
line,  and  ground  pertaining  to  them.  Two  or  more  men,  called 
stab/e  police,  are  detailed  for  the  purpose  of  policing,  removing 
manure,  feeding,  etc.,  under  the  direction  of  the  stable  sergeant. 

Usually  horses  are  groomed  twice  daily,  at  morning  and  at 
evening  stables,  under  the  supervision  of  the  first  sergeant  and 
a  commissioned  officer.  Under  special  circumstances,  it  may  be 
advisable  to  groom  only  once  a  day. 

The  stable  police,  after  grooming  their  own  horses  at  morn- 
•  ing  stables,  clean  out  the  stalls  and  police  the  stable,  under  the 


152  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DUTY,  ETC. 

direction  of  the  stable  sergeant.  The  bedding  is  taken  up,  that 
which  is  much  soiled  being  separated  from  the  manure  heap, 
and  the  remainder  put  on  the  litter  racks  or  spread  upon  the 
ground  to  dry. 

At  or  before  evening  stables  the  stable  is  policed,  the  bedding 
is  laid  down  and  fresh  straw  spread  on  top  of  it ;  the  bed  must 
be  soft  and  even,  with  the  thickest  part  toward  the  manger; 
where  horses  eat  their  bedding,  the  old  litter  should  be  placed 
on  top  of  the  new  straw. 

Grooming. 

513.  The  grooming  is  always  done  at  the  picket  line,  except 
in  stormy  weather.  Stable  call  is  the  first  call  or  warning  call 
for  stables,  and  precedes  assembly  by  such  interval  as  may  be 
prescribed.  The  roll  having  been  called,  the  company  is 
marched  to  the  horses  or  stable,  and  upon  arrival  there  the  first 
sergeant  commands,  Commence  grooming,  by  sections;  fall  out. 
The  horses  are  then  tied  on  the  picket  line,  if  not  already  there, 
and  are  groomed  under  the  direction  of  the  chiefs  of  sections. 
Each  man  habitually  grooms  his  own  horse,  except  that  the 
horses  of  the  first  sergeant  and  master  signal  electricians  may, 
at  the  discretion  of  the  company  commander,  be  groomed  by 
the  men  of  the  section  to  which  these  horses  are  attached. 
Drivers  and  wagoners  groom  the  animals  assigned  to  them. 

For  the  purpose  of  proper  supervision  in  grooming,  feeding, 
etc.,  the  horses  of  the  men  not  assigned  to  sections  and  other 
supernumerary  horses,  will  be  attached  to  sections. 

At  stables  each  man  examines  his  horse's  feet.  Horses  re- 
quiring shoeing  are  reported  to  the  noncommissioned  officer  in 
charge  of  the  section,  who  notifies  the  stable  sergeant. 

Each  horse  should  be  groomed  not  less  than  20  minutes,  and 
as  much  longer  as  may  be  necessary.  When  the  horses  of  any 
section  are  sufficiently  groomed,  the  chief  of  section  reports 
that  fact  to  the  first  sergeant.  The  section,  at  the  discretion  of 
the  company  commander,  may  then  lead  in,  and  the  horses  will 
be  led  to  their  stalls  and  properly  secured  under  the  supervision 
of  the  chief  of  section.  Should  the  officer  wish  to  inspect  the 
horses  of  any  section  or  of  the  whole  company  before  they  are 
led  in,  he  will  notify  the  chief  of  section  or  the  first  sergeant, 
who  will  then  command :  Cease  grooming;  stand  to  heel.  When 
all  the  horses  have  been  groomed  and  led  in,  and  the  grooming 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT.  153 

kits  put  away,  the  first  sergeant  will  form  the  company,  march 
it  to  the  company  parade,  and  dismiss  it. 

If,  when  the  horses  are  inspected,  the  officer  finds  any  of  them 
not  properly  groomed,  he  will  direct  that  these  horses  be  left 
at  the  picket  line  and  groomed  under  the  supervision  of  a  non- 
commissioned officer  detailed  for  that  purpose. 

To  Groom. 

514.  The  horse's  feet  are  first  thoroughly  cleaned  with  the 
hoof  pick.    Then  take  the  currycomb  in  the  right  hand,  fingers 
over  back  of  comb ;  begin  at  the  near  side  at  the  upper  part  of 
the  neck,  thence  proceed  to  the  chest,  arms,  shoulders,  back, 
belly,  flank,  loins,  and  croup  in  the  order  named.     Then  go  to 
the  off  side,  taking  the  comb  in  the  left  hand,  and  proceed  as 
before. 

The  currycomb  is  applied  gently  and  is  used  only  to  loosen 
the  scurf  and  matted  hair ;  it  is  not  used  on  the  legs  from  the 
knees  or  hocks  downward,  except  to  carefully  loosen  dried  mud. 

Next,  take  the  brush  in  the  left  hand  and  change  the  curry- 
comb to  the  right;  begin  at  the  head  and  then  the  neck  on  the 
near  side,  and  proceed  in  the  same  order  as  in  currying,  brush- 
ing also  the  parts  not  touched  by  the  comb ;  on  the  off  side 
take  the  brush  in  the  right  hand,  the  currycomb  in  the  left. 
The  principal  working  of  the  brush  should  follow  the  direction 
of  the  hair,  but  in  places  difficult  to  clean  it  may  be  necessary 
to  brush  against  it,  finishing  by  leaving  the  hair  smooth.  After 
every  few  strokes  clean  the  brush  of  dust  with  the  currycomb. 

Having  finished  with  the  brush,  rub  or  dust  off  the  horse  with 
the  grooming  cloth,  wipe  out  the  eyes,  ears,  and  nostrils,  and 
clean  the  dock.  The  skin  under  the  flank  and  between  the  hind 
quarters  must  be  soft,  clean,  and  free  from  dust. 

Currycombs,  cards,  or  common  combs  must  never  be  applied 
to  the  mane  or  tail ;  the  brush,  fingers,  and  cloth  are  freely  used 
on  both.  Straw  is  used  when  the  horse  comes  in  wet  from 
exercise,  rubbing  against  the  hair  until  dry,  from  his  hind  quar- 
ters up  to  his  head.  If  very  wet,  very  hot,  or  very  cold,  blanket 
the  horse,  groom  and  hand-rub  the  legs;  then  remove  the 
blanket  and  groom  the  body. 

Feeding. 

515.  In  garrison  it  is  recommended  that  grain  be  fed  by  the 
stable  sergeant,  assisted  by  one  or  two  members  of  the  stable 


154  CARE  OF  ANIMALS,  STABLE  DITTY,  ETC. 

guard  or  police  at  first  call  for  reveille.  The  grain,  in  a  box  on 
wheels,  is  rolled  opposite  the  stalls,  whence  it  is  transferred  to 
the  feeding  boxes  by  allowance  measures.  Grain  is  fed  again 
at  evening  stables  as  in  the  morning,  but  not  until  the  hay  has 
been  distributed  and  the  stable  swept  out  and  the  dust  thor- 
oughly settled. 

In  camp  or  on  the  march  grain  is  fed  morning  and  evening. 
The  men  are  marched  to  the  forage  wagons  or  other  grain  de- 
pository, where  the  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge,  with  an 
allowance  measure,  issues  to  each  in  turn. 

The  chiefs  of  sections  then  march  their  sections  back  to  the 
horses  and  command :  Feed.  Ordinarily  one  man  of  each  sec- 
tion will  remain  near  the  horses  until  they  have  done  eating,  to 
adjust  nose  bags.  Each  man  may  be  required  to  feed  and  groom 
as  soon  as  he  has  received  his  grain. 

In  garrison  hay  is  usually  fed  in  the  evening,  but  when  the 
horses  are  kept  in  the  stables  during  the  entire  day  a  portion 
is  fed  in  the  morning.  The  dust  must  be  well  shaken  out  of 
the  hay  before  it  is  put  in  the  mangers. 

In  camp  hay  is  fed  at  the  picket  line  morning,  noon,  and 
evening;  on  the  march,  when  the  horses  are  grazed  during  the 
day.  in  the  evening  only. 

The  use  of  bran  once  or  twice  a  week  is  important  for  stable 
horses.  In  spring  or  early  summer  they  should  be  grazed. 

Two  and  a  half  ounces  of  salt  should  be  given  each  week, 
preferably  lumps  of  rock  salt,  secured  in  or  near  the  manger. 

When  forage  can  not  be  obtained,  grazing  should  be  allowed 
at  every  spare  moment,  both  in  camp  and  at  halts  on  the  march. 

The  daily  allowance  of  oats,  barley,  or  corn  is  12  pounds  to 
each  horse  and  9  pounds  to  each  mule;  that  of  hay,  14  pounds 
to  each  animal ;  the  allowance  of  straw  for  bedding  is  100 
pounds  a  month  to  each  animal. 

516.  Good  oats  weigh  about  40  pounds  to  the  bushel;  barley, 
about  48  pounds;  corn,  about  56  pounds.  Pressed  hay  weighs 
about  11  pounds  to  the  cubic  foot. 

The  standard  bushel  in  the  United  States  contains  2,150.4 
cubic  inches.  A  cubic  yard  contains  21.69  bushels.  A  box  16 
by  16.8  by  8  inches  holds  1  bushel ;  a  box  8  by  8.4  by  8  inches 
holds  1  peck ;  a  box  8  by  8  by  4.2  inches  holds  one-half  peck,  or 
4  quarts. 


STABLE  MANAGEMENT.  155 

Watering. 

517.  Horses  must  be  watered  quietly  and  without  confusion; 
the  manner  in  which  this  duty  is  performed  is  often  a  good 
test  of  the  discipline  of  a  mounted  command. 

Horses  are  to  be  led  to  and  from  water  at  a  walk.  At  the 
drinking  place  no  horse  should  be  hurried  or  have  his  head 
jerked  up  from  the  water. 

In  the  field  or  on  the  march  the  watering  is  from  the  most 
convenient  running  water ;  in  garrison  it  is  usually  from  troughs, 
which  should  be  cleaned  each  day.  In  warm  weather  water 
drawn  from  a  cold  well  or  spring  should  stand  long  enough  for 
the  chill  to  pass  off. 

The  horses  are  watered  under  the  immediate  direction  of  the 
chiefs  of  sections,  but  if  they  are  liable  to  meet  those  of  other 
commands  at  the  watering  place  a  commissioned  officer  should 
supervise  this  duty. 

Horses  should  be  watered  before  feeding  or  not  until  two 
hours  after  feeding.  Ordinarily  they  should  be  watered  twice 
a  day ;  in  hot  weather  three  times  a  day.  In  very  cold  weather 
once  a  day,  about  noon,  is  sufficient.  A  horse  will  rarely  drink 
freely  very  early  in  the  morning. 

If  a  mounted  command  have  to  march  a  long  distance  without 
water,  so  that  it  will  be  necessary  to  encamp  en  route,  the 
animals  are  fed,  and  denied  water  until  just  before  starting, 
when  they  are  permitted  to  drink  freely.  The  command 
marches  in  the  afternoon  and  does  not  encamp  until  it  has  ac- 
complished at  least  half  of  the  distance,  and  moves  early  next 
morning  to  reach  water. 

Watering  the  horses  on  the  march  depends  in  a  great  meas- 
ure upon  the  facilities  to  be  had.  If  nothing  is  known  as  to 
the  country  over  which  the  day's  march  is  to  be  made,  water 
call  should  be  sounded  shortly  before  leaving  the  camp  and 
every  horse  given  an  opportunity  to  drink.  As  many  animals, 
however,  will  not  drink  at  an  early  hour,  or  until  after  exercis- 
ing, the  horses  should  be  watered  at  the  first  opportunity.  On 
severe  marches  frequent  watering  is  of  great  benefit. 

The  daily  allowance  of  water  for  a  horse  at  rest  is  about  6 
gallons ;  when  at  work,  from  8  to  12  gallons ;  for  a  man,  1  gal- 
lon for  all  purposes.  One  gallon  of  fresh  water  weighs  8$ 
pounds,  approximately  1  pint  to  1  pound. 


PART  V. 

TRANSMISSION   OF  INFORMATION. 

CHAPTER  I.— GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

518.  The  primary  function  of  the  Signal  Corps  is  the  trans- 
mission of  information  and  orders  affecting  tactical  and.  strate- 
gical situations.     This  will  be  constantly  kept  in  view  in  all 
drill-ground  and  school  training. 

When  by  reason  of  the  exposed  nature  of  the  duty  assigned 
to  any  signal  detachment  an  escort  becomes  necessary,  an 
application  therefor  will  be  made  to  the  proper  authority. 

519.  A  signal  officer  should  seek  to  maintain  the  most  in- 
timate official  relations  with  his  commanding  officer  and  the 
latter's  staff,  and  to  be  completely  in  his  confidence,  in  order 
to  obtain  the  earliest  possible  information  of  all  intended  move- 
ments and  the  probable  course  of  events  as  far  as  can  be  fore- 
seen.    The  prompt  establishment  of  lines  of  information  will 
be  greatly  influenced  by  this  cooperation. 

520.  In  order  that  the  condition  of  the  equipment  may  be 
such  as  to  insure  the  efficient  operation  of  all  lines  of  informa- 
tion at  all  times,  the  equipment  will  be  frequently  inspected, 
under  direction  of  the  company  commander. 

521.  Officers  only  will  use  the  telephone  on  field  lines,  and 
then  only   in  such  cases  where  the  same  ends  could  not  be 
attained  by  written  messages.     Operators  are  not  permitted  to 
receive    verbal    messages    for    transmission.      Operators   when 
directed  otherwise  by  officers  will,  before  obeying,  respectfully 
invite  the  officer's  attention  to  this  rule,  and  report  the  circum- 
stance and  the  name  of  the  officer  to  the  signal  officer  in  charge 
of  the  line.     Written  messages  may  in  case  of  necessity   be 
transmitted  by  telephone,  and  in  all  such  cases  the  entire  mes- 
sage will  be  repeated  back. 

522.  The  company  commander  should  secure  such  distribu- 
tion of  his  company,  whether  in  camp,  on  the  march,  or  in 
combat,  as  will  meet  every  probable  contingency  that  may  arise. 
Orders  to  his  subordinates  should  contain  all  the  information 
relative  to  the  commanders  and  organizations  between  which 

156 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES.  157 

lines  of  information  are  to  be  established,  the  terrain  over  which 
they  are  ordered  to  operate,  the  number  and  location  of  sta- 
tions, and  the  equipment  to  be  carried  by  them  as  may  be 
necessary  to  insure  a  thorough  understanding  of  their  mission. 
The  general  principles  and  rules  governing  the  composition  and 
forms  of  field  orders  as  laid  down  in  the  Field  Service  Regu- 
lations should  be  followed. 

Field  Lines. 

523.  The  lines  of  information  established  and  maintained  by 
field  companies  and  battalions  are  tactical  lines,  and  are  gen- 
erally designated  field  lines.     They  are  intended  to  furnish  a 
quick,    safe,    and   reliable   means   of   transmitting   information 
and  orders  between  the  headquarters  of  the  field  army  and  the 
divisions  and  auxiliary  troops  of  which  it  is  composed,   and 
within   the  divisions. 

524.  The  means  of  transmission  over  such  lines  of  informa- 
ation  may  be  electrical,  as  by  wireless  telegraph,  buzzer,  and 
telephone,  or  visual,  as  with  the  heliograph,  lantern,  rockets, 
etc.,  or  by  messenger. 

Visual  signaling  will  be  used  only  when  the  nature  of  the 
terrain  or  atmospheric  conditions  or  lack  of  equipment  pre- 
clude the  possibility  of  electrical  signaling.  The  flag  and  helio- 
graph are  used  for  signaling  during  the  day.  At  night  the 
acetylene  lamp,  rockets,  and  the  Very  pistol  may  be  used,  but 
they  will  not  be  resorted  to  except  upon  the  failure  of  electrical 
signaling.  The  possibility  of  interception  by  the  enemy  and 
the  likelihood  of  disclosing  our  own  position  will  cause  this 
class  of  signaling  to  be  used  with  caution. 

Messengers  will  be  used  when  other  methods  have  been  found 
impracticable  or  have  suddenly  failed. 

525.  Signal  officers  should  be  skilled  in  the  use  of  the  cipher, 
so  that  they  may  assist  officers  in  enciphering  and  deciphering 
messages. 

The  advantages  of  sending  messages  in  cipher,  when  there  is 
danger  of  their  falling  into  the  hands  of  the  enemy,  or  when  it 
is  desired  to  maintain  secrecy  in  our  own  forces,  should  be 
pointed  out  to  all  officers. 

526.  The  commanding  officer  must  be  kept  in  communication 
with  such  parts  of  his  command  as  he  considers  necessary,  at 
all  hazards. 


158  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

527.  Field  lines  between  the  headquarters  of  the  field  army 
and  the  divisions  should  start  from  the  headquarters  of  the 
field   army   and   move   forward   with   the   current.     Similarly,, 
lines  to  be  established  within  the  division  should  start  from 
division    headquarters,    although    exceptional    conditions    may 
sometimes  make  the  reverse  necessary. 

528.  The  field  lines  connecting  the  various  elements  of  a 
field  army  form  one  system,  which  is  controlled  from  field  army 
headquarters.     The  lines  from  the  division  commander  to  his 
subordinates  form  a  separate  system,  which  is  controlled  from 
division   headquarters.     Interference  with   any   part   of  either 
of  these  systems  by  others  than  those  charged  with  their  con- 
trol may  cause  serious  complications.     Stations  will  therefore 
not  be  closed  or  moved,  nor  will  lines  be  discontinued  without 
directions  from  the  source  of  control.     When,  under  exceptional 
c ire um stances,  it  becomes  necessary  to  move  or  close  a  station 
or  discontinue  a  line,  a  brief  report  of  the  proposed  action  will 
be  made  before  the  change  is  accomplished,  when  practicable; 
otherwise  a  report  of  the  circumstances  will  be  made  as  soon 
thereafter  as  practicable. 

529.  Whenever  practicable,  a  reserve  of  equipment  will  be 
kept  on  hand  to  provide  for  a  sudden  move  of  the  headquarters 
or  other  station.     For  this  reason  the  company  commander  must 
take  every  opportunity  to  reel  up  wire  no  longer  used.     This  can 
often  be  done  as  the  action  progresses  or  after  a  move  of  head- 
quarters. 

530.  Brigade  and   subordinate  commanders  will   ordinarily 
provide  their  own  internal  communication. 

53 1.  Signal  officers  will  endeavor  to  inform  themselves  of 
the  tactical  situation  and  the  plans  of  their  commanding  officer 
before  establishing  a   field  line.     Field  lines   should  never  be 
established  without  an  order  from  competent  authority  when 
it  is  not  impracticable  to  obtain  such  an  order. 

532.  When  a  wire  line  is  discontinued,  every  effort  will  be 
made  to  recover  the  wire,  and  wire  or  material  will  not  be 
abandoned  unless  its  recovery  has  become  impracticable. 

Buzzer  wire  will  be  used  for  short  lines  where  it  is  imprac- 
ticable or  unsafe  to  lay  a  line  with  the  wire  cart,  because  such 
lines  are  hard  to  see  and  easily  broken. 

533.  When  lines  are  laid  within  the  zone  of  fire  or  observa- 
tion of  the  enemy,  the  men  laying  the  lines  will  take  advantage 


GENERAL  PRINCIPLES, 


159 


of  cover  to  conceal  their  position  and  movements.  Sections 
should  not  be  placed  in  positions  exposed  to  the  enemy,  nor,  on 
the  other  hand,  in  places  where  it  will  be  difficult  for  those 
for  whose  use  the  line  is  established  to  find  them  readily. 

534.  Messages  transmitted  over  all  lines  of  information  will 
be  written   on  the  prescribed   message   blank.     The  time   and 
place  of  sending  and  receiving  will  be  accurately  noted,  and 
messages  will  be  numbered,  checked,  and  recorded,  and  a  carbon 
copy  thereof  retained,  in  accordance  with  the  regulations  pre- 
scribed therefor. 

535.  The  following  message  blank  is  prescribed  for  the  trans- 
mission of  messages  in  the  field : 


U.  S.  Army  Field  Message. 


Communicated  by  buzzer,  phone,  tele- 
graph, wireless,  lantern,  helio,  flag, 
cyclist,  foot  messenger,  mounted  mes- 
senger. 

Underscore  means  used. 


No. 


by. 


Sent  Time.     Rec'd    Time.    Check. 


by. 


This  space  for  signal  operators  only. 


From (name  of  sending  detachment 

here). 
At (location  of  sending  detachment 

here). 
Date Hour No 


To_ 


Received- 


160  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

This  blank  is  4f  by  6|  inches,  including  the  margin  on  the 
left  for  binding.  The  back  is  ruled  in  squares  and  provided 
with  scales  for  use  in  making  simple  sketches  explanatory  of 
the  message.  It  is  issued  by  the  Signal  Corps  in  blocks  of  40 
with  duplicating  sheets. 

536.  The  regulation  envelope  is  3  by  5i  inches,  and  is  printed 
as  follows: 

U.  S.  ARMY  FIELD  MESSAGE. 

To No ., 

(For  signal  o'perators  only.) 


When  sent 

Name  of  operator 

When  and  by  whom  received. 


This  envelope  will  be  returned  to  bearer. 

537.  Whether  a  message  shall  be  sent  by  signaling  or  mes- 
senger will  be  determined  by  the  length  of  the  message  and  the 
distance  to  which  it  is  to  be  sent. 

538.  Messages  will  be  transmitted  in  the  order  of  their  filing. 

When  under  exceptional  circumstances  an  officer  filing  a  mes- 
sage considers  it  necessary  for  his  message  to  have  precedence 
over  messages  previously  filed,  he  will  be  informed  by  the  opera- 
tor of  this  general  rule,  and  that  it  can  only  be  violated  by  direc- 
tion of  the  commanding  officer  for  whose  use  the  station  has 
been  established. 

539.  The  right  to  the  use  of  the  line  between  several  oper- 
ators shall  be  determined  by  the  signal  officer  or  operator  in 
charge  of  the  central  station. 

540.  In  cases  permitting  of  no  delay  whatever  in  the  trans- 
mission of  a  message,  the  use  of  the  wire  will  be  obtained  by 
means  of  the  signal  "  9." 

CHAPTER  II.— INSTRUCTION  IN   GARRISON. 

Genera/  Rules. 

541.  Instruction  in  The  School  of  the  Soldier,  dismounted, 
mounted,  and  in  signaling,  will  be  conducted  simultaneously, 
with  the  exception  that  telegraphy  will  not  be  taught  until  the 


INSTRUCTION  IN  GARRISON. 


161 


recruit  is  proficient  in  the  Myer  code.     Short  drills  in  each  will 
be  carried  on  to  avoid  undue  fatigue. 

542.  Signaling  instruction  will  include  visual  signaling,  teleg- 
raphy, the  simple  principles  involved  in  construction,  operation, 
and  repair  of  the  electrical  instruments  used  in  the  company, 
with  a  complete  training  in   Signal  Corps  field  duties.     Only 
men  capable  of  taking  the  advanced  course  in  electricity  will  be 
given  it;  and  these  with  a  view  to  promotion  to  first-class  ser- 
geants and  master  signal  electricians. 

The  Signal  Corps  manuals  will  be  used  in  company  and  post 
schools;  and  for  advanced  work  such  additional  textbooks  in 
electricity  and  aeronautics  as  may  be  prescribed  by  higher 
authority. 

543.  All   men   excepting  cooks   and   mechanics   will   be   in- 
structed in  visual  signaling,  as  far  as  practicable. 

Such  men  as  show  adaptability  for  the  work  will  be  given  a 
course  in  wireless  telegraphy. 

Visual  Signaling. 

544.  The  recruit  will   first  be  taught  the  alphabet  in  the 
Myer  code,  with  numerals,  abbreviations,  and  conventional  sig- 
nals, the  correct  positions  of  the  flag,  and  the  correct  method  of 
setting  up  and  adjusting  the  heliograph  and  lantern. 

545.  The  Myer  code,  abbreviations,  and  conventional  signals: 


A 

22 

O  . 

21 

B  

2112 

P... 

1212 

c 

121 

Q 

1211 

D 

222 

R 

211 

E 

12 

S  .. 

212 

F 

2221 

T 

2 

G 

.  2211 

U 

112 

II 

122 

V 

1222 

I 

..  .    1 

W.. 

1121 

J 

1122 

x 

2122 

K. 

.  2121 

Y 

..  Ill 

L 

221 

z 

2222 

M 

1221 

tion 

1112 

N... 

11 

NUMERALS. 


3.... 

.  1112 

4.          .  ... 

2221 

5 

1122 

ft 

2211 

7 

J999    v 

2111 

9... 

..  1221  0... 

.,  2112 

82940° — 11- 


-11 


162 


TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 

a after  t the 

b before  u you 

c can  ur your 

h have  w word 

n not  wi with 

r are  y yes 

CONVENTIONAL  SIGNALS. 

End  of  word 3 

End  of  sentence 33 

End  of  message 333 

Numerals  follow  (or)  numerals  end xx3 

Signature  follows sig  3 

Error 12  12  3 

Acknowledgment,  or  "  I  understand  " 22  22  3 

Cease  signaling 22  22  22  333 

Cipher  follows  (or)  cipher  ends 2122  121  3 

Wait  a  moment 1111  3 

Repeat  after  (word) 121  121  3  22  3  (word) 

Repeat  last  word 121  121  33 

Repeat  last  message 121 121 121  333 

Move  a  little  to  right 211  211  3 

Move  a  little  to  left 221  221  3 

Signal  faster 22123 


Visual  Stations. 

546.  Signal  parties  should  consist  of  four  men,  equipped  with 
the  necessary  visual  signal  equipment  for  the  operation  of  one 
station.     The  instructor  indicates  the  point  where  the  station 
is  to  be  established  and  the  location  of  the  station  or  stations 
with  which  communication  is  to  be  conducted. 

547.  At  the  command  open  station,  the  signal  equipment  is 
made  ready  for  use. 

One  man  is  designated  to  record  incoming  messages  and  to 
call  off  the  words  of  the  message  being  sent. 

A  second  man  manipulates  the  sending  apparatus  and  reads 
and  calls  off  incoming  messages  for  the  recorder. 

A  third  man  watches  the  distant  station  for  breaks. 

A  fourth  man  is  horse  holder  and  messenger. 

The  duties  of  each  will  be  varied  until  all  are  familiar  with 
various  duties. 

548.  The  Myer  code  will  always  be  used  with  the  flag,  and 
the  alphabet  and  conventional  signals  will  be  thoroughly  mas- 


INSTRUCTION  IN  GARRISON.  163 

tered  by  means  of  wand  drill  before  any  effort  is  made  to  do  out- 
side work.  This  instruction  will  be  conducted  at  such  time  and 
in  such  schools  as  prescribed  by  the  company  commander  or 
higher  authority. 

549.  The  Morse  code  will  be  used  with  heliograph  and  lan- 
tern.    Instruction  in  the  use  of  these  will  only  be  given. after 
the  recruit  has  made  satisfactory  progress  with  the  buzzer. 

550.  Signal  Corps  Manual  No.  6  will  be  used  for  further  in- 
struction in  visual  signaling. 

551.  The  outside  or  field  work  will  be  conducted  by  sections, 
which  may  be  divided  into  convenient  squads  of  four.     Chiefs 
of  sections  and  their  assistants  will  be  the  instructors.     These 
units  lend  themselves  readily  to  the  use  of  the  flag,  heliograph, 
and  lantern,  as  well  as  for  convenience  in  camping. 

Telegraphy. 

552.  The  ability  to  telegrapll  by  means  of  the  Morse  code  is 
the  most  important  qualification  for  men  of  the  Signal  Corps. 

553.  Instruction  in  telegraphy  will  be  conducted  in  classes, 
under  the  direction  of  the  company  commander,  by  competent 
noncommissioned    officers,    and,    when    practicable,    under    the 
personal  supervision  of  a  commissioned  officer.    In  this  instruc- 
tion the  buzzer  will  be  used  and  the  men  will  be  classified 
according  to  ability  and  progress.     Instruction  will  of  necessity 
be  conducted  indoors  until  the  operator  is  sufficiently  advanced 
to  work  to  advantage  on  field  lines,  which  should  be  indicated 
by  his  ability  to  send  and  receive  about  15  words  per  minute 
under  service  conditions. 

Such  men  as  have  no  adaptability  for  operating,  or  such  as 
are  not  sufficiently  educated,  will  not  be  given  this  instruction. 

Instruction  in  telegraphy  will  not  commence  until  the  recruit 
is  tliorouglily  familiar  with  "the  Myer"cbde  and  flag  signaling, 

554.  Instruments  will  be  provided  in  barracks  so  that  they 
are  accessible  to  the  men  at  all  times.    The  ambitious  will  make 
rapid  progress  under  such  circumstances.    The  Morse  code  will 
be  exclusively  used. 

Opportunity  will  be  given  men  to  use  typewriters  when  they 
have  progressed  sufficiently. 

555.  The  Morse  code  as  used  in  the  Signal  Corps  consists  of 
seven  elements:  (1)  the  dot;  (2)  the  dash;  (3)  the  long  dash; 


164 


TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 


(4)  the  ordinary  space;  (5)  the  letter  space;  (6)  the  word 
space;  aiid  (7)  the  sentence  space.  It  is  important  to  remember 
that  the  value  of  the  spaces  in  the  code  is  as  great  as  that  of 
the  dots  and  dashes.  The  complete  code  is  shown  in  plates 
21  and  22. 

ALPHABET   AND   NUMERALS. 


4 

ts 

sa 

K 

N     ••     « 

fill 

T  " 

B 

m 

? 

• 

a 

• 

0     •        • 

fill 

-  •  • 

D 

•# 

i 

. 

Q    •    • 

E 

B 

R     •        • 

IB 

t 
G 

a 

a 

i 

L"- 

W 

i     • 

T     •• 

,      , 

H 

a 

HI 

i     • 

U     i     • 

•                 8     IB    * 

.      •       I 

I 

a 

f« 

V     •     • 

••            9     ••     • 

"            1 

J 

c: 

B 

. 

•- 

1 

Win 

:4&              OB  •••• 

K 
L 

« 
a 

rt 
II 

SG 

Y     •    • 

M 

c 

e 

R 

2 

z   •   • 

• 

556.  The  arbitrary  unit  of  time  in  this  code,  which,  when 
written  down  becomes  a  unit  of  length,  is  technically  termed 
tlio  dot.  An  appreciable  time  is  required  for  the  production  of 
signals  by  electricity,  in  the  magnetization  of  the  electromagnet, 
and  in  the  movement  of  clockwork.  The  formation  of  a  dot, 


INSTRUCTION  IN  GARRISON.  165 

therefore,    necessarily    involves    time.      Assuming,     therefore, 
that— 

(1)  The  dot  is  the  unit  of  time. 

(2)  The  dash  is  equal  to  two  dots. 

(3)  The  long  dash  is  equal  to  four  dots. 

(4)  The  ordinary  space  between  the  elements  of  a  letter  is 

equal  to  one  dot. 

(5)  The  letter  space  is  equal  to  two  dots. 

(6)  The  word  space  is  equal  to  three  dots. 

(7)  The  sentence  space  is  equal  to  six  dots. 

557.  The  recruit  will  first  thoroughly  commit  to  memory 
the  groups  of  signs  representing  the  letters  of  the  alphabet,  the 
numerals,  and  the  principal  punctuation  points,  viz.,  the  period, 
the  comma,  and  the  point  of  interrogation.  The  remaining 
characters  can  be  learned  afterwards,  as  they  will  be  little 
needed  by  the  beginner. 


558.  The  most  approved  manner  of  grasping  the  key,  and 
one  which  has  been  employed  by  some  of  the  most  successful, 
experienced,  and  rapid  operators,  is  shown  in  plate  23.     Curve 
the  forefinger,  but  do  not  hold  it  rigid.     Let  the  thumb  press 
slightly  in  an  upward  direction  against  the  knob.     Keep  the 
wrist  well  above  the  table.     No  better  general  direction  can  be 
given  than  that  the  key  will  be  grasped,  held,  and  controlled 
with  the  same  flexible  but  perfectly  controlled  muscular  action 
of  the  fingers,  wrist,  and  forearm  with  which  the  skilled  pen- 
man holds  his  pen.     Carefully  avoid  tapping  upon  the  knob  of 
the  key ;  the  raising  spring  should  assist  the  upward  motion  of 
the  key,  but  should  never  be  permitted  to  control  it. 

559.  By  constant  drill,  as  hereinafter  directed,  the  habit  of 
making  dots  with   regularity,   uniformity,   and   precision   must 


• 

B 

B     B 

B 

• 

1 

| 

•     B 

I 

•          B 

£1 

IB 

• 

I      ^ 

1"      B     B 

§. 

i 

B 

1! 

•     • 

1 

•          • 

B 

. 

B 

B 

B            I 

B 

f. 

B    I    _ 

m    B 

,. 

w 

• 

• 

IB          .' 
•     5 

•         B 

1    B 

B 

tl 

*pr 

I 

I'll 

B 

! 

o 

B    B    • 

B 

R     i     • 

B 

5- 

ji  ._,•    „ 

•  •  • 

• 

-f 

I 

H 

u 

i 

&*• 

1              Clft 

X.          fift- 

s 

i 

Comma,  } 
Semicolon,  j 
Colon,  ; 

i 

Q      I 
§    1 

3  I 

Interrogation,  ' 

Exclamation, 
Dash, 
Hyphen, 
Pounds,2  i 

Shillings,1  y 
Dollars,'  J 
Capitalized  Letter,* 

Colon-Quotation,  ; 

Decimal  Point.  • 

4 

• 

•         • 

M 

1 

o 

3 

o- 

V 

S^ 

I    •    *    1 

II 

1    1 

III 

1     • 

V 

8J-5 

o 
rt 

1! 

•             . 

1     •     I 

s 

•    1 

•1 

*s 

|8 

I     1 

I    I    1    1 

II 

•-U    M    y>  -o 

i  ^c 

o  •*• 

•-     u 

•      U     •      p 

w* 

—                       -                oj^-^ 
^            5       5              ^c«-2 

1  J 

•s  « 
?? 

•>            7  5  ot.  o*a 

*    a 

c           2  S  Z  Z  3 

£  Jf 

•2          «  |  3  S  S" 
1          Hff? 

o-     5*»U 

•-s   irfii 

«                      .^            ^«x5  t  3  ^ 

To  be  used  befo 
To  be  w*d  befo 

.rf 

^  V  v    *       4^11  5 

8- 

* 

£ 

1  I  1  1     W« 

1    'S     §     1         33323 
P!    D    <5    a 

INSTKUCTION  IN  GARRISON.  167 

first  be  acquired;  then  dashes,  and  lastly,  in  order,  group  of 
dots  and  dashes,  letters  and  words.  In  commencing,  the  habit 
should  at  once  be  acquired  of  making  the  dots  like  short,  firm 
dashes.  The  recruit  should  learn  to  form  the  conventional  char- 
acters accurately  and  perfectly;  speed  will  come  in  good  time, 
but  only  as  a  result  of  constant  and  persistent  drill. 

Elementary  Principles. 

560.  As  a  basis  for  practice,  the  code  may  be  regarded  as 
comprising  six  elementary  principles,  viz : 

First  principle.  Associated  dots. 

I  S  H  P  6 


Second  principle.  Associated  dashes. 

M  5  fl 

Third  principle.     Isolated  dots. 
E 

Fourth  principle.    Isolated  dashes. 
L  or  cipher  T 

Fifth  principle.     Dot  followed  by  dash. 
A 

Sixth  principle.     ];axhf<illniced  by  dot. 
X 


561.  The   learner    will    first    practice   upon    the   above    ele- 
mentary principles. 


168  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

Make  dots  with  the  key  at  uniform  and  regular  intervals, 
until  they  can  be  produced  with  the  precision  of  a  machine  and 
of  definite  and  uniform  dimensions. 

Next  make  dashes,  first  at  the  rate  of  about  one  per  second, 
which  speed  may  be  increased  by  degrees,  as  skill  is  acquired 
by  practice,  to  three  per  second.  Make  the  space  interval  be- 
tween successive  dashes  as  short  as  possible.  If  the  upward 
movement  which  forms  the  space  be  made  full,  it  can  not  be 
made  too  quickly. 

The  third  principle  occurs  but  once,  and  needs  no  specific 
directions. 

The  fourth  principle  will  be  found  somewhat  more  difficult 
(<>  execute.  The  usual  tendency  is  to  make  T  too  long  and  L 
too  short.  Theoretically,  the  cipher  is  one-half  longer  than  L, 
but  in  fact  it  is  always  made  the  same,  as  the  practice  has 
been  found  to  occasion  no  inconvenience.  Occurring  alone  or 
among  other  letters,  it  is  translated  as  L,  but  when  found 
among  figures  it  is  read  as  0. 

The  fifth  principle  forms  the  letter  A.  The  usual  tendency  is 
to  separate  the  two  elements  too  much. 

The  dash  followed  by  a  dot  (N)  is  usually  found  to  be  some- 
what difficult.  Time  the  movement  by  pronouncing  the  word 
ninety,  sounding  the  first  syllable  fully.  Guard  especially 
against  the  usual  tendency  to  separate  the  elements  by  too 
great  a  space. 

562.  Having  become  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  principles, 
the  following  exercises  may  with  advantage  be  taken  up  in 
order : 


These  should  be  practiced  repeatedly  until  the  correct  number 
of  dots  in  each  character  can  be  certainly  made  at  every  trial. 
A  habit  once  formed  of  making  the  wrong  number,  usually  one 
or  two  too  many  in  the  case  of  H,  P,  and  6,  is  almost  impossible 
to  eradicate.  Guard  especially  against  the  objectionable  habit 
of  shortening  or  clipping  the  final  dot,  a  vice  which  leads  to 
innumerable  and  vexatious  errors  and  misreading  signals. 


INSTRUCTION  IN  GARRISON.  169 

T  M  5  * 


The  faults  to  guard  against  particularly  in  this  exercise  are 
shortening  or  elongating  the  terminal  dash,  and  separating  the 
successive  dashes  by  too  great  a  space  interval. 


The  usual  tendency  to  allow  too  much  space  between  the  dot 
and  dash  in  the  above  letters  may  be  overcome  by  forming  them 
as  by  an  elongation  of  the  final  dot  in  I,  S,  H,  and  P. 


Practice  these  characters   in   pairs,  that  the  distinction   be- 
tween them  may  be  more  firmly  impressed  upon  the  mind. 


The  student  who  has  mastered  the  sixth  principle  will  find  no 
difficulty  with  the  above  characters. 


w  i 


U  Q  i>  Period 


These  are  similar  to  preceding  exercises,  and  present  no  new 
difficulties. 


170  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

K  J  9  7 


J  and  K  are  usually  considered  the  most  difficult  letters  in 
the  code.  Avoid  the  tendency  to  separate  J  by  a  space  into 
double  N,  and  be  careful  that  the  dashes  are  of  equal  length. 
The  numerals  7  and  9  require  some  care  to  insure  correct 
spacing. 


These  are  termed  the  space  letters,  and  the  utmost  care  and 
diligent  practice  are  necessary  in  order  to  form  them  accurately. 
The  ability  to  transmit  the  spaced  letters  with  absolute  correct- 
ness is  the  test  of  a  strictly  first-class  sender.  The  space  should 
be  just  enough  in  excess  of  that  ordinarily  used  between  the 
elements  of  a  letter  to  enable  the  letters  intended  to  be  made 
to  be  distinguished  with  certainty  from  I,  S,  and  H.  The 
most  usual  tendency  is  to  make  the  space  too  great,  even  in 
some  cases  as  great  as  the  space  between  letters.  This  is  a 
most  fruitful  source  of  misapprehension  and  error,  and  too 
much  pains  can  not  be  taken  to  acquire  and  maintain  correct 
habits  in  this  particular. 

Methods  of  Practice. 

563.  In  transmitting  words  containing  groups  of  two  or 
more  spaced  letters,  careful  operators  are  accustomed  to  slightly 
increase  the  spacing  between  successive  letters  of  the  group. 

Practice  in  transmission  from  miscellaneous  manuscript  is 
strongly  recommended.  The  ability  to  read  all  kinds  of  copy — 
good,  bad,  and  indifferent — correctly  at  sight  is  a  most  valuable 
one,  and  it  is  not  difficult  to  acquire  by  attention  and  experience. 

If  the  principles  here  laid  down  be  firmly  adhered  to,  the 
learner  will  find  much  reason  for  encouragement  not  only  at 


INSTRUCTION  IN  GARRISON.  171 

the  rapidity  with  which  he  will  master  what  at  first  sight  ap- 
pears to  be  a  very  difficult  undertaking,  but  the  extreme  ac- 
curacy with  which  he  will  be  able  to  manipulate  his  instrument 
after  a  fair  amount  of  practice. 

This  art  can  only  be  acquired  by  constant  and  persevering 
practice,  keeping  in  mind  the  principles  above  given. 

564.  In  learning  to  read  by  sound,  it  is  advisable  for  two 
persons  to  practice  together,  taking  turns  at  reading  and  writ- 
ing, and  each  correcting  the  faults  of  the  other.     The  sounds 
of  the  code  characters  must  first  be  learned  separately  and  then 
short  words  chosen,  which  must  be  written  very  slowly  and 
distinctly  and  well   spaced,  the  speed  of  manipulation  being 
gradually  increased  as  the  student  becomes  more  proficient  in 
reading. 

565.  When  the  operator  has  made  sufficient  progress,  he  will 
be  given  instruction  in  checking  messages,  the  conduct  of  offices, 
the  care,  adjustment,  and  repair  of  instruments. 

Checking  the  Message. 

566.  In  preparing  the  "check"  of  the  message,  all  words 
and  figures  written  in  the  address,  body  of  the  message,  and 
the  signature  will  be  counted.    That  is,  count  all  words  after  to 
to  the  end  of  the  signature.     The  word  "  sig."  is  sent  merely 
to  indicate  that  the  signature  follows,  and  is  not  counted  in 
the  check. 

In  counting  the  check  of  a  message,  all  words,  whether  in 
plain  English,  code,  or  cipher,  pronounceable  or  unpronounce- 
able, or  initial  letters,  will  be  counted  each  as  one  word.  The 
abbreviations  for  the  names  of  places,  cities,  towns,  villages, 
States,  Territories,  and  Provinces  will  be  counted  as  if  written 
in  full;  In  the  names  of  towns,  counties,  countries,  or  States 
all  of  the  words  will  be  counted. 

Abbreviations  of  weights  and  measures  in  common  use  and 
cardinal  points  of  the  compass  will  be  counted  each  as  one 
word. 

Figures,  decimal  points,  and  bars  of  division,  and  letters  will 
be  counted  each  separately  as  one  word. 

In  ordinal  numbers,  the  affixes  st,  d,  nd,  rd,  and  th  will 
each  be  counted  as  one  word. 


172  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

CHAPTER  III.— INSTRUMENTS. 
The  Buzzer  in  Telegraphy  and  Telephony. 

567.  We  are  able  with  a  few  dry  cells  to  operate  an  inter- 
rupter and  coil  which  transforms  the  interrupted  primary  cur- 
rent driven  by  a  few  volts  of  the  cells  into  a  smaller  current 
driven  by  a  much  greater  alternating  voltage  of  a  frequency 
that  gives  a  high  note  in  the  telephone  receiver.    This  current 
is  capable  of  efficient  use  over  very  leaky  and  high-resistance 
lines  when  a  telephone  receiver  is  the  instrument  used  at  the 
distant  station.     The  efficiency  of  the  buzzer  depends  equally 
upon  the  delicacy  of  the  instrument  at  the  receiving  end.    The 
telephone  receiver  is  an  instrument  of  marvelous  sensitiveness 
to  currents  of  higher  acoustic  frequencies. 

568.  The  buzzer  requires  no  adjustment  at  the  receiving  end. 
Leaks,  bad  connections,  and  high  resistances,  any  one  of  which 
would  cause  loss  of  some  or  all  of  the  signals  on  Morse  instru- 
ments, simply  affect  the  loudness  of  the  signals  in  the  receiving 
buzzer. 

From  its  construction  and  mode  of  operation  it  may  be  appre- 
ciateil  how  we  may  substitute  a  telephone  transmitter  for  the 
key,  and  produce  variation  in  its  resistance  by  the  voice  instead 
of  interruptions  by  the  vibrator  and  key,  thus  instantly  con- 
verting the  telegraph  into  a  telephone  station.  This  feature 
alone  is  of  great  importance,  especially  on  instruments  for 
operating  tactical  lines. 

569.  The  delicacy  of  the  telephone  receiver  makes  telegraphy 
possible  over  lines  long  after  Morse  operation  has  ceased.     On 
short  lines  with  good  insulation  the  sound  is  loud  enough  to  be 
heard  for  several  feet  or  more.     As  the  resistance  of  the  line 
rises  or  the  insulation  decreases,  or  both,  the  sound  becomes 
fainter,  but  operation  remains  possible,  even  with  very  weak 
sounds.    The  principle  of  operation  is  shown  in  the  elementary 
din  gram  of  circuits  of  the  field  buzzer  in  plate  24. 

The  Field  Buzzer.— Model   1908. 

570.  This  buzzer  is  Sf  inches  in  length,  G|  inches  deep,  and 
5£  inches  wide,  all  outside  measurements.     It  weighs  9*  pounds. 


INSTRUMENTS. 


173 


It  contains  five  4-0  dry  cells  in  the  back  compartment.  At  one 
end  of  this  compartment  is  a  small  condenser  and  resistance  coil 
in  series  which  are  bridged  across  the  interrupter.  This  com- 
partment is  closed  by  a  hinged  lid.  The  front  and  lower  com- 
partment holds  a  telephone  receiver  and  transmitter. 

This  is  covered  with  a  hard  rubber  plate,  hinged  at  one  end, 
which  carries  on  its  top  an  interrupter  and  key,  and  line  and 
ground  binding  posts  at  the  hinged  end.  The  interrupter  con- 
tains a  single  coil  of  about  9  ohms  resistance,  the  coil  having 


an  iro.n  core  and  jacket,  and  is  provided  with  a  vibrating 
tongue  and  platin  ana-tipped  contacts  at  the  interrupter  points. 
When  the  key  is  pressed  the  battery  current  passes  through  the 
key,  coil,  and  interrupter  contacts,  which  vibrate  at  the  rate  of 
several  hundred  times  per  second.  The  interruption  causes 
high-voltage  pulsating  currents  to  go  out  through  binding  posts 
to  line  and  ground  through  the  telephone  receiver  and  distant 
stations.  The  buzzer  parts  are  inclosed  in  a  strong  leather 
case  with  hinged  top,  making  a  compact  and  serviceable  instru- 
ment for  field  use. 


174 


TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 


571.  The  wiring  diagram  of  the  buzzer  is  shown  in  plate  25. 
When  the  key  is  depressed,  the  current  starting  from  the  bat- 
tery at  A  goes  to  the  coil  terminal  at  B,  through  the  coil  C  into 


BUSfEM..  MODFL    JOOt. 


the  metal  jacket  and  S-shaped  spring  through  the  interrupter 
and  out  at  D  through  key  E,  back  to  battery  at  F. 

The  high-voltage  currents  come  out  of  the  coil  at  B  and  H, 
to  the  line  through  L,  and  to  the  ground  through  the  telephone 
receiver  I  and  K. 


INSTRUMENTS.  175 

Transmission  of  Information. 

The  small  condenser  and  25-ohm  coil  shunt  the  interrupter 
and  prevent  sparking. 

The  transmitter  can  be  put  into  circuit  in  place  of  the  key 
by  pressing  the  button  S.  When  this  is  done  only  two  of  the  five 
cells  are  in  action.  The  circuit  otherwise  is  the  same  as  when 
the  key  is  depressed. 

In  receiving,  the  currents  come  over  the  line  through  L,  B, 
coil  C,  H,  receiver  I,  and  to  ground  through  K. 

572.  Some  older   types  of  field  buzzers  remain   in   service 
which  are  bulkier  and  heavier  than  that  described.     They  use 
the  same  form  of  coil,  interrupter,  key,  dry  cells,  and  telephone 
receiver.    The  transmitter  is  somewhat  different  in  pattern. 

The  adjustments  and  circuits  described  apply  substantially  to 
them  also. 

The  Cavalry  Buzzer. 

573.  This  instrument  is  5  inches  in  length,  7£  inches  deep, 
and  3  inches  wide;  it  also  has  a  cylindrical  leather  pouch  6 
inches  in  length  and  3  inches  in  diameter,  which  contains  the 
receiver  and  transmitter;  it  is  attached  by  a  carrying  strap  to 
its  side.     The  above  are 'outside  measurements.     It  weighs  5£ 
pounds. 

This  buzzer  was  not  constructed  to  be  used  extensively  as  a 
telegraph  instrument.  Its  principal  use  will  be  as  a  telephone. 
While  the  button  on  top  may  be  used  as  a  telegraph  key,  its 
principal  function  is  as  a  call  on  the  telephone  line. 

It  has  an  extra  binding  post,  so  connected  to  a  condenser  that 
the  buzzer  can  be  used  on  a  telegraph  line  without  interfering 
with  the  business  of  the  line.  In  such  a  case  the  line  wire 
should  be  connected  to  the  condenser  post. 

This  instrument  will  stand  rough  usage  and  will  need  very 
little  attention  from  the  repairman,  except  renewal  of  battery 
occasionally ;  but  if  it  does  get  out  of  order,  it  is  hard  to  repair, 
due  to  the  delicacy  of  its  parts  and  its  compactness. 

574.  A   simplified  diagram   of   the   circuits   in   the  cavalry 
buzzer  is  shown  in  plate  26. 

Two  small  dry  cells  in  one  case  furnish  the  current,  and  these 
automatically  connect  with  the  circuit  by  means  of  spring  con- 
tacts. When  the  key  A-2  B-2  is  depressed,  the  current  runs 


176 


TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 


through  the  primary  of  the  induction  coil  P  and  then  through 
the  contact  E  and  small  electromagnet  of  the  interrupter.  A 
small  condenser  C-2  shunts  the  interrupter  break.  Thus  there 
are  produced  rapidly  alternating  currents  of  comparatively  high 
voltage  in  the  secondary  S  which  go  out  on  the  line  through 
D  L  and  to  the  distant  telephone  receiver.  There  is  a  second 
key  A-l  B-l  so  arranged  that  when  the  current-controlling  key 
is  depressed  the  second  key  puts  the  secondary  coil  to  the  line, 
cutting  out  the  home  telephone  receiver,  and  thus  prevents  loud 
buzzing  in  the  operator's  ears  from  his  own  instrument. 


575.  A  condenser  C-l  is  provided  in  an  alternative  path  to 
line  through  C  L  which  permits  of  attaching  a  buzzer  directly 
to  the  telegraph  line.    The  condenser  freely  permits  passage  of 
the  voice  or  buzzer  currents,  but  blocks  those  of  the  telegraph, 
thus  not  interfering  with  its  operation. 

576.  The   buzzer  is  provided  with   a  transmitter  T  in   the 
same  way  as  the  field  buzzer,  and  by  depressing  the  talking 
switch  the  set  is  converted  into  a  local  battery  telephone. 

To  Use  the  Buzzer  as  a  Telephone. 

577.  The  key  is  closed  and  opened  several  times  to  draw  the 
attention  of  the  operator  at  other  stations.     The  operator  at 
the  calling  station  calls  the  letter  or  call  letters  of  the  station 
wanted,  signing  at  intervals  his  own  call ;  when  answered,  in- 
forms the  station  called  to  use  the  telephone,  which  is  done  by 
sending  the  word  "  fone." 


INSTRUMENTS.  177 

To  use  the  telephone  press  the  button  on  the  transmitter 
while  talking  and  hold  it  vertically.  If  held  horizontally  the 
granulated  carbon  in  the  receptacle  of  the  transmitter  may  not 
touch  the  front  carbon  disk,  thus  opening  the  circuit. 

Care  of  Buzzers — Location  of  Faults  and  Adjustments. 

578.  A  buzzer  used  at  a  station,  such  as  at  a  tent  in  the 
camp,  will  cause  but  little  trouble.     The  buzzer,  however,  car- 
ried by  operators  in  sections  gets  out  of  order  at  times,  due  to 
being  jarred  while  carried  on  horseback,  especially  when  travel- 
ing at  the  faster  gaits.     This  can  frequently  be  obviated  by 
seeing  that  all  connections  are  tight,  and  that  the  cells  are 
packed  firmly  with  excelsior  or  some  other  suitable  material 
before  leaving  camp. 

If  the  battery  is  not  well  packed  and  an  operator  rides  10  or 
12  miles  at  a  trot,  some  of  the  wires  connecting  the  cells  will 
probably  be  broken  or  jarred  loose  from  the  cells,  and  possibly 
the  connections  to  the  condenser  and  coil  will  be  loosened  or 
broken. 

The  transmitter  and  receiver  should  be  packed  and  not  al- 
lowed to  knock  against  each  other  and  the  sides  and  bottom  of 
the  compartments.  The  continual  jarring  for  two  or  three 
hours  at  a  time  may  loosen  some  of  the  set  screws  and  even 
cause  breaks  in  the  cords. 

The  operator  who  takes  proper  care  of  his  buzzer  will  seldom 
have  to  bring  it  to  the  repairman. 

Location  of  Faults  (Field  Buzzer). 

579.  Sometimes  even  with  all  precautions  the  buzzer  will  not 
work.     When  such  is  the  case,  the  first  thing  to  do  is  to  try 
and  locate  the  trouble  and  remove  it. 

The  trouble  may  be  in  the  line,  connecter,  or  in  the  buzzer. 

First.  See  if  the  circuit  is  open  at  the  interrupter  just  in  front 
of  the  coil ;  the  spring  should  touch  the  vibrator ;  if  it  does  not 
touch,  the  circuit  is  open,  and  can  be  closed  by  slowly  turning 
the  screw,  pressing  against  the  spring  to  the  right  until  the 
spring  and  vibrator  touch ;  if  a  buzz  is  not  heard  when  the  key 
is  closed  or  a  click  when  it  is  opened,  the  trouble  is  probably 
82940°— 11 12 


178  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

somewhere  else.  Care  will  be  taken  to  see  that  the  contact 
points  on  the  spring  and  vibrator  are  clean. 

Second.  Disconnect  the  connecter  from  the  line  wire  and 
connect  to  the  ground  rod.  If,  after  adjusting  spring  contact, 
by  working  the  key  no  circuit  can  be  obtained,  short-circuit  the 
line  and  ground  posts.  If  still  no  sound  is  heard  in  the  re- 
ceiver by  closing  and  opening  the  key,  the  trouble  is  without  a 
doubt  in  the  buzzer. 

Third.  Examine  the  battery,  see  that  all  connections  between 
the  cells  are  tight,  use  a  voltmeter  to  test  each  cell  for  voltage. 
This  to  ascertain  if  any  of  the  wires  connecting  the  cells  are 
broken  inside  the  insulation. 

If  no  circuit  can  be  obtained  after  the  battery  has  been  gone 
over  carefully,  make  an  inspection  of  all  the  connections  on  the 
buzzer  in  general.  Very  likely  a  loose  connection  will  be  found 
somewhere. 

The  receiver  can  be  tested  by  disconnecting  the  cords  from  the 
binding  posts  on  the  buzzer  and  touching  them  to  the  two  poles 
of  a  cell.  If  a  scratching  sound  is  heard  when  touching  the 
terminals  of  the  cell,  the  receiver  is  in  working  order. 

The  transmitter  and  transmitter  cords  are  in  circuit  only 
when  the  buzzer  is  used  as  a  telephone. 

58O.  Any  circuit  in  the  buzzer  can  be  tested  by  using  a  dry 
cell  or  two  in  series  with  the  telephone  receiver.  Using  a  lead 
wire  from  one  side  of  the  battery  and  one  side  of  the  receiver, 
and  by  touching  the  two  wires  to  the  points,  which  should  be 
electrically  connected,  if  no  sound  is  heard  in  the  receiver  when 
touching  these  points  the  circuit  between  them  is  open. 

As  the  resistance  between  any  two  points  in  the  buzzer  should 
be  very  low,  the  sound  heard  in  the  receiver  should  be  loud, 
provided  the  cells  used  for  the  test  are  in  good  condition.  If 
the  sound  is  faint,  the  part  tested  is  faulty.  The  fault  may  be 
due  to  a  broken  wire  making  partial  connection,  or  to  corro- 
sion, dirt,  or  loose  connection  where  the  wire  is  connected  to 
the  binding  post.  Such  connections  under  certain  climatic  con- 
ditions often  become  so  corroded  that  they  would  entirely  open 
the  circuit  if  not  inspected  and  cleaned  occasionally. 

Too  much  care  can  not  be  taken  in  regard  to  keeping  all  con- 
nections clean  and  tight.  The  satisfactory  working  of  the 
buzzer  will  depend  on  it. 


INSTRUMENTS.  179 

If  the  buzzer  works  poorly  with  a  new,  strong  battery  in  it, 
there  is  something  wrong,  and  the  cause  of  trouble  should  be 
located  and  removed. 

Adjustments. 

581.  The  adjustment  is  made  with  the  screw  touching  the 
spring  which  touches  the  armature  or  vibrator  in  front  of  the 
coil. 

If  clicks  are  heard  when  closing  and  opening  the  key,  the 
spring  is  pressing  too  hard  against  the  vibrator;  hold  the  key 
down  and  turn  the  screw  to  the  left  until  a  suitable  buzz  is 
obtained.  Loudness  and  clearness  of  tone  are  both  desirable 
for  the  best  results. 

In  case  the  spring  does  not  touch  the  vibrator,  turn  the  screw 
to  the  right  until  it  does,  as  indicated  by  the  sound  in  receiver. 

Little  trouble  in  adjustment  will  be  experienced  with  a  buzzer 
that  has  a  good  battery  and  all  connections  clean  and  tight ; 
but  when  the  battery  is  weak,  with  a  high  resistance  in  the 
buzzer  circuit  also,  the  adjustment  becomes  very  difficult.  The 
turning  of  the  adjustment  screw  should  be  gradual.  If  turned 
fast  it  is  nearly  impossible  to  get  good  adjustment. 

582.  The  adjustment  and  repair  of  the  cavalry  buzzer  is 
governed  by  similar  principles.     See  that  the  spring  contacts 
in  the  top  of  the  battery  compartment  touch  the  battery  termi- 
nals.   The  adjustment  of  the  small  interrupter  in  the  top  of  the 
case  is  somewhat  delicate,  but  may  be  done  readily  with  the 
small  screwdriver  in  the  case.     It  seldom  goes  out  of  adjust- 
ment.    It  should  be  remembered  that  when  the  button  operates 
the  buzzer  the  home  receiver  is  cut  out.     By  removing  the  top 
and  pressing  one  of  the  key  springs  at  a  time,  one  of  them  will 
operate  the  home  as  well  as  distant  buzzer.    For  complete  test, 
the  E  and  DL  binding  screws  in  the  compound  plug  should  be 
short-circuited  for  loudest  effect. 

Dry  Cells. 

583.  The  operation  of  all  types  of  buzzers  and  electric  flash 
lights  depends  upon  the  condition  of  dry  cells  used  with  them. 
Dry  cells  issued  with  the  1908  and  some  earlier  types  of  field 
buzzers  are  of  the  "  reserve "  variety  and  the  "  4-O "   size. 


180  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

These  are  inactive  until  water  is  put  in  them  after  removing 
the  small  corks  in  the  tops  of  the  carbons.  This  should  be 
done  by  pouring  the  water  in  carefully  until  it  no  longer  sinks, 
then  throwing  out  surplus  and  replacing  the  corks.  The  open- 
ing in  the  carbon  should  be  filled  at  least  10  minutes,  when 
the  water  will  generally  cease  sinking.  The  cells  should  be  in 
full  operation  within  half  an  hour.  The  cells  furnished  for  the 
cavalry  buzzer  and  flash  lights  are  all  ready  for  operation 
when  received,  but  they  deteriorate  in  storage  and,  in  general, 
are  unserviceable  after  six  months.  The  useful  life  of  a  dry 
cell  depends  upon  the  size,  climate,  date  of  manufacture  (or 
moistening  of  "reserve"  type),  and  the  current  drawn  from 
it.  In  flash  lights  the  current  demand  is  heavy  when  the  light 
is  used,  so  the  life  of  the  battery  is  short  if  much  use  is  made 
of  the  light.  In  buzzers,  most  of  their  failure  is  due  to  de- 
terioration in  storage  or  in  the  buzzer  case. 

The  general  tendency  is  to  blame  any  failure  of  the  buzzers 
on  the  dry  cells,  throw  away  those  in  the  case  without  test, 
and  substitute  new  ones.  This  practice  should  be  rigorously 
checked. 

The  voltmeter  test  alone  is  not  conclusive,  especially  when  the 
voltage  of  one  cell  falls  below  1.4.  The  test  should  be  made 
while  the  cell  is  sending  current,  and  if,  after  a  few  minutes  of 
steady  use,  the  voltage  drops  below  1.0  the  cell  is  too  far  ex- 
hausted to  be  serviceable.  The  cavalry  cells  are  connected  in 
pairs  in  their  cases  and  should  give  not  less  than  two  volts. 

Field  Wireless  Telegraphy — General  Principles. 

584.  Wireless  telegraphy  will  be  used  when  distance,  the 
character  of  the  service,  and  the  nature  of  the  terrain  prevents 
the  laying  of  wire  lines.  This  is  particularly  the  case  in  service 
with  the  cavalry.  It  may  also  be  used  to  keep  parallel  columns 
in  communication  on  the  march,  and  possibly  to  intercept  mes- 
sages sent  by  the  enemy  or  to  interfere  with  the  operation  of 
his  wireless  station. 

The  locality  for  the  station  will  be  selected  with  as  much  care 
as  the  conditions  permit.  Open  ground  as  far  back  from  hills 
as  practicable  is  to  be  preferred.  The  nearer  to  the  commanding 


INSTRUMENTS.  181 

officer  or  his  headquarters  the  headquarters  station  is  placed 
the  better.  The  range  of  the  present  pack  set  is  from  15  to  20 
miles. 

General  Description  of  Pack  Wireless  Set. 

[1910  type.] 

585.  The  set  consists  of: 

(1)  Two  chests  containing  general  operating  apparatus. 

(2)  A  jointed  hollow  wooden  mast  of  seven  sections,  and 

one  extra  section. 

(3)  An  antenna  system  of  four  three-ply  stranded  wires 

terminating  in  ropes,  and  a  stranded  lead  wire 
fastened  to  a  top  insulator. 

(4)  A  rubber-covered  wire  counterpoise  of  four  wires. 

(5)  A  hand-power  generator. 

(6)  Two  storage  batteries  (four  cells  each). 

(7)  A  set  of  pack  frames  and  leather  bags  fitting  over 

the  aparejos  of  the  three  mules  that  carry  the 
equipment;  (1)  goes  on  one  mule,  (2),  (3),  and  (4) 
on  another,  and  (5)  on  another.  When  carried, 
(6)  is  put  in  two  boxes  that  hook  on  the  generator 
frame  (5). 

Transmitting  and  Receiving  Apparatus. 

586.  In  one  of  the  chests  is  contained  the  induction  coil, 
the  Leyden-tube  secondary  condenser,  and  the  spark  gap. 

587.  In  the  other  chest  is  placed  the  interrupter,  key,  pri- 
mary condenser   (under  the  base),  the  detector,  and  small  re- 
ceiving condenser  in  the  box  under  the  detector,  and  a  tuning 
coil  with  sliding  contacts.    A  spiral  linking  coil,  small  lamp,  and 
connections  for  antenna  and  counterpoise  are  attached  to  the  lid. 

588..  Forty- foot  mast  equipment:  Seven  sections  of  the  5^-foot 
length  tubular  mast  are  used,  four  of  the  larger  at  the  bottom 
and  three  of  the  smaller  at  the  top.  The  tube  is  permanently 
fixed  in  one  end  of  each  section,  except  the  top  one,  making  the 
section  and  the  tube  practically  one  piece,  and  this  facilitates 
very  much  quick  handling  of  the  mast.  A  large  glass,  porce- 
lain, or  composition  insulator  is  screwed  on  the  bottom  section, 


182  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

and  is  used  at  the  bottom  of  the  mast  to  insulate  it  from  the 
ground. 

589.  Antenna:  Four  phosphor-bronze  antenna  wires  are  used, 
each  85  feet  long.     These  wires  are  made  up  of  three  of  the 
regular  antenna  wires  plaited  together.     This  gives  more  sur- 
face in  the  antenna,  and  prevents  kinking.     The  guy  ropes  0:1 
the  end  of  the  antenna  wires  are  75  feet  long  and  are  insulated 
from  the  wire  by  four  hard-rubber  insulators  placed  in  series. 
The  antenna  wires  are  secured  to  a  metal  piece  on  the  insu- 
lator at  the  top  of  the  mast.     The  lead  wire,  which  is  made  up 
exactly  like  the  antenna  wires,  is  also  fastened  to  this  metal 
piece. 

590.  Counterpoise:  The  counterpoise  consists  of  four  pieces 
of  cable  core    (seven-strand  Xo.  20  copper  wire,  eight  thirty- 
seconds  to  nine  thirty-seconds  rubber  insulation)  100  feet  long. 
These  four  wires  are  soldered  together  at  the  inner  end,  the 
outer  ends  being  insulated.     At  the  junction  of  the  counterpoise 
wires  a  lead  wire  of  this  cable  core  is  also  soldered  for  con- 
nection with  the  instruments  and  this  joint  insulated  with  pure 
rubber  or  okonite  tape. 

591.  The  pack  set  should  be  insulated  from  the  ground.    Pins 
nnd  spare  parts  should  be  placed  near  the  base  of  the  mast,  so 
they  will  not  be  lost.     The  antenna   is  reeled  up  from  outer 
ends  by  revolving  the  carriers.     The  counterpoise  is  reeled  up 
from  the  center,  the  men  drawing  in  the  insulated  wires  and 
coiling  them  over  the  arm  and  hand.     These  precautions  will 
prevent  kinking  the  antenna  and  counterpoise  wires.    The  steel 
joining  tubes  of  the  mast  must  be  kept  bright  and  well  oiled. 

591.  Each  member  of  the  section  will  thoroughly  familiarize 
himself  with   his   particular   duties.     At   the   same   time   each 
member  of  the  section  will  be  given  instruction  in  the  various 
duties  in  putting  up  the  mast. 

592.  To  call  a  station,  first  listen  in,  and  adjust  detector  and 
tuning  coil  to  prevent  interference.     Then  signal  its  call  letter, 
signing  your  own  call  letter  at  intervals.     In  opening  station 
the  call  will  not  be  continuous,  but  will  be  at  intervals  of  about 
three  minutes,  in  order  to  give  the  other  station  a  chance  to 
answer.     As  soon  as  communication  is  established  report  to  the 
signal  officer.     Firmly  made  distinct  signals  are  especially  nec- 
essary in  wireless  operation.     Speed  should  be  moderate,  and 
no  increase  is  to  be   made  unless   receiving   is   readily   done. 


INSTRUMENTS.  183 

When  difficulties  exist,  it  is  safer  and,  in  the  end,  more  expe- 
ditious to  repeat  all  messages  at  least  once. 

593.  The  sign   "  33 "   will  be  made  when  through   sending, 
which  means  that  you  are  going  to  switch  over  to  the  receiving 
side  and  listen  in.     Always  change  over  from  the  sending  side 
to  the  receiving  side  as  quickly  as  possible,  and  adjust  detector 
by  means  of  the  small  buzzer  furnished.     When  changing  from 
the  receiving  side   to  the   sending   side   always   make   several 
periods  before  commencing  your  message,  in  order  to  give  the 
other  station  time  to  change  over  and  get  tuned. 

594.  It  is  generally  useless  and  always  dangerous  to  attempt 
to   operate  in   a   thunderstorm.     Therefore   in   general   during 
such  a  storm  it  is  advisable  to  connect  the  antenna  direct  to  the 
ground. 

595.  A  wireless-telegraph  operator  must  not  only  be  able  to 
send  and  receive  messages,  but  must  be  familiar  with  the  appa- 
ratus employed,  in  order  to  tune,  adjust,  overhaul,  and  make 
repairs.     Wireless  sections  will  have  permanent  call  letters  as- 
signed.   An  accurate  record  of  messages  will  be  kept  at  each 
station,  numbering  them  consecutively. 

Instructions  for  Operating  Field  Wireless  Pack  Sets. 

596.  The  diagram  of  circuits  and  arrangement  is  given  in 
plate  27. 

The  various  operations  in  sending  and  receiving  are  as 
follows  : 

In  sending,  the  control  switch  is  thrown  to  the  right.  The 
current  from  the  generator  or  storage  battery  then  starts  the 
interrupter,  coming  in  at  A,  to  B  through  interrupter  magnets 
C,  to  interrupter  driving  contact  screw  D,  through  small  inter- 
rupter spring  to  vibrator  K,  to  E,  1,  over  to  control  switch 
through  F,  and  back  to  battery  through  G.  This  causes  inter- 
rupter to  vibrate  continuously,  but  the  main  current,  controlled 
by  the  key,  is  not  yet  on.  When  key  is  closed  the  main  current 
goes  on  as  follows:  From  A  to  B  through  primary  of  induction 
coil  to  I,  through  key  and  up  to  J  and  to  large  vibrator  screw, 
through  platinum  point  of  this  to  large  vibrator  spring  K,  to  E, 
to  1,  to  control  switch,  through  F,  and  back  to  battery  through 
G.  The  lower  section  of  primary  condenser  shunts  the  contact 
points  of  the  small  vibrator  through  4  and  H  on  one  side  and 


INSTRUMENTS.  185 

through  1  and  E  on  the  other.  The  two  upper  sections  shunt 
the  contact  points  of  the  large  vibrator  and  key  through  1 
and  E  on  one  side  and  through  2,  3,  and  I  on  the  other.  The 
rapidly  interrupted  current  in  the  primary  coil  induces  high 
voltage  impulses  in  the  secondary.  The  Leyden  tubes,  connected 
in  parallel,  are  joined  across  this  secondary  at  L  and  M.  Being 
charged  at  each  interruption  they  discharge  through  the  cir- 
cuit formed  by  the  spark  gap  and  included  turns  of  the  linking 
coil,  producing  at  each  discharge  the  high  frequency  oscillations 
in  the  included  turns  in  the  linking  coil.  These  induce  the 
high  frequency  oscillations  in  the  turns  of  the  linking  coil  in- 
cluded between  .the  antenna  and  ground  connections.  These  cur- 
rents go  to  ground  or  counterpoise  from  the  linking  coil,  down 
to  N  on  the  control  switch,  and  to  ground  through  "  Gr."  Those 
to  the  antenna  go  directly  to  "Ant." 

In  receiving,  the  control  switch  is  thrown  to  the  left.  The 
high  frequency  currents  induced  in  the  antenna  by  the  waves 
from  the  distant  station  come  in  at  "Ant."  to  control  switch 
at  O,  to  adjustable  slider  P  on  tuning  coil,  out  at  Q,  through 
switch  at  R,  and  to  detector  at  S,  through  detector,  and  up  to 
"Rec.  condenser,"  through  this  to  T  on  the  switch,  and  up  to 
ground  at  "  Gr."  The  telephone  receiver  shunts  the  condenser, 
including  in  its  circuit  the  points  U  V  of  the  potentiometer  and 
the  turns  W  Q  of  the  tuning  coil.  The  silicon  or  "  Perikon  " 
detector  tends  to  rectify  the  high  frequency  currents.  These, 
traversing  the  telephone  receiver  circuit,  give  the  signals  by 
causing  vibrations  of  the  diaphragm  of  the  same  acoustic  fre- 
quency as  the  groups  of  waves  corresponding  to  the  interrup- 
tions or  half  periods  in  the  primary  of  the  induction  coil  or 
transformer. 

By  closing  the  small  battery  switch  shown  at  the  bottom  of 
plate  27  we  impart  to  the  telephone  receiver  circuit,  through 
the  points  U  V,  a  portion  of  the  voltage  applied  at  the  terminals 
of  the  potentiometer. 

Sending  Apparatus. 

Power:  Either  of  two  sources  of  power  may  be  used.  Storage 
batteries  and  hand-driven  dynamos. 

Hand  generator:  When  hand  driven  power  is  used,  it  should 
be  steadily  applied.  Owing  to  resistance  going  off  and  on  when 


186  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

operating  the  key,  care  should  be  taken  to  work  handles  with 
arms  somewhat  stiffened,  so  as  to  resist  sudden  increases  in 
velocity.  Such  changes  are  apt  to  strain  the  interrupter  or 
cause  trouble  with  the  primary  condenser.  A  storage  battery 
connected  across  the  hand  generator  will  do  much  to  assist  in 
smoothing  the  action.  One  of  16  volts  and  quite  small  capacity 
will  serve.  The  connection  should  be  made  while  dynamo  is 
being  slowly  turned,  and  disconnected  when  through  sending, 
otherwise  the  battery  will  be  run  down  by  driving  the  dynamo 
as  a  motor.  The  hand  generator  requires  frequent  cleaning 
and  occasional  oiling.  If  it  fails  to  "pick  up"  when  the  han- 
dles are  turned,  it  may  be  it  is  being  turned  in  the  wrong  direc- 
tion. If  it  still  fails  when  turned  in  the  reverse  direction,  the 
commutator  and  carbon  brushes  probably  need  cleaning,  and, 
possibly,  adjusting.  Steady  operation  of  the  hand  generator  is 
desirable  to  prevent,  on  the  one  hand,  too  violent  action  of  the 
interrupter  and  flaming,  or,  on  the  other  hand,  insufficient  volt- 
age to  give  a  good  spark. 

Batteries:  The  most  satisfactory  used  so  far  are  the  "  Duro  " 
dry-type  storage.  They  should  always  be  charged  fully  as  soon 
as  possible  after  receipt,  at  the  rate  of  about  2  amperes.  When 
standing  they  should  have  a  setting-up  charge  at  least  once  a 
month. 

They  have  approximately  20  ampere  hours'  capacity,  and, 
when  freshly  charged,  will  serve  for  about  eight  hours'  continu- 
ous sending.  They  should  never  be  permitted  to  stand  long 
discharged.  For  transportation  the  soft-rubber  stoppers  should 
always  be  placed  in  the  cells.  Keep  the  rubber  stoppers  out 
during  the  charge  and  put  in  a  spoonful  of  water. 

Interrupter:  The  small  contact  should  be  screwed  in  until  it 
just  touches  the  spring,  and  will  start  when  switch  is  placed 
at  "  send "  position.  Adjust  until  an  amplitude  of  vibration 
of  about  one-half  inch  is  reached,  and  then  screw  up  small 
set  screw  on  the  side. 

The  large  contact  should  be  adjusted  so  that  the  large  plati- 
num tipped  screw  pushes  in  the  spring  contact  about  one- 
sixteenth  inch.  If  the  large  contact  sticks  or  flames  up  when 
key  is  depressed,  it  may  be  that  it  is  screwed  in  too  far  or 
has  been  roughened  by  previous  burning.  In  the  latter  case 
the  platinum  contacts  should  be  sparingly  dressed  with  a 
smooth  file.  Continued  and  violent  flaming  indicates  an  open 


INSTRUMENTS.  187 

circuit  in  the  condenser  shunting  the  interrupter  or  the  con- 
nections therewith.  Violent  sparking  at  the  key  and  none  at 
spark  gap  indicates  a  short  circuit  in  the  condenser. 

Key:  Should  be  worked  with  a  play  of  not  less  than  three 
thirty-seconds  inch.  There  is  a  tendency  for  it  to  stick,  and 
this  should  be  met  by  grasping  the  knob  and  working  with  an 
upward  as  well  as  downward  stroke.  When  the  interrupter 
sticks  or  flames  badly  the  key  should  not  be  touched  until  in- 
terrupter is  adjusted. 

Control  switch :  The  sending  position  is  to  the  right,  the  receiv- 
ing to  the  left. 

Spark  gap:  Should  in  no  case  exceed  one-quarter  inch  spark 
length.  Between  this  and  three-sixteenths  inch  gives  the  best 
effects.  In  the  double  spark  gap  each  space  should  be  about 
one-eighth  inch.  The  spark  should  appear  white  and  with 
some  volume  and  give  a  sharp  crackling  sound.  A  hissing 
sound  usually  indicates  that  the  spark  is  too  short. 

Linking  coil:  This  is  a  flat  spiral  of  rubber-covered  wire  with 
binding  posts  connected  every  half  turn.  These  are  numbered 
from  1  to  20,  the  adjoining  half  turns  being  connected  to  con- 
secutive odd  and  even  numbers. 

Two  high-frequency  (oscillating)  circuits  are  connected  with 
the  linking  coil.  The  first,  called  the  "  closed  oscillating  "  cir- 
cuit, includes  the  spark  gap  and  Ley  den  eight-tube  condenser. 
The  two  spring  clips  leading  from  these  can  include  one  or 
more  turns  of  the  linking  coil. 

The  "  open  oscillating  "  circuit  leads  at  one  side  into  the  an- 
tenna connection,  and  at  the  other  side  to  the  binding  post  con- 
nected with  the  counterpoise  wires.  The  clips  from  these  are 
connected  with  one  or  more  turns  of  the  linking  coil,  and  these 
may  or  may  not  include  the  turns  already  in  the  closed  oscillat- 
ing circuit 

When  there  are  turns  common  to  the  closed  and  open  oscil- 
lating circuits,  the  coupling  is  said  to  be  "  close,"  and  when  not 
the  coupling  is  said  to  be  "  loose."  To  place  the  closed  and  open 
oscillating  circuits  in  "  tune  "  with  each  other,  the  small  glow 
lamp  in  the  hard-rubber  socket  should  be  connected  in  the  wire 
leading  to  the  antenna  post.  The  closed  and  open  oscillating 
circuits  are  then  tried  on  various  adjustments  until  the  glow 
of  the  lamp  is  brightest. 


188  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

On  the  linking  coil  it  is  advisable  to  start  out  with  the  closed 
oscillating  circuit  connected  with  20  and  15,  and  the  open  oscil- 
lating clips  connected  with  20  and  14.  Too  many  turns  in  the 
closed  oscillating  circuit  are  apt  to  make  the  spark  ragged  and 
red,  and  to  cause  flaming  at  the  interrupter. 

Receiving   Apparatus. 

597.  Buzzer  adjustment  of  the  detector:  A  small  commercial- 
type  buzzer  is  connected  with  a  dry  cell  and  push  button,  and  a 
wire  from  the  buzzer  connected  to  a  bar  of  the  receiving  tuning 
coil.  When  the  button  is  pushed  and  the  buzzer  operated,  if 
the  detector  is  in  proper  adjustment  for  receiving  signals,  the 
sound  of  the  buzzer  will  be  heard  quite  plainly  in  the  tele- 
phone receiver  when  the  wire  is  touched  to  the  tuning  coil. 

Silicon  detector:  This  is  the  detector  usually  furnished  with 
pack  sets. 

In  adjusting  the  detector : 

1.  Adjust  the  pressure  of  contact  point  by  gently  pressing  the 
spring  sleeve  down  on  the  cup  contact  until  maximum  response 
is  obtained  in  the  telephone  receiver. 

2.  After  clamping  the  sleeve  in  above  position  by  the  side 
screw,  then   slide  the  cup  contact  about  to  determine  if  the 
response  can  be  improved.    A  very  slight  movement  or  tap  will 
sometimes  cause  a  great  improvement  in  sensitiveness. 

It  is  important  in  this  detector  that  both  the  rounded  contact 
point  and  the  upper  or  polished  surface  of  the  cup  contact  be 
kept  absolutely  clean. 

In  case  the  rounded  contact  point  becomes  oxidized  or  other- 
wise tarnished,  it  should  be  cleaned  by  rubbing  gently  with 
very  fine  emery  paper. 

The  upper  or  polished  surface  of  the  cup  contact  can  be 
cleaned  by  rubbing  with  a  piece  of  soft  cloth,  or,  better,  wiped 
with  a  clean  cloth  moistened  with  carbon  bisulphide. 

Under  no  circumstances  rub  the  silicon  with  emery  paper,  as 
it  will  destroy  the  smooth  surface. 

In  damp  weather  or  in  tropical  climates,  where  a  film  of 
moisture  tends  to  form  on  the  polished  surface  of  the  cup 
contact,  a  layer  of  insulating  oil,  such  as  paraffin,  may  be 
spread  on  the  surface.  This  will  in  no  way  affect  the  opera- 


INSTRUMENTS.  189 

tion  or  adjustment  of  the  detector,  as  the  pressure  of  the  contact 
point  readily  displaces  the  oil  layer  at  the  point  of  contact. 

Per  ikon  detector:  This  is  used  in  a  way  similar  to  the  silicon 
detector.  The  red  crystals  are  quite  friable,  and  in  no  case 
must  the  two  contacts  be  rotated  when  in  contact,  as  this  would 
destroy  the  crystalline  points. 

A  slight  motion  or  tap  will  often  bring  out  the  signals 
clearly,  especially  at  the  beginning. 

In  both  silicon  and  perikon  detectors  the  battery  must  be 
connected  in  proper  direction.  In  silicon,  the  positive  is  con- 
nected with  the  base,  and  with  perikon  to  the  metallic  crystal 
side.  The  battery  is  not  needed  at  moderate  distances,  but  it 
improves  the  strength  of  signals  when  they  come  in  faintly. 
In  later  types  the  battery  circuit  has  been  dispensed  with. 

In    General. 

598.  Connections   from   the   aerial   circuit  and  counterpoise 
wires  should  not  have  any  open  loops  in  them.    If  there  is  any 
slack,  it  should  be  lashed  up  flat  without  having  open  loops, 
which  seriously  affect  accurate  tuning. 

The  conductor  to  the  antenna  should  not  come  within  several 
inches  of  the  ground  or  counterpoise  conductors.  Particular 
care  should  be  observed  to  have  good  clean  connections  in  the 
storage-battery  circuit. 

It  is  essential  that  all  metal  and  hard  rubber  of  instruments 
should  be  kept  clean  and  free  from  dust. 

VISUAL  SIGNALING  APPARATUS. 
The  Flag  Kit. 

599.  Two  kinds  of  flag  kits,  the  2-foot  kit  and  the  4-foot  kit, 
are  issued  by  the  Signal  Corps. 

The  2-foot  kit. — This  kit  consists  of  one  white  and  one  red 
signal  flag,  two  three-jointed  staffs,  and  a  suitable  carrying 
case  to  contain  the  outfit.  The  white  flag  is  made  of  white 
muslin  2  feet  square,  with  an  8-inch  turkey-red  muslin  center. 
The  red  flag  is  of  similar  size  and  material,  the  only  difference 
being  an  alteration  of  colors  in  the  body  and  center.  The 


190  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

means  of  attachment  to  the  staff  consists  of  a  loop  at  the 
center  and  two  ends  of  white  tape  at  each  edge  of  the  back 
of  the  flag  body.  The  staff  is  made  of  hickory  in  three  joints, 
each  23  inches  long,  and  is  assembled  by  telescoping  into  brass 
ferrules.  Brass  eyes  are  provided  on  the  first  and  second  joints 
to  receive  the  tape  ends  at  the  edge  of  the  flag.  The  carrying 
case,  of  convenient  size  and  shape  to  contain  the  two  flags  and 
staffs  complete,  is  made  of  8-oimce  standard  khaki  bound  with 
leather  and  fitted  with  a  shoulder  strap. 

The  2-foot  kit  is  essentially  a  practice  kit,  although  under 
favorable  conditions  of  weather  and  terrain  it  may  be  used  to 
advantage  as  a  short-distance  service  signaling  outfit.  Two  of 
these  kits  are  issued  to  each  troop,  battery,  and  company  for 
the  purpose  of  disseminating  general  instruction  in  military 
signaling  throughout  the  Army. 

The  4-foot  kit. — This  kit  is  of  essentially  the  same  description 
as  the  2-foot  kit,  except  as  regards  size.  The  flags  are  3  feet 
D  inches  square,  with  12-inch  centers,  and  the  staffs  are  con- 
siderably heavier,  the  joints  being  36  inches  long.  The  4-foot 
kit  is  the  standard  field  flag  kit,  and  the  range  at  which  signals 
can  be  exchanged  with  it  depends  on  a  variety  of  factors,  such 
as  the  condition  of  the  weather,  the  location  of  station,  the 
proficiency  of  signalmen,  etc.  The  speed  for  continuous  sig- 
naling is  seldom  greater  than  five  to  six  words  per  minute. 

600.  Care  of  flag  material. — Signal  flags  should  be  examined 
at  the  close  of  drill  or  practice  and  repairs  made  to  any  rents 
or  loose  ties  discovered.  Flags,  when  soiled,  should  be  thor- 
oughly washed  and  dried  in  *the  sun.  Signals  made  by  clean 
flags  are  much  more  easily  read  than  those  made  by  dirty  ones. 
Staffs  should  be  handled  with  care,  especially  when  jointing  or 
unjointing.  Care  should  be  taken  not  to  bruise  the  ends  of  the 
brass  ferrules.  If  a  ferrule  becomes  loose  on  a  staff  it  should 
be  tightened  without  delay. 

60  1.  Powers  and  limitations  of  flag  signaling. — The  advantages 
which  may  be  claimed  for  this  method  of  signaling  are  port- 
ability of  apparatus,  adaptability  to  varied  weather  conditions, 
and  great  rapidity  of  station  establishment.  The  disadvantages 
are  the  lack  of  celerity  of  the  signals,  their  impenetrability  to 
dust  or  smoke,  and  the  comparatively  short  ranges  at  which 
they  can  be  read. 


INSTRUMENTS.  191 

The  Heliograph. 

602.  The  heliograph  is  an  instrument  designed  for  the  pur- 
pose of  transmitting  signals  by  means  of  the  sun's  rays. 

Description.  —  The  service  heliograph  equipment  of  the  Signal 
Corps  consists  of: 

A  sole-leather  pouch  with  shoulder  strap  containing  — 


1  screen,  1  sighting  rod,  1  screw  driver. 
A  small  pouch,  sliding  by  two  loops  upon  the  strap  of  the 

larger  pouch,  containing  1  mirror  bar. 
A  skeleton  leather  case  containing  2  tripods. 

The  mirrors  are  each  4^-inch  squares  of  plate  glass  supported 
by  sheet-brass  and  cardboard  backings,  and  mounted  in  brass 
retaining  frames.  At  the  center  of  each  mirror  there  is  an  un- 
silvered  spot  three  thirty-seconds  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  and 
holes  corresponding  to  these  spots  are  drilled  in  the  backing. 
The  sun  mirror  differs  from  the  station  mirror  only  in  that  it 
has  a  paper  disk  pasted  upon  its  face  covering  the  unsilvered 
spot.  The  mirror  frames  are  carried  by  brass  supports  pro- 
vided at  the  bases  with  conical  projections  accurately  turned  to 
fit  the  sockets  of  the  mirror  bar  and  grooved  at  the  ends  to  re- 
ceive the  clamping  spring.  Each  support  is  fitted  with  a  tangent 
screw  and  worm-wheel  attachment  functioned  to  control  the 
motion  of  the  mirror  frame  about  its  horizontal  axis. 

The  mirror  bar  is  a  bronze  casting  provided  at  the  center 
with  a  clamp  threaded  to  fit  the  screw  of  the  tripod.  By  releas- 
ing the  clamp  the  bar  may  be  moved  independently  of  the  screw  . 
and  adjusted  to  any  desired  position.  Conical  sockets  for  the 
mirror  supports  are  provided  for  at  the  ends  of  the  mirror  bar. 
These  sockets  work  freely  in  the  bar  and,  being  actuated  by  a 
tangent  screw  and  wrorm  wheel,  serve  to  regulate  the  motion  of 
the  mirror  frame  about  its  vertical  axis.  Clamp  springs,  for 
engaging  and  securing  the  ends  of  the  mirror  frame  supports, 
are  attached  at  each  end  of  the  bar. 

The  screen  is  a  brass  frame  6£  inches  square,  in  which  six 
segments  or  leaves  are  mounted  in  such  a  way  as  to  form  a 
shutter.  The  leaves  are  designed  to  turn  through  arcs  of  90° 
on  horizontal  axes,  unanimity  of  movement  being  secured  by 
connections  made  with  a  common  crank  bar.  The  crank  bar  is 


192  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

operated  by  a  key  and  retractile  spring,  which  serve  to  reveal 
and  cut  off  the  flash.  A  set  screw  and  check  nut  at  the  lower 
edge  of  the  screen  frame  limits  the  motion  of  the  crank  bar  and 
the  opening  of  the  leaves.  A  threaded  base  support  furnishes 
the  means  of  attaching  the  screen  frame  to  the  tripod. 

The  sighting  rod  is  a  brass  rod  6£  inches  long,  carrying  at  the 
upper  end  a  front  sight  and  a  movable  disk.  About  the  rod  is 
fitted  a  movable  bronze  collar,  coned  and  grooved  to  take  the 
socket  and  clamping  spring  of  the  mirror  bar.  A  milled  edged 
bronze  washer  serves  to  clamp  the  collar  to  the  rod  at  any 
desired  point. 

The  tripods  are  similar  in  all  respects,  the  screw  of  either 
threading  into  the  mirror  bar  or  screen  frame.  Each  tripod  is 
provided  with  a  hook  at  the  base  of  the  head,  allowing  the 
suspension  of  a  weight  when  great  stability  is  required. 

603.  Assembling. — There   are   two   ways   of   assembling  the 
heliograph,  and  the  position  of  the  sun  is  the  guide  in  deter- 
mining which  of  the  two  should  in  any  given  case  be  employed. 
When  the  sun  is  in  front  of  the  operator — that  is,  in  front  of 
a  plane  through  his  position  at  right  angles  to  the  line  joining 
the  stations — the  sun  mirror  only  is  required ;   with  the  sun 
in  rear  of  this  plane  both  mirrors  should  be  used.     With  one 
mirror  the  rays  of  the  sun  are  reflected  directly  from  the  sun 
mirror  to  the  distant  station ;  with  two  mirrors  the  rays  are 
reflected  from  the  sun  mirror  to  the  station  mirror,  and  thence 
to  the  distant  station. 

604.  With  one  mirror. — Firmly  set  one  of  the  tripods  upon  the 
ground;  attach  the  mirror  bar  to  the  tripod;  insert  and  clamp 
in  the  sockets  the  sun  mirror  and  sighting  rod,  the  latter  hav- 
ing the  disk  turned  down.     At  a  distance  of  about  6  inches, 
sight  through  the  center  of  the  unsilvered  spot  in  the  mirror 
and  turn  the  mirror  bar,  raising  or  lowering  the  sighting  rod 
until  the  center  of  the  mirror,  the  extreme  point  of  the  sighting 
rod,   and   the  distant  station  are  accurately  in  line.     Firmly 
clamp  the  mirror  bar  to  the  tripod,  taking  care  not  to  disturb 
the  alignment,  and  turn  up  the  disk  of  the  sighting  rod.     The 
mirror  is  then  moved  by  means  of  the  tangent  screws  until  the 
"  shadow  spot "  falls  upon  the  paper  disk  in  the  sighting  rod, 
j'.fter  which  the  flash  will  be  visible  at  the  distant  station.    The 
"  shadow  spot "  is  readily  found  by  holding  a  sheet  of  paper  or 
the  hand  about  6  inches  in  front  of  the  mirror,  and  should  be 


INSTRUMENTS.  193 

constantly  kept  in  view  until  located  upon  the  disk.  The  screen 
is  attached  to  a  tripod  and  established  close  to,  and  in  front  of, 
the  sighting  disk,  in  such  a  way  as  to  intercept  the  flash. 

605.  With  two  mirrors. — Firmly  set  one  of  the  tripods  on  the 
ground;   clamp  the  mirror  bar  diagonally  across  the  line  of 
vision  to  the  distant  station;  clamp  the  sun  mirror  facing  the 
sun  to  one  end  of  the  mirror  bar  and  the  station  mirror  facing 
the  distant  station.     Stooping  down,  the  head  near  and  in  rear 
of  the  station  mirror,  turn  the  sun  mirror  by  means  of  its  tan- 
gent screws  until  the  whole  of  the  station  mirror  is  seen  re- 
flected in  the  sun  mirror  and  the  unsilvered  spot  and  the  reflec- 
tion of  the  paper  disk  accurately  cover  each  other.     Still  look- 
ing into  the  sun  mirror,  adjust  the  station  mirror  by  means  of 
the  tangent  screws  until  the  reflection  of  the  distant  station  is 
brought  exactly  in  line  with  the  top  of  the  reflection  of  the  disk 
and  the  top  of  the  unsilvered  spot  of  the  sun  mirror ;  after  this 
the  station  mirror  must  not  be  touched.     Now  step  behind  the 
sun  mirror  and  adjust  it  by  means  of  the  tangent  screws  so 
that  the  "  shadow  spot "  falls  upon  the  center  of  the  paper  disk 
on  the  station  mirror. 

The  flash  will  then  be  visible  at  the  distant  station.  The 
screen  and  its  tripod  are  established  as  described  in  the  single 
mirror  assembling. 

606.  Alternate  method  with  two  mirrors. — Clamp  the  mirroi 
bar  diagonally  across  the  line  of  vision  to  the  distant  station, 
with  the  sun  mirror  and  the  station  mirror  approximately  fac- 
ing the  sun  and  distant  station,  respectively. 

Look  through  small  hole  in  sun  mirror  and  turn  the  station 
mirror  on  its  vertical  and  horizontal  axes  until  the  paper  disk 
on  the  station  mirror  accurately  covers  the  distant  station. 

Standing  behind  sun  mirror,  turn  it  on  its  horizontal  and 
vertical  axes  by  means  of  the  tangent  screw  attachments  until 
the  shadow  spot  falls  upon  the  paper  disk  on  station  mirror. 

607.  Adjustment. — Perfect  adjustment  is  maintained  only  by- 
keeping  the  "  shadow  spot "  uninterruptedly  in  the  center  of 
the  paper  disk,  and  as  this  "  spot "  continually  changes  its  posi- 
tion with  the  apparent  movement  of  the  sun,  one  signalman 
should  be  in  constant  attendance  on  the  tangent  screws  of  the 
sun  mirror.     Movement  imparted  by  these  screws  to  the  mirror 
does  not  disturb  the  alignment,  as  its  center   (the  unsilvered 

82940°— 11 13 


194  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

spot)  is  at  the  intersection  of  the  axes  of  revolution.  Extra 
care  bestowed  upon  preliminary  adjustment  is  repaid  by  in- 
creased brilliancy  of  flash.  With  the  alignment  absolutely  as- 
sured and  the  "  shadow  spot "  at  the  center  of  the  disk,  the 
axis  of  the  cone  of  reflected  rays  is  coincident  with  the  line  of 
sight  and  the  distant  station  receives  the  greatest  intensity  of 
light.  Remember  the  distant  observer  is  unquestionably  the 
belter  judge  as  to  the  character  of  the  flash  received,  and  if, 
therefore,  adjustment  is  called  for  when  the  "shadow  spot"  is 
at  the  center  of  the  disk,  the  alignment  is  probably  at  fault  and 
should  be  looked  after  at  once.  In  setting  up  the  tripods  always 
see  that  the  legs  have  a  sufficient  spread  to  give  a  secure  base, 
and  on  yielding  soil  press  firmly  into  the  ground.  Keep  the 
head  of  the  tripod  as  nearly  level  as  possible,  and  in  high  wind 
ballast  by  hanging  a  substantial  weight  to  the  hook.  See  that 
the  screen  completely  obscures  the  flash,  also  that  the  flash 
passes  entire  when  the  screen  is  opened.  This  feature  of  the 
adjustment  is  partially  regulated  by  the  set  screw  attached  to 
the  screen  frame.  The  retractile  spring  should  sharply  return 
all  the  leaves  of  the  screen  to  their  normal  position  when  the 
key  is  released.  Failure  to  respond  promptly  is  obviated  by 
strengthening  or  replacing  the  spring. 

608.  Care  of  apparatus. — Minor  parts  of  the  instrument  should 
be  dismounted  only  to  effect  repairs,  for  which  spare  parts  are 
furnished  on  requisition.     Steel  parts  should  be  kept  oiled  and 
free  from  rust.     Tangent  screws  and  bearings  should  be  fre- 
quently inspected  for  dust  or  grit.    Mirrors  should  invariably 
be  wiped  clean  before  using.     In  case  of  accident  to  the  sun 
mirror  the  station  mirror  can  be  made  available  for  substitu- 
tion therefor  by  removing  the  paper  disk.     If  the  tripod  legs 
become  loose  at  the  head  joints,  tighten  the  assembling  screws 
with  the  screw  driver. 

609.  Power    and    limitations    of    the    heliograph. — Portability, 
great   range,   comparative   rapidity   of  operation,   and   the   in- 
visibility of  the  signals  except  to  observers  located  approxi- 
mately  on   a   right   line,   joining   the  stations   between   which 
communication  is  had,  are  some  of  the  advantages  derived  from 
using  the  heliograph  in  visual  signaling. 

The  principal  disadvantage  results  from  the  entire  dependence 
of  the  instrument  upon  the  presence  of  sunlight.  The  normal 
working  range  of  the  heliograph  is  about  30  miles,  though  in- 


INSTRUMENTS.  195 

stances  of  its  having  attained  ranges  many  times  greater  than 
this  are  of  record.  The  heliograph  can  be  depended  upon  to 
transmit  from  5  to  12  words  per  minute. 

The  Acetylene  Lantern. 

6  10.  The  signal  lantern  is  an  instrument  designed  for  the 
purpose  of  transmitting  signals  by  means  of  intermittent  flashes 
of  artificial  light.  It  is  the  standard  night  visual  signaling 
equipment  furnished  by  the  Signal  Corps,  and  depends  for  its 
illumination  upon  the  combustion  of  acetylene  gas. 

611.  Method   of  gas   generation. — The   method   employed   for 
producing  acetylene  in  the  signal  lantern  is  by  bringing  water 
into  contact  with  calcium  carbid. 

612.  Description. — This  equipment  consists  of  a  signal  lan- 
tern,   with    cartridge    generator    attached.      The    lantern    is 
equipped  with  a  special  aplanatic  mirror,  5  inches  in  diameter 
and  about  3  inches  focus.    The  lantern  is  packed  complete  in  a 
wooden   case   with   shoulder   straps,   and   the   following   extra 
parts  are  included,  each  part  having  its  own  receptacle  in  the 
case:  Two  burners,  1  cover  glass,  3  cartridges  of  calcium  car- 
bide of  5  ounces  each,  1  pair  of  gas  pliers,  1  tube  white  lead, 
1  extra  filter  bag,  1  screw  driver. 

The  lantern  is  made  of  brass,  all  parts  of  which  are  riveted. 
The  burner  is  of  the  double-tip  form,  consuming  three-quarters 
of  a  cubic  foot  per  hour.  The  lantern  is  fitted  with  a  hood  to 
provide  proper  ventilation  and  at  the  same  time  to  prevent  tlie 
flickering  of  the  light  by  the  wind.  The  front  door  of  the 
lantern  is  hinged  and  fastens  with  a  spring  clasp;  it  is  so  ar- 
ranged that  it  can  be  entirely  removed  if  necessary.  The  cover 
glass  is  made  in  three  sections  and  is  not  affected  by  the 
expansion  and  contraction  of  the  metal  due  to  changes  in  tem- 
perature. The  glass  is  fastened  by  the  aid  of  a  spring  wire, 
so  that  it  can  be  readily  removed  if  it  is  necessary  to  replace 
a  broken  section.  In  the  base  of  the  lantern  is  a  key  and  the 
adjustment  for  regulating  the  height  of  the  flame.  The  key  is 
so  arranged  that  when  not  depressed  but  little  gas  is  admitted 
through  the  by-pass  to  the  burner,  and  the  flame  is  low.  By 
depressing  the  key  as  much  gas  as  can  be  entirely  consumed  is 
admitted  to  the  burner,  which  gives  a  bright  flash.  At  the  back 
of  the  lantern  there  is  an  adjustable  handle,  so  that  the  equip- 


196  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

ment  can  be  used  as  a  hand  lantern  if  desired.  This  form  of 
lantern  can  be  used  with  the  regular  heliograph  tripod,  the 
generator  being  either  attached  to  the  back  of  the  lantern  or 
suspended.  When  practicable,  it  is  better  to  attach  the  gen- 
erator to  the  lantern.  The  candlepower  of  this  lantern  is  about 
1,900. 

The  generator  used  is  known  as  "  the  cartridge  generator," 
:uid  while  constructed  on  the  water-feed  principle,  the  disadvan- 
tages incident  to  this  method  are  eliminated  as  far  as  possible. 
It  is  constructed  of  brass  and  has  a  removable  top.  Attached 
to  the  inside  of  the  top  is  a  flexible  frame  with  a  spring  latch, 
the  spring  latch  being  hinged.  At  the  top  of  the  frame  is  a 
tube  or  cylinder,  the  bottom  of  which  is  conical  in  shape  and 
covered  by  a  rubber  plug.  At  the  bottom  of  the  frame  is  a 
hollow  tube,  which  is  the 'water  inlet.  The  cartridge  proper 
consists  of  a  tin  cylinder  having  an  opening  at  either  end.  A 
small  cylinder  of  wire  mesh  extends  from  and  connects  these 
openings.  The  carbide  lies  around  this  mesh  on  the  inside  of 
the  cartridge.  The  rubber  plug  before  mentioned  fits  into  the 
upper  opening  and  the  water  tube  into  the  lower  opening.  In- 
side the  tube,  at  the  top  of  the  frame,  is  a  filter,  the  function  of 
which  is  to  remove  the  dust  and  moisture  from  the  gas.  The 
outlet  from  this  chamber  is  by  a  brass  bent  tube  having  a  stop- 
cock attached  thereto. 

613.  The  principal  things  to  observe  in  the  operation  of  this 
generator  are  the  following: 

(1)  To  see  that  the  rubber  plugs  fit  tightly  into  the  openings 
of  the  cartridge. 

(2)  That  the  tube,  the  cap,  and  water  hole  are  not  stopped  up. 

(3)  That  the  cotton  in  the  filter  is  changed  frequently. 

(4)  That  the  stopcock  is  closed  before  inserting  the  frame  in 
the  water.     If  this  latter  instruction  is  not  complied  with,  it  can 
be  readily  seen  that  the  water  will  have  free  access  to  the  car- 
bide and  excessive  generation  will  occur. 

614.  When  the  charge  is  exhausted,  the  entire  cartridge  is 
taken  out  and  thrown  away.     This  eliminates  the  handling  of 
carbide  and  the  disagreeable  task  of  cleaning  out  the  residuum 
after  the  gas  has  been  extracted. 

Connection  is  made  from  the  stopcock  to  the  hose  connection 
on  the  lantern  proper,  and  this  is  the  passageway  of  the  gas 
from  the  generator  to  the  burner.  As  soon  as  the  stopcock  is 


INSTRUMENTS.  197 

opened  the  water  rises  through  the  tube  and  flows  to  the  car- 
bide. The  advantage  of  the  cartridge  being  submerged  in  the 
water  is  to  reduce  and  absorb  as  much  of  the  heat  liberated  by 
generation  as  is  possible.  These  lanterns  have  been  tested  up  to 
a  distance  of  10  miles  with  the  naked  eye,  and  under  favorable 
conditions  can  be  used  over  a  range  somewhat  in  excess  of  this. 
With  a  30-power  telescope  the  flash  can  be  read  at  a  distance  of 
30  miles. 

615.  Operation  and  care. — Take  the  lamp  and  generator  from 
the  case  by  aid  of  the  handle  attached  to  the  lamp;  screw  the 
complete  outfit  on  a  heliograph  tripod,  or  stand  the  outfit  on  a 
level  object ;  remove  the  cover  of  generator,  to  which  is  attached 
the  flexible  frame,  detach  spring  from  the  catch  of  the  flexible 
frame;  tear  off  flaps  from  the  ends  of  carbide  cartridge  (or 
pry  off  small  caps),  and  attach  the  cartridge.  Then  attach  to 
frame,  being  careful  to  see  that'  both  rubber  plugs  fit  tightly  into 
the  holes  in  the  cartridge;  fasten  the  latch  of  the  spring  over 
the  metal  catch;  close  stopcock  on  service  pipe;  completely  fill 
the  outer  can  of  generator  with  water,  the  object  being  to  have 
the  generator  level  full  of  water  when  the  lamp  is  in  service, 
then  immerse  the  frame  and  cartridge,  pressing  the  top  of  the 
generator  down  tight.  In  doing  this  the  water  will  overflow 
the  sides  of  the  generator  tank.  Now  connect  by  rubber  tubing 
the  stopcock  with  the  gas  inlet  at  the  bottom  of  the  lamps,  then 
(1)  open  front  door  of  the  lamp,  (2)  light  a  match,  (3)  open 
stopcock,  and  (4)  light  the  gas  at  the  burner.  In  doing  this 
hold  the  key  open.  In  the  new  model  the  key  and  hose  connec- 
tion are  on  the  side  of  bottom  of  lamp. 

When  the  gas  is  ignited  the  lamp  is  ready  for  signaling,  and 
the  key  can  be  operated  as  is  the  Morse  telegraph  instrument, 
but  not  so  rapidly. 

In  the  event  of  the  flame  being  too  high  when  the  key  is 
closed,  adjustment  can  be  made  by  loosening  the  set  screw  and 
adjusting  the  light.  When  at  the  proper  height  tighten  the  set 
screw,  which  locks  the  by-pass  in  its  proper  position.  In  the 
new  model  this  is  accomplished  by  aid  of  the  regulator  by-pass 
valve  at  the  left-hand  side  of  bottom  of  lamp.  The  lamp  is 
properly  adjusted  when  shipped  and  should  not  be  changed 
unless  absolutely  necessary.  Connect  the  rubber  tube  to  the 
burner  before  opening  the  stopcock  on  the  generator. 


198  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

To  recharge  the  generator  take  the  frame  and  the  old  car- 
tridge from  the  case,  throw  away  the  old  case  and  replace  with 
a  fresh  one,  proceeding  as  before. 

See  that  fresh  water  is  put  in  the  generator  each  time  a  new 
cartridge  is  used. 

In  the  tube  through  which  the  service  pipe  passes  is  a  felt 
filter  for  taking  the  dust  out  of  the  gas.  If  the  filter  clogs,  un- 
screw the  cap  to  which  the  service-  pipe  is  attached,  clean  the 
felt,  or  replace  it  with  a  new  filter,  binding  it  in  place  by  a 
stout  thread  or  string. 

If  the  burner  of  the  lamp  does  not  produce  a  perfectly  flat 
flame,  it  has  become  clogged  and  should  be  cleaned  with  the 
burner  cleaner  furnished,  or  a  new  burner  should  be  substituted, 
care  being  taken  to  put  a  little  white  lead  on  the  nipple,  if 
practicable,  so  as  to  insure  a  tight  joint. 

In  repacking  the  outfit  in  the 'case,  throw  out  the  water  and 
wipe  the  can  and  generator  parts  dry.  You  can  not  be  too  care- 
ful to  keep  the  apparatus  clean.  This  is  especially  true  of  the 
small  pipe  that  passes  up  through  the  bottom  of  the  cartridge, 
with  a  cap  over  it.  The  cap  should  always  be  screwed  in  place, 
as  its  object  is  to  prevent  the  water  from  squirting  to  the  top 
of  the  cartridge. 

The  back  of  the  lamp  can  be  removed  by  turning  the  small 
thumbscrew  on  the  top  and  drawing  out  the  pin  which  holds 
the  shell  into  which  is  fitted  the  lens.  It  is  not  necessary  to 
take  the  back  out  except  to  replace  a  lens,  as  the  latter  can 
be  cleaned  by  opening  the  front  door. 

If  it  is  desirable  to  use  the  lamp  as  a  hand  lantern,  the  flame 
can  be  turned  on  full  by  turning  the  button  in  in  a  vertical 
position ;  this  locks  the  key  open.  In  the  new  model  depress 
the  key  and  lock  it  with  the  latch  above  the  key. 

One  charge  of  calcium  carbide  will  supply  gas  to  burn  about 
one  hour  with  the  light  turned  on  full,  or  for  approximately 
three  hours  signaling. 

If  signaling  is  to  be  suspended  for  some  hours,  empty  the 
water  out  of  the  generator  and  close  valve. 

The  glass  front  can  be  replaced  by  taking  out  the  wire 
spring.  The  glass  cuts  should  be  mounted  in  a  horizontal  posi- 
tion and,  to  prevent  breaking,  should  be  protected  from  rain 
when  the  lamp  is  hot. 


INSTRUMENTS.  199 

If  a  glass  should  be  broken  and  an  extra  one  is  not  available 
to  replace  it,  signaling  can  be  continued  by  turning  the  flame 
on  full  and  using  the  heliograph  shutter,  a  cap  or  piece  of 
board  in  front  of  the  lantern  to  obscure  and  reveal  the  flash. 
Without  the  protection  of  the  cover  the  flame  is  easily  blown 
out  when  turned  low,  but  will  not  be  extinguished  even  in  a 
strong  wind  if  the  gas  is  turned  full  on. 

616.  Powers  and  limitation   of  the  acetylene  signal  lantern. — 
As  conditions  are  usually  more  uniform  at  night  than  in  the 
daytime,  the  signal  lantern  is  probably  the  most  reliable  of  all 
visual  signaling  outfits.     The  advantages  of  this  form  of  appa- 
ratus are  its  portability,  speed  of  operation,  and  comparatively 
great  range.    The  principal  disadvantages  are  due  to  the  inter- 
ference caused  by  rain,  fog,  and  moonlight.     The  speed  attain- 
able with  the  lantern  is  about  the  same  as  that  attainable  with 
the  heliograph. 

Rockets. 

617.  Two  distinct  kinds  of  rockets  are  issued,  one  of  which 
is  adapted  to  day  and  the  other  to  night  signaling.     Rockets 
of  the  amber-smoke  type  with  parachute  are  used  in  the  day- 
time, while  sequence  rockets  are  used  at  night. 

Description. — Rockets  for  both  day  and  night  signaling  are 
equipped  with  parachutes.  The  smoke  rocket  is  of  similar  con- 
struction to  the  smoke  shell.  The  sequence  rocket  is  so  ar- 
ranged at  the  base  that  threaded  sections  of  combustible  ma- 
terial burning  either  red  or  white  can  be  attached  to  it. 
Rockets  ascend  about  700  feet. 

Each  rocket  is  supplied  in  a  cylindrical  sealed  tin  can,  which 
also  contain  a  port  fire,  wind  matches,  and  for  the  rockets  a 
stick  in  four  sections.  On  the  outside  of  the  can  is  a  label 
designating  the  kind  of  rocket  therein  contained.  These  cans 
are  easily  opened  by  pulling  a  ring  and  require  no  special 
opening  tool. 

The  sequence  rocket  is  prepared  for  use  by  attaching  red  or 
white  sections  to  the  base  in  such  a  combination  as  to  form 
letters  of  the  alphabet  which  it  is  desired  to  use. 

Letters  containing  the  same  color  in  sequence  are  very  diffi- 
cult to  read  and  should  be  avoided  whenever  possible.  If 
necessary  to  use  them,  blank  sections  furnished  for  the  purpose 


200  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

should  be  inserted  between  the  units.  The  base  of  the  rocket 
will  secure  six  units. 

6  18.  When  rockets  are  to  be  fired  the  sticks  must  be  firmly 
attached,  the  rocket  placed  upright  in  a  trough,  upon  a  frame, 
or  against  a  post.  If  the  fuse  is  beneath  the  paper  covering  the 
"  choke"  orifice,  the  paper  should  be  torn  off  and  the  rocket 
lighted  by  a  port  fire.  In  the  rocket  now  used  the  fuse  extends 
through  the  covering  and  can  be  lighted  direct.  If  the  night  be 
damp,  this  fuse  should  be  exposed  only  a  moment  before  the 
rocket  is  fired.  If  several  rockets  are  to  be  fired  in  succession, 
it  is  well  to  prepare  them  all  at  the  same  time,  and  to  have 
them  all  stood  upright,  but  each  separated  from  the  other  at 
a  distance  of  at  least  6  feet,  else  one  may  ignite  the  other  acci- 
dentally. In  firing  for  chronosemic  signals,  one  rocket  ought  to 
be  kept  ready  upon  the  frame  and  in  reserve,  to  be  fired  in  place 
of  one  that  fails. 

If  a  rocket  misses  fire,  it  is  to  be  taken  from  the  stand  and 
laid  on  the  ground.  Its  place  is  at  once  supplied  by  a  similar 
rocket,  fired  in  its  stead.  The  failing  rocket  is  laid  on  the 
ground,  pointed  away  from  the  station,  in  order  that  if  it  has 
only  hung  and  should  afterwards  ignite  it  may  not  disar- 
range the  signal  shown  or  injure  anyone  of  the  party.  If  the 
wind  blows  freshly,  the  rocket  to  be  fired  should  be  inclined 
slightly  against  the  wind. 

Signal  rockets  are  furnished  in  sealed  cans  and  should  not 
be  removed  therefrom  until  ready  for  use.  Strict  economy 
should  be  observed  in  the  use  of  these  articles,  and  on  no  ac- 
count should  they  be  used  for  purpose  of  display. 

619.  Employment. — Rockets  are  especially  valuable  in  making 
preconcerted  or  emergency  signals.     On  account  of  the  great 
amount  of  ammunition  required  it  is  impracticable  to  spell  out 
messages  with  them.    These  articles  should  be  supplied  to  out- 
posts, detached  stations,  etc.,  to  be  used  for  signaling  the  ap- 
proach of  the  enemy,  or  the  happening  of  unexpected  events, 
which  should  be  known  promptly. 

Very's  Night  Signals. 

620.  The   Very   system    employs  projected   red,   white,   and 
green  stars,  which  are  shot  from  pistols  held  in  the  hand. 


INSTRUMENTS.  201 

Description. — The  Very  pistol  is  a  breech-loading,  single-shot 
pistol,  with  an  8-inch  steel  barrel  chambered  to  receive  a  12- 
gauge  commercial  shotgun  shell.  Brass  shells  are  used  and  are 
packed  in  boxes  colored  to  indicate  the  character  of  stars  em- 
ployed in  loading.  The  color  of  the  star  fired  may  indicate  an 
element  of  any  alphabet  or  any  special  signal  which  may  be 
desired.  The  stars  rise  to  a  height  of  about  200  feet  and  remain 
visible  for  some  time. 

For  more  complete  descriptions  of  apparatus  for  visual  signal- 
ing, management  of  stations,  and  instructions  for  operators  ref- 
erence is  made  to  Manual  No.  6,  Signal  Corps. 

CHAPTER  IV.— FIELD  LINES. 
General  Provisions. 

621.  From  instruction  with  the  buzzer  the  work  will  be  car- 
ried on  in  actually  laying  field  lines  on  the  drill  ground  or  along 
such  roads  as  are  available.     The  units  for  this  work  will  be 
the  section,  platoon,  and  company.     Whether  operating  alone  or 
in  combined  training  each  section  lays,  operates,  and  maintains 
its  own  line. 

622.  Two  kinds  of  wire  are  provided  for  this  work:  The  11- 
strand  field  wire,  which  will  be  used  when  possible,  and  the 
3-strand  buzzer  wire,  which  will  be  used  only  as  hereinbefore 
prescribed. 

THE  WIRE  CART. 

623.  The  means  provided  for  laying  field  lines  is  a  wire  cart, 
with  drums  and  an  automatic  gear  for  picking  up  the  wire  when 
driving  back  over  the  line.     This  is  supplemented  by  carriers 
for  buzzer  wire  to  be  used  by  men  on  foot  or  mounted. 

624.  Immediately  after  each  drill,  maneuver,  or  other  forma- 
tion, the  wire  cart  will  be  thoroughly  inspected  by  the  chief  of 
section.     Notes  will  be  made  of  necessary  repairs,  and  turned 
in  by  him  to  the  company  commander.    An  inspection  will  be 
made  prior  to  each  formation  by  the  chief  of  section,  to  see 
that  all  the  bearings  of  the  cart  are  clean  and  oiled,  except  the 
clutch,  which  will  be  bright  and  free  from  oil.     He  will  see 
that  the  axles  are  greased  and  the  harness  in  repair;  that  oil 


202  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

cans  are  full,  and  that  there  is  no  sediment  in  the  holes  to 
prevent  the  oil  from  reaching  the  bearings. 

TO  CLEAN  THE  WIRE  CART. 

625.  Always  after  the  cart  has  been  used,  after  ea<;h  forma- 
tion, before  the  cart  is  parked,  the  drivers  and  cart  operators 
will  thoroughly  clean  the  chains,  friction  clutch,  and  sprocket 
wheels  with  a  stiff  brush  and  rough  cloth,  removing  all  dust, 
dirt,  and  hard  oil.  After  cleaning,  these  parts  will  be  gone 
over  with  a  well-oiled  cloth  to  prevent  rust. 

026.  Once  each  week,  or  when  directed  by  the  company  com- 
mander, the  section  will  be  assembled,  and,  under  the  super- 
vision of  the  chief  of  section,  the  cart  given  a  thorough  washing 
and  cleaning  throughout.  All  dirt  and  dust  will  be  removed 
from  the  woodwork  with  a  broom  or  stiff  brush,  and  dust  and 
oil  from  the  metal  parts  with  a  cloth.  Hose  will  be  then  used 
to  wash  the  cart,  if  available;  otherwise  pails  and  sponges  will 
be  used.  The  metal  parts  will  be  wiped  dry  before  oiling. 

Occasionally  the  friction  clutch  will  be  taken  apart  under 
the  supervision  of  the  chief  of  section  and  cleaned  writh  gaso- 
line. A  light  oil  will  be  sparingly  used  before  assembling  to 
prevent  rust. 

In  the  field  paulins  will  be  placed  over  the  carts  after  use, 
and  not  removed  until  the  cart  is  again  used.  These  paulins 
will  be  folded  and  placed  on  the  chest  when  the  cart  is  in 
action. 

MANIPULATION  OF  THE  WIRE  CART. 

627.  The  manipulation  of  the  machinery  of  the  cart  for 
handling  wire  will  be  a  part  of  the.  duty  of  the  cart  driver, 
unless  an  operator  be  placed  on  the  cart,  in  which  case  the 
latter  will  do  this.  He  will  stop  the  cart  at  command  or  signal 
from  the  chief  of  section. 

The  reel  will  always  be  stopped  before  a  march  to  the  rear  is 
taken  up. 

In  spooling  up  wire  the  reel  should  be  stopped  when  the  loop 
gets  too  short  and  the  clutch  should  be  thrown  in  before  the 
loop  gets  too  long. 


FIELD  LINES.  203 

LAYING  THE  LINES. 

628.  Slack  will  be  pulled  back  and  the  wire  tied  in  every 
500  or  600  yards  or  when  the  section  chief  directs.  The 
line  will  always  be  tied  at  turns,  in  such  manner  as  to  pre- 
vent the  wire  from  crossing  the  roads.  Under  no  circumstances 
will  the  wire  be  so  tied  as  to  subtend  the  arc  formed  by  any 
turn  in  the  road.  Should  a  number  of  turns  come  together, 
the  cart  will  be  halted  until  the  work  is  satisfactorily  per- 
formed. Ties  will  be  made  by  two  round  turns  and  a  half 
hitch,  around  bushes,  trees,  or  anything  fixed  in  the  ground,  and 
as  close  to  the  ground  as  possible. 

At  points  where  the  line  crosses  roads  or  at  crossroads  the 
line  will  be  raised  overhead  or  buried,  unless  the  road  is  little 
traveled,  when  it  may  be  tied  on  each  side  with  plenty  of  slack. 
When  there  is  nothing  to  tie  to,  stones  will  be  placed  on  the 
wire  on  either  side  of  the  road. 

Generally  the  wire  will  be  laid  to  one  side  of  the  roadbed  to 
avoid  unnecessary  damage  to  the  wire  from  wheels,  etc.,  but  in 
unfenced  country,  where  mounted  men  and  stock  may  approach 
the  road  from  the  adjacent  fields,  it  will  frequently  be  advisable 
to  lay  it  in  the  road,  so  that  it  will  be  flat  and  also  be  more 
easily  seen. 

Plenty  of  slack  wire  always  will  be  taken,  so  that  it  will  drop 
off  the  feet  of  animals  passing  over  it,  without  breaking  the 
wire  or  throwing  the  animal. 

In  crossing  railroads  or  trolley  lines,  the  wire  is  cut  and  the 
ends  run  under  the  rails.  To  prevent  delay,  a  man  of  the  sec- 
tion will  be  dropped  off  at  such  crossings  and  connect  the  wire, 
then  overtake  the  section  at  an  increased  gait. 

In  passing  through  villages,  the  wire  will  be  placed  overhead 
on  telegraph  and  telephone  poles.  The  climbers  carried  with 
the  cart  will  be  used  for  this  purpose.  A  man  will  be  dropped 
for  this  work ;  when  completed,  he  overtakes  the  section.  Men 
left  behind  in  laying  the  wire,  for  any  duty,  will  follow  the  line 
in  overtaking  the  section,  looking  for  breaks. 

The  gait  to  be  taken  in  laying  lines  will  depend  on  the  kind 
of  troops  the  section  is  following  and  the  speed  made  by  them. 
In  all  cases  the  line  will  keep  in  touch  with  the  element  it  is 
to  transmit  information  for.  When  the  last  station  is  cut  in, 


204  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

horses  may  be  unhitched  if  the  troops  seem  likely  to  remain 
in  place  any  length  of  time. 

On  the  care  with  which  lines  are  laid  will  depend  in  no  small 
degree  their  efficiency.  Carelessly  laid  lines  will  need  much 
attention  to  repair  breaks,  and  will  cause  many  delays  in  mes- 
sages, and  no  end  of  annoyance  to  other  troops. 

Speed  will  always  be  sacrificed  to  carefulness  in  this  work. 
Wire  fences,  telephone  and  telegraph  lines  may  sometimes  be 
used  to  advantage. 

OPERATING  THE  LINES. 

Stations  and  Call  Letters. 

629.  Each  section  will  be  assigned  call  letters  for  four  sta- 
tions, which  in  general  should  not  exceed  four.    The  first  section 
will  be  given  the  letters  A,  B,  C,  and  D;   the  second  section 
the  letters  F,  G,  H,  and  K ;  the  third  section,  M,  N,  Q,  and  R ; 
the  fourth  section,  S,  U,  W,  and  X.    The  stations  are  assigned 
the  call  letters  in  order  of  establishment,  not  location,  begin- 
ning with   the  first  letter.     The  call  of  headquarters   is   SO, 
which  will  be  its  call  whenever  it  may  be  on  the  line,  suspending 
for  the  time  being  the  letter  of  the  station  where  it  may  be. 
This  applies  to  the  first  station  established  as  well  as  to  the 
later  ones. 

Branch  lines  electrically  connected  with  the  main  line  have 
offices  given  calls  as  if  on  the  main  line. 

An  office  on  a  branch  line  not  connected  with  the  main  line 
will  be  assigned  the  call  letter  of  the  station  where  the  branch 
goes  out,  adding  J  to  it. 

630.  As  soon  as  a  station  is  established  the  operator  will 
call  up  the  initial  station  and  report.    The  opening  of  all  sta- 
tions, including  the  initial  station,  will  be  reported  to  the  officer 
or  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge  of  the  line,  and  by  the 
latter   to   the   company   commander   and   to   the   commanding 
officer  for  whose  use  the  line  was  established. 

Each  operator  will  have  his  personal  sign,  as  Smith  "  SM," 
Johnson  "  JO,"  etc. 

631.  To  open  station  with  buzzer  the  operator  will  attach 
the  buzzer  connector  to  the  line  wire  and  ground  rod.     Care 
will  be  taken  that  the  teeth  of  the  connector  have  penetrated 


FIELD  LINES.  205 

the  insulation  of  the  line  wire.  Damp  ground  will  be  sought 
for  the  ground  rod;  if  not  available  the  ground  will  be  damp- 
ened around  it  with  water  from  the  canteen. 

The  operators  will  not  leave  their  buzzers  unless  properly 
relieved  by  higher  authority. 

At  night,  when  lanterns  are  necessary  at  a  station,  the  light 
must  be  so  placed  as  to  conceal  it  from  hostile  observation. 

When  it  becomes  necessary  to  move  a  station  some  distance 
from  the  line  and  it  is  not  practicable  to  use  field  wire  for 
extending  the  line,  the  buzzer  wire  carried  by  the  lineman  may 
be  used. 

The  buzzer  carried  by  the  lineman  may  be  used  for  opening 
stations  on  branch  lines. 

632.  Stations  will  be  conducted  in  a  military  manner.     Si- 
lence wTill  be  preserved,  except  conversation  relative  to  business. 
The  lines  will  not  be  used  for  conversational  purposes  between 
operators. 

Buzzers  will  be  kept  dry.    In  case  of  wet  weather  the  shelter 
tents  of  messenger  and  operator  will  be  made  into  an  office. 
No  unauthorized  persons  will  be  allowed  around  stations. 

MAINTAINING  THE  LINES. 

633.  Each  lineman  will  be  equipped  with  a  carrier  with  one- 
fourth  mile  buzzer  wire  and  a  buzzer  for  testing  the  line.    This 
will  enable  linemen  to  determine  in  what  part  of  the  line  a 
break  may  be.     Intermediate  stations  will  assist  in  this,  and 
when  the  section  in  which  the  break  exists  has  been  located  the 
messenger  or  any  available  man  will  be  sent  to  find  and  repair 
it  if  no  lineman  is  at  hand.     In  following  the  line  to  locate 
breaks  the  lineman  will  take  up  the  gallop,  following  the  line 
with* his  eye  where  it  is  raised  from  the  ground,  and  with  the 
pike  where  it  is  on  the  ground.    He  picks  it  up  with  the  hook. 
In  order  to  prevent  a  knot  or  splice  from  being  caught  in  the 
hook  and  jerking  the  pole  from  his  hand  he  raises  the  pike  in  a 
horizontal  position,  slips  the  wire  out  of  the  hook  and  on  to  the 
handle,  and  allows  the  wire  to  run  on  it  near  the  hook,  the 
shoulder  of  the  hook  keeping  it  from  slipping  off.    By  lowering 
the  pike  and  turning  it  around  in   the  hand  the  wire  slips 
quickly  to  the  ground. 


206  TRANSMISSION  OF  INFORMATION. 

634.  To  repair  a  break  the  ends  will  be  first  scraped,  the 
scraped  ends   tied   in   a   square  knot,   the   loose  ends  twisted 
around  the  line  wire,  and  all  carefully  insulated  with  tape.    The 
knots  should  be  pulled  tight  and  made  as  small  as  possible,  so 
that  in  reeling  up  the  knots  will  not  jerk  the  pike  and  glove 
from  the  hand. 

635.  Lines  which  have  been  hastily  laid  will  be  patrolled  at 
once,  the  linemen  proceeding  from  each  end  until  they  meet, 
reporting  from  there  by  wire  to  their  sections  for  instructions. 
In  thus  patrolling  lines  it  will  be  with  a  view  to  placing  the 
wire  flat  on  the  ground,  should  it  have  become  taut  after  the 
section  passed,  and  otherwise  arranging  it  to  lessen  the  likeli- 
hood  of   breaks.      Should   a    line  cross   a   macadamized   road, 
heavily   traveled  by  artillery  and  cavalry,  with  no  means  to 
place  it  overhead,  a  lineman  will  be  left  at  the  point  to  repair 
any  possible  break.     Should  travel  over  the  road  practically 
cease,  he  will  ask  for  instructions  by  wire. 

Frequent  patrols  will  be  made  over  lines  which  pass  over 
fields  of  grain,  weeds,  or  underbrush  in  unfenced  country,  and 
can  neither  be  placed  flat  on  the  ground  nor  overhead.  Breaks 
are  more  apt  to  occur  with  lines  thus  laid. 

On  all  occasions  in  handling  wire,  such  as  reeling  it  on  to 
the  reels  in  filling  them  or  reeling  it  off  for  repairs,  the  section 
chief  will  have  leaks  in  insulation  repaired  and  all  connections 
looked  over.  This  aids  materially  in  the  working  of  the  lines 
when  the  wire  is  laid. 

RECOVERING  THE  WIRE. 

636.  Wire  will  not  be  picked  up  at  a  faster  gait  than  a  trot. 
Should  a  more  rapid  gait  become  necessary  to  escape  capture, 
the  wire  will  be  cut  and  abandoned.     The  real  object  is  to  lay 
wire  and  not  to  pick  it  up.     Should  wire  have  to  be  abandoned, 
the  cart  will  refill  its  reel  at  the  earliest  possible  moment  from 
the  reserve.     Wire  will  only  be  temporarily  abandoned  at  ma- 
neuvers.    The  section  will  return  for  it  when  the  maneuver  is 
completed.     Under  no  circumstances  will  wire  be  reeled  up  on 
the  reels  or  spools  until  any  breaks  in  the  metallic  continuity 
of  the  wire  have  been  repaired. 


PART  VI. 

SIGNAL,    TROOPS    IN    THE    FIELD. 

POSITION. 

637.  The  position  of  signal  troops  will  be  governed  by  the 
tactical  requirements  of  the  situation.     Detachments  of  signal 
troops  must  necessarily,  whether  on  the  march,  in  camp,  or  in 
combat,   be   near   the   commanding   officer   of  the  troops   with 
whom  communication  must  be  maintained. 

To  this  end  commanding  officers  of  signal  troops  will  make 
such  distribution  of  their  command  as  will  enable  signal  troops 
to  best  secure  this  result  without  interfering  with  the  function 
of  other  troops. 

638.  The  position  of  the  signal  officer  is  usually  with  the 
commanding  general  or  with  the  commanding  officer  of  the  unit 
for  which  he  is  furnishing  lines.     From  this  point  he  can  get  a 
grasp  of  the  situation  and  be  able  to  direct  the  operations  of 
his  platoons  and  sections  to  the  best  advantage.     All  contem- 
plated changes  in  the  location  of  wire  carts  and  stations  will 
be  reported  to  him. 

MARCHES. 

639.  The  average  march  for  field  signal  troops,  on  ordinarily 
good  roads,  is  from  15  to  25  miles  per  day.     With  rare  excep- 
tions the  walk  is  invariably  the  gait.     Necessity  may  require 
alternating  the  trot  and  walk,  or  an  unbroken  trot,  for  several 
miles. 

Long  marches  or  expeditions  will  be  begun  moderately;  12  to 
15  miles  per  day  is  enough  for  the  first  marches.  This  may  be 
increased  when  the  horses  are  inured  to  their  work. 

A  halt  of  from  5  to  10  minutes  is  made  at  the  end  of  every 
hour,  for  the  purpose  of  adjusting  saddles  and  harness,  etc. 
When  troops  march  for  the  greater  part  of  the  day,  a  halt  of 
about  an  hour  is  made  near  the  middle  of  the  day.  At  this 
halt  cinchas  will  be  loosened  and  horses  unhitched. 

Chiefs  of  platoons  and  of  sections,  without  waiting  for  ex- 
press instruction,  will  give  such  orders  as  may  be  necessary  for 
helping  horses  or  wagons  out  of  difficulty.  All  men  of  the  sec- 

207 


208  SIGNAL  TROOPS  IN  THE  FIELD. 

tion  will  be  dismounted  and  used  for  this  purpose  if  necessary. 
The  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge  will  take  similar  action 
in  his  train  if  circumstances  make  it  necessary. 

An  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  may  be  sent  forward  to 
select  a  camp  ground  and  arrange  for  wood  and  water. 

Upon  arrival  of  the  company  in  camp,  damages  must  be  re- 
paired without  delay ;  wagons  repaired  and  greased ;  and  horses 
shod  and  cared  for. 

640.  When  an  accident  happens  to  a  wagon  it  is  pulled  out  of 
the  column,  if  possible,  so  as  not  to  interrupt  the  march ;  other- 
wise, sections  in  rear  pass  it  by  on  the  most  convenient  flank, 
so  as  not  to  delay  the  march.     It  will  resume  its  place  in  the 
column  when  the  damage  is  repaired,  as  soon  as  it  is  possible 
to   pass  the   intervening  sections.     If  a   section  wire  cart  or 
wagon  is  damaged,  the  chief  of  section,  with  the  necessary  num- 
ber of  men,  will  remain  with  it  until  repaired  unless  the  damage 
is  beyond  repair. 

641.  More  extended  instructions  for  the  conduct  of  marches 
will  be  found  in  the  Field  Service  Regulations. 

CAMPING. 

642.  Camping,  while  on  the  march,  will  be  in  line,  column 
of  platoons,  or  sections,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  available 
camping  space.    The  company  is  formed  as  desired,  with  proper 
intervals  or  distances,  and  the  platoons  or  sections,  as  the  case 
may  be,  turned  over  to  the  chiefs  of  the  units  into  which  the 
camp  is  established.     The  men  dismount  at  the  command  of 
their  chief;    unsaddle  and  place  the  saddles  in  a  line;   hold 
their  horses  until  the  picket  line  is  up,  when  they  tie  on  the 
line,  reform,  and  pitch  tents.     ( See  par.  649. ) 

643.  The  wagons  will  be  parked  with  about  15  yards  interval, 
on  the  most  convenient  flank.     The  wagons  of  the  train  may 
be  parked  in  a  similar  manner  15  yards  in  rear  of  them.    The 
section  picket  lines  will  be  carried  on  the  carts.    While  the  men 
individually  mounted  are  unsaddling  the  other  men  attach  the 
picket  lines.     The  horses  of  each  section  are  tied  in  the  space 
between   the  carts,   commencing  with  the   first  section.     This 
work  is  supervised  by  the  company  commander. 

644.  The  harness  is  placed  on  the  footboards  and  covered 
with  the  paulins  used  for  protecting  carts  and  instruments. 


SIGNAL  TROOPS  IN  THE  FIELD.  209 

Saddles  are  placed  alongside  the  tongues  under  the  paulins, 
and  this  equipment  protected  from  the  weather  by  the  cart 
paulins. 

645.  Should  it  become  necessary  to  camp  in  the  road,  the 
shelter  tents  can  be  placed  to  one  side  in  line  and  the  picket 
line  extended  from  one  flank,  as  indicated  above.     The  officers' 
tents  will   be   placed  in   the   locality   most   available   and  the 
kitchen  in  the  most  convenient  place  for  the  men.     Tents  will 
be  faced  according  to  prevailing  weather.    Men  not  assigned  to 
sections  will  pitch  tents  with  the  train. 

646.  On  arriving  in  camp,  sinks  will  be  dug  at  once.     If  the 
march  is  to  be  resumed  the  following  day,  some  sanitary  ar- 
rangement may  be  made;  ordinarily  sinks  with  brush  screens 
will  be  necessary. 

647.  Camp  will  be   broken   in  the  following  order:  Irnme- 
mediately  after  reveille  the  men  will  feed  their  horses  and,  if 
time  permits,  groom  for  20  minutes,  each  man  caring  for  his 
own  horse. 

Tents  will  be  struck  and  rolls  made,  which  is  followed  by 
breakfast,  then  water  call,  followed  by  boots  and  saddles.  The 
picket  lines  are  placed  upon  the  carts  and  the  company  formed 
in  column  of  sections  or  as  directed  by  the  captain. 

648.  In  maintaining  extended  lines,  the  men  will  camp  in 
pairs,  squads,  or  sections,  as  the  nature  of  the  duty  dictates. 

For  camps  of  any  duration,  or  permanent  camps,  instructions 
contained  in  Field  Service  Regulations  will  be  followed. 

PITCHING  TENTS. 
Single  Shelter  Tents. 

649.  The  captain  causes  the  company  to   form   for  shelter 
tents. 

The  officers  fall  out,  the  first  sergeant  falls  in  as  rear-rank 
man  of  the  right  file,  composed  of  himself  and  guidon ;  blank  files 
are  filled  by  the  file  closers  or  by  men  taken  from  the  front  rank. 

The  captain  then  commands :  1.  To  the  left  (right)  take  shelter 
tent  intervals;  2.  MARCH;  3.  COMPANY;  4.  HALT;  5.  FRONT; 
6.  PITCH  TENTS. 

At  the  command  march,  all  face  to  the  left  and  move  off  in 
succession,  the  front  and  rear  rank  men  alternating.  Each 
82940°— 11 14 


210  SIGNAL  TROOPS  IN  THE  FIELD. 

rear-rank  man  places  himself  in  rear  of  his  front-rank  man  in  a 
single  column;  as  the  line  is  being  extended  each  man  grasps 
with  his  left  hand  the  right  wrist  of  the  man  in  front. 

If  intervals  are  taken  to  the  right,  the  front-rank  man  of  each 
file  follows  his  rear-rank  man,  and  each  man  grasps  with  his 
right  hand  the  left  wrist  of  the  man  in  front. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  as  the  second  man  from  the  right 
has  his  interval,  all  halt,  face  to  the  front,  dress  to  the  right, 
and  correct  their  intervals  by  moving  to  the  left  until  the  arms 
are  fully  extended. 

At  the  command  front,  all  drop  their  hands. 

At  the  command  pitch  tents,  each  rear-rank  man  moves  back 
to  four  paces  in  rear  of  his  front-rank  man ;  all  unsling  and 
open  the  blanket  rolls  and  take  out  the  shelter  half,  poles,  and 
pins;  the  front-rank  man  places  one  pin  in  the  ground  at  the 
point  where  his  right  heel,  kept  in  position  until  this  time, 
was  planted.  Each  then  spreads  his  shelter  half,  triangle  to  the 
rear,  flat  upon  the  ground  the  tent  is  to  occupy,  rear-rank  man's 
half  on  the  right.  The  halves  are  then  buttoned  together.  Each 
front-rank  man  joins  his  pole,  inserts  the  top  in  the  eyes  of 
the  halves,  and  holds  the  pole  upright  beside  the  pin  placed  in 
the  ground;  his  rear-rank  man,  using  the  pins  in  front,  pins 
down  the  front  corners  of  the  tent  on  the  line  of  pins,  stretching 
the  canvas  taut ;  he  then  inserts  a  pin  in  the  eye  of  the  rope 
and  drives  the  pin  at  such  distance  in  front  of  the  pole  as  to 
hold  the  rope  taut.  Both  then  go  to  the  rear  of  the  tent ;  the 
rear-rank  man  adjusts  the  pole  and  the  front-rank  man  drives  ' 
the  pins.  The  rest  of  the  pins  are  then  driven  by  both  men,  the 
rear-rank  man  working  on  the  right. 

As  soon  as  the  tent  is  pitched  each  man  arranges  the  con- 
tents of  the  blanket  roll  in  the  tent  and  stands  at  attention  in 
front  of  his  own  half  on  line  with  the  front  guy-rope  pin. 

The  guy  ropes,  to  have  a  uniform  slope  when  the  shelter 
tents  are  pitched,  should  all  be  of  the  same  length. 

650.  Shelter  tents  are  pitched  by  a  squad,  section,  or  platoon 
in  the  same  manner  as  by  a  company. 

Double  Shelter  Tents. 

651.  The  double  shelter  tent  is  formed  by  buttoning  together 
the  square  ends  of  two  single  tents.    Two  complete  tents,  except 


SIGNAL  TROOPS  IN  THE  FIELD.  211 

one  pole,  are  used.  Two  guy  ropes  are  used  at  each  end,  the 
guy  pins  being  placed  in  front  of  the  corner  pins. 

The  double  shelter  tents  are  pitched  by  Nos.  1  and  2  front  and 
rear  rank,  and  by  Nos.  3  and  4  front  and  rear  rank;  the  men 
falling  in  on  the  left  are  numbered,  counting  off  if  necessary. 

The  captain  gives  the  same  commands  as  before,  inserting 
double  before  shelter  in  the  first  command,  and  before  tents  in 
the  last  command. 

The  commands  are  executed  in  the  same  manner  as  when 
pitching  single  shelter  tents,  with  the  following  exceptions : 

Only  the  front-rank  men  grasp  wrists;  the  rear-rank  men 
cover  their  file  leaders  at  6  paces. 

The  first  sergeant  places  himself  on  the  right  of  the  guidon 
and  with  him  pitches  a  single  shelter  tent. 

Only  the  odd  numbers  of  the  front  rank  mark  the  line  with 
the  tent  pin. 

All  the  men  spread  their  shelter  halves  on  the  ground  the  tent 
is  to  occupy.  Those  of  the  front  rank  are  placed  with  the  tri- 
angular ends  to  the  front.  All  four  halves  are  then  buttoned 
together,  first  the  ridges  and  then  the  square  ends.  The  front 
corners  of  the  tent  are  pinned  by  the  front-rank  men,  the  odd 
number  holding  the  poles,  the  even  number  driving  the  pins. 
The  rear-rank  men  similarly  pin  the  rear  corners. 

While  the  odd  numbers  steady  the  poles,  each  even  number 
of  the  front  rank  takes  his  pole  and  enters  the  tent  where,  as- 
sisted by  the  even  number  of  the  rear  rank,  he  adjusts  the 
pole  to  the  center  eyes  of  the  shelter  halves  in  the  following 
order :  First,  the  lower  half  of  the  front  tent ;  second,  the  lower 
half  of  the  rear  tent;  third,  the  upper  half  of  the  front  tent; 
fourth,  the  upper  half  of  the  rear  tent.  The  guy  ropes  are  then 
adjusted. 

The  tents  having  been  pitched,  the  triangular  ends  are  turned 
back,  contents  of  the  rolls  arranged,  and  the  men  stand  at 
attention,  each  opposite  his  own  shelter  half  and  facing  out  from 
the  tent. 

652.  To  pitch  single  or  double  shelter  tents  by  battalion,  the 
major  causes  the  right  (left)  guides  to  cover,  dresses  the  bat- 
talion on  the  covering  guides,  and  commands :  1.  Pitch  (double) 
tents.  Each  captain  causes  his  company  to  pitch  tents  by  the 
same  commands  and  in  the  same  manner  as  previously  de- 
scribed. 


212  SIGNAL  TROOPS  IN  THE  FIELD. 

TO  STRIKE  SHELTER  TENTS. 

653.  Everything   having  been   removed   from   the  tents:  1. 
Strike  tents,  2.  DOWN,  3.  To  the  right  (left)  assemble,  4.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command  the  side  pins  are  removed;  the  front 
rank  men  steady  the  front  pole,  the  rear  rank  men  the  rear 
pole,  and  all  remaining  pins  are  removed. 

At  the  second  command,  or  last  note  of  the  genera/,  the  tents 
are  lowered,  blanket  rolls  packed  and  slung,  and  the  men  stand 
at  attention  in  front  and  rear  of  the  places  lately  occupied  by 
their  tents  at  their  original  places  after  extension. 

At  the  fourth  command  they  close  in  to  the  right  and  re-form 
company. 

COMMON  AND  WALL  TENTS. 

654.  Four  men,  numbered  from  1  to  4,  consecutively,  pitch 
each  tent. 

Nos.  1  and  2  place  the  ridgepole  perpendicular  to  the  com- 
pany street,  with  one  end  against  the  position  pin ;  Nos.  3  and 
4  drive  a  pin  at  the  other  end  of  the  ridgepole.  Nos.  1  and  2 
mark  the  positions  of  the  four  corner  guy-rope  pins  by  placing 
the  ridgepole  parallel  to  the  company  street,  to  the  right  (fac- 
ing the  tent)  of  the  position  pin;  Nos.  3  and  4  drive  a  large  pin 
one  pace  in  front  of  the  outer  end  of  the  ridgepole.  The  other 
three  corner  guy  pins  are  set  in  succession  in  the  same  manner, 
going  first  straight  to  the  rear,  then  across  the  tent,  and  then 
to  the  front.  All  four  then  spread  the  tent  on  the  ground  it  is 
to  occupy :  Nos.  1  at  the  front  and  2  at  the  rear  insert  the  up- 
rights. The  ridgepole  and  uprights  are  joined,  the  pole  pins 
inserted  in  the  eyelets  of  the  tent  and  fly,  and  the  tent  raised 
to  a  vertical  position  with  the  poles  at  the  pins.  Nos.  1  and  2 
hold  the  tent  in  position;  No.  3  places  the  front  guy  ropes  of 
tent  and  fly,  No.  4,  the  rear,  on  their  pins,  and  tighten  the  same 
so  as  to  hold  the  poles  vertical.  The  wall  pins  are  then  driven 
through  the  loops,  walls  hanging  vertically.  The  other  pins  are 
then  driven  on  line  with  the  corner  pins  and  in  prolongation  of 
the  seams  of  the  tent. 

CONICAL  WALL  TENTS. 

655.  The  conical  wall  tent  is  pitched  by  eight  men.     The 
ranking  noncommissioned  officer  numbers  the  men  from  1  to  7 


SIGNAL  TROOPS  IN  THE  FIELD.  213 

and  superintends  the  work.  Upon  the  hood  lines  of  the  tent 
are  placed  three  marks;  the  first  about  8  feet  3  inches,  the 
second  about  11  feet  3  inches,  the  third  .about  14  feet  2  inches 
from  the  hood  ring ;  the  first  marks  the  distance  from  the  cen- 
ter to  the  wall  pins,  the  second  to  the  guy  pins,  and  the  distance 
between  the  second  and  third  is  the  distance  between  guy  pins. 
These  distances  vary  slightly  for  different  tents  and  should  be 
verified  by  actual  experiment  before  permanently  marking  the 
ropes.  They  should  also  be  frequently  verified  on  account  of 
the  stretching  of  the  rope.  To  locate  the  position  of  guy  pins 
after  the  first,  the  hood  being  held  on  the  center  pin,  with  the 
left  hand  hold  the  outer  mark  on  the  pin  last  set,  with  the  right 
hand  grasp  the  rope  at  the  center  mark  and  move  the  hand 
to  the  right  so  as  to  have  both  sections  of  the  rope  taut;  the 
center  mark  is  then  over  the  position  desired ;  the  inner  mark  is 
over  the  position  of  the  corresponding  wall  pin. 

To  pitch  the  tent,  No.  1  places  the  tent  pole  on  the  ground, 
socket  end  against  the  door  pin,  pole  perpendicular  to  the  com- 
pany street.  No.  2  drives  the  center  pin  at  the  other  extremity 
of  the  pole.  No.  3  drives  a  wall  pin  on  each  side  of  and  1  foot 
from  the  door  pin.  No.  4  places  the  open  tripod  flat  on  the 
ground  with  its  center  near  the  center  pin.  The  whole  party 
then  places  the  tent,  fully  opened,  on  the  ground  it  is  to  occupy, 
the  center  at  the  center  pin,  the  door  at  the  door  pin. 

The  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge  holds  the  hood  ring  on 
the  center  pin,  and  superintends  from  that  position.  No.  1 
stretches  the  hood  rope  over  the  right  (facing  the  tent)  wall 
pin  and  No.  2  drives  the  first  guy  pin  at  the  middle  mark.  No.  1 
marks  the  position  of  the  guy  pins  in  succession  and  No.  2 
drives  a  pin  lightly  in  each  position  as  soon  as  marked.  At  the 
same  time  No.  5  inserts  small  pins  in  succession  through  the 
wall  loops  and  places  the  pins  in  position  against  the  inner 
mark  on  the  hood  rope,  where  they  are  partly  driven  by  No.  6. 
No.  4  distributes  large  pins  ahead  of  Nos.  1  and  2 ;  No.  7,  small 
pins  ahead  of  Nos.  5  and  6;  No.  3  fellows  Nos.  1  and  2  and 
drives  the  guy  pins  home.  No.  7,  after  distributing  his  pins, 
takes  an  ax  and  drives  home  the  pins  behind  Nos.  5  and  6. 
No.  4,  after  distributing  his  pins,  follows  No.  3  and  loops  the 
guy  ropes  over  the  pins. 

Nos.  1,  2,  and  3,  the  pins  being  driven,  slip  under  the  tent 
and  place  the  pin  of  the  pole  through  the  tent  and  hood  rings 


214  SIGNAL  TROOPS  IN  THE  FIELD. 

while  the  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge  places  the  hood  in 
position.  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3  then  raise  the  pole  to  a  vertical 
position  and  insert  the  end  in  the  socket  of  the  tripod.  They 
then  raise  the  tripod  to  its  proper  height,  keeping  the  center 
of  the  tripod  over  the  center  pin.  While  they  hold  the  pole 
vertical  Nos.  4,  5,  6,  and  7  adjust  four  guy  ropes,  one  in  each 
quadrant  of  the  tent,  to  hold  the  pole  in  its  vertical  position, 
and  then  the  remaining  guy  ropes.  As  soon  as  these  are  ad- 
justed the  men  inside  drive  a  pin  at  each  foot  of  the  tripod,  if 
necessary,  to  hold  it  in  place. 

TO  STRIKE  COMMON,  WALL,  AND  CONICAL  WALL  TENTS. 

656.  1.  Strike  t$nts,  2.  DOWN. 

The  men  first  remove  all  pins  except  those  of  the  four  corner 
guy  ropes — four  quadrant  guy  ropes  in  case  of  the  conical  wall 
tent.  The  pins  are  neatly  piled  or  placed  in  their  receptacle. 

One  man  removes  each  guy  from  its  pin,  and  all  hold  the  tent 
in  a  vertical  position  until  the  command  down,  or  the  last  note 
of  the  genera/,  and  then  lower  it  to  the  indicated  side. 

The  canvas  is  then  folded,  or  rolled,  and  tied,  the  poles,  or 
tripod  and  pole  fastened  together  and  the  remaining  pins  col- 
lected. 

TO  FOLD  TENTS. 

657.  Wall  tents. — Spread  the  tent  flat  on  its  side  and  place 
all  guys  but  two  over  on  the  canvas;  fold  the  triangular  ends 
over  so  as  to  make  the  canvas  rectangular;  fold  both  ends  so 
that  they  meet  at  the  center,  and  then  fold  one  end  over  on  the 
other ;  fold  the  bottom  and  ridge  over  so  that  they  meet  at  the 
center  of  the  strip,  and  then  fold  one  end  over  on  the  other. 

Fold  the  fly  into  four  folds,  parallel  to  its  length,  then  in  a 
similar  manner  across  its  length,  making  a  rectangle  with 
dimensions  about  the  same  as  the  folded  tent. 

Place  the  fly  on  the  tent,  cross  the  two  free  guys,  and  tie 
them  so  that  they  pass  over  the  ends  and  across  the  sides. 

The  hospital  and  command  tent  are  folded  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  the  wall  tent. 

Conical  wall  tents.— Spread  the  tent  flat,  with  the  door  up; 
holding  the  ring  vertical,  fold  the  two  edges  in  so  they  meet  at 


SIGNAL  TROOPS  IN  THE  FIELD.  215 

the  center,  and  again  fold  in  the  same  manner ;  place  the  hood 
on  one  half  and  fold  the  other  half  over  on  it;  turn  wall  over 
toward  ring,  fold  coming  at  about  middle  of  height  of  wall ;  two 
men  working  together  then  roll  from  the  ring  down,  placing 
knees  on  each  fold  to  make  bundle  compact  and  flat. 

Tie  the  bundle  with  the  two  free  guys,  as  in  case  of  the 
wall  tent. 

GENERAL  REMARKS. 

658.  As  soon  as  the  lines  of  company  streets  are  established 
the  positions  of  the  tents  should  be  marked,  from  the  flank  near- 
est the  officers'  tents,  by  pins.    The  front  pole  of  the  wall  and 
common  tent  and  the  door  pins  of  the  conical  wall  tents  occupy 
the  points  so  marked.    The  distance  between  pins  may  be  deter- 
mined by  pacing  or  by  a  light  cord  with  the  distances  marked 
upon  it.    These  distances  are :  For  wall  tents,  8  paces ;  common 
tents,  6  paces;  conical  wall  tents,  10  paces.     The  pins  marking 
the  position  of  the  tents  are,  when  practicable,  set  on  a  straight 
line,  and  the  company  officers  verify  and  correct  the  alignment 
of  such  pins  in  the  quickest  and  most  convenient  manner. 

659.  Wall  pins  are  so  driven  as  to  slope  slightly  away  from 
the  tent ;  guy  pins  so  as  to  slope  slightly  toward  the  tent. 

660.  Each  tent,  its  fly,  hood,  poles,  and  tripod,  should  have 
the  same  number. 

661.  The  conical  wall  tent  complete  consists  of  1  tent  and 
hood,  76  pounds;  1  tent  pole  and  tripod,  32  pounds;  48  pins, 
about  20  pounds ;  total  weight,  128  pounds.    Its  dimensions  are : 
Diameter,   16£  feet ;   height,   10   feet ;   height  of  wall,   3  feet ; 
packed,  contains  13  cubic  feet. 

662.  The  wall  tent  complete  consists  of  1  tent,  43  pounds; 
1  fly,  15  pounds;  1  set  poles,  25  pounds;  10  large  and  18  small 
tent  pins,  about  15  pounds;  total  weight,  98  pounds.     Its  di- 
mensions are :  Length  of  ridge,  9  feet ;  width,  8  feet  11  inches ; 
height,  8i  feet ;  height  of  wall,  3  feet  9  inches ;  packed,  contains 
6  cubic  feet. 

663.  The  common  tent  complete  consists  of  1  tent,  26  pounds ; 
1   set  poles,   15   pounds ;   24   small   tent   pins,   weight  about  9 
pounds;  total  weight,  50  pounds.     Its  dimensions  are:  Length 
of  ridge,  6  feet  11  inches ;   width,  8  feet  4  inches ;   height,  6 
feet  10  inches ;  height  of  wall,  2  feet. 


216  SIGNAL  TROOPS  IN  THE  FIELD. 

664.  The  shelter-tent  equipment  of  each  enlisted  man  con- 
sists of  the  following : 

(a)  One  shelter  half,  weight  3  pounds. 

(6)   One  pole  in  3  joints,  47  inches  long;  weight,  10i  ounces. 

(c)   Five  tent  pins,  9  inches  long;  weight,  10  ounces. 

The  shelter  tent  is  pitched  by  two  men,  whose  combined 
equipment  make  a  complete  tent.  The  tent,  when  pitched,  oc- 
cupies a  space  5  feet  4  inches  deep  and  6  feet  4  inches  wide; 
the  two  triangular  parts,  when  pinned  to  the  ground,  inclose 
an  additional  triangular  space  20  inches  deep. 

665.  In  striking  tents,  common  and  wall  tents  are,  unless 
otherwise  directed,  lowered  to  the  right  facing  out  from  the 
tent  door;  conical  wall  tents  away  from  the  door. 


PART  VII. 

CEREMONIES. 

CHAPTER  I.— GENERAL  RULES. 

666.  On  occasions  of  ceremony,  except  funerals  and  reviews 
of  large  forces,  troops  will  be  arranged  from  right  to  left  in 
line  and  from  head  to  rear  in  column  in  the  following  order: 
First,   Infantry;    second,    Field   Artillery;    third,    Field    Signal 
troops;  fourth,  Cavalry. 

Artillery,  Engineer,  and  Signal  Corps  troops,  equipped  as 
Infantry,  are  posted  as  Infantry;  dismounted  Cavalry  and 
Marines  attached  to  the  Army  are  on  the  left  of  the  Infantry  in 
the  order  named;  companies  or  detachments  of  the  Hospital 
Corps  and  mounted  detachments  of  engineers  are  assigned  to 
places  according  to  the  nature  of  the  ceremony.  When  Cavalry 
and  Field  Artillery  are  reviewed  together  without  other  troops 
the  Artillery  is  posted  on  the  left;  if,  however,  Field  Signal 
troops  are  present,  they  are  posted  between  the  Cavalry  and 
Field  Artillery.  Troops  in  column  in  funeral  escorts  will  be 
arranged  from  head  to  rear  in  the  following  order :  First,  Cav- 
alry ;  second,  Field  Signal  troops ;  third,  Field  Artillery ;  fourth, 
Infantry.  In  the  same  arm,  Regulars,  Militia  in  the  service  of 
the  United  States,  and  Volunteers  are  posted  in  line  from  right 
to  left  or  in  column  from  head  to  rear  in  the  order  named. 
In  reviews  of  large  bodies  of  troops  the  different  arms  and 
classes  are  posted  at  the  discretion  of  the  commanding  general, 
due  regard  being  paid  to  their  position  in  camp.  On  all  other 
occasions  troops  of  all  classes  are  posted  at  the  discretion  of 
the  general  or  senior  commander. 

667.  At  formations  for  ceremony  sabers  are  drawn.     Mounted 
officers  in  facing  toward  the  line  and  in  resuming  their  front 
always  execute  a  left  about. 

Staff  and  noncommissioned  staff  officers,  when  it  is  not  other- 
wise prescribed,  draw  and  return  saber  with  their  chief. 

668.  A  noncommissioned  officer  in  command  of  a  company 
takes  post  on  the  right  of  the  company  in  line  with  it.    After 

217 


218  CEREMONIES. 


it  he  takes  the  post  of  the  captain  when  the  battalion 
is  in  column. 

Companies  of  the  battalion  are  formed  and  posted  as  pre- 
scribed in  paragraph  329. 

CHAPTER  II.—  REVIEWS. 
GENERAL  RULES. 

669.  The  adjutant  or  the  adjutant  general   posts  men   or 
otherwise  marks  the  points  where  the  column  changes  direc- 
tion, in  such  manner  that  the  right  flank  in  passing  the  review- 
ing officer  shall  be  about  10  yards  from  him. 

670.  The  post  of  the  reviewing  officer,  usually  opposite  the 
center  of  the  line,  is  marked  by  a  flag. 

671.  The  reviewing  officer,  his  staff,  and  others  at  the  review- 
ing stand  salute  the  standard  as  it  passes,  whether  the  stand- 
ard salutes  or  not;  those  with  arms  not  drawn  salute  by  un- 
covering.    The  reviewing  officer  returns  the  salute  of  the  com- 
manding officer  of  the  troops,  and  of  such  commanding  officer 
enly. 

672.  The  staff  of  the  reviewing  officer  is  in  single  rank,  0 
yards  in  rear  of  him,  in  the  following  order  from  right  to  left  : 
Chief  of  Staff,  officers  of  the  General  Staff  Corps,  adjutant  gen- 
eral, aids,  then  the  other  members  of  the  staff  in  the  order  of 
rank,  the  senior  on  the  right  ;  the  flag  and  orderlies  place  them- 
selves 3  yards  in  rear  of  the  staff,  the  flag  on  the  right. 

673.  Officers  of  the  same  or  higher  grade  and  distinguished 
personages  invited   to   accompany   the   reviewing  officer   place 
themselves  on  his  left  ;   their  staff  and  orderlies  place  them- 
selves, respectively,  on  the  left  of  the  staff  and  orderlies  of  the 
reviewing    officer;    all    others    who    accompany    the    reviewing 
officer  place  themselves  on  the  left  of  his  staff,  their  orderlies 
in  rear.     A  staff  officer  is  designated  to  escort  distinguished 
personages  and  to  indicate  to  them  their  proper  positions. 

674.  When  riding  around  the  troops,  the  reviewing  officer 
may  direct  that  his  staff,  flag,  and  orderlies  remain  at  the  post 
of  the  reviewing  officer  or  that  only  his  personal  staff  and  flag 
shall  accompany  him  ;  in  either  of  these  cases  the  commanding 
officer  alone  accompanies  the  reviewing  officer.     If  the  review- 
ing officer  is  accompanied  by  his  staff,  the  staff  officers  of  the 


REVIEWS.  219 

commander  place  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  staff  of  the 
reviewing  officer. 

While  passing  in  review  or  riding  around  troops  the  staff  is 
formed  in  one  or  more  ranks,  according  to  its  size. 

675.  The  staff,   flag,   and  orderlies  of  brigade  commanders 
place  themselves  in  the  order  prescribed  for  the  staff,  flag,  and 
orderlies  of  the  reviewing  officer. 

676.  When  the  reviewing  officer  is  not  in  front  or  in  rear 
of  a  regiment,  or  other  separate  organization,  its  commander 
may  cause  it  to  stand  at  ease,  to  rest,  or  to  dismount  and  rest, 
and  to  resume  attention  and  mount,  but  so  as  not  to  interfere 
with  the  ceremony. 

677.  When  the  commanding  officer  of  the  troops  turns  out 
of  the  column  his  post  is  on  the  right  of  the  reviewing  officer; 
his  staff,  in  single  rank,  on  the  right  of  the  staff  already  there ; 
his  flag  and  orderlies  in  rear  of  his  staff 

When  the  column  has  passed,  the  commanding  officer,  without 
changing  position,  salutes  the  reviewing  officer  and  then  with 
his  staff  and  orderlies  rejoins  his  command. 

If  the  person  reviewing  the  command  is  not  mounted,  the 
commanding  officer  and  his  staff,  on  turning  out  of  the  column 
after  passing  the  reviewing  officer,  dismount  preparatory  to 
taking  post  on  the  right  of  the  reviewing  officer  and  his  staff. 
In  such  case  the  salute  of  a  commanding  officer,  prior  to  rejoin- 
ing his  command,  is  made  with  the  hand  before  remounting. 

678.  When  the  general,  the  colonel,  or  the  major  faces  the 
line  to  give  commands,  the  staff  and  orderlies  do  not  change 
position. 

679.  Each   guidon   and,   when   the   rank   of   the  reviewing 
officer  entitles  him  to  the  honor,  each  standard  salutes  at  the 
command,  present  saber;  and  again  in  passing  in  review  when 
6  yards  from  the  reviewing  officer.     The  standard  and  guidons 
are  raised  at  the  command,   carry  saber,  or  when  they  have 
passed  6  yards  beyond  the  reviewing  officer. 

680.  The  band  of  each  battalion,  corps,  or  regiment  plays 
while  the  reviewing  officer  is  passing  in  front  of  and  in  rear  of 
the  organization. 

During  the  march  in  review  each  band,  immediately  after  pass- 
ing the  reviewing  officer,  turns  out  of  the  column,  takes  post  in 
front  of  and  facing  him,  and  continues  to  play  until  its  organi- 
zation has  passed,  then  ceases  playing  and  follows  in  rear  of 


220  CEREMONIES. 

its  organization;  the  band  of  the  following  organization  com- 
mences to  play  as  soon  as  the  preceding  band  has  ceased.  The 
trumpeters  of  each  organization,  except  those  pertaining  to  the 
organization  commanders,  are  consolidated  in  rear  of  the  band. 

If  the  band  be  not  present,  the  trumpeters  of  each  organiza- 
tion, with  the  exceptions  above  noted,  are  consolidated  and 
posted  in  single  rank  in  a  position  corresponding  to  that  of  the 
band.  They  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  band,  the 
chief  trumpeter  taking  post  and  performing  the  duties  of  the 
drum  major. 

This  rule  applies  to  all  ceremonies. 

681.  If  the  rank  of  the  reviewing  officer  entitles  him  to  the 
honor,  the  march  or  flourishes  are  sounded  by  the  trumpeters 
when  sabers  are  presented,  and  sounded  again  in  passing  in 
review  at  the  moment  the  standard  salutes,  by  the  trumpeters 
halted  in  front  of  the  reviewing  officer. 

Trumpeters  with  the  organization  commanders  do  not  sound 
the  march  or  flourishes. 

682.  The  formation  for  review  may  be  modified  to  suit  the 
ground,  and  the  present  saber  and  the  ride  around  the  line  by 
the  reviewing  officer  may  be  dispensed  with. 

683.  If  the  post  of  the  reviewing  officer  is  on  the  left  of 
the  column  the  troops  inarch  in  review  with  the  guide  left;  the 
commanding  officer  and  his  staff  turn  out  of  the  column  to  the 
left,  taking  post  as  prescribed  above,  but  to  the  left  of  the 
reviewing  officer. 

684.  Field  companies  of  the  Signal  Corps  pass  in  review  at 
a  walk,  trot,  or  gallop.    When  passing  at  the  trot  or  gallop  no 
salutes  are  made  except  by  the  commander  of  the  troops  when 
he  leaves  the  reviewing  officer. 

685.  When  the  command  is  to  pass  at  an  increased  gait  the 
band   (or  trumpeters,  if  no  band  is  present)   remains  in  front 
of  the  reviewing  officer  and  continues  to  play  until  the  column 
has  completed  its  second  change  of  direction  after  passing  the 
reviewing  officer.     As  soon  as  the  increased  gait  is  taken  up 
by  the  column  the  band  plays  in  appropriate  time,  ceasing  when 
the  column  has  again  completed  the  second  change  of  direction 
after  passing  the  reviewing  officer.     Upon  the  completion  of 
the  review,  the  band  returns  to  the  position  it  occupied  before 
marching  in  review  or  is  dismissed,  as  may  be  directed,     if 
there  be  more  than  one  band,  the  band  last  in  the  column 


REVIEWS.  221 

remains  in  front  of  the  reviewing  officer;  the  others  turn  out 
of  the  column  when  the  increased  gait  is  taken  up  by  their 
respective  organizations,  and  rejoin  them,  or  are  dismissed  on 
the  termination  of  the  review. 

686.  In  reviews  of  brigades  or  larger  commands  each  bat- 
talion, after  its  rear  has  passed  the  reviewing  officer  50  yards, 
takes  an  increased  gait  for  100  yards  in  order  not  to  interfere 
with  the  march  of  the  column  in  rear. 

The  troops,  having  passed  the  reviewing  officer,  return  to 
their  camps  by  the  most  practicable  route,  being  careful  not 
to  delay  the  march  of  the  troops  in  rear  of  them. 

687.  When  field  companies  of  the  Signal  Corps  are  reviewed 
in   line   with   Cavalry,   Infantry,   or   Field  Artillery,   they   are 
formed  with  the  mounted  men  aligned  on  the  front  rank  of 
the  Infantry  or  on  the  rank  of  Cavalry,  or  on  the  lead  drivers 
of  the  Artillery. 

At  the  command  close  ranks,  march,  with  infantry,  or  attention, 
posts,  with  cavalry  or  field  artillery,  the  Signal  Corps  commander 
commands:  1.  Attention;  2.  POSTS.  The  chiefs  of  platoon  and 
standard  bearer  resume  their  posts  in  line. 

The  instrument,  kit,  and  field  wagons  do  not  accompany  the 
companies  at  the  review  unless  so  ordered. 

688.  When  it  is  necessary  that  an  organization  should  be 
reviewed  before  an  inspector  junior  in  rank  to  the  commanding 
officer,  the  commanding  officer  receives  the  review  and  is  ac- 
companied by  the  inspector,  who  takes  post  on  his  left. 

BATTALION  REVIEW. 

689.  The  battalion  being  in  line,  the  major  faces  to  the 
front;   the  reviewing  officer  takes  his  post;   the  major  turns 
about  and  commands :  1.  Prepare   for  review;   2.  MARCH.     The 
staff  remains  in  position,  facing  to  the  front. 

At  the  command  march,  the  chiefs  of  platoons,  and  the  stand- 
ard bearers,  if  present  with  the  standards,  move  up  on  the  line 
of  captains.  Noncommissioned  officers  acting  as  chiefs  of  pla- 
toon do  not  move  up  on  the  line  of  captains. 

The  major  then  faces  to  the  front. 

The  reviewing  officer  moves  a  few  yards  toward  the  major 
and  halts;  the  major  turns  about,  commands:  1.  Present;  2. 
SABER,  and  again  turns  about  and  salutes. 


222  CEREMONIES. 

The  reviewing  officer  returns  the  salute,  the  major  turns 
about,  brings  the  battalion  to  carry  saber,  and  again  turns  to 
the  front. 

The  reviewing  officer  approaches  to  within  about  6  yards  of 
the  major,  the  latter  salutes,  returns  saber,  joins  the  reviewing 
officer,  takes  post  on  his  right,  and  accompanies  him  around  the 
battalion.  The  reviewing  officer  proceeds  to  the  right  of  the 
band,  passes  along  the  front  of  the  officers  to  the  left  of  the  line, 
and  returns  to  the  right,  passing  in  rear  of  the  line.  The  re- 
viewing officer  and  those  accompanying  him  salute  the  standard 
when  passing  in  front  of  it. 

While  the  reviewing  officer  is  riding  around  the  battalion 
the  band  plays,  ceasing  when  he  leaves  the  right  to  return  to 
his  post. 

On  arriving  again  at  the  right  of  the  line  the  major  salutes, 
halts,  and,  when  the  reviewing  officer  and  staff  have  passed, 
moves  directly  to  his  post  in  front  of  the  battalion,  faces  it, 
draws  saber,  and  commands :  1.  Attention;  2.  POSTS.  The  chiefs 
of  platoon  and  standard  bearers  execute  a  left  about  and  take 
their  posts  in  line.  The  major  commands:  1.  By  the  right  flank; 
2.  MARCH;  3.  BATTALION;  4.  HALT.  The  command  halt  is  given 
as  soon  as  the  sections  have  completed  the  turn.  The  band 
takes  post  36  yards  in  front  of  the  leading  company. 

The  column  being  formed,  the  major  commands:  1.  Pass  in 
review;  2.  Forward;  3.  MARCH.  At  the  command  march  the 
column  marches  off,  the  band  playing.  Without  command 
from  the  major  the  column  changes  direction  at  the  points  indi- 
cated, and  column  of  companies  or  platoons  at  full  distance 
with  guide  to  the  right  is  formed  successively  to  the  left  at  the 
second  change  of  direction.  The  major  takes  his  post  24  yards 
in  front  of  the  band,  immediately  after  the  second  changer 
The  band  having  passed  the  reviewing  officer,  turns  to  the  left 
out  of  the  column,  takes  post  in  front  of  and  facing  the  review- 
ing officer,  and  remains  there  until  the  review  terminates. 

When  the  major  is  6  yards  from  the  reviewing  officer  he  and 
his  staff  salute,  turning  the  head  and  eyes  sharply  to  the  right 
When  the  major  has  passed  6  yards  "beyond  the  reviewing  officer 
he  and  his  staff  resume  the  carry,  turning  the  head  and  eyes  to 
the  front. 

The  other  officers,  noncommissioned  staff  officers  and  the 
drum  major,  salute  at  the  point  prescribed  for  the  major,  turn- 


REVIEWS.  223 

ing  the  head  and  eyes  as  above  described.  Noncommissioned 
officers  commanding  platoons  salute  with  the  hand. 

The  reviewing  officer  returns  the  salutes  of  the  major  and  of 
the  standard  only. 

The  major,  having  saluted,  takes  post  on  the  right  of  the 
reviewing  officer,  remains  there  until  the  rear  of  the  battalion 
has  passed,  then  salutes  and  rejoins  his  battalion.  The  band 
ceases  to  play  when  the  column  has  completed  its  second  change 
of  direction  after  passing  the  reviewing  officer. 

If  the  battalion  is  to  pass  around  again  at  an  increased  gait, 
in  order  to  keep  the  original  first  section  at  the  head  of  the 
column  each  company  should  execute  right  by  sections  just 
before  executing  the  first  change  of  direction  after  passing  the 
reviewing  officer. 

When  the  battalion  arrives  at  its  original  position  in  column 
the  major  commands:  1,  Trot  (or  Gallop);  2.  MARCH. 

The  battalion  passes  in  review  as  before,  except  that  no  sa- 
lutes are  rendered  except  by  the  major  when  he  leaves  the 
reviewing  officer. 

The  review  terminates  when  the  rear  company  has  passed  the 
reviewing  officer :  the  band  then  ceases  to  play  and  rejoins  the 
battalion  or  is  dismissed.  The  major  and  his  staff  rejoin  the 
battalion. 

The  reviewing  officer  may  prescribe  how  often  the  column 
shall  pass  in  review  and  the  gait  or  gaits  to  be  used. 

REVIEW  OF  A  BATTALION  WITH  CLOSED  INTERVALS. 

690.  The  battalion  is  formed  in  line,  each  company  being  at 
closed   intervals.    The   review   is   conducted   according   to   the 
principles   previously   explained,    except   that   instead    of   first 
executing  by  the  right  flank  the  battalion  is  formed  in  column 
of   companies    with    closed    intervals   but    full    distances,    and 
passes  in  review  in  that  formation. 

691.  When  space  is  limited  the  battalion  may  be  formed  in 
line  with  each  company  in  platoon  column.     The  review  will  be 
conducted  on  the  general  principles  previously  explained,  the 
battalion   passing   in   review   either   in  platoon   column   or   in 
column  of  companies  at  full  distance,  as  before. 


224  CEREMONIES. 

GARRISON  REVIEW. 

692.  A  review  of  a  body  of  troops  less  than  a  division,  com- 
posed of  different  arms,  is  conducted  on  the  principles  laid  down 
for  a  battalion. 

The  senior  officer  present  commands  the  review;  the  senior 
officer  present  with  each  arm  commands  that  arm.  The  troops 
of  each  arm  form  on  the  line  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed in  the  drill  regulations  for  that  arm. 

Each  commander  gives  the  commands  necessary  to  carry  out 
the  orders  of  the  officer  commanding  the  review. 

Mounted  troops  will  not  be  put  in  march  to  pass  in  review 
until  the  rear  element  of  the  foot  troops  has  completed  the 
second  change  of  direction.  The  commanding  officer,  having 
saluted,  turns  out  and  joins  the  reviewing  officer.  The  other 
commanders  do  not  turn  out  of  the  column. 

CHAPTER   III.— INSPECTIONS. 
GENERAL  RULES. 

693.  The  inspector  prescribes  the  kind  of  inspection  which  he 
desires. 

694.  If  there  be  both  inspection  and  review,  the  inspection 
may  either  precede  or  follow  the  review.     When  an  inspection 
follows  a  review  with  the  other  arms,  the  Signal  Corps  pro- 
ceeds, at  the  proper  time,  to  the  place  designated  by  the  in- 
spector and  is  inspected  separately. 

695.  Officers  draw  and  return  saber  with  the  captain. 

COMPANY  INSPECTION  MOUNTED. 

696.  The  company  being  in  line  at  normal  intervals,  the  cap- 
tain forms  the  mounted  men  of  the  sections  in  line  in  front  of 
the  carts  and  pack  mules  by  the  commands. 

1.  Sections;  2.  Left  front  into  line;  3.  MARCH;  4.  COMPANY; 
5.  HALT. 

697.  He  then  draws  saber  and  commands:  1.  Prepare  for  in- 
spection; 2.  MARCH;  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  first  command  the  captain  goes  to  the  right  of  the 
company,  at  a  trot  or  gallop,  and  takes  post  facing  to  the  left, 


INSPECTIONS.  225 

8  yards  in  front  of  the  guidon ;  and  the  trumpeters  take  post  2 
yards  to  the  right  of  and  abreast  of  the  guidon. 

At  the  second  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoons  move  forward 
8  yards,  and  the  drivers  and  all  individually  mounted  men 
dress  to  the  right. 

The  captain  verifies  the  alignment  of  the  chiefs  of  platoons 
of  the  mounted  men  in  line  and  of  the  carts,  returns  to  his  post 
in  front  of  the  guidon  on  line  with  the  chiefs  of  platoons,  com- 
mands Front,  and  faces  to  the  front. 

The  chiefs  of  platoons  cast  their  eyes  to  the  front  as  soon  as 
the  alignment  is  verified. 

The  captain  then  faces  to  the  left  and  commands :  1.  Inspec- 
tion; 2.  PISTOL.  As  the  inspector  approaches,  the  men  take  the 
position  of  inspection  pistol  and  the  trumpeters  raise  their 
trumpets  for  inspection.  Revolvers  are  returned  as  soon  as 
inspected. 

The  inspector  begins  the  inspection  by  passing  around  and 
inspecting  the  chiefs  of  platoons,  who,  after  being  inspected, 
face  to  the  rear  and  remain  at  ease  at  their  posts  unless  di- 
rected to  assist  in  the  inspection.  The  inspector  then  goes  to 
the  right  of  the  company  and  inspects  the  trumpeters  and 
guidon,  after  which  he  inspects  each  section  in  turn,  commenc- 
ing at  the  right  flank,  passing  along  the  front  of  the  sections, 
and  returning  in  the  rear  of  the  sections. 

To  inspect  the  company  more  minutely,  the  captain  may  cause 
the  men  to  dismount,  and  without  forming  ranks,  conduct  the 
inspection. 

To  inspect  the  technical  signal  equipment  carried,  the  captain 
dismounts  the  company,  if  not  already  dismounted,  forms  ranks 
and  commands:  1.  Inspection;  2.  EQUIPMENT. 

At  this  command  the  horses  of  the  sections  are  turned  over  to 
the  horse  holders,  and  the  men  fall  in,  in  front  of  their  horses. 
The  chiefs  of  section  then  march  the  sections  by  the  right  flank 
of  the  sections  to  the  rear  of  the  carts  or  pack  mules,  faces  them 
to  the  front,  and  commands  FALL  OUT. 

The  equipment  is  then  removed  from  the  carts  or  mules  and 
placed  upon  the  ground  in  the  following  order,  from  right  to 
left: 

82940°— 11 15 


226  CEREMONIES. 

ARRANGEMENT  OF  INSTRUMENTS  FOR  INSPECTION  FROM  RIGHT 

TO  LEFT. 

Wireless. 
Batteries. 
Pack  chest. 

Antenna  and  eonnUTpoise  box. 
Mast. 

Wire. 

Buzzers,  field. 

Buzzers,  cavalry. 

Ground  rods. 

Kits,  inspection  pocket. 

Pads,  message. 

Carriers,  wire. 

Hatchets. 

Pikes,  wire. 

Flags,  etc. 

When  the  equipment  has  been  laid  out,  the  sections  will  form 
in  single  rank,  in  rear  of  the  equipment,  facing  to  the  front. 

Upon  the  completion  of  the  inspection  of  a  section,  its  equip- 
ment is  replaced  without  command  and  the  section  is  formed 
and  marched  back  to  the  horses,  where  the  men  resume  their 
horses  and  stand  at  ease,  until  the  completion  of  the  inspection. 
All  sections,  when  not  being  inspected,  stand  at  ease  awaiting 
the  approach  of  the  inspector,  and  are  brought  to  attention  by 
the  chief  of  sections  on  his  approach. 

When  the  captain  dismounts  the  company,  the  guidon  dis- 
mounts with  it ;  the  chiefs  of  platoons  return  saber,  dismount, 
and  stand  to  horse  facing  their  platoons;  the  captain  returns 
saber  and  dismounts  and  his  horse  is  held  by  a  trumpeter.  If 
the  arms  are  not  to  be  inspected,  the  commands  therefor  are 
omitted. 

The  chiefs  of  platoons,  when  the  inspection  of  the  rank  be- 
gins, face  toward  the  company  and  remain  at  ease,  resuming 
front  on  the  completion  of  the  inspection  of  arms,  or  the  captain 
may  require  them  to  assist  him.  If  dismounted,  their  horses- 
are  held  by  trumpeters.  The  captain  may  require  each  chief 
to  inspect  his  own  platoon  while  he  makes  a  general  inspection. 


INSPECTIONS.  227 

While  inspecting  the  company  or  accompanying  the  inspector 
the  captain  does  not  return  his  saber  while  mounted ;  if  dis- 
mounted, he  returns  saber. 

On  completion  of  the  inspection  the  captain  brings  the  com- 
pany to  attention,  commands:  1.  Prepare  to  mount;  2.  MOUNT; 
3.  FORM;  4.  RANKS,  and  then  commands  Posts.  At  this  com- 
mand the  chiefs  of  platoons  turn  to  the  left  about,  move  for- 
ward, and  resume  their  posts  by  another  left  about,  and  the 
trumpeters  take  their  posts. 

Should  the  inspector  be  other  than  the  captain,  the  latter 
prepares  the  company  for  inspection  and  awaits  the  arrival  of 
the  inspector.  Upon  the  approach  of  the  inspector  the  captain 
at  his  post  in  front  of  the  guidon  salutes,  the  inspector  returns 
the  salute  and  informs  him  of  the  character  of  the  inspection 
desired;  the  captain  gives  the  necessary  commands,  faces  to 
the  front,  and,  when  inspected,  accompanies  the  inspector. 

698.  The  company  carries  for  inspection  every  article  that 
is   prescribed   as   a    part   of   the   regular    equipment   and   for 
which  there  is  a  specially  designated  place  on  the  horses  or 
wagons. 

COMPANY  INSPECTION  DISMOUNTED. 

699.  The  company  being  in  line,  the  officers  at  carry  saber, 
the   captain   commands:  1.  Prepare   for  inspection;     2.  MARCH; 
3.  FRONT. 

At  the  first  command  the  noncommissioned  officers  on  the 
right  of  each  section  step  backward  2  yards  to  mark  the  new 
alignment  of  the  rear  rank;  the  file  closers  step  backward  2 
yards  in  rear  of  this  line.  The  captain  goes  to  the  right  flank 
and  sees  that  the  guides  are  on  a  line  parallel  to  the  front  rank, 
then  places  himself  facing  to  the  left,  4  yards  in  front  of  and 
2  yards  to  the  right  of  the  company,  and  commands:  March. 

At  the  command  March,  the  chiefs  of  platoons  step  forward 
2  yards,  the  chiefs  of  sections  step  forward  1  yard,  and  all  dress 
to  the  right.  The  front  rank  and  file  closers  dress  to  the  right ; 
the  rear  rank  steps  backward,  halts  a  little  in  rear  of  the  line, 
and  then  dresses  to  the  right. 

The  captain  aligns  the  chiefs  of  platoons  and  of  sections, 
the  ranks  and  the  file  closers;  the  chiefs  of  platoons  and  of 
sections  and  the  file  closers  turning  their  heads  and  eyes  to 
the  front  as  soon  as  their  alignment  is  verified.  He  then  re- 


228  CEREMONIES. 

sumes  his  post  in  front  of  the  right  of  the  company  and  com- 
mands Front. 

At  this  command  the  guides  marking  the  line  of  the  rear  rank 
move  forward  into  the  front  rank  and  all  cast  their  eyes  to  the 
front. 

The  captain  then  commands:  1.  Inspection;  2.  PISTOL. 

70  O.  The  captain  returns  saber,  inspects  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
and  of  sections,  the  ranks,  and  the  file  closers,  beginning  on  the 
right  of  each  and  returning  by  the  left  and  rear.  During  the 
inspection  of  the  ranks  the  lieutenants  face  about  and  stand 
at  ease;  they  may  be  directed  to  accompany  the  captain  or  to 
assist  in  the  inspection,  tlpon  the  completion  of  the  inspec- 
tion the  lieutenants  face  to  the  front  and  resume  the  attention ; 
and  the  captain  commands  posts,  upon  which  the  rear  rank 
and  file  closers  step  forward  to  their  original  positions,  and  the 
chiefs  of  platoons  and  of  sections  resume  their  posts  by  making 
an  about  face,  stepping  forward  2  and  1  yards,  respectively,  and 
then  making  another  about  face. 

701.  Should  the   inspector  be  other   than   the  captain,   the 
latter  prepares  the  company  for  inspection  and  when  the  in- 
spector approaches  brings  the  company  to  attention,  and  from 
his  post  in  front   of  the  right  of  the  company   salutes.     The 
salute   acknowledged,   the  captain   carries   saber,   faces  to   the 
left,    commands:  1.  Inspect/on;   2,  PISTOL,   and  again   faces   to 
the  front. 

The  inspection  proceeds  as  before;  the  captain  returns  saber 
and  accompanies  the  inspector  as  soon  as  the  latter  has  in- 
spected him. 

At  inspection  of  quarters  the  inspector  is  accompanied  by  the 
captain  and  followed  by  the  other  officers,  or  by  such  of  them 
as  he  may  designate;  the  men,  without  accouterments,  stand 
uncovered  near  their  respective  bunks;  in  camp  they  stand 
covered,  without  accouterments,  in  front  of  their  tents;  upon 
the  approach  of  the  inspector  the  first  sergeant  commands 
attention,  salutes,  and  leads  the  way  through  the  quarters  or 
camp. 

BATTALION  INSPECTION  MOUNTED. 

702.  The  battalion   being   in   column  of  companies,   on   the 
approach  of  the  inspector  the  major  commands:  1.  Prepare  for 
inspection;  2.  MARCH. 


INSPECTIONS.  229 

The  companies  are  prepared  for  inspection  as  already  pre- 
scribed. 

The  trumpeters  join  their  companies.  The  drum  major  con- 
ducts the  band,  if  there  be  one,  to  the  rear  of  the  column,  pass- 
ing by  the  right  flank,  and  places  it  facing  to  the  front  36  yards 
in  rear  of  the  rear  company,  and  opens  ranks. 

The  battalion  staff  officers  place  themselves  in  line  with  1 
yard  intervals  about  30  yards  in  front  of  the  column,  opposite 
the  center,  in  order  of  rank  from  right  to  left;  the  noncom- 
missioned staff  form  in  a  similar  manner  6  yards  in  rear  of  the 
staff  officers;  the  guard  of  the  standard  marches  to  the  front 
and  takes  post  6  yards  in  rear  of  the  center  of  the  line  of  the 
noncommissioned  staff.  The  major  takes  post  in  front  of  the 
center  of  the  column  6  yards  in  front  of  the  staff. 

Field  and  staff  officers  senior  in  rank  to  the  inspector  do  not 
take  post  in  front  of  the  column,  but  accompany  him. 

The  inspector  inspects  the  major  and,  accompanied  by  the 
latter,  inspects  the  staff  officers. 

The  major  and  his  staff,  as  soon  as  inspected,  return  saber 
and  accompany  the  inspector.  The  noncommissioned  staff  offi- 
cers return  saber  when  inspected. 

The  inspector,  commencing  at  the  head  of  the  column,  in- 
spects the  noncommissioned  staff,  guard  of  the  standard,  and 
band.  The  noncommissioned  staff  and  guard  of  the  standard 
may  be  dismissed  as  soon  as  inspected. 

The  captain  of  each  company  not  undergoing  inspection  dis- 
mounts his  men  and  brings  the  men  to  rest.  As  the  inspector 
approaches  the  company  the  captain  brings  it  to  attention  and 
mounts  the  men ;  as  soon  as  he  himself  has  been  inspected,  he 
gives  the  necessary  commands,  returns  saber,  and  accompanies 
the  inspector.  The  inspector  proceeds  as  in  company  inspection. 
At  its  completion  the  captain  commands  posts,  dismounts  his 
men,  if  not  already  dismounted,  and  brings  the  company  to 
rest.  Upon  intimation  from  the  inspector  the  major  may  direct 
that  each  company  in  turn  be  dismissed  as  soon  as  inspected. 

The  band  plays  during  the  inspection  of  the  companies. 

When  the  inspector  approaches  the  band  the  adjutant  com- 
mands: 1.  Inspect/on;  2.  INSTRUMENTS,  and  the  band  is  in- 
spected as  prescribed  in  paragraph  735. 

703.  The  battalion  may  be  inspected  in  line.  The  inspection 
is  conducted  according  to  the  same  principles  as  when  formed 


230  CEREMONIES. 

in  column.  The  major  and  his  staff  are  inspected  at  their  posts 
in  front  of  the  center  of  the  line ;  the  band,  which  remains  at  its 
post  on  the  right,  is  next  inspected ;  then  the  companies  in  order 
from  right  to  left. 

704.  If  the  major  is  himself  the  inspector  the  inspection  is 
conducted  according  to  the  same  principles. 

705.  At  dismounted  inspection  the  companies  of  the  battalion 
will  be  separately  inspected,  dismounted,  on  their  own  parade 
grounds. 

CHAPTER  IV.— MUSTER. 

BATTALION  OR  COMPANY  MUSTER. 

706.  Muster  is  held  in  line  or  in  column  of  companies  in  line. 
The  adjutant  is  provided  with  a  muster  roll  of  the  field  staff 

and  band ;  each  captain,  with  the  roll  of  his  company.  A  list 
of  absentees  alphabetically  arranged,  showing  cause  and  place 
of  absence,  accompanies  each  roll. 

As  the  mustering  officer  approaches  a  company  the  captain 
commands:  Attention  to  muster.  The  mustering  officer  or  the 
captain  then  calls  the  names  on  the  roll,  and  as  each  man's 
name  is  called  he  answers  here  and  dismounts. 

After  muster  the  mustering  officer  verifies  the  presence  of  the 
men  reported  absent  from  the  formation,  but  in  the  post  or 
camp. 

If  the  company  be  mustered  dismounted,  as  each  man's  name 
is  called  he  answers  HERE  and  steps  one  pace  to  the  front. 

The  formation  for  dismounted  muster  of  the  company  is  the 
same  as  for  company  inspection  dismounted,  the  muster  being 
usually  preceded  by  an  inspection. 

CHAPTER  V.— FUNERAL  ESCORT. 

707.  The  composition  and  strength  of  the  escort  are  pre- 
scribed in  Army  Regulations. 

The  escort  is  formed  with  its  center  opposite  the  quarters  of 
the  deceased,  the  mounted  men  in  line  to  the  front;  the  band 
(or  musicians)  on  that  flank  of  the  escort  toward  which  it  is  to 
march. 

Upon  the  appearance  of  the  coffin  the  commander  of  the  escort 
commands:  1.  Present;  2.  SABER,  if  sabers  are  worn,  otherwise 


FUNERAL  ESCORT.  231 

he  alone  salutes,  and  the  band  plays  an  appropriate  air ;  sabers 
are  then  brought  to  the  carry,  and  the  escort  is  formed  in  section 
column. 

The  procession  is  formed  in  the  following  order:  1.  Music; 
2.  Escort;  3.  Clergy;  4.  Coffin  and  pallbearers;  5.  Mourners; 
6.  Members  of  the  former  command  of  the  deceased;  7.  Other  offi- 
cers and  enlisted  men;  8.  Distinguished  persons;  9.  Delegations; 
10.  Societies;  11.  Civilians. 

Officers  and  enlisted  men  (Nos.  6  and  7),  with  side  arms,  are 
in  the  order  of  rank,  seniors  in  front. 

The  escort  marches  at  a  walk  to  solemn  music,  and  on  arriv- 
ing at  the  grave  is  formed  in  line  with  the  center  opposite  the 
grave ;  the  sections  then  form  line  to  the  front ;  the  coffin  is  car- 
ried along  the  front  of  the  escort  to  the  grave;  sabers  are 
presented,  and  the  band  plays  an  appropriate  air;  the  coffin 
having  been  placed  over  the  grave,  the  music  ceases  and  sabers 
are  carried. 

After  the  coffin  is  lowered  into  the  grave  and  the  funeral 
services  are  completed,  a  trumpeter  sounds  taps  over  the  grave. 

The  escort  is  then  formed  into  column,  marched  to  the  point 
where  it  was  assembled,  and  dismissed. 

The  band  does  not  play  until  it  has  left  the  inclosure. 

The  funeral  ceremony  for  an  enlisted  man  is  the  same  as  for 
an  officer,  except  that  the  commands  present  and  carry  saber  are 
omitted;  the  sergeant  in  command  of  the  escort  salutes  with 
the  hand  on  the  appearance  of  the  coffin  at  the  quarters  of  the 
deceased  and  also  when  the  coffin  is  carried  along  the  front  of 
the  escort  to  the  grave. 

When  the  distance  to  the  place  of  interment  is  considerable, 
the  escort  after  leaving  the  camp  or  garrison  may  march 
at  ease  until  it  approaches  the  burial  ground,  when  it  is  brought 
to  attention.  The  music  does  not  play  while  marching  at  ease. 

In  marching  at  attention  the  field  music  may  alternate  with 
the  band  in  playing. 

708.  When  it  is  impracticable  for  the  horses  and  carts  to 
approach  the  grave,  they  are  left  outside  the  inclosure.  If  the 
escort  consists  of  Signal  Corps  only,  the  officers,  noncommis- 
sioned staff  officers,  and  all  individually  mounted  men  dis- 
mount, turn  over  their  horses  to  the  horse  holders,  and  the 
officers  draw  saber ;  a  suitable  formation  is  then  taken  and 
the  coffin  is  escorted  to  the  grave,  where  line  is  formed  and 


232  CEREMONIES. 

the  same  ceremonies  are  performed  as  before  prescribed.  The 
ceremony  at  the  grave  having  been  completed,  the  command 
remains  in  line  until  the  trumpeter  sounds  taps  over  the  grave. 

709.  Should  the  entrance  to  the  cemetery  prevent  the  hearse 
accompanying  the  escort  till  the  latter  halts  at  the  grave,  the 
column  is  halted  at  the  entrance  long  enough  to  take  the  coffin 
from  the  hearse,  when  the  column  is  again  put  in  march.  The 
Cavalry,  Artillery,  and  Signal  Corps  of  the  escort,  when  unable 
to  enter  the  iriclosure,  turn  out  of  the  column  and  salute  the 
coffin  as  it  passes. 

7  I.O.  In  all  funeral  ceremonies  six  pallbearers  will  be  selected 
as  far  as  practicable  from  the  grade  of  the  deceased.  If  the 
deceased  is  a  commissioned  officer,  the  coffin  is  borne  by  six 
commissioned  officers;  if  a  noncommissioned  officer  or  private, 
by  six  privates. 

711.  When  arms  are  presented  at  the  funeral  of  a  general 
officer,  the  trumpters  sound  the  march  or  flourishes,  according  to 
the  rank  of  the  deceased,  after  which  the  band  plays  an  appro- 
priate air. 

7 12.  At  the  funeral  of  a  mounted  officer  or  enlisted  man,  his 
horse,  in  mourning  caparison,  follows  the  hearse. 

713.  When  necessary  to  escort  the  remains  from  the  quarters 
of  the  deceased  to  the  church  before  the  funeral  service,  arms 
are  presented  upon  receiving  the  remains  at  the  quarters  and 
also  as  they  are  borne  into  the  church. 

714.  Before  the  funeral  the  commander  of  the  escort  gives 
the  clergyman  and  pallbearers  all  needed  directions. 

CHAPTER  VI.— COMPANY  GUARD  MOUNTING. 

715.  At  the  assembly  the  men  warned  for  stable  or  other 
guard  duty  fall  in  on  the  company  parade  in  two  ranks,  facing 
to  the  front ;  the  senior  noncommissioned  officer  on  the  right  of 
the   front   rank,    the   other   noncommissioned   officers   and   the 
supernumerary  in  the  file  closers. 

The  first  sergeant  verifies  the  detail,  dresses  it  to  the  right, 
and  inspects  the  arms,  equipment,  and  appearance  of  the  men, 
and  replaces  by  the  supernumerary  any  man  unfit  to  march  on 
guard. 


COMPANY  GUARD  MOUNTING.  233 

He  then  takes  post  4  yards  to  the  front  of  the  detail  facing 
it,  and  commands:  1.  Guard  to  its  post;  2.  Right;  3.  Face;  4. 
Forward;  5.  MARCH. 

At  the  fifth  command  the  guard  moves  to  its  post ;  the  senior 
noncommissioned  oflicer  marching  near  its  left  and  rear,  his 
place  as  guide  being  taken  by  a  file  closer.  The  supernumerary 
is  then  dismissed. 

When  an  oflicer  mounts  the  guard  he  will  take  post  6  yards 
in  front  of  the  detail ;  the  first  sergeant  will  salute  and  report 
to  him  the  result  of  his  verification  of  the  detail  and  will  then 
face  to  the  left  and  take  post  2  yards  to  the  left  of  the  front 
rank.  The  oflicer  will  inspect  the  detail  and  march  the  guard 
to  its  post  as  above  described. 

716.  On  arrival  at  the  guardhouse  or  other  designated  place 
the  commander  of  the  old  guard  will  give  the  commander  of 
the  new  guard  all  the  information  and  instructions  relating  to 
his  guard  and  turn  over  to  him  all  property  or  prisoners  in 
his  charge.  The  guard  will  then  be  divided  into  reliefs  and  the 
men  designated  for  the  different  posts,  less  the  commander  of 
the  guard,  and  the  members  of  the  first  relief  will  relieve  the 
corresponding  members  of  the  relief  of  the  old  guard  on  post. 
When  all  of  the  members  of  the  old  guard  have  been  relieved 
the  old  guard  will  be  dismissed  by  its  commander. 


PART  VIII. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

THE  GUIDON. 

717.  The  position  of  carry  guidon,  dismounted. — The  lance  of 
the  guidon  is  held  vertically  in  the  right  hand,  thumb  in  front 
of  the  lance,  forefinger  along  the  side,  ferrule  about  6  inches 
from  the  ground.     It  is  thus  carried  in  marching. 

When  leading  the  horse  the  lance  is  held  in  a  corresponding 
position  in  the  left  hand. 

718.  The  position  of  order  guidon. — The  ferrule  of  the  lance 
rests  on  the  ground  on  a  line  with  and  touching  the  toe  of  the 
right  shoe ;  the  right  hand  grasps  the  lance  in  the  same  manner 
as  when  at  a  carry. 

719.  The  position  of  parade  rest. — The  ferrule  of  the  lance 
is  on  the  ground  as  at  the  order;  the  lance  is  held  with  both 
hands  in  front  of  the  body,  left  hand  uppermost. 

720.  To   mount   and  dismount — The   position    of   carry  guidon , 
mounted. — At  stand  to  horse  the  ferrule  of  the  lance  rests  on 
the  ground  on  a  line  with  and  touching  the  toe  of  the  left  shoe, 
lance  vertical  and  supported  by  the  left  hand ;   hand  at  the 
height  of  the  neck,  elbow  and  forearm  closed  against  the  lance. 

Preparatory  to  mounting,  grasp  the  reins  and  a  lock  of  the 
mane  in  the  left  hand,  lance  held  in  the  same  hand,  reins  on  the 
near  side  of  the  lance ;  place  the  right  hand  on  the  pommel  and 
mount  in  the  usual  manner.  After  mounting,  grasp  the  lance 
with  the  right  hand  under  the  left,  which  lets  go  of  it  without 
quitting  the  reins;  carry  the  lance  to  the  right  side,  lower  and 
place  the  ferrule  in  the  stirrup  socket.  The  right  hand  then 
grasps  the  lance,  forearm  nearly  horizontal,  the  arms  through 
the  sling,  lance  vertical ;  this  is  the  position  of  carry  guidon, 
mounted. 

Dismounting  with  the  guidon  is  executed  in  a  manner  the 
reverse  of  the  foregoing. 
234 


MISCELLANEOUS.  235 

(NOTE. — Mounting  and  dismounting  with  the  wire  pike  should 
be  similarly  executed.) 

72 1.  Sa/utes — Being  mounted. — Lower  the  guidon  to  the  front 
until  the  lance  (under  the  right  arm)  is  horizontal. 

Being  dismounted. — Slip  the  right  hand  up  the  lance  as  high  as 
the  eye,  then  lower  the  lance  to  the  front  by  straightening  the 
right  arm  to  its  full  extent. 

If  marching,  the  salute  is  executed  when  at  6  yards  from 
the  officer  entitled  to  the  salute;  the  carry  is  resumed  after 
passing  6  yards  beyond  him. 

At  the  halt  the  salute  is  executed  at  the  command  present 
saber  (or  arms)  ;  the  carry  is  resumed  at  the  command  carry 
saber  (or  arms). 

THE  STANDARD. 

722.  Whenever  in  these  regulations  the  term  the  standard  is 
used  it  includes  both  the  national  and  the  regimental  standards ; 
if  either  alone  is  to  be  referred  to,  the  term  the  national  standard 
or  the  regimental  standard  is  used. 

723.  The  manual  of  the  standard  is  as  prescribed  for  the 
guidon  except  that  at  carry  standard,  dismounted,  the  ferrule 
of  the  lance  is  supported  at  the  right  hip. 

The  standard  salutes  an  officer  entitled  to  the  honor,  but  in 
no  other  case. 

724.  The  guard  of  the  standard. — The  guard  of  the  standard 
consists  of  the  color  sergeants  and  of  two   experienced   men 
selected  by  the  colonel.    The  guard  is  habitually  formed  in  line, 
the  color  sergeants  in  the  center. 

The  national  standard  is  carried  by  the  senior  color  sergeant, 
,who  is  nearest  to  the  right  flank  of  the  guard  and  who  com- 
mands the  guard.  The  signal-corps  standard  is  carried  by  the 
.other  color  sergeant.  The  latter  conforms  to  the  movements  of 
the  former,  maintaining  his  position  on  the  left. 

The  standard,  kept  at  the  quarters  or  office  of  the  command- 
Ing  officer,  is  escorted  by  the  guard  to  the  place  of  formation  of 
the  battalion  and  is  similarly  returned. 

725.  Post  of  the  standard. — At  the  formation  of  the  battalion, 
as  soon  as  the  companies  have  taken  their  places,  the  guard  of 
the  standard  takes  post  midway  between  the  two  center  com- 
panies, in  line,  abreast  of  the  front  ranks  of  the  sections;  in 
column,  at  the  center  of  the  column. 


236  MISCELLANEOUS. 

If  the  formation  of  the  battalion  is  changed  from  line  to 
column  or  the  reverse,  the  standard  conforms  to  the  movement, 
taking  its  new  position  by  the  most  direct  route. 

When  during  exercises  the  battalion  formation  is  broken  up, 
the  standard  joins  the  commanding  officer  or  is  dismissed,  as 
may  be  directed  by  the  adjutant. 

THE  SABER. 

726.  Officers  are  armed  with  the  saber. 

At  ceremonies  sabers  are  habitually  drawn.  In  route  marches 
they  are  habitually  in  the  scabbard.  At  other  times  they  are 
drawn  or  in  the  scabbard,  in  the  discretion  of  the  officer  in 
command ;  when  he  draws  or  returns  saber,  officers  and  noncom- 
missioned staff  officers  under  his  command  draw  and  return 
saber  with  him. 

For  dismounted  duty  the  saber  is  attached  to  the  belt,  and 
is  kept  hooked  up  except  when  drawing  and  returning  saber. 

For  mounted  duty  the  saber  is  habitually  attached  to  the  left 
side  of  the  saddle ;  in  full  dress  it  is  attached  to  the  belt,  unless 
otherwise  directed  by  the  commanding  officer.  The  saber  is  not 
removed  from  the  saddle  when  dismounting  temporarily  for  the 
performance  of  some  duty  on  foot. 

727.  To  draw  the  saber — The  position  of  carry  saber. — Unhook 
the  saber  with  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of  the  left  hand, 
thumb  on  the  end  of  the  hook,  fingers  lifting  the  upper  ring; 
grasp  the  scabbard  with  the  left  hand  at  the  upper  band,  bring 
the  hilt  a  little  forward,  seize  the  grip  with  the  right  hand  and 
draw  the  saber  quickly,  raising  the  arm  to  its  full  extent  to  the 
right  front  at  an  angle  of  about  45°  with  the  horizontal,  the 
saber,  edge  down,  in  a  straight  line  with  the  arm ;  make  a  slight 
pause  and  bring  the  back  of  the  blade  against  the  shoulder, 
edge  to  the  front,  arm  nearly  extended,  hand  by  the  side,  elbow 
back,  third  and  fourth  fingers  back  of  the  grip ;  at  the  same  time 
hook  up  the  scabbard  with  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of 
the  left  hand,  thumb  through  the  upper  ring,  fingers  supporting 
it ;  drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side.     This  is  the  position  of  carry 
saber  dismounted. 

To  draw  the  saber  when  mounted,  reach  with  the  right  hand 
over  the  bridle  hand,  and,  without  the  aid  of  the  bridle  hand, 


MISCELLANEOUS.  237 

draw  the  saber  as  before.     The  right  hand  at  the  carry  rests 
on  the  right  thigh. 

728.  The  saber  if  drawn  is,  while  at  attention,  habitually 
held  at  the  carry,  except  when  dismounted  and  moving  in  double 
time;   in  the  latter  case  it  is  carried  diagonally   across   the 
breast,  edge  to  the  front,  the  left  hand  steadying  the  scabbard. 

729.  Being  at  carry  saber:  1.  Present;  2.  SABER. 

For  officers :  At  the  command  present  raise  and  carry  the 
saber  to  the  front,  base  of  the  hilt  as  high  as  the  chin  and  6 
inches  in  front  of  the  neck,  edge  to  the  left,  point  6  inches 
farther  to  the  front  than  the  hilt,  thumb  extended  on  the  left 
of  the  grip,  all  the  fingers  grasping  the  grip.  At  the  command 
saber  lower  the  saber,  point  in  prolongation  of  the  right  foot  and 
near  the  ground,  edge  to  the  left,  hand  by  the  side,  thumb  on 
left  of  grip,  arm  extended.  If  mounted,  the  hand  is  lowered 
behind  the  thigh,  point  a  little  to  the  right  and  front  of  the 
stirrup. 

730.  Being  at  present  saber:  1.  Carry;  2.  SABER. 

At  the  command  saber,  resume  the  position  of  carry  saber. 

731.  Being  at  carry  saber:  1.  Parade;  2.  REST. 

Take  the  position  of  parade  rest  (Par.  49),  point  of  saber  on 
or  near  the  ground  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  edge  to 
the  right. 

At  the  command  attention,  resume  the  carry  saber  and  the 
position  of  the  soldier. 

732.  To  return  saber. — Carry  the  right  hand  opposite  to  and 
6  inches  from  the  left  shoulder,  saber  vertical,  edge  to  the  left ; 
at  the  same  time  unhook  and  lower  the  scabbard  with  the  left 
hand  and  grasp  it  at  the  upper  band;  drop  the  point  to  the 
rear  and  pass  the  blade  across  and  along  the  left  arm ;  turn  the 
head  slightly  to  the  left,  fixing  the  eyes  on  the  opening  of  the 
scabbard,   raise  the  right  hand,  insert  and  return  the  blade; 
turn  the  head  to  the  front,  drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side, 
hook  up  the  scabbard  with  the  left  hand,  drop  the  left  hand 
by  the  side. 

When  mounted  the  saber  is  returned  without  using  the  left 
hand. 

THE  BAND. 

733.  The  band  is  generally  formed  in  column  of  fours.     It 
may  be  formed  in  two  or  more  ranks. 


238  MISCELLANEOUS. 

Dismounted  the  baud  is  formed  iu  two  or  more  ranks,  with 
sufficient  intervals  between  the  men  and  distances  between  the 
ranks  to  permit  a  free  use  of  the  instruments. 

The  drum  major  is  ;}  yards  (dismounted,  2  yards)  in  front  of 
the  center  of  the  front  rank.  He  gives  the  commands  or  signals 
for  its  movements.  The  commands  are  the  same  as  for  a  squad, 
substituting  in  them  band  for  squad. 

In  line  the  band  is  posted  with  the  left  of  its  front  rank  36 
yards  to  the  right  of  the  right  company.  In  column  it  marches 
with  its  rear  rank  36  yards  in  front  of  the  leading  company  or 
its  front  rank  36  yards  in  rear  of  the  rear  company,  according 
as  the  column  has  been  formed  to  the  right  or  the  left. 

Dismounted  the  band  takes  post  as  when  mounted. 

When  united  the  musicians  form  in  rear  of  the  band.  When 
the  band  is  not  present  the  posts,  movements,  and  duties  of  the 
musicians  are  the  same  as  prescribed  for  the  band. 

In  rendering  honors,  whenever  the  standard  salutes,  the 
musicians  sound  the  march,  flourishes,  or  to  the  standard,  at  a 
signal  from  the  drum  major. 

In  marching,  the  different  ranks  dress  to  the  right. 

When  the  command  with  which  the  band  is  posted  faces  to 
the  rear  the  band  executes  the  countermarch.  The  intervals  aro 
increased  before  executing  a  countermarch  and  closed  upon  the 
completion  of  the  countermarch. 

In  executing  the  countermarch  the  men  in  the  leading  rank, 
or  four  to  the  right  of  the  drum  major,  turn  individually  to  the 
right  about,  and  those  to  his  left  to  the  left  about,  each  followed 
by  the  men  covering  him  in  the  column.  The  drum  major  passes 
through  the  center. 

In  dismounted  formations,  when  right,  left,  or  about  face  is 
executed,  the  band  faces  in  the  same  manner. 

SIGNALS  OF  THE  DRUM  MAJOR. 

734.  The  signals  for  the  movements  of  the  band  will  cor- 
respond to  the  saber  signals  (par.  344)  as  far  as  practicable. 

Prepare  to  play. — Take  the  first  position  of  present  saber. 

Play. — Thrust  upward  energetically  with  the  saber,  arm  fully 
extended,  and  quickly  resume  the  carry. 

Prepare  to  cease  playing. — Same  as  prepare  to  play. 

Cease  playing. — Same  as  play. 


MISCELLANEOUS.  239 

The  march  or  flourishes. — 1.  Prepare  to  play:  Raise  the  hand 
to  the  height  of  the  forehead  and  hold  the  saber  in  a  horizontal 
position,  point  to  the  left.  2.  Play:  Lower  the  hand  quickly 
to  the  belt  and  resume  the  carry. 

Increase  intervals. — Extend  the  arm  to  the  front,  and  wave 
the  saber  several  times  to  the  right  and  left  in  front  of  the 
body. 

TO  INSPECT  THE  BAND. 

735.  Being  at  the  halt. — Prepare  for  inspection;  MARCH;  front. 
The  front  rank  dresses  to  the  right ;  the  other  ranks  move  back- 
ward, each  taking  the  distance  of  3  yards  (dismounted,  2  yards) 
from  the  rank  preceding,  halt  and  dress  to  the  right.  1.  Inspec- 
tion; 2.  INSTRUMENTS. 

Each  musician,  as  the  inspector  approaches  him,  raises  his 
instrument  in  front  of  his  body,  reverses  it  so  as  to  show  the 
other  side,  and  then  returns  it  to  its  former  position. 

A  trumpeter,  when  inspected,  executes  with  his  bugle  what  is 
prescribed  for  a  band  musician. 

POSTS. 

The  front  rank  stands  fast,  the  other  ranks  move  up  and 
close  to  the  proper  distance. 

HONORS. 

736.  The  national  or  regimental  color  or  standard,  uncased, 
passing  an  armed  body,  is  saluted,  the  field  music  sounding  to 
the  color.     Officers  or  enlisted  men  passing  the  uncased  color 
render  the  prescribed  salute;  with  no  arms  in  hand,  the  salute 
is  made  by  uncovering;  the  headdress  is  held  in  the  right  hand 
opposite  the  left   shoulder,   right  forearm   against  the  breast. 

737.  Whenever  "The  Star  Spangled  Banner"  is  played  by 
the  band  on  a  formal  occasion  other  than  retreat  at  a  mili- 
tary station,  or  at  any  place  where  persons  belonging  to  the 
military  service  are  present  in  their  official  capacity,  all  officers 
and  enlisted  men   present   stand  at  attention  throughout  the 
playing  of  the  air.     The  same  respect  is  observed  toward  the 
national  air  of  any  other  country  when  it  is  played  as  a  com- 
pliment to  official  representatives  of  such  country.     Whenever 
"  The  Star  Spangled  Banner  "  is  played  as  contemplated  by  this 


240  MISCELLANEOUS. 

paragraph,  the  air  is  played  through  once  without  the  repeti- 
tion of  any  part,  except  such  repetition  as  is  called  for  by  the 
musical  score.  When  the  flag  is  lowered  at  retreat  and  aboard 
transports,  when  the  flag  is  hoisted  at  guard  mounting,  all 
officers  and  enlisted  men  out  of  ranks  stand  at  attention,  fac- 
ing the  flag,  while  the  air  is  being  played,  and  at  the  last  note 
of  the  music  salute  in  the  prescribed  manner. 

738.  Troops  under  arms  salute  other  armed  bodies,  the  com- 
manding officer,  and  his  superiors ;  if  halted  in  line,  by  persent- 
ing  arms;  if  marching,  eyes  are  turned  in  the  direction  of  the 
person  or  body  of  troops  saluted  by  the  commands :  1.  Eyes, 
2.  Right  (Left),  3.  Front;  the  command  front  is  given  when  the 
person    or    body    is    passed.      The    commander    of    the    troops 
salutes. 

When  troops  are  in  column  at  a  halt,  the  commander  alone 
salutes;  the  present  or  eyes  right  (left)  is  omitted. 

Troops  are  brought  to  attention  when  a  body  of  troops  or 
an  officer  entitled  to  a  salute  passes  in  rear. 

Unarmed  troops  salute  as  prescribed  for  armed  bodies,  except 
that  when  halted  the  present  is  omitted. 

The  commander  of  a  body  of  troops  salutes,  in  person,  his 
superior  officers  not  mentioned  above ;  the  other  officers  and  men 
of  the  command  do  not  salute;  the  present  or  eyes  right  (left) 
is  omitted. 

Troops  are  brought  to  attention,  if  not  already  there,  before 
their  commander  salutes. 

739.  No  honors  are  paid  by  troops  when  on  the  march  or  in 
trenches,  except  that  they  may  be  called  to  attention ;  no  salute 
is  rendered  when  marching  in  double  time. 

740.  The  commander  of  a  body  of  troops  is  saluted  by  all 
officers  junior  in  rank  and  by  all  enlisted  men.    The  salute  is 
returned  by  the  commander  only. 

741.  All  officers  salute  on  meeting  and  in  making  and  receiv- 
ing official  reports.     Military  courtesy  requires  the  junior  to 
salute  first,  but  when  the  salute  is  introductory  to  a  report 
made  at  a  military  ceremony  or  formation  to  the  representative 
of  a  common  superior — as,  for  example,  to  the  adjutant,  officer 
of  the  day,  etc. — the  officer  making  the  report,  whatever  his 
rank,  will  salute  first;  when  not  otherwise  prescribed  in  cere- 
monies the  officer  to  whom  the  report  is  made  will  acknowledge 
by  saluting  that  he  has   received  and  understood  the  report. 
When  under  arms  the  salute  is  made  with  the  saber  drawn; 


MISCELLANEOUS.  241 

otherwise  with  the  hand.    A  mounted  officer  dismounts  before 
addressing  a  superior  not  mounted. 

On  official  occasions  officers,  when  indoors  and  under  arms, 
do  not  uncover,  but  salute  with  the  saber  if  drawn ;  otherwise 
with  the  hand.  If  not  under  arms  they  uncover  and  stand  at 
attention,  but  do  not  salute  except  when  making  or  receiving 
reports. 

742.  Enlisted  men  carrying  rifles,  not  in  ranks,  when  within 
saluting  distance  salute  an  officer  with  the  rifle  salute,  look 
toward  him,   and   retain  the   left   hand   in   position   until   the 
salute  is  acknowledged  or  he  has  passed. 

If  unarmed  the  salute  is  made  in  a  similar  manner  with  the 
hand  farthest  from  the  officer ;  if  mounted  the  salute  is  made 
with  the  right  hand. 

If  approaching  an  officer  the  salute  begins  when  six  paces 
from  him. 

Indoors  and  armed  with  a  rifle,  the  salute  is  made  from  the 
position  of  the  order  on  trail. 

Officers  are  saluted  whether  in  uniform  or  not. 

743.  An  enlisted  man,  if  seated,  rises  on  the  approach  of  an 
officer,  faces  toward  him  and  salutes.     If  standing  he  faces  the 
officer  for  the  same  purpose.    If  the  parties  remain  in  the  same 
place  or  on  the  same  ground,  such  compliments  need  not  be 
repeated.      Soldiers   actually    at   work   do   not   cease   work   to 
salute  an  officer  unless  addressed  by  him. 

744.  An  enlisted  man  makes  the  prescribed  salute  with  the 
weapon  he  is  armed  with,  or,  if  unarmed,  whether  covered  or 
uncovered,  with  the  hand,  before  addressing  an  officer.    He  also 
makes  the  same  salute  after  receiving  a  reply. 

745.  All  salutes  in  passing  or  approaching  are  begun  first  by 
the  junior  at  6  paces  distance,  or  at  6  paces  from  the  nearest 
point  of  passing ;  no  salutes,  except  as  otherwise  prescribed,  are 
made  at  greater  distances  than  30  paces. 

746.  Indoors,  an  unarmed  man  uncovers  and  stands  at  atten- 
tion upon  the  approach  of  an  officer;  he  does  not  salute  unless 
lie  addresses  or  is  addressed  by  the  officer.    If  armed,  he  salutes 
as  heretofore  prescribed,  without  uncovering. 

747.  When  an  officer  enters  a  room  where  there  are  soldiers, 
the  word  attention  is  given  by  some  one  who  perceives  him, 
•when  all  rise  and  remain  standing  in  the  position  of  a  soldier 
until  the  officer  leaves  the  room.    Soldiers  at  meals  do  not  rise. 

82940°— 11 16 


242  MISCELLANEOUS. 

748.  Officers   at    all    times   acknowledge    the   courtesies   of 
junior   officers   and   enlisted   men   by   returning   their   salutes. 
When  several  officers  in  company  are  saluted,  all  who  are  en- 
titled to  the  salute  return  it. 

749.  Officers  arriving  at  the  headquarters  of  a  military  com- 
mand, or  at  a  military  post,  call  upon  the  commander  thereof 
as  soon  as  practicable,  and  register  their  names.    If  the  visiting 
officer  be  senior  to  the  commander,  the  former  may  send  a  card, 
in  which  case  it  becomes  the  duty  of  the  commander  to  make 
the  first  call. 

750.  Officers  of  the  Navy  are  saluted  according  to  their  rela- 
tive rank ;  officers  of  marines  and  of  the  volunteer  forces  or 
militia  in  the  service  of  the  United  States,  and  officers  of  for- 
eign services,  are  saluted  according  to  rank. 

751.  Honors,    courtesies,    and    ceremonies    not    referred    to 
herein  are  found  in  Army  Regulations  and  in  the  Manual  of 
(iunrd  Duty. 

TRUMPET    CALLS. 

WARNING  CALLS. 

752.  First   call,   guard   mounting,   full   dress,   overcoats,   drill, 
stable,  water,  and  boots  and  saddles;  they  precede  the  assembly 
by   such  intervals  as  may  be  prescribed  by  the  commanding 
officer. 

In  camp,  where  the  men  are  near  their  horses,  and  known  to 
be  present,  the  assembly  may  be  sounded  immediately  after  boots 
and  saddles,  in  which  case  the  men  immediately  proceed  to  the 
horses  and  saddle. 

Mess,  church,  and  fatigue,  classed  as  service  calls,  may  also  be 
used  as  warning  calls. 

First  call  is  the  first  signal  for  formation  dismounted  only ;  it 
does  not  precede,  and  is  not  used  in  connection  with  other  warn- 
ing calls,  except  full  dress  and  overcoats. 

Guard  mounting  is  the  first  signal  for  guard  mounting. 

Boots  and  saddles  is  the  signal  for  mounted  formations  or 
mounted  drills ;  it  immediately  follows  the  signal  guard  mounting 
or  drill. 

The  trumpeters  assemble  at  first  call,  guard  mounting,  and 
boots  and  saddles. 


MISCELLANEOUS.  243 

When  full  dress  or  overcoats  are  to  be  worn,  the  full  dress  or 
overcoats  call  immediately  follows  first  call,  guard  mounting,  or 
boots  and  saddles. 

Call  to  quarters. — The  signal  for  the  men  to  repair  to  their 
quarters. 

FORMATION  CALLS. 

753.  Assembly. — The    signal    for    companies    or    details    to 
fall  in. 

Adjutant's  call. — The  signal  for  companies  to  form  battalion; 
also  for  the  guard  details  to  form  for  guard  mounting  on  the 
camp  or  garrison  parade  ground ;  it  follows  the  assembly  at  such 
interval  as  may  be  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

To  the  standard. — Is  sounded  when  the  standard  salutes. 

Alarm  Calls. 

754.  Fire  call. — The  signal  for  the  men  to  fall  in,  without 
arms,  to  extinguish  fire. 

To  arms. — The  signal  for  the  men  to  fall  in,  under  arms,  on 
their  company  parade  grounds  as  quickly  as  possible. 

To  horse.^-The  signal  for  mounted  men  to  proceed  under  arms 
to  their  horses,  saddle,  mount,  and  assemble  at  a  designated 
place  as  quickly  as  possible. 

SERVICE  CALLS. 

755.  Tattoo,    taps,    mess,    sick,    church,    recall,    issue,    officers', 
captains',  first  sergeants',  fatigue,  school,  and  the  general. 

The  general  is  the  signal  for  striking  tents  and  loading  wagons 
preparatory  to  marching. 

Reveille  precedes  the  assembly  for  roll  call ;  retreat  follows  the 
assembly;  the  interval  being  only  that  required  for  formation 
and  roll  call,  except  when  there  is  a  parade. 

Taps  is  the  signal  for  extinguishing  lights;  it  is  usually  pre- 
ceded by  call  to  quarters  by  such  interval  as  prescribed  by  Army 
Regulations. 

Assembly,  reveille,  retreat,  adjutant's  call,  to  the  standard,  the 
flourishes,  ruffles,  and  the  marches  are  sounded  by  all  the  field 
music  united;  the  other  calls,  as  a  rule,  are  sounded  by  the 
musician  of  the  guard  or  orderly  musician ;  he  may  also  sound 
the  assembly  when  the  musicians  are  not  united. 


244  MISCELLANEOUS. 

The  morning  gun  is  fired  at  the  first  note  of  reveille,  or,  if 
marches  be  played  before  reveille,  it  is  fired  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  first  march. 

The  evening  gun  is  fired  at  the  last  note  of  retreat. 

DRILL  SIGNALS. 

756.  The  drill  signals  include  both  the  preparatory. commands 
and  the  commands  of  execution;  the  last  note  is  the  command 
of  execution. 

When  a  command  is  given  by  the  trumpet,  the  chiefs  of  sub- 
divisions give  the  proper  commands  orally. 

The  memorizing  of  these  signals  is  facilitated  by  observing 
that  all  signals  for  movements  to  the  right  are  on  the  ascending 
scale;  that  the  signals  for  the  same  movements  to  the. left  are 
corresponding  signals  on  the  descending;  that  changes  of  gait 
are  all  on  the  same  note ;  that  captain's  call  is  the  first  two  bars 
of  officers'  call  with  the  attention  added. 

Form  rank  and  posts  are  the  same. 

The  signals  for  the  turn  are  preceded  by  the  signal  platoons, 
when  the  platoons  are  to  execute  the  movement. 

In  sounding  the  signals  for  simultaneous  movements,  the 
signal  platoons  precedes  the  preliminary  signal  for  the  move- 
ment. 

The  signals  are  sounded  in  the  same  order  as  the  commands 
are  prescribed  in  the  text. 


TRUMPET    CALLS. 


To  economize  space,  the  music  is  written  an  octave  higher  than  the 
trumpet  scale,  and  is  adjusted  to  the  scale  of  the  bugle. 


1.    FIRST  CALL. 


^-esp^=^r 


2.    GUARD  MOUNTING. 


quick. 


iHg : 

!    I 


245 


246 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 

3.    FULL  DRESS. 


Quick. 


4.    OVERCOATS. 


Quick. 


5.    DRILL. 


Quick. 


6.    STABLE. 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 

7.    WATER. 


247 


Quick. 


8.  BOOTS  AND  SADDLES. 
— -a*  ?  * — «=r* — ^ 


-*-+- 


l 


LU 


9.    ASSEMBLY. 


Moderate. 


H      h 


10.    ADJUTANT'S  CALL. 


_^3^i 


.  

r  i*  _    r     I    r  p      r p_^f —      j      i    0    \    * r 


11.  To  THE  STANDARD. 


^J^fe^-t^=£^^^^^ 


248 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 

To  THE  STANDARD— Concluded. 


End. 


Repeat  at  will. 


I 


r  '-=f^ 

Utfzt     =2=tr-*- 


13.    To  ARMS. 


Quick 


"BrUItnW 

^      Repeat  at  itntt. 


r  •/  r  ^ 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 

14.    To  HORSE. 


249 


Presto. 


15.    REVEILLE. 


Quick. 

— —  r*\_  =s je-i ^X r-» 

...a. ,.  fri  jg  -    -  ffTT:^^    — ^_r __*__ — s-F^ 

^^^£^^£i^^i 


g-u^-      —  ^zc    i     —  a-P—  ^         i- 


End. 




}^_^_^rrazpc^__ Fs-rf 


1 6.    RETREAT. 


^ 


- 


250 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 

R  ETR  E  AT—  Concluded. 


mm* H « Md^^d L  L T 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 
17.  TATTOO. 


Quick. 


251 


*** 


a^ 


— 


s 


4=^3::+:  :^^=^f =r=^rS:| jg 
ti^tf zSl  it-tzt  zi^zitzb 


:sznzizzr=±3d: 


^^H*-^4 

H  1-f-pF 


U-J3J 


252 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 

TATTOO—  Continued. 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 

TATTOO—  Concluded. 


253 


254 


TETJMPET  CALLS. 


19.   TAPS. 


**!!,, *"    .r?,g?.   n,^     n^ — fl-r 


fcS^-^q 

r^ 

—  ?  —  i 
i    p 

—\  — 

-TTI  r>^~T 

&^ 

'.       LJi 

&  • 

^•3|  i       1 

20.    MESS. 


Quick. 


Quick. 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 

21.  SICK. 


255 


2ii 


22.  CHURCH. 


LIJb:=^=aqpilf^    I           ?        £13—- 
IrTK* — *-*H — £-> — *»: F-P"-^ — ^H 1 — ' — 

EP-^B-L^=-    *  rLa-u=g^g 


23.  RECALL. 


Moderate. 


24.  ISSUE. 


Allegro. 


256 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 
25.  OFFICERS'  CALL. 


Quick. 


26.  CAPTAINS'  CALL. 


!      H"'     ! 


27.  FIRST  SERGEANTS'  CALL. 


Quick. 


Quick. 


28.  FATIGUE. 

3 

-* f-^-ft—ft. 


Si 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 

29.   SCHOOL. 


257 


Quick. 


30.   THE  GENERAL. 


:d-3i-n — ^-F 
La      k*^ 


82940°— 11 17 


258 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 
31.    ATTENTION. 


:£ 


32.    PREPARE  TO  MOUNT,  MOUNT. 


33.    PREPARE  TO  DISMOUNT,  DISMOUNT. 


34.    FORM  RANK  OR  POSTS. 


35.    FORWARD,  MARCH. 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 
36.    HALT. 

Fi8r-2-— ** — — f 

Ep=f3=3 

37.   WALK,  MARCH. 
Slow.    /^      ^ 


259 


38.   TROT,  MARCH. 


Quick. 


F^^'^T^ 


39.    GALLOP,  MARCH. 


40.    GUIDE  RIGHT. 


41.   GUIDE  LEFT. 
Slow. 


lli 


42.    GUIDE  CENTER. 
Slow.      /^ 


260 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 
43.    BY  THE  RIGHT  FLANK,  MARCH. 
Moderate. 


44.    BY  THE  LEFT  FLANK,  MARCH. 
Moderate. 


45.    RIGHT  ABOUT,  MARCH. 
i  ' 


46.    LEFT  ABOUT,  MARCH. 
Slow.-~^*. 


^ 


47.    COLUMN  RIGHT,  MARCH. 


-¥— -R-R--g-* 


48.    COLUMN  LEFT,  MARCH. 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 

49.    PLATOONS. 


261 


Quick. 


50.    RIGHT  TURN,  MARCH. 


Mod. 


•*  »    _• •     «          m    *   m  ^— —  ,-  '  -  * 


51.    LEFT  TURN,  MARCH. 


Mod. 


52.    SECTIONS  COLUMN  HALF  RIGHT,  OR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE,  MARCH. 
Stow. 


53.   SECTIONS  COLUMN  HALF  LEFT,  OR  LEFT  OBLIQUE,  MARCH. 
Slow. 


262  TRUMPET  CALLS. 

54.    RIGHT  FRONT  INTO  LINE,  MARCH. 
Moderate. /^ 


55.    LEFT  FRONT  INTO  LINE,  MARCH. 


56.    ON  RIGHT  INTO  LINE,  MARCH. 
Moderate.  —  /5N 


57.    ON  LEFT  INTO  LINE,  MARCH. 


58.    COMMENCE  FIRING. 


£iE 


59.    CEASE  FIRING. 


60.    ROUTE  ORDER. 


<fa)4 

*- 

i  r" 

V 

MM 

TRUMPET  CALLS. 

61.    PRESIDENT'S  MARCH. 


263 


Quick  time. 


ij^jgi^JH^  *• » r  in  IH*-M-*-^ 

-gp-^-^fp  [j  I-  J- ;  if  «r  r  4 

""^••t—  ^tHMMtaMMBBt 


Jir 


*=f= 
ft  f  \. 


m 


264 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 
62.   GENERAL'S  MARCH. 


Quick  time. 


63.    FLOURISHES  FOR  REVIEW. 
Quick.  ^ 


64.    ROGUE'S  MARCH. 


QtwVfc  «me 


yjpKpqci  „   [J.,r.fijr^i 

11   i   || — *     I   II   i  i 

•JUHJ.M     :.|l     '-•(- }— P         '  '         ^ 


-* ft- 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 

65.    FUNERAL  MARCH. 


265 


Very  slow. 


^=sj^-n^^^^^^ 


yfyi^s 


I 


Repeat  at  will. 


^ 


266 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 
66.   QUICKSTEP  No.  1. 


Quick. 


End. 


End. 


:££ 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 
67.   QUICKSTEP  No.  2. 


267 


£ 


T^^ggpimujrgEiii 

68.   QUICKSTEP  No.  3. 
EE-jg=gi=fr_L  * «_CLi*j£i£:         ^'±f=-fy=±f~Si 

^fci_£Jj-#=j=gE^g^pjQ  LJMUrfe 


69.   QUICKSTEP  No.  4. 


,r 


1       I     2 


268 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 
69.    QUICKSTEP  No.  4— Concluded. 


-*— s-jr-PryP-a f^ — ^i_. _-. 

~~~Lu~ " 


70.    QUICKSTEP  No.  5. 


-T  i.  -^       ir  . 


71.    QUICKSTEP  No,  6. 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 
71.    QUICKSTEP  No.  6— Concluded. 


269 


72.    QUICKSTEP  No.  7. 


i 


73.    QUICKSTEP  No.  8. 


F  TRUMPET. 


G  CROOK. 


270 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 
73.    QUICKSTEP  No.  8— Concluded. 


^ 


Second  time.  End. 


Da  Capo. 


F  TRUMPET. 


74.    QUICKSTEP  No.  9. 


C  CROOK. 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 

74.    QUICKSTEP  No.  9— Concluded. 


271 


End 


fsrm-t-CDf 


At 


^ 


1 


33 


272 


TRUMPET  CALLS. 


75.    QUICKSTEP  No.  10. 
Quick.  F  TRUMPET. 


C  CROOK. 


EE 


-t-*f- 


?-?- 


££ 


Z).C. 


MISCELLANEOUS.  273 

Arms  and  Equipment. 

757.  Arms  and  equipment   of  enlisted  men,   field  company, 
Signal  Corps,  and  equipment  of  animals: 
(a)   For  each  enlisted  man — 
1  revolver,  approved  type. 
1  revolver  holster. 

1  revolver  cartridge  belt  and  fastener. 
1  first-aid  packet  (medical  department). 
1  pouch  for  first-aid  packet. 
1  waist  belt. 

1  revolver  cartridge  box. 
1  artillery  knapsack. 
1  canteen. 

1  canteen  strap,  cavalry. 
1  meat  can. 
1  cup. 
1  knife. 
1  fork. 
1  spoon. 

1  shelter  tent,  half. 
1  shelter  tent  pole. 
5  shelter  tent  pins. 

(&)   For  each  enlisted  man  individually  mounted,  in  addi- 
tion to  (a)  — 

1  saddle,  cavalry,  complete. 
1  saddle  cover. 
1  saddle  bag. 

1  saddle  cloth. 

2  spurs. 

2  spur  straps. 
1  curb  bridle,  complete. 
1  currycomb. 
1  horse  brush. 
1  link. 

1  watering  bridle. 

(c)   For  each  driver  in  addition  to  (a)  — 
1  currycomb. 
1  horse  brush. 
1  haversack. 
1  haversack  strap. 
82940°— 11 18 


274  MISCELLANEOUS. 

(d)  For  each  dismounted  man,  in  addition  to  (a) — 
1  haversack. 

1  haversack  strap. 

(e)  Equipment  for  each  horse — 
1  saddle  blanket. 

1  halter  complete. 

Inose  bag. 

1  surcingle. 

1  horse  cover. 
(/)   Equipment  for  each  mule — 

1  halter,  complete. 

1  nose  bag. 
(g)   For  each  pack  mule,  in  addition  to  (/)  — 

1  aparejo,  complete. 

Service  Kii. 

758.  The  service  kit  for  men  of  field  and  field  wireless  com- 
panies, Signal  Corps,  comprising  the  field  kit  and  the  surplus 
kit.  is  as  follows : 

(a)   The  field  kit  comprises,  in  addition  to  the  clothing  worn 
on  the  person,  the  following  article : 
Clothing,  etc. — 
1  overcoat. 
1  blanket. 
1  comb. 
1  housewife. 
1  slicker. 
1  soap,  cake. 
1  stockings,  pair. 
1  toothbrush. 

1  towel. 
Rations — 

2  haversack  rations. 
1  emergency  ration. 

(6)   The  surplus  kit  consists  of: 
1  drawers,  pair. 

1  shoes,  marching,  pair. 

2  stockings,  pairs. 
1  undershirt. 


MISCELLANEOUS.  275 


Arms  and  equipments,  as  prescribed  in  paragraph  1,  ex- 
cepting— 

1  waist  belt. 

1  revolver  cartridge  box. 

1  saddle  cover. 

1  saddle  cloth. 

1  horse  cover. 
Ammunition — 

20  rounds  revolver  cartridges,  ball. 

Technical  Equipment. 

759.  The  technical  equipment  for  enlisted  men  of  a  field  com- 
pany, Signal  Corps,  is  as  follows: 

(a)  Each  enlisted  man  carries  on  the  person  1  electrician's 
knife,  1  pair  of  5-inch  pliers. 

(&)  Chiefs  of  sections  will  carry,  in  addition  to  (a),  1  field 
glass,  Type  D,  a  wrist  watch,  map  case  and  map,  a  field  message 
book,  a  pencil,  and  a  compass. 

(c)  Operators  will  carry,  in  addition  to    (a)  :  Of  wire  sec- 
tions— 1  field  buzzer    (when  not  carried  on  the  wire  cart),  1 
connector,  buzzer,  1  ground  rod,  1  wrist  watch,  1  field  message 
book,  and  25  message  envelopes,  2  pencils,  1  small  roll  of  tape, 
1  cipher  disk.     Of  wireless  stations — 1  wrist  watch,  and  also 
field  message  books,  25  message  envelopes,  2  pencils,  cipher  disk 
and  tape  in  the  pack  chests. 

(d)  Linemen  will  carry,  in  addition  to   (a),  1  wire  pike.  1 
cavalry  buzzer,  1  connector,  buzzer,  1  ground  rod,  1  carrier  with 
buzzer  wire,  1  small  roll  of  tape.    The  pike  will  not  be  carried 
at  ceremonies  except  at  mounted  inspection. 

(e)  Messengers  will  carry,  in  addition  to   (a)  :  Of  wire  sec- 
tions— 1  field  message  book,  1  pencil,  1  small  roll  of  tape,  1  box 
of  wind  matches,  and,  when  not  carried  on  the  wire  cart,  a  lan- 
tern, 3  candles,  and  box  of  wind  matches.     Of  wireless  sec- 
tions— 1  field  message  book,  1  pencil. 

(/)  Horseholders  will  carry,  in  addition  to  (a)  :  Of  wire  sec- 
tions— 1  small  roll  of  tape,  and,  when  not  carried  on  the  wire 
cart,  a  lantern,  3  candles,  and  a  box  of  wind  matches. 

o 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
f   STAMPED  BELOW 

Books  not  returned  on  time  are  subject  to  a  fine  of 
50c  per  volume  after  the  third  day  overdue,  increasing 
to  $1.00  per  volume  after  the  sixth  day.  Books  not  in 
demand  may  be  renewed  if  application  is  made  before 
expiration  of  loan  period. 


YA  06347 


214808 


